2018 F350 Owners Manual

2018 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual
2018 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com ford.ca
October 2017
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Super Duty
Litho in U.S.A.
JC3J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2017
All rights reserved.

Part Number: 201709 20170927160847
Table of Contents
Introduction Supplementary Restraints

About This Manual...........................................7 System
Symbols Glossary.............................................8 Principle of Operation..................................46
Data Recording................................................10 Driver and Passenger Airbags....................47
California Proposition 65.............................12 Side Airbags.....................................................52
Perchlorate.........................................................12 Safety Canopy™.............................................53
Ford Credit.........................................................12 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......54
Replacement Parts Airbag Disposal...............................................55
Recommendation.......................................12
Special Notices................................................13 Keys and Remote Controls
Mobile Communications General Information on Radio
Equipment.....................................................14 Frequencies..................................................56
Export Unique Options.................................14 Remote Control..............................................56
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Environment Control...........................................................62
Protecting the Environment........................16
MyKey™
At a Glance Principle of Operation..................................63
Instrument Panel Overview.........................17 Creating a MyKey...........................................64
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................65
Child Safety Checking MyKey System Status...............65
General Information.......................................19 Using MyKey With Remote Start
Installing Child Restraints...........................20 Systems.........................................................65
Booster Seats..................................................32 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................66
Child Restraint Positioning.........................34
Child Safety Locks.........................................35
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................67
Seatbelts Keyless Entry....................................................70
Principle of Operation...................................37
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................38
Tailgate
Tailgate Lock.....................................................72
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................42
Removing the Tailgate..................................72
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................42 Tailgate Step....................................................73
Seatbelt Reminder........................................43 Bed Extender....................................................74
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................44 Security
Seatbelt Extension........................................45 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................76
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................78
Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, First Printing
Table of Contents
Power Running Boards Exterior Mirrors................................................99

Using Power Running Boards...................80 Interior Mirror...................................................101
Sliding Windows...........................................102
Steering Wheel Sun Visors........................................................102
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles Moonroof.........................................................103
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column..........................................................82 Instrument Cluster
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles Gauges.............................................................105
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column..........................................................82 Warning Lamps and Indicators...............108
Audio Control...................................................83 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............112
Voice Control...................................................84
Cruise Control.................................................84 Information Displays
Information Display Control......................85 General Information.....................................114
Heated Steering Wheel...............................85 Information Messages.................................131
Pedals Climate Control

Adjusting the Pedals....................................86 Manual Climate Control............................148
Automatic Climate Control......................150
Wipers and Washers Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................151
Windshield Wipers.........................................87
Heated Rear Window..................................154
Autowipers........................................................87
Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................154
Windshield Washers.....................................88
Cabin Air Filter...............................................154
Lighting Remote Start..................................................155
General Information.....................................89
Seats
Lighting Control..............................................89
Sitting in the Correct Position..................156
Autolamps........................................................90
Head Restraints............................................156
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................90
Manual Seats.................................................158
Daytime Running Lamps..............................91
Power Seats...................................................159
Automatic High Beam Control..................92
Memory Function..........................................161
Front Fog Lamps............................................93
Rear Seats.......................................................163
Direction Indicators.......................................93
Heated Seats.................................................164
Spot Lamps......................................................93
Climate Controlled Seats..........................165
Interior Lamps.................................................94
Front Seat Armrest......................................166
Ambient Lighting............................................97
Rear Seat Armrest........................................167
Windows and Mirrors
Universal Garage Door
Power Windows.............................................98
Opener
Global Opening..............................................99
Universal Garage Door Opener...............168
Table of Contents
Auxiliary Power Points Transmission

Auxiliary Power Points.................................172 Automatic Transmission...........................210
Power Take-Off.............................................215
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................174 Four-Wheel Drive
Overhead Console........................................174 Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................216
Under Seat Storage.....................................174
Rear Axle
Starting and Stopping the Limited Slip Differential............................225
Engine Electronic Locking Differential................225
General Information.....................................177
Ignition Switch................................................177 Brakes
Keyless Starting.............................................178 General Information....................................227
Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/ Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
6.8L................................................................178 Brakes..........................................................229
Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L Parking Brake................................................229
Diesel............................................................180 Hill Start Assist.............................................229
Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L
Diesel............................................................185
Traction Control
Engine Idle Shutdown................................185
Principle of Operation.................................231
Engine Block Heater....................................185
Using Traction Control................................231
Fuel and Refueling
Stability Control
Safety Precautions.......................................187
Principle of Operation................................232
Fuel Quality - E85........................................188
Using Stability Control...............................233
Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................189
Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................191
Terrain Control
Running Out of Fuel.....................................192
Refueling - Gasoline....................................192
Using Hill Descent Control.......................235
Refueling - Diesel.........................................193
Fuel Consumption.......................................195
Parking Aids
Engine Emission Control
Rear Parking Aid...........................................237
Emission Law.................................................197
Rear View Camera.......................................238
Catalytic Converter......................................198
360 Degree Camera....................................241
Selective Catalytic Reductant System -
Diesel...........................................................200
Diesel Particulate Filter.............................204 Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control...................................245
Table of Contents
Using Adaptive Cruise Control...............246 In California (U.S. Only)..............................312

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Driving Aids Line Program (U.S. Only).......................313
Lane Keeping System.................................252 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................314
Blind Spot Information System.............254
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Cross Traffic Alert........................................259 Canada.........................................................314
Steering............................................................261 Ordering Additional Owner's
Collision Warning System........................263 Literature.....................................................315
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Load Carrying Only).............................................................316
Load Limit......................................................266 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................316
Bed Ramps.....................................................270
Fuses
Towing
Fuse Specification Chart...........................318
Towing a Trailer.............................................273
Changing a Fuse...........................................327
Trailer Reversing Aids..................................275
Trailer Sway Control...................................282
Maintenance
Recommended Towing Weights...........283
General Information...................................329
Essential Towing Checks..........................287
Opening and Closing the Hood..............329
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......296
Under Hood Overview - 6.2L..................330
Under Hood Overview - 6.7L Diesel.......331
Driving Hints
Under Hood Overview - 6.8L...................333
Breaking-In....................................................299
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L/6.8L...............334
Economical Driving.....................................299
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel.............334
Driving Through Water..............................300
Engine Oil Check - 6.2L/6.8L..................334
Floor Mats......................................................300
Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel................335
Snowplowing.................................................301
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil
Filter..............................................................336
Roadside Emergencies Changing the Crankcase Vent Filter
Roadside Assistance.................................304 Element.......................................................337
Hazard Flashers...........................................305 Oil Change Indicator Reset......................338
Fuel Shutoff..................................................305 Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L/6.8L........339
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................306 Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Diesel......343
Post-Crash Alert System..........................308 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Transporting the Vehicle..........................308 Check............................................................347
Towing Points...............................................309 Transfer Case Fluid Check.......................350
Brake Fluid Check........................................350
Customer Assistance Power Steering Fluid Check......................351
Getting the Services You Need.................311 Washer Fluid Check.....................................351
Table of Contents
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L Capacities and Specific-
Diesel............................................................352 ations
Fuel Filter - 6.2L/6.8L.................................353 Engine Specifications - 6.2L.....................421
Changing the 12V Battery.........................354 Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel........421
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................356 Engine Specifications - 6.8L....................422
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................356 Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L..............................423
Adjusting the Headlamps........................356 Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel.................424
Changing a Bulb..........................................358 Motorcraft Parts - 6.8L..............................425
Bulb Specification Chart...........................361 Vehicle Identification Number................426
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L/ Vehicle Certification Label.......................427
6.8L...............................................................363
Transmission Code Designation............427
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L
Diesel...........................................................364 Capacities and Specifications - 6.2L....428
Changing the Engine-Mounted and Capacities and Specifications - 6.7L
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel Diesel...........................................................433
Filters - 6.7L Diesel..................................366 Capacities and Specifications -
6.8L..............................................................440
Vehicle Care
General Information.....................................371 Audio System
Cleaning Products........................................371 General Information...................................446
Cleaning the Exterior....................................371 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM......447
Waxing..............................................................372 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC...........................................................448
Cleaning the Engine....................................373
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel........373 Touchscreen Display..............................453
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Digital Radio..................................................454
Blades..........................................................374
Satellite Radio..............................................456
Cleaning the Interior...................................374
USB Port.........................................................459
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................375
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................376 SYNC™
Cleaning the Wheels...................................377 General Information..................................460
Vehicle Storage.............................................377 Using Voice Recognition...........................462
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........464
Wheels and Tires SYNC™ Applications and Services......476
General Information...................................380 Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................481
Tire Care..........................................................382
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................490
Using Snow Chains....................................400
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........400
SYNC™ 3
Changing a Road Wheel..........................408
General Information..................................498
Technical Specifications...........................419
Home Screen................................................509
Table of Contents
Using Voice Recognition............................510

Entertainment................................................517
Climate.............................................................527
Phone...............................................................529
Navigation......................................................535
Apps.................................................................543
Settings...........................................................546
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................560
Accessories
Accessories....................................................574
Auxiliary Switches.......................................575
Ford Protect
Ford Protect...................................................579
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information........581
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........585
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................589
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........599
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility.............609
End User License Agreement...................611
Type Approvals.............................................637
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL Note: Your vehicle’s powertrain control

systems can detect and store information
Thank you for choosing Ford. We about vehicle modifications that increase
recommend that you take some time to horsepower and torque output such as
get to know your vehicle by reading this whether or not performance-enhancing
manual. The more that you know about powertrain components commonly referred
your vehicle, the greater the safety and to as performance chips have been used.
pleasure you will get from driving it. This information will stay in the system’s
memory and cannot be erased even if the
WARNING modification is removed. Ford Motor
Driving while distracted can result in Company, Ford of Canada, Ford of Mexico
loss of vehicle control, crash and and service or repair facilities can retrieve
injury. We strongly recommend that this information when servicing your vehicle.
you use extreme caution when using any Ford Motor Company may use this
device that may take your focus off the information to determine if your warranty
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe covers any needed repairs.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend Note: Some aftermarket products may
against the use of any hand-held device cause severe engine, transmission and
while driving and encourage the use of exhaust system damage. See your warranty
voice-operated systems when possible. information for more details.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of Your new diesel engine may feel, drive and
electronic devices while driving. function somewhat differently than a
gasoline engine. Therefore, it is very
important that you read and thoroughly
Note: This manual describes product familiarize yourself and others operating
features and options available throughout the vehicle with this guide. There is a
the range of available models, sometimes special procedure for turning off the diesel
even before they are generally available. It engine. See Starting a Diesel Engine
may describe options that are not on your (page 180). It is important to read and
vehicle. It is possible that either Ford Motor understand this material in order to
Company or an authorized Ford dealer may maintain the best service life for your
have originally sold an incomplete vehicle engine.
to a vehicle modifier who upfitted it. As a
result, some of the options and features on Ford may discontinue models or change
this vehicle may differ from what we specifications without any notice and
describe in this manual. without incurring obligations.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this This manual may qualify the location of a
manual may show features as used in component as left-hand side or right-hand
different models, so they may appear side. The side is determined when facing
differently to you on your vehicle. forward in the seat.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle

in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.
Introduction
Brake fluid - non petroleum

based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
E154903
Child safety door lock or unlock

A Right-hand side
B Left-hand side
Note: Throughout this guide, you will find Child seat lower anchor
warnings identified by the warning symbol.
Warnings remind you to be especially
careful to reduce the risk of personal injury. Child seat tether anchor
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY Cruise control

These are some of the symbols you may E71340
see on your vehicle.
Do not open when hot
Air conditioning system
E162384
Engine air filter
Air conditioning system lubricant
E231157 type
Anti-lock braking system Engine coolant
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine coolant temperature
Battery Engine oil
Battery acid Explosive gas
Fan warning
Introduction
Fasten seatbelt Note operating instructions

E71880
Flammable Panic alarm

E231160
Front airbag Parking aid

E67017
E139213
Front fog lamps
Parking brake
Fuel pump reset

Power steering fluid
Fuse compartment
Power windows front/rear
Hazard warning flashers

Power window lockout
Heated rear window

Requires registered technician
E231159
Heated windshield
Safety alert
Interior luggage compartment See Owner's Manual

release
Jack See Service Manual

E231158
Keep out of reach of children Service engine soon

E161353
Lighting control Side airbag
Low tire pressure warning Shield the eyes
E167012
Maintain correct fluid level Stability control

E138639
Introduction
Windshield wash and wipe also be accessed electronically by Ford

Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
DATA RECORDING experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
Service Data Recording products and services that may interest
Service data recorders in your vehicle are you, where permitted by law. For Canada
capable of collecting and storing only, for more information, please review
diagnostic information about your vehicle. the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
This potentially includes information about www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
the performance or status of various storage and use of service providers in
systems and modules in the vehicle, such other jurisdictions who may be subject to
as engine, throttle, steering or brake legal requirements in Canada, the United
systems. In order to properly diagnose and States and other countries applicable to
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company them, for example, lawful requirements to
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service disclose personal information to
and repair facilities may access or share governmental authorities in those
among them vehicle diagnostic countries. See SYNC™ (page 460).
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
Event Data Recording
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with an event
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford data recorder. The main purpose of an
of Canada, in Canada) may, where event data recorder is to record, in
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic certain crash or near crash-like
information for vehicle improvement or situations, such as an airbag
with other information we may have about deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
you, (for example, your contact this data will assist in understanding
information), to offer you products or how a vehicle’s systems performed.
services that may interest you. Data may The event data recorder is designed to
be provided to our service providers such record data related to vehicle dynamics
as part suppliers that may help diagnose and safety systems for a short period
malfunctions, and who are similarly of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
obligated to protect data. We retain this
data only as long as necessary to perform The event data recorder in this vehicle
these functions or to comply with law. We is designed to record such data as:
may provide information where required • How various systems in your vehicle
in response to official requests to law were operating;
enforcement or other government • Whether or not the driver and
authorities or third parties acting with passenger safety belts were
lawful authority or court order, and such buckled/fastened;
information may be used in legal
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if • How far (if at all) the driver was
you choose to use connected apps and depressing the accelerator and/or
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health the brake pedal; and
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may
10
Introduction
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; Note: Including to the extent that any
and law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
• Where the driver was positioning applies to SYNC or its features, please
the steering wheel. note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
This data can help provide a better may, through any paired and connected
understanding of the circumstances in cell phone, disclose to emergency
which crashes and injuries occur. services that the vehicle has been in a
Note: Event data recorder data is crash involving the deployment of an
recorded by your vehicle only if a airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
is recorded by the event data recorder Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
under normal driving conditions and no may also be capable of being used to
personal data or information (e.g., name, electronically or verbally provide to 911
gender, age, and crash location) is operators the vehicle location (such as
recorded (see limitations regarding 911 latitude and longitude), and/or other
Assist and Traffic, directions and details about the vehicle or crash or
Information privacy below). However, personal information about the
parties, such as law enforcement, could occupants to assist 911 operators to
combine the event data recorder data provide the most appropriate emergency
with the type of personally identifying services. If you do not want to disclose
data routinely acquired during a crash this information, do not activate the 911
investigation. Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 460).
To read data recorded by an event data Additionally, when you connect to
recorder, special equipment is required, Traffic, Directions and Information (if
and access to the vehicle or the event equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
data recorder is needed. In addition to GPS technology and advanced vehicle
the vehicle manufacturer, other sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
parties, such as law enforcement, that location, travel direction, and speed
have such special equipment, can read (“vehicle travel information”), only to
the information if they have access to help provide you with the directions,
the vehicle or the event data recorder. traffic reports, or business searches
Ford Motor Company and Ford of that you request. If you do not want
Canada do not access event data Ford or its vendors to receive this
recorder information without obtaining information, do not activate the
consent, unless pursuant to court order service. For more information, see
or where required by law enforcement, Traffic, Directions and Information,
other government authorities or other Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
third parties acting with lawful (page 460).
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
11
Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 We offer a number of convenient ways for

you to contact us, and to manage your
account.
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine Call 1-800-727-7000.
exhaust, certain vehicle components, For more information about Ford Credit
certain fluids contained in vehicles and access to Account Manager, go to
and certain products of component wear www.ford.com/finance.
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. REPLACEMENT PARTS
Battery posts, terminals and related RECOMMENDATION
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the We have built your vehicle to the highest
State of California to cause cancer and standards using quality parts. We
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain recommend that you demand the use of
other chemicals known to the State of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
California to cause cancer. Wash your whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
hands after handling. maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
PERCHLORATE Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners Scheduled Maintenance and
and remote control batteries may contain Mechanical Repairs
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life One of the best ways for you to make sure
disposal. that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
For more information visit: recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
Web Address this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- specifications.
ouswaste/perchlorate
Collision Repairs
FORD CREDIT We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
US Only Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing finish, structural integrity, corrosion
and lease plans to help you acquire your protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
12
Introduction
vehicle development we validate that On Board Diagnostics Data Link

these parts deliver the intended level of Connector
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level WARNING
of protection is to use genuine Ford Do not connect wireless plug-in
replacement collision parts. devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
Warranty on Replacement Parts
access to vehicle data and impair the
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement performance of safety related systems.
parts are the only replacement parts that Only allow repair facilities that follow our
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford service and repair instructions to connect
Warranty may not cover damage caused their equipment to the data link connector.
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information, Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
refer to the terms and conditions of the Connector (DLC) that is used in
Ford Warranty. conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
SPECIAL NOTICES reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
remote insurance company monitoring,
For a detailed description of what is transmission of vehicle data to other
covered and what is not covered by your devices or entities, or altering the
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, performance of the vehicle, may cause
see the Warranty Guide that is provided to interference with or even damage to
you along with your Owner’s Manual. vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
Special Instructions devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
For your added safety, your vehicle has caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
Using your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not More information and guidelines for using
follow the instruction highlighted by your vehicle with a snowplow are in this
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the Owner's Manual. See Snowplowing (page
specific warnings and instructions could 301).
result in personal injury.
Using a Slide-In Camper
Never place front seat mounted
rear-facing child or infant seats in For information regarding the use of
front of an active passenger airbag. slide-in campers, consult the Truck
Camper Loading document supplied with
your vehicle.
13
Introduction
Using your Vehicle as an MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

Ambulance
EQUIPMENT
If your light truck has the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package, it may be utilized as WARNING
an ambulance. We urge ambulance
Driving while distracted can result in
manufacturers to follow the
loss of vehicle control, crash and
recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
injury. We strongly recommend that
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s
you use extreme caution when using any
Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle
device that may take your focus off the
Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
pertinent supplements. For additional
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
information, please contact the Truck Body
against the use of any hand-held device
Builders Advisory Service at
while driving and encourage the use of
http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/
voice-operated systems when possible.
and then by selecting Contact Us or by
phone at 1–877–840–4338.
local laws that may affect the use of
Use of your Ford light truck as an electronic devices while driving.
ambulance, without the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package voids the Ford New Using mobile communications equipment
Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void is becoming increasingly important in the
the emissions warranties. In addition, conduct of business and personal affairs.
ambulance usage without the preparation However, you must not compromise your
package could cause high underbody own or others’ safety when using such
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a equipment. Mobile communications can
risk of spraying fuel which could lead to enhance personal safety and security when
fires. appropriately used, particularly in
If your vehicle has the Ford Ambulance emergency situations. Safety must be
Preparation Package, it will be indicated paramount when using mobile
on the Safety Compliance Certification communications equipment to avoid
Label. The label is on the driver side door negating these benefits. Mobile
pillar or on the rear edge of the driver door. communication equipment includes, but
You can determine whether the is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
ambulance manufacturer followed Ford’s portable email devices, text messaging
recommendations by directly contacting devices and portable two-way radios.
that manufacturer. The Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package is only available on
certain diesel engine equipped vehicles. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
Using your Vehicle as a Stationary For your particular global region, your
Power Source vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
Information and guidelines for operating a and options that are described in this
vehicle with an aftermarket power take-off Owner’s Manual. A market unique
system are in this Owner's Manual. See supplement may be supplied that
Power Take-Off (page 215). complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
14
Introduction
recommendations and specifications that

are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
15
Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor

Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address
www.sustainability.ford.com
16
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
E251634
A Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 93).

B Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 87).
C Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 114).
D Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 105).
E Navigation, media, phone.
F Entertainment display.
G Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 305).
H Audio. See Audio System (page 446).
I Climate control. See Climate Control (page 148).
J Rear defrost.
K Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 178).
L Voice control. See Voice Control (page 84).
17
At a Glance
M Horn.
N Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 245).
O Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 82).
P Parking brake release. See Brakes (page 227).
Q Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 89).
18
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
See the following sections for directions properly install the child restraint in your
on how to properly use safety restraints vehicle and that you consult your
for children. pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
WARNINGS
locate a child restraint fitting station and
Always make sure your child is CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
secured properly in a device that is 1-888-327-4236 or go to
appropriate for their height, age and www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
weight. Child safety restraints must be Transport Canada toll free at
bought separately from your vehicle. 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
Failure to follow these instructions and find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
guidelines may result in an increased risk Failure to properly restrain children in child
of serious injury or death to your child. restraints made especially for their height,
All children are shaped differently. age and weight, may result in an increased
The National Highway Traffic Safety risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Administration and other safety On hot days, the temperature inside
organizations, base their recommendations the vehicle can rise very quickly.
for child restraints on probable child height, Exposure of people or animals to
age and weight thresholds, or on the these high temperatures for even a short
minimum requirements of the law. We time can cause death or serious heat
recommend that you check with a NHTSA related injuries, including brain damage.
Certified Child Passenger Safety Small children are particularly at risk.
19
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
Child Child size, height, weight, or age
type
Use a child safety seat

Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (sometimes called an
toddlers (generally age four or younger). infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four Use a belt-positioning
Small children
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb booster seat.
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle seatbelt
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug
seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips,
Larger children 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than shoulder belt centered
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom- across the shoulder and
mended by child restraint manufacturer). chest, and seatback
upright.
• You are required by law to properly use

safety seats for infants and toddlers in INSTALLING CHILD
the United States and Canada. RESTRAINTS
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster Child Seats
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. E142594
20
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called • Place the vehicle seat upon which the
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or child restraint will be installed in the
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or upright position.
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less • Put the seatbelt in the automatic
(generally age four or younger). locking mode. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Except Front Center Position of Perform the following steps when
Super Cab and Crew Cab) installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
WARNINGS Note: Although the child restraint
Do not place a rearward facing child illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
restraint in front of an active airbag. the steps are the same for installing a rear
Failure to follow this instruction facing child restraint.
could result in personal injury or death.
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
E142528
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
where they are able to be properly with a combination lap and shoulder
restrained. belt.
When installing a child safety seat with

combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child E142529
restraint and the release button, to 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
prevent accidental unbuckling. then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
21
Child Safety
E142530 E142875
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt 5. To put the retractor in the automatic
portions together, route the tongue locking mode, grasp the shoulder
through the child restraint according portion of the belt and pull downward
to the child restraint manufacturer's until you pull all of the belt out.
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing Note: The automatic locking mode is
is not twisted. available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
E142531 belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142533
22
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
Force the seat down with extra weight, (Front Center Position of Super
for example, by pressing down or Cab and Crew Cab)
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order WARNINGS
to force slack from the belt. This is Do not place a rearward facing child
necessary to remove the remaining restraint in front of an active airbag.
slack that exists once you add the extra Failure to follow this instruction
weight of the child to the child restraint. could result in personal injury or death.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your Always use both the lap and
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean shoulder portion of the seatbelt in
toward the buckle helps to remove the center seating position.
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child The belt webbing below the tongue is the
restraint is equipped). lap portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt. The belt webbing above the
tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,

forcibly move the seat forward and E142528
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. 1. Position the child safety seat in the
front center seat.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
E162708
23
Child Safety
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
E142533
E142530 5. While pushing down with your knee on

3. While holding both shoulder and lap the child restraint, pull up on the
portions next to the tongue, route the shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap
tongue and webbing through the child belt portion of the combination lap and
restraint according to the child restraint shoulder belt.
manufacturer's instructions. Be sure 6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and
that the belt webbing is not twisted. remove any slack in the belt to securely
tighten the child safety seat in the
vehicle.
7. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142531

for that seating position until you hear E142534
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make 8. Before placing the child in the seat,
sure the tongue is latched securely by forcibly move the seat forward and
pulling on it. back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
24
Child Safety
9. Check from time to time to be sure that 2. After positioning the child safety seat
there is no slack in the lap and shoulder in the proper seating position, grasp the
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug shoulder belt and lap belt together
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash. behind the belt tongue.
Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear

Seat Outboard Positions) (If Equipped)
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat

with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E146523

for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
E146522
pulling on it.
25
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor

to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic

locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
E146525
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the Force the seat down with extra weight,
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks for example, by pressing down or
the child restraint for installation. The ability kneeling on the child restraint while
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move pulling down on the lap belt in order to
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has force slack from the belt. This is
been put into the automatic locking mode. necessary to remove the remaining
Note: The lock-off device on some child slack that exists once you add the extra
restraints may not accommodate the weight of the child to the child restraint.
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. It also helps to achieve the proper
Follow all instructions provided by the snugness of the child restraint to your
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off toward the buckle will additionally help
device. In some instances, these devices to remove remaining slack from the
have been provided only for use in vehicles belt.
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
require a locking clip. restraint is equipped).
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
26
Child Safety
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
E142534
The LATCH system is composed of three
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
forcibly move the seat forward and
where the vehicle seat backrest and seat
back to make sure the seat is securely
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and
held in place. To check this, grab the
one top tether anchor behind that seating
seat at the belt path and attempt to
position.
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than LATCH compatible child safety seats have
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper two rigid or webbing mounted
installation. attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the
lower anchors are not used. For
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers forward-facing child restraints, you must
for CHildren (LATCH) also attach the top tether strap to the
proper top tether anchor if a top tether
WARNINGS strap has been provided with your child
restraint.
Do not attach two child safety
restraints to the same anchor. In a Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
crash, one anchor may not be strong child restraint installation at the following
enough to hold two child safety restraint seating positions (LATCH is not available
attachments and may break, causing on Regular Cab):
serious injury or death.
27
Child Safety
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E166694
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors

from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
E166695 specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower LATCH anchors are at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat backrest. Follow the child The lower anchors at the center of the
restraint manufacturer's instructions to second row rear seat are spaced 26 in
properly install a child restraint with LATCH (652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing
attachments. for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. You cannot install a child
Follow the instructions later in this chapter restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
on attaching child safety seats with tether the center seating position. LATCH
straps. compatible child restraints (with
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the attachments on belt webbing) can only be
child restraint only to the anchors shown. used at this seating position provided that
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit use with the anchor
spacing stated. Do not attach a child
restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child restraint is attached to that anchor.
28
Child Safety
Each time you use the safety seat, check The passenger seats of your vehicle may
that the seat is properly attached to the have built-in tether strap anchors behind
lower anchors and tether anchor, if the seats as described below.
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be
to side and forward and back where it is
loops of webbing above the seat backrest
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
or an anchor bracket behind the seat on
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
the rear edge of the seat cushion.
this for a proper installation.
The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
Cab has three straps along the top of the
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
seat backrest that function as both routing
greatly increases.
loops for the tether straps and anchor
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH loops.
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
Safety Seats are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may Regular Cab
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps

Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from E166696
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle. E251549
29
Child Safety
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E251550
Attach the tether strap only to the 2. Locate the correct anchor for the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The selected seating position. You may
tether strap may not work properly if need to pull the seat backrest forward
attached somewhere other than the to access the tether anchors. Make sure
correct tether anchor. the seat is locked in the upright position
before installing the child restraint.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child 4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when strap according to the manufacturer's
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether instructions.
strap just snug without lifting the front of Regular Cab passenger and center
the child restraint. Keeping the child seats (located on back panel)
restraint just touching the vehicle seat
gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the seatbelt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
Front Seat Tether Strap

Attachment (Regular Cab)
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the head E175295
restraint posts, otherwise route the tether
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
strap over the top of the seatback.
child safety seat may not be retained
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap properly in the event of a crash.
over the back of the seat and under the
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
head restraint.
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
30
Child Safety
If your child restraint system has a tether

strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
Rear Seat Tether Strap

Attachment (Crew Cab and Super
Cab)
E162715
1. Route the vehicle tether loop between

the head restraint posts, then route the
child seat tether strap through the loop,
forward of the head restraint.
2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether
anchor loop in the adjacent seating
position. If using the driver side, pass
E167009
the strap behind the shoulder belt for
There are three loops of webbing just the center seat. Always put the tether
above the back of the rear seat (along the strap through the routing loop. The
bottom edge of the rear window). Use head restraint support post holds the
these loops as both routing loops and child restraint tightly, but the head
anchor loops for up to three child safety restraint post is not strong enough to
seat tether straps. hold the child restraint during a crash.
For example, you can use the center loop 3. Tighten the tether strap according to
as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the child restraint manufacturer's
the center rear seat and as an anchoring instructions.
loop for child restraints installed in the If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
outboard rear seats. the risk of a child being injured in a crash
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if greatly increases.
the tether strap is hooked to the loop If your child restraint system has a tether
directly behind the child restraint. strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
To provide a tight tether strap: recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
31
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS • Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
WARNING knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
Never place, or allow a child to place, • Can the child sit without slouching?
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it • Does the lap belt rest low across the
reduces the protection for the upper part hips?
of the body and may increase the risk of • Is the shoulder belt centered on the
injury or death in a crash. shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides the whole trip?
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
Always use booster seats in conjunction
of the inflatable safety belt.
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer Types of Booster Seats
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). E68924
Booster seats should be used until you can • Backless booster seats
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat: If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E142595
32
Child Safety
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot

find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
E70710 the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
• High back booster seats shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
E142597
33
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle WARNINGS

seat upon which it is being used, placing a conjunction with the instructions and
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet warnings provided by your vehicle
liner under the booster seat may improve manufacturer. A safety seat that is
this condition. Do not introduce any item improperly installed or utilized, is
thicker than this under the booster seat. inappropriate for your child's height, age,
Check with the booster seat or weight or does not properly fit the child
manufacturer's instructions. may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
CHILD RESTRAINT Never let a passenger hold a child on
POSITIONING his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
WARNINGS protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing Never use pillows, books, or towels
child seat in front of an active airbag. to boost a child. They can slide
If you must use a forward-facing child seat around and increase the likelihood
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat of injury or death in a crash.
upon which the child seat is installed all Always restrain an unoccupied child
the way back. When possible, all children seat or booster seat. These objects
age 12 and under should be properly may become projectiles in a crash or
restrained in a rear seating position. If all sudden stop, which may increase the risk
children cannot be seated and restrained of serious injury.
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat. Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
Always carefully follow the or behind the back because it
instructions and warnings provided reduces the protection for the upper part
by the manufacturer of any child of the body and may increase the risk of
restraint to determine if the restraint device injury or death in a crash.
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
manufacturer's instructions and warnings children or pets unattended in your
provided for installation and use in vehicle.
34
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
LATCH LATCH Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt

Combined (lower (lower and top and LATCH only
Restraint weight of anchors anchors tether (lower
Type child and and top only) anchor anchors
child seat tether and top
anchor) tether
anchor)
Rear facing Up to 65 lb
X X
child seat (29.5 kg)
Rear facing Over 65 lb
X
child seat (29.5 kg)
Forward
Up to 65 lb
facing X X X
(29.5 kg)
child seat
Forward
Over 65 lb
facing X X
(29.5 kg)
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
156).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
35
Child Safety
The childproof locks are located on the

rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
36
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

When possible, all children 12 years
WARNINGS old and under should be properly
Always drive and ride with the restrained in a rear seating position.
seatback upright and the lap belt Failure to follow this could seriously
snug and low across the hips. increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce the risk of injury, make Seatbelts and seats can become hot
sure children sit where they can be in a vehicle that has been closed up
properly restrained. in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
Never let a passenger hold a child on before you place a child anywhere near
his or her lap while your vehicle is them.
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash Front and rear seat occupants,
which may result in serious injury or death. including pregnant women, should
wear seatbelts for optimum
All occupants of the vehicle, protection in an accident.
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint All seating positions in this vehicle have
system is provided. Failure to properly wear lap and shoulder belts. All occupants of
your seatbelt could seriously increase the the vehicle should always properly wear
risk of injury or death. their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a The seatbelt system consists of:
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in • Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
these areas are more likely to be seriously • Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure • Height adjuster at the front outboard
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and seating positions.
using a seatbelt properly. • Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
E71880
Each seating position in your vehicle • Seatbelt warning light and chime.
has a specific seatbelt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
E67017
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
with readiness indicator.
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the seatbelt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
37
Seatbelts
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front

seating positions are designed to tighten
the seatbelts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the seatbelt pretensioners
activate when the Safety Canopy is
activated.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS E142588
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts 2. To unfasten, press the release button
similar and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination Using the Seatbelt with Cinch
lap and shoulder belts. Tongue (Front Center Seat on
Super Cab and Crew Cab)
The cinch tongue slides up and down the
belt webbing when you stow the belt or
while putting seatbelts on. When you
buckle the lap and shoulder seatbelt, the
cinch tongue allows you to shorten the lap
portion, but pinches the webbing to keep
the lap portion from getting longer. The
cinch tongue is designed to slip during a
crash, so always wear the shoulder belt
properly and do not allow any slack in
E142587
either the lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a lap and
shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
lap belt portion of it.
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
38
Seatbelts
While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the

lap and shoulder belt with a cinch tongue
adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle
receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the seatbelt will become locked and
help reduce your forward movement.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy

WARNING
E162708 Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and properly fasten
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
webbing out of the shoulder belt the seatbelt snugly and low across the
retractor. hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
2. While holding the webbing below the
women must follow this practice. See the
tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion)
following figure.
of the tongue so that it is parallel to the
webbing and slide the tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue

WARNING
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the

retractor so that the shoulder belt E142590
portion of the seatbelt crosses your Pregnant women should always wear their
shoulder and chest. seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the combination lap and shoulder belt low
belt is twisted, remove the twist. across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
buckle for your seating position until
shoulder and the center of the chest.
you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.
39
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Locking Modes When to Use the Automatic Locking

Mode
WARNING
Use this mode any time you install a child
If your vehicle is involved in a crash, safety seat in a front outboard passenger
have the seatbelts and associated seating position in a Regular Cab,
components inspected as soon as SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating
possible. Failure to follow this instruction position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The
could result in personal injury or death. optional front seat's center seatbelt has a
cinch mechanism. Properly restrain
All safety restraints in the vehicle are children 12 years old and under in a rear
combination lap and shoulder belts. The seat whenever possible. See Child Safety
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking (page 19).
mode, and the front outboard passenger
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of How to Use the Automatic Locking
locking modes described as follows: Mode
Non-inflatable seatbelts
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly,
turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
E142591
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower 1. Buckle the combination lap and
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt shoulder belt.
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
small length of webbing back toward the downward until you pull the entire belt
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline out.
the rear seat backrest or push the seat 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt. retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
Feed a small length of webbing back This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
toward the stowed position. automatic locking mode.
Automatic Locking Mode

In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.
40
Seatbelts
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
(second row only– if equipped) shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
E146363 • An inflatable bag in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt. • Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until you pull the entire • The same warning light, electronic
belt out. control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. • Impact sensors in various parts of the
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the vehicle.
automatic locking mode.
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
How to Disengage the Automatic system work?
Locking Mode
WARNING
Unbuckle the combination lap and If a supplementary restraint system
shoulder belt and allow it to retract component has deployed, it will not
completely to disengage the automatic function again. Have the system and
locking mode and activate the vehicle associated components inspected as soon
sensitive (emergency) locking mode. as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped) or death.
WARNING
The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
Do not attempt to service, repair, or standard restraints in everyday usage.
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
41
Seatbelts
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the

inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.
E145664
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so

the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
E146365
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter 1. Pull the button and slide the height
more effectively holds the occupant in the adjuster up or down.
appropriate seating position, and spreads 2. Release the button and pull down on
crash forces over more area of the body the height adjuster to make sure it is
than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce locked in place.
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes, AND INDICATOR CHIME
rollovers and some side impact crashes.
The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt This lamp illuminates and an
did not inflate in a crash does not mean audible warning will sound if the
that something is wrong with the system. E71880 driver seatbelt has not been
Rather, it means the forces were not of the fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
type sufficient to cause activation. turned on.
42
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
If Then
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi- the warning chime sounds for a few
tion... seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the The seatbelt warning light and warning
indicator light is illuminated and the chime turn off.
warning chime is sounding...
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the The seatbelt warning light and indicator
ignition switch is turned to the on position... chime remain off.
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the seatbelt
warning function. It provides additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
chime and illuminating the seatbelt
warning light when you are in the driver
seat and a seatbelt is unbuckled.
If... Then...
You buckle your seatbelt before you switch

the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
You do not buckle your seatbelt before your The Belt-Minder feature activates - the
vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
and 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the warning tone sounds for six seconds every
ignition on... 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt.
The driver seatbelt is unbuckled for about The Belt-Minder feature activates - the
one minute while the vehicle is traveling at seatbelt warning light illuminates and the
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 warning tone sounds for six seconds every
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about five
on... minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt.
43
Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the 4. While the seatbelt warning light is on,
Belt-Minder Feature (Driver only) buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
WARNING flashes for confirmation.
While the system allows you to • This will switch the feature off if it is
deactivate it, this system is designed currently on.
to improve your chances of being • This will switch the feature on if it is
safely belted and surviving an accident. currently off.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, CHILD RESTRAINT AND
do not deactivate or activate the system SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
while driving the vehicle.
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot safety seat systems periodically to make
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the sure they work properly and are not
Belt-Minder has been previously disabled, damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
it will be re-enabled during the use of seat safety belts to make sure there are no
MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 63). nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
proceeding with the programming retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
procedure. assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
Before following the procedure, make sure height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
that: belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
• The parking brake is set. safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
• The transmission is in park (P).
after a crash. Read the child restraint
• The ignition is off. manufacturer's instructions for additional
• All vehicle doors are closed. inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
• The driver seatbelt is unbuckled.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
engine.
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light if the crash was minor and an authorized
turns off (about one minute). You must dealer finds that the belts do not show
complete Step 3 within 30 seconds damage and continue to operate properly,
after the seatbelt warning light turns they do not need to be replaced. Safety
off. belt assemblies not in use during a crash
3. Buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt should also be inspected and replaced if
three times at a moderate speed, either damage or improper operation is
ending with the seatbelt in the noted.
unbuckled state. After Step 3, the Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
seatbelt warning light turns on. Care (page 371).
44
Seatbelts
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Ford Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an
extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
Never use seatbelt extensions to
install child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over
the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,

it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.
45
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The airbags are a supplemental restraint

system and are designed to work with the
WARNINGS safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
Airbags do not inflate slowly or body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
gently, and the risk of injury from a there is a risk of injury from a deploying
deploying airbag is the greatest close airbag.
to the trim covering the airbag module.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
All occupants of your vehicle, cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
including the driver, should always airbag deploys. This is normal.
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
system is provided. Failure to properly wear upon activation. After airbag deployment,
your safety belt could seriously increase it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
the risk of injury or death. residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
Always transport children 12 years (to lubricate the bag) or sodium
old and under in the back seat and compounds (for example, baking soda)
always properly use appropriate that result from the combustion process
child restraints. Failure to follow this could that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
seriously increase the risk of injury or death. sodium hydroxide may be present which
Never place your arm over the airbag may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
module as a deploying airbag can the residue is toxic.
result in serious arm fractures or While the system is designed to help
other injuries. reduce serious injuries, contact with a
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
child seat. Never place a rear-facing or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
child seat in front of an active airbag. a possibility as a result of the noise
If you must use a forward-facing child seat associated with a deploying airbag.
in the front seat, move the seat upon which Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
the child seat is installed all the way back. with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
Do not attempt to service, repair, or facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
modify the airbag supplemental particularly to occupants who are not
restraint systems or its fuses as you properly restrained or are otherwise out of
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact position at the time of airbag deployment.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Thus, it is extremely important that
Several airbag system components occupants be properly restrained as far
get hot after inflation. To avoid risk away from the airbag module as possible
of injury, do not touch them after while maintaining vehicle control.
inflation. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag required.
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
46
DRIVER AND PASSENGER Passenger Airbag On and Off

Switch (If Equipped)
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
Never place your arm over the airbag systems, properly restrain children
module as a deploying airbag can 12 and under in a rear seating
result in serious arm fractures or position. Failure to follow this could
other injuries. seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a The front passenger airbag is not
child restraint. Never place a designed to offer protection to an
rear-facing child restraint in front of occupant in the center seating
an active airbag. If you must use a position.
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child Your vehicle may have an airbag
seat is installed all the way back. deactivation switch. Before driving,
always look at the switch to make
sure it is in the appropriate position. Failure
to put the switch in the proper position can
increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a crash.
E151127
E181984
The driver and front passenger airbags
deploy during significant frontal and near High-series vehicles (if equipped)
frontal crashes.
The front passenger airbag on and off
The driver and passenger front airbag switch has indicators that illuminate,
system consists of: indicating that the front passenger frontal
• Driver and passenger airbag modules. airbag is either on or off. The indicator lamp
is near the center of the instrument panel.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator. Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag OFF and ON lamps illuminate for a short
Indicator (page 54). period of time when you switch the ignition
on to confirm it is functional.
47
Switch position Passenger airbag status Passenger airbag

indicator
Off OFF: Lit Disabled

ON: Unlit
On OFF: Unlit Enabled
ON: Lit
WARNINGS
If your vehicle has rear seats, always
transport children who are 12 and
younger in the rear seat. Always use
seatbelts and child restraints properly. Do
not place a child in a rear facing infant seat
in the front seat unless your vehicle is
E229376
equipped with an airbag on and off switch
and the passenger airbag is turned off. This
Low-series vehicles (if equipped) is because the back of the infant seat is
The front passenger airbag on and off too close to the inflating airbag and the
switch has an indicator that illuminates risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the
and stays lit to remind you that the front airbag inflates is substantial.
passenger frontal airbag is off. The
indicator lamp is near the center of the The passenger airbag on and off switch is
instrument panel. in the glovebox.
Note: The indicator lamp illuminates for a
short period of time when you switch the
ignition on to confirm it is functional.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off

WARNINGS
If the light does not illuminate when
the passenger airbag switch is off
and you switch the ignition on, have
the passenger airbag switch serviced
immediately by a qualified technician.
To avoid switching on the airbag,
always remove the ignition key with
the switch in the off position.
E181522
48
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch The passenger airbag remains off until you
to OFF and hold in OFF while removing turn it back on.
the key.
2. When you switch the ignition on, the
passenger airbag off light illuminates
briefly, momentarily shuts off and then
turns back on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On

WARNINGS
The seatbelts for the driver and right
front passenger seating positions are
specifically designed to operate
together with the airbags in certain types
of crashes. When you switch off your
airbag, you not only lose the protection of E181521
the airbag, you also may reduce the
effectiveness of your seatbelt system. If 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the
the passenger does not meet the switch to ON.
requirements stated in the National 2. The passenger airbag off light will
Highway Traffic Safety Administration or briefly illuminate when you switch the
Transport Canada deactivation criteria, ignition on. This indicates that the
switching off the airbag can increase the passenger airbag is operational.
risk of serious injury or death in a crash.
The passenger side airbag should always
If your vehicle has rear seats, always be on (the passenger airbag off light
transport children who are 12 and should not be illuminated) unless the
younger in the rear seat. Always use passenger is a person who meets the
seatbelts and child restraints properly. Do requirements stated either in Category 1, 2
not place a child in a rear facing infant seat or 3 of the National Highway Traffic Safety
in the front seat unless your vehicle is Administration or Transport Canada
equipped with an airbag on and off switch deactivation criteria which follows.
and the passenger airbag is turned off. This
is because the back of the infant seat is The vast majority of drivers and passengers
too close to the inflating airbag and the are much safer with an airbag than
risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the without. To do their job and reduce the risk
airbag inflates is substantial. of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can
If the passenger airbag off light is pose a potentially deadly risk in some
illuminated when the passenger situations, particularly when a front seat
airbag switch is on and the ignition occupant is not properly buckled up. The
is on, have the passenger airbag switch most effective way to reduce the risk of
serviced immediately by a qualified unnecessary airbag injuries without
technician. reducing the overall safety of the vehicle
is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the
49
front seat. This provides the protection of • The vehicle has no rear seat;
seatbelts and permits the airbags to • The vehicle has a rear seat too small
provide the additional protection they were to accommodate a rear-facing infant
designed to provide. If you choose to seat; or
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the
very significant risk reducing benefits of • The infant has a medical condition
the airbag and you are also reducing the which, according to the infant's
effectiveness of the seatbelts, because physician, makes it necessary for the
seatbelts in modern vehicles are designed infant to ride in the front so that the
to work as a safety system with the driver can constantly monitor the
airbags. child's condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
National Highway Traffic Safety ride in the front seat because:
Administration Deactivation Criteria
(Excluding Canada) • The vehicle has no rear seat;
• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in
WARNING the rear seat(s) whenever possible,
This vehicle has special energy children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
management seatbelts for the driver ride in the front because no space is
and right front passenger. These available in the rear seat(s) of the
particular seatbelts are specifically vehicle; or
designed to work with airbags to help • The child has a medical condition
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The which, according to the child's
energy management seatbelt gives or physician, makes it necessary for the
releases additional seatbelt webbing in child to ride in the front seat so that the
some accidents to reduce the driver can constantly monitor the
concentration of force on an occupant's child's condition.
chest and to reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs. 3. Medical condition. A passenger has a
In a crash, if the airbag is off, this energy medical condition which, according to his
management seatbelt might permit the or her physician:
passenger wearing the seatbelt to move • Causes the passenger airbag to pose
forward enough to have a serious or fatal a special risk for the passenger;
injury. The more severe the crash, and the • Makes the potential harm from the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk. passenger airbag in a crash greater
Make sure the airbag is on for any than the potential harm from turning
passenger who does not qualify under the off the airbag and allowing the
National Highway Traffic Safety passenger, even if belted, to hit the
Administration deactivation criteria. dashboard or windshield in a crash.
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)

must ride in the front seat because:
50
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria • My vehicle has no rear seat;

(Canada Only) • Although children age 12 and under ride
in the rear seat whenever possible,
WARNING
children age 12 and under have no
This vehicle has special energy option but to sometimes ride in the
management seatbelts for the driver front seat because rear seat space is
and right front passenger. These insufficient;
particular seatbelts are specifically • The child has a medical condition that,
designed to work with airbags to help according to the child's physician,
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The makes it necessary for the child to ride
energy management seatbelt gives or in the front seat so that the driver can
releases additional seatbelt webbing in monitor the child's condition.
some accidents to reduce the
concentration of force on an occupant's 3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
chest and to reduce the risk of certain bone medical condition that, according to his or
fractures and injuries to underlying organs. her physician:
In a crash, if the airbag is off, this energy • Poses a special risk for the passenger
management seatbelt might permit the if the airbag deploys; and
passenger wearing the seatbelt to move
forward enough to have a serious or fatal • Makes the potential harm from the
injury. The more severe the crash, and the passenger airbag deployment greater
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk. than the potential harm from turning
Make sure the airbag is on for any off the airbag and experiencing a crash
passenger who does not qualify under the without the protection offered by the
National Highway Traffic Safety airbag
Administration deactivation criteria.
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because: WARNING
• My vehicle has no rear seat; National Highway Traffic Safety
• The rear seat in my vehicle cannot Administration (NHTSA)
accommodate a rear-facing infant recommends a minimum distance
seat; of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
• The infant has a medical condition module.
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that To properly position yourself away from
the driver can monitor the infant's the airbag:
condition. • Move your seat to the rear as far as you
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or can while still reaching the pedals
under must ride in the front seat because: comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
51
After all occupants have adjusted their If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very Cab, properly restrain the child in the
important that they continue to sit center front unless doing so would interfere
properly. Properly seated occupants sit with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
upright, lean against the seat back, and and shoulder belt protection for all
center themselves on the seat cushion, occupants, and airbag protection for the
with their feet comfortably extended on adults. A child or infant properly restrained
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase in the center front seat should not incur
the chance of injury in a crash event. For risk of serious injury from the airbags.
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both SIDE AIRBAGS
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases. WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
Children and Airbags equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
WARNING (of the front seats), or in front seat areas
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a that may come into contact with a
child restraint. Never place a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
rear-facing child restraint in front of instructions may increase the risk of
an active airbag. If you must use a personal injury in the event of a crash.
forward-facing child restraint in the front Do not use accessory seat covers.
seat, move the seat upon which the child The use of accessory seat covers
seat is installed all the way back. may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
E142846
If the side airbag has deployed, the
Children must always be properly airbag will not function again. The
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that side airbag system (including the
children are safer when properly restrained seat) must be inspected and serviced by
in the rear seating positions than in the an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
front seating position. Failure to follow replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
these instructions may increase the risk of the risk of injury in a crash.
injury in a crash.
52
The side airbags are located on the SAFETY CANOPY™

outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the WARNINGS
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed Do not place objects or mount
to inflate between the door panel and equipment on or near the headliner
occupant to further enhance the protection at the siderail that may come into
provided occupants in side impact crashes. contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
E152533 All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
The system consists of the following: properly wear their seatbelts, even
• A label or embossed side panel when an airbag supplemental restraint
indicating that side airbags are found system is provided. Failure to properly wear
on your vehicle. your seatbelt could seriously increase the
• Side airbags located inside the risk of injury or death.
seatback of the driver and front To reduce risk of injury, do not
passenger seats. obstruct or place objects in the
·Crash sensors and monitoring deployment path of the airbag.
system with readiness indicator. If a supplementary restraint system
E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag component has deployed, it will not
Indicator (page 54). function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
The design and development of the side as possible. Failure to follow this
airbag system included recommended instruction could result in personal injury
testing procedures that were developed or death.
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended The Safety Canopy deploys during
testing procedures help reduce the risk of significant side crashes or when a certain
injuries related to the deployment of side likelihood of a rollover event is detected
airbags. by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
53
activated, regardless of which seats are The design and development of the Safety
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed Canopy included recommended testing
to inflate between the side window area procedures that were developed by a
and occupants to further enhance group of automotive safety experts known
protection provided in side impact crashes as the Side Airbag Technical Working
and rollover events. Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND

AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
E75004 structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
The system consists of the following: increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the front end of the vehicle.
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar occupant sensors which provide
trim. information to the restraints control
• A flexible headliner which opens above module which deploys (activates) the
the side doors to allow air curtain front safety belt pretensioners, driver
deployment airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted
side airbags, and the Safety Canopy®.
· Crash sensors and monitoring Based on the type of crash (frontal impact,
system with a readiness side impact or rollover), the restraints
E67017 indicator. See Crash Sensors control module will deploy the appropriate
and Airbag Indicator (page 54). safety devices.
Properly restrain children 12 years old and The restraints control module also
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy monitors the readiness of the above safety
will not interfere with children restrained devices plus the crash and occupant
using a properly installed child or booster sensors. The readiness of the safety
seat because it is designed to inflate system is indicated by a warning indicator
downward from the headliner above the light in the instrument cluster or by a
doors along the side window opening. backup tone if the warning light is not
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
105). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
54
The readiness light will not • The design of the side airbags is to
illuminate immediately after the inflate in certain side impact crashes.
E67017 ignition is turned on. Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
• The readiness light will either flash or experiences sufficient sideways motion
stay lit. or deformation.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The • The design of the Safety Canopy is to
tone pattern will repeat periodically inflate in certain side impact crashes
until the problem, the light or both are or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
repaired. may activate in other types of crashes
If any of these things happen, even if the vehicle experiences sufficient
intermittently, have the supplemental sideways motion or deformation, or a
restraint system serviced at an authorized certain likelihood of rollover.
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the AIRBAG DISPOSAL
event of a crash.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
or front airbags did not activate for both possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
front seat occupants in a crash does not qualified personnel.
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
55
Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before

leaving it unattended.
RADIO FREQUENCIES
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
This device complies with Part 15 of the still operates if you press any button
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada unintentionally.
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
The system uses a radio frequency signal
harmful interference, and (2) This device
to communicate with your vehicle and
must accept any interference received,
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
including interference that may cause
of the following conditions are met:
undesired operation.
• You touch the inside of the front
Note: Changes or modifications not exterior door handle within 3 ft (1 m)
expressively approved by the party proximity of an intelligent access key.
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment. • You press the tailgate release button.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification • You press a button on the remote
number only signifies that Industry Canada control.
technical specifications were met.
If excessive radio frequency interference
The typical operating range for your is present in the area or if the remote
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). control battery is low, you may need to
Vehicles with the remote start feature will mechanically unlock your door. You can
have a greater range. One of the following use the mechanical key blade in your
could cause a decrease in operating range: intelligent access key to open the driver
• Weather conditions. door in this situation. See Remote Control
(page 56).
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
REMOTE CONTROL
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle. Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Other short-distance radio transmitters, Equipped)
such as amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
controls and alarm systems may operate unlock or lock the driver door from outside
on the same frequency as your remote your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
control. If other transmitters are operating transmitter functions as a programmed
on those frequencies, you may not be able ignition key that operates all the locks and
to use your remote control. Using your starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
remote control near some types of control.
electronic equipment, such as USB devices,
computers or cell phones can interfere with
remote operation. Operating your remote
control near metal or metallic-finished
purses, bags or clothing can interfere with
remote operation. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
56
E191532
Press the button to release the key blade.

Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
E226461
The intelligent access keys operate the

power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E151795 Removable Key Blade

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a The intelligent access key also contains a
security label that provides important key removable key blade that you can use to
cut information. Keep the label in a safe unlock your vehicle.
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)

Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
57
A message appears in the information

display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
114).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter

The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E226462
Press the release button and pull the key

blade out.
E191533
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a

security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery

Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board. E151799
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase 3. Carefully remove the cover.
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
58
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
screwdriver, in the position shown to
E226462
release the battery.
1. Press the release button and pull the
key blade out.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.

6. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward.
7. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
Intelligent Access Key

The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
59
E218402

screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
E218401
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden onto the transmitter and install the key
behind the key blade head to remove blade.
the battery cover.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory positions.
Press the unlock button on a linked remote
control to recall memory positions. If you
enable the easy entry and exit feature, the
seat moves to the easy entry position. The
seat moves to the driver memory position
when you switch the ignition on.
Linking a Preset Position to your

Remote Control
See Memory Function (page 161).
60
Car Finder The remote start system does not work if

any of the following occur:
Press the button twice within
three seconds. A tone sounds • The ignition is on.
E138623 and the direction indicators • The anti-theft alarm triggers.
flash. We recommend you use this method • You switch off the feature.
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm. • The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
Sounding the Panic Alarm • The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Press the button to sound the
• The service engine soon light is on.
panic alarm. Press the button
E138624 again or switch the ignition on to Remote Control Feedback
turn it off.
An LED on the remote control provides
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
status feedback of remote start or stop
the ignition is off.
commands.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
LED Status
WARNING
Solid green Remote start or
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use extension
remote start if your vehicle is parked successful
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated. Solid red Remote stop
successful; vehicle
off
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low. Blinking red Remote start or
The remote start button is on the stop failed
transmitter.
E138625 Blinking green Waiting for status
update
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
Remote Starting Your Vehicle
has an extended operating range.
You can configure vehicles with automatic Note: You must press each button within
climate control to turn on the automatic three seconds of each other.
climate control when you remote start your
vehicle. See Automatic Climate Control
(page 150). A manual climate control
system runs at the setting you set it to
when you switched your vehicle off.
Many states and provinces restrict the use
of remote start. Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems. E138626
61
The label on your transmitter details the Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting procedure. starting after the engine stops running.
To remote start your vehicle: Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
1. Press the lock button. Starting
2. Press the remote start button twice. Press the button once. The
The exterior lamps flash twice. parking lamps turn off.
E138625
The horn sounds if the system fails to start, You may have to be closer to the
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs vehicle than when starting due to ground
the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce reflection and the added noise of the
noise. You can switch it on or off in the running vehicle.
information display. See General You can turn the remote start system on
Information (page 114).
or off using the information display. See
Note: If you do not follow this sequence, General Information (page 114).
your vehicle does not start remotely, the
direction indicators do not flash twice and
the horn does not sound. REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with REMOTE CONTROL
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch on the ignition before driving your Replacement keys or remote controls can
vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with be purchased from an authorized dealer.
an intelligent access transmitter, you must Authorized dealers can program remote
press the push button ignition switch on the controls for your vehicle. See Passive
instrument panel once while applying the Anti-Theft System (page 76).
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend
the remote start up to a maximum of 35
minutes.
62
MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • Certain driver alerts, stability systems

or parking aids turn on automatically
MyKey allows you to program keys with when you use the MyKey system. For
restricted driving modes to promote good example, Blind Spot Information
driving habits. You can program the System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
restrictions to all keys but one. Any keys departure warning or forward collision
that you did not program are administrator warning.
keys or admin keys. • Restricted touchscreen operation in
You can use admin keys to: some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle destination input while the vehicle is in
restrictions. any gear other than park (P) or when
• Program certain MyKey settings. the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
• Clear all MyKey restrictions. speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
After you program a MyKey, you can view
restrictions, if this feature is available
the following information through the
in your market.
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch
MyKeys for your vehicle. the lane departure warning feature off, but
this feature turns back on automatically
• The total distance a MyKey driver with every new key cycle.
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: MyKey drivers can turn on the forward
Note: Every MyKey receives the same collision warning when it is turned off by an
restrictions and settings. You cannot admin key.
program them individually.
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM
Note: For vehicles equipped with a radio or a very basic audio system, then the
push-button start switch: When both a radio may not mute.
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes Optional Settings
the admin key only.
You can configure certain vehicle feature
Standard Settings settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
Not every vehicle includes the features with an admin key.
listed below. If your vehicle has this
equipment, then you cannot change the Note: Not every feature applies to every
following settings when using a MyKey: vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. in your information display, providing
MyKey mutes the audio system until choices to switch them on or off, or to select
drivers, and in some instances, a more specific setting.
passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
63
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed limits so the CREATING A MYKEY

MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows Use the information display to create a
warnings followed by an audible tone MyKey.
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set 1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
speed by fully depressing the the transmitter you want to program.
accelerator pedal. If your vehicle has a push-button start,
place the transmitter into the back
WARNING position. See Passive Anti-Theft
Do not set MyKey maximum speed System (page 76).
limit to a limit that will prevent the 2. Access the main menu in the
driver from maintaining a safe speed information display and then scroll
considering posted speed limits and through the menus to begin
prevailing road conditions. The driver is programming your MyKey. See
always responsible to drive in accordance Information Displays (page 114).
with local laws and prevailing conditions. 3. Follow the instructions in the display.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury. 4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
• Various vehicle speed reminders so restrictions apply when you key off,
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle open and close driver door and restart
speed approaches the limits. Warnings your vehicle with the programmed key
appear in your information display and or transmitter.
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed. Note: Make sure you label the programmed
MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
• The audio system's maximum volume admin keys.
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message You can also program the optional MyKey
appears in the information display settings.
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also Programming or Changing
disables the automatic volume control. Configurable Settings
• Always on setting. This setting forces Use the information display to program or
certain features to remain on and change your optional MyKey settings.
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the 1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
do not disturb features stay on even if the transmitter you want to program.
a MyKey driver uses the feature's 2. Access the main menu in the
control to switch it off. information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM
settings of your MyKey. See
radio or a very basic audio system, then the
Information Displays (page 114).
radio may not mute.
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
64
MyKey™
4. A confirmation message appears in the CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM

display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed STATUS
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close the driver door and You can find information about your
restart your vehicle with the programmed MyKeys by using the
programmed key or transmitter. information display. See Information
Displays (page 114).
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key MyKey Distance
cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch the engine off, you must use an Tracks the distance when drivers use a
admin key to change or clear your optional MyKey. The only way to delete the
MyKey settings. accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove recreated a MyKey.
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status at once. To Number of MyKeys
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the information display. Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin feature to detect how many MyKeys you
key. have for your vehicle and determine when
2. Access the main menu in the all MyKeys have been deleted.
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin clearing Number of Admin Keys
your MyKey programming. See
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
3. Follow the instructions in the display. feature to determine how many admin
4. A confirmation message appears in the keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
display after you finish clearing your if an additional MyKey has been
MyKeys. programmed.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
to their original admin key status. You START SYSTEMS
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
individually. MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
65
MyKey™
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential causes
I cannot create a MyKey. · The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup posi-
tion. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 76).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 64).
For vehicles with keyless start: No MyKey · An admin transmitter is present when you
restrictions are available when starting the started your vehicle.
vehicle. · There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 64).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. · The key or transmitter used to start the
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 64).
I lost the only admin key. · Purchase a new key or transmitter from
your authorized dealer.
I lost a key. · Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
76).
MyKey distances do not accumulate. · The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
66
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
You can use the power door lock control seconds to disable or enable two-stage
or the remote control to lock and unlock unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
your doors and tailgate. See Tailgate allows your entire vehicle to unlock with
(page 72). one press of the button.
Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks
Power Door Locks (If Equipped) your entire vehicle when you disable
two-stage unlocking.
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels. Locking the Vehicle
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
E138623 flash.
Press the button again within three

seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
E138628 if all the doors are closed.
A Unlock. Mislock
B Lock. If any door is open, or if the hood is open
on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn sounds twice and
Remote Control (If Equipped) the direction indicators do not flash.
You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage
Unlock) General Information
Press the button to unlock the You can unlock and lock the vehicle
driver door. Press the button without taking the keys out of your pocket
E138629 again within three seconds to or purse when your intelligent access key
unlock all doors. The direction indicators is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
flash. The direction indicators flash twice Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
to confirm the change. The unlocking back of the door handle for unlocking and
mode applies to the remote control, a separate sensor on the face of each door
keyless entry keypad and intelligent handle for locking.
access. The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies are jammed.
67
Doors and Locks
Note: The system may not function if the At the Electronic Tailgate (If Equipped)
key is close to metal objects or electronic
devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 56).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E187693
E248555
Press the exterior tailgate release button
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
unlocks and opens. See Tailgate Lock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
(page 72).
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not Smart Unlock (If Equipped)
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The This feature helps to prevent you from
intelligent access system requires a brief locking your intelligent access key inside
delay to authenticate your intelligent your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
access key fob. rear cargo area.
Locking Using Intelligent Access If you leave your key in the ignition, when
you open the driver door and lock your
vehicle with the power door lock control,
the doors lock then unlock.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
E248556 • Using the manual lock on the inside of
the door.
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door • Locking the driver door with a key.
handle lock sensor for approximately one • Using the keyless entry keypad.
second to lock, being careful to not touch • Using the lock button on the remote
the unlock sensor on the back of the door control.
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
to confirm locking occurred without Access Keys (If Equipped)
inadvertently unlocking.
Note: Do not use the outside door handle This feature helps to prevent you from
as a roof cargo strap. locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
68
Doors and Locks
When you lock your vehicle using the Autounlock

power door lock control (with the door
open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
vehicle searches for an intelligent access • The ignition is on, all the doors are
key in the passenger compartment after closed, and your vehicle has been
you close the door. If your vehicle finds a moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
key, all of the doors immediately unlock. (20 km/h).
In order to override the smart unlock • Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
feature and intentionally lock the switch the ignition off or to the
intelligent access key inside your vehicle, accessory position.
you can lock your vehicle after all doors • You open the driver door within 10
are closed by using the keyless entry minutes of switching the ignition off or
keypad, pressing the lock button on to accessory.
another intelligent access key or touching
the locking area on the handle with another Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
intelligent access key in your hand. electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
When you open one of the front doors and the driver door.
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if the Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
ignition is on.
You can enable or disable the autounlock
Autolock (If Equipped) feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
Autolock locks all the doors when: General Information (page 114).
• All doors are closed.
Illuminated Entry
• The ignition is on.
The interior lamps and select exterior
• You shift into any gear putting your
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
vehicle in motion.
doors with the remote entry system.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h). The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
Autolock repeats when:
• The ignition is on.
• You open then close any door while the
• You press the remote control lock
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
button.
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h). The dome lamp does not turn on if the
control is set to the off position.
The lights do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the dimmer
control.
• Any door is open.
69
Doors and Locks
Battery Saver You can operate the keypad with the

factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
The battery saver turns off the interior is located on the owner’s wallet card in the
lamps 30 minutes after you switch off the glove box and is available from an
ignition if a door is open and the dome authorized dealer. You can also create up
lamp switch is on. It turns off the interior to five of your own five-digit personal entry
lamps after 10 minutes if the dome lamp codes.
switch is off.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) To create your own personal entry code:
If you leave the ignition on after leaving 1. Enter the factory-set code.
your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after 2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
you close all of the doors. seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped) must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY 4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
KEYPAD personal code one.
The keypad is near the driver window and The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
illuminates when you touch it. that programming was successful.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast To program additional personal entry
on the keypad, the unlock function may not codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly. • Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code five.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
E190936
Erasing a Personal Code
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
• Program and erase user codes. 2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
70
Doors and Locks
All personal codes erase and only the

factory-set five-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors

To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See General
Information (page 114).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
71
Tailgate (If Equipped)
TAILGATE LOCK (If Equipped)

The tailgate lock can help prevent theft of
the tailgate.
E248384
2. Locate and disconnect the frame

connections. They are on the left-hand
side of the vehicle.
E224958 Note: Your vehicle may have up to three
frame connections.
Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.
Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turn 3. Install the caps from the tailgate
it to the right to unlock the tailgate. removal kit on the in-line connectors
that remain on the vehicle.
REMOVING THE TAILGATE Note: If you do not install the caps on the
connectors, some features may not operate
as intended.
WARNING
4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully
Always properly secure cargo to
feed the tailgate harness up through
prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling
the bumper and place it out of the way.
from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle 5. Lower the tailgate.
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
You can remove the tailgate for more

loading room.
1. Obtain the tailgate removal kit from
the glove box.
E163092
6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the

spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
72
7. Disconnect the other cable.

8. Lift the tailgate to a 45 degree angle
from horizontal.
9. Lift the right side off its hinge.
10. Lift the tailgate to an 80 degree angle
from horizontal.
11. Remove the tailgate from the left side
hinge by sliding it to the right.
Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.
E187718
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step
Use the step to make entering the truck to its lowest position.
bed easier.
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
• Always open the step panel to widen
the step.
• Always use the grab handle when
climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet. E189557
• Make sure the step is clean before use. 4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
• Keep the step load, you plus the load, out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
below 350 lb (159 kg). 5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal
to vertical until you hear a click. You
Opening the Step have locked the handle in place.
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
step before moving your vehicle. Do not handle.
drive with the step or grab handle open. Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
1. Lower the tailgate. handle molding if it appears as worn or
damaged.
2. Push the button in the center of the
step molding. The step pops out
slightly.
73
Closing the Step 1. Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.
1. Press the yellow button on the
telescoping handle to lower the handle,
then press the yellow lever at the
bottom of the handle to unlock the
handle. Rotate the handle down from
vertical to horizontal and push it into
the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped) E163096
Note: Do not use the bed extender when 2. Open the latches to release the panels.
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 pounds (68
kilograms) on the tailgate when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed E163097
position with the tailgate closed.
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Tailgate mode Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E163095
E163098
74
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both

knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.
E163099
5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into

the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage
both sides of the locking pins into their
holes in the pick-up box.
Reverse the steps to store the bed
extender.
Grocery mode
E163100
Follow Steps 1-4 of the tailgate mode

instructions by rotating the panels away
from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
75
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT The integrated keyhead transmitter

functions as a programmed ignition key
SYSTEM that operates all the locks and starts your
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. The intelligent access key functions as a
Use of these systems may result in engine programmed key that operates the driver
starting problems and a loss of security door lock and turns on the intelligent
protection. access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key If your coded keys are lost or stolen and
chain may result in vehicle starting you do not have an extra coded key, you
problems, especially if they are too close to need to erase the key codes from your
the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent vehicle and program new coded keys.
these objects from touching the coded key Contact an authorized dealer.
when starting your vehicle. Switch the Store an extra programmed key away from
ignition off, move all objects on the key your vehicle in a safe place. You can
chain away from the coded key and restart purchase replacement keys or remote
your vehicle if a problem occurs. controls from an authorized dealer.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and Programming a Spare Integrated
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle. Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of six
SecuriLock® keys to your vehicle. All six can be integrated
The system helps prevent the engine from keyhead transmitters.
starting unless you use a coded key You can program your own integrated
programmed to your vehicle. Using the keyhead transmitter or standard
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle.
starting. A message may appear in the This procedure programs both the vehicle
information display. immobilizer keycode and the remote
If you are unable to start your vehicle with control to your vehicle.
a coded key, it is not operating correctly. Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
A message may appear in the information or standard SecuriLock keys.
display.
You must have two previously
Automatic Arming programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible.
The system arms when you switch the Contact an authorized dealer to have the
ignition off. spare key programmed if two previously
programmed keys are not available.
Automatic Disarming
Read and understand the entire procedure
The system disarms when you switch the before you begin.
ignition on with a coded key.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
Replacement Keys coded key into the ignition.
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
76
Security
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep You must have two previously
the ignition on for at least 3 seconds, programmed intelligent access keys inside
but no more than 10 seconds. your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the intelligent access key readily accessible.
first coded key from the ignition. Contact an authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
4. After at least 3 seconds but within 10 programmed keys are not available.
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key Make sure that the ignition is switched off
into the ignition. before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep beginning and that they remain closed
the ignition on for at least 3 seconds, throughout the procedure. Carry out all
but no more than 10 seconds. steps within 30 seconds of starting the
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
second previously programmed coded minute before starting again if you carry
key from the ignition. out any steps out of sequence.
7. After at least 3 seconds but within 10 Read and understand the entire procedure
seconds of switching the ignition off before you begin.
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new 1. Remove the key blade from the
unprogrammed key into the ignition. transmitter.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If you have successfully programmed the
new integrated keyhead transmitter, it will
start your vehicle and operate the remote
entry system.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 9. If
you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent

Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of six
keys to your vehicle. All six must be
intelligent access keys.
This procedure programs both the vehicle
immobilizer keycode and the remote
control to your vehicle.
77
Security
9. Wait five seconds, then place the

unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If
you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The active anti-theft system is designed
to warn you in the event of unauthorized
vehicle entry and is also designed to help
prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by
arming the system in different ways. See
The direction indicators flash and the horn
sounds if the system triggers while the
alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
E226701 dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
2. Remove the tray and the cover from
the center console. With the buttons Using the System
facing upward, place the first intelligent
access key in the backup slot. You can select two levels of alarm security.
You can change the level of security
3. Press the push button ignition switch. through the information display. See
4. Wait five seconds and then press the General Information (page 114).
push button ignition switch again.
Reduced Guard (If Equipped)
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second Reduced guard monitors the following:
programmed intelligent access key in • Doors.
the backup slot and press the push • Hood.
button ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
78
Security
Full Guard (If Equipped) Disarming the Alarm

Full guard monitors the following: Disarm the alarm by any of the following
• Doors. actions:
• Hood. • Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
• Movement inside your vehicle.
• Unlock the doors with the remote
• Change in vehicle inclination, for
control or keyless entry keypad. If
example, unwanted towing.
equipped with intelligent access, you
Note: Do not choose full monitor mode can use the unlock sensor on the
when the vehicle is in transport or if exterior door handle. See Locking and
movement within the vehicle is likely to Unlocking (page 67).
occur. • Switch the ignition on or start your
Note: For correct operation of the interior vehicle.
motion detection system, make sure you • Use a key in the driver door lock
close all the windows prior to arming the cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm switch the ignition on within 12
activation due to external influences. seconds.
Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system does not arm if any door is ajar. Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control stops the horn and direction
Arming the Alarm indicators, but does not disarm the system.
The alarm is ready to arm when there is

not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle
using the remote control or keyless entry
keypad. You can also lock your vehicle
using the lock sensor on the exterior door
handle if your vehicle is equipped with
intelligent access. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 67).
The direction indicators flash once after
you lock your vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully
arms after 20 seconds.
79
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
USING POWER RUNNING Automatic Power Deploy

BOARDS
WARNINGS
In extreme climates, excessive ice
buildup may occur, causing the
running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
Switch off the running boards before E166682
jacking or placing any object under
The running boards automatically extend
your vehicle. Never place your hand
down and out when you open the door.
between the extended running board and
This can help you enter and exit your
your vehicle. A moving running board may
vehicle.
cause injury.
Automatic Power Stow
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board When you close the doors, the running
motors, or the running board underbody boards return to the stowed position after
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking. a two-second delay.
Always use proper jacking points.
Manual Power Deploy
Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures. You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and 1. Select Settings.
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this 2. Select Advanced Settings.
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the 3. Select Vehicle.
system, in particular the front and rear hinge 4. Select Power Running Boards.
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand. 5. Select your desired power running
board setting.
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h).
80
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
Enabling and Disabling

You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display.
• When disabled, the running boards
move to the stowed position regardless
of the door position.
• When enabled, the running boards
move back to the correct positions
based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.
81
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 156).
E261503
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
E261502
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
1. Unlock the steering column. correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 156).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
82
Steering Wheel
Note: The steering column may begin to

move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory
function. See Memory Function (page
161).
E261582
Pressing the adjustment control during
Use the control on the side of the steering memory recall cancels the operation.
column to adjust the position.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
To adjust:
The column moves to the full up position
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
when you switch the ignition off. Switch
control.
the ignition on to return the system to its
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of previous settings. You can switch this
the control. feature on or off in the information display.
See Information Displays (page 114).
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping AUDIO CONTROL
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering You can operate the following functions
column. A new stopping position sets if with the control:
the steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
83
Steering Wheel
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E191327
A Volume up. E191328
B Media.
A Mute.
C Seek up or next.
B Voice recognition.
D Volume down.
C End call.
E Seek down or previous.
D Answer or make a call.
Media
See your SYNC information.
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.
CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)
Seek, Next or Previous
Type One
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
E191329
See Using Cruise Control (page 245).
84
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E191337
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control

(page 246).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E191336
See Information Displays (page 114).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If

Equipped)
See your SYNC information.
85
Pedals (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS Horizontal Control
WARNING
Never use the pedal adjustment
controls when your feet are on the
accelerator or brake pedal when the
vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your

vehicle is in park (P).
A B
Depending on your vehicle and equipment
level, the shape and location of your E162916
power-adjustable pedal control can vary.
• If your control is vertical, then it is to A. Farther.
the left of the steering column and on B. Closer.
the instrument panel.
• If your control is horizontal, then it is on Both horizontal and vertical controls
the left side of the steering column. operate the same way:
1. Press and hold A to move the pedals
Vertical Control
away from you.
2. Press and hold B to move the pedals
closer to you.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 161).
E176213
A. Farther.
B. Closer.
86
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Make sure you switch the windshield

wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
you switch the windshield wipers on. windshield, clean the windshield and the
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
wipers off before entering a car wash. issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the Note: The courtesy wipe feature turns on
windshield, clean the windshield and the after using the windshield washers to
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the remove any excess washer fluid and debris.
issue, install new wiper blades. You can adjust the courtesy wipe settings
in the instrument display.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass, Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper snow or salty road mist can cause
motor to burn out. Always use the inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
windshield washers before wiping a dry smearing.
windshield.
E172817
E172816
Use the rotary control to adjust the
• Rotate away from you for a long wipe sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
interval. select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
• Rotate toward you for a short wipe of water on the windshield. When you
interval. select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
Speed Dependent Wipers
of water on the windshield.
When your vehicle speed increases, the Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
interval between wipes decreases. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped) hit the windshield.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before

you switch the windshield wipers on.
87
Wipers and Washers
In these conditions, you can do the

following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E172818
• A brief press causes a single wipe

without washer fluid.
• A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.
88
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist E142449
can form on the interior of the lens. The

fine mist eventually clears and exits A Off.
through the vents during normal operation. B Parking lamps, instrument panel
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours lamps, license plate lamps and
under dry weather conditions. rear lamps.
Examples of acceptable condensation are: C Headlamps.
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets). Headlamp High Beam
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch

the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
89
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher The headlamps remain on for a period of

time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
E163268
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
Slightly pull the lever toward you and approximately 60 seconds after you switch
release it to flash the headlamps. the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped) wipers:
• During a single wipe.
WARNING • When using the windshield washers.
The system does not relieve you of • If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
your responsibility to drive with due
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
care and attention. You may need to
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
override the system if it does not turn the
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
headlamps on in low visibility conditions,
for example daytime fog.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: When disconnecting the battery or
when it runs out of charge, the illuminated
components turn to the maximum setting.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the

autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.
90
Lighting
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions.
Make sure you switch the headlamps on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
Type One - Conventional (Non-

Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
E231828
1. Switching the ignition on.
Press repeatedly or press and hold until 2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
you reach the desired level. vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
A B lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type Two - Configurable

Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display. See
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
E165366 display.
2. Switching the ignition on.
A Press repeatedly or press and
hold to dim. 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
B Press repeatedly or press and or releasing the parking brake for
hold to brighten. vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
91
Lighting
If the daytime running lamps are off in the Once the system is active, the high beams
information display, the lamps stay off in turn on if:
all switch positions. • The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM vehicle.
CONTROL (If Equipped) • The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
WARNING The high beams turn off if:
The system does not relieve you of • The ambient light level is high enough
your responsibility to drive with due that high beams are not required.
care and attention. You may need to • The system detects an approaching
override the system if it does not turn the vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
high beams on or off.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it • The system detects severe rain, snow
detects an approaching vehicle’s or fog.
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting • The camera is blocked.
ahead, the system turns off high beams
before they can distract other road users. Switching the System On and Off
Low beams remain on. Switch the system on using the information
Note: The system may not operate properly display. See Information Displays (page
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield 114).
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
E142451
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can Switch the lighting control to the
modify your vehicle's ride height and autolamps position. See Autolamps
degrade automatic high beam control (page 90).
performance.
Overriding the System
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle, When you switch on the high beams,
continuously monitors conditions to turn pushing or pulling the stalk provides a
the high beams on and off. temporary override to low beam.
92
Lighting
Automatic High Beam Indicator (If • To operate the left direction indicator,
Equipped) push the lever down until it stops.
• To operate the right direction indicator,
The indicator lamp illuminates push the lever up until it stops.
to confirm when the system is
ready to assist. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped) SPOT LAMPS (If Equipped)

The spot lamps are on the forward-facing
side of the exterior mirrors. Switch on the
spot lamps by pressing the buttons above
the lighting control with the parking lamps
on.
E142453
Press the control to switch the fog lamps

on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
Off and the high beams are not on. E176842
When switching on the spot lamps, the

DIRECTION INDICATORS area in front of and to the side of your
vehicle illuminates.
Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by
moving the position of the exterior mirrors.
For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim
of the lamps by folding the exterior mirrors
into or away from the windows. For
power-folding mirrors, use the switch on
the driver-side door.
Note: The spot lamps turn off when you
reach a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
E163272
93
Lighting
Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps INTERIOR LAMPS

(If Equipped)
The lamps turn on under the following
The cargo lamps are in the central high conditions:
mounted stop lamp, and to either side of
the cargo box. • You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
The trailer hookup lamp is on the tailgate
next to the handle. Front Interior Lamps
Pressing the button in the
lighting control panel or the Note: The front interior lamp switches are
E189587 button in the cargo box near the on the overhead console. The exact location
lamp turns on both of these lamps. of each button on the overhead console
depends upon your vehicle features.
Note: Press the button to switch the door
function off when you open any door. When
the door function is off and you open a door,
the courtesy and door lamps stay off. The
indicator lamp lights amber when the door
function is off.
Note: Press the button again to switch the
door function back on. When the door
function is on and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps turn on. The
indicator lamp lights blue when the door
function is on.
E190880
If you switch on the cargo lamps, the cargo

and trailer hitch area illuminate.
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn off when you reach a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h). They also turn off after 10
minutes, fading gradually to off.
94
Lighting
Type One Type Two
C B A C D A C D
B
E199032 E192153
A. Door function. A. All lamps on.

B. All lamps on. B. Door function.
C. Map lamps. C. All lamps off.
D. Map lamps.
95
Lighting
Type Three Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped)

Type One
E182517
A. Individual lamp.
B. Individual lamp.
Type Two
A B C D
E201073
A. Map lamp.
B. Door function.
C. All lamps off.
D. Map lamp.
E187343
Type Three
E187342
A. All lamps on.

B. Door function.
E187345
96
Lighting
Press the button to switch the lamps on

or off.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)

Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen. See your SYNC information.
97
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped) Restoring the One-Touch Up Function

You may lose the one-touch function if the
WARNINGS vehicle battery is low.
Do not leave children unattended in To reset the function after the battery
your vehicle and do not let them play recharges:
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves. 1. Pull the switch all the way up.
When closing the power windows, 2. Hold the switch until the glass stops
you should verify they are free of and continue to hold for two seconds.
obstructions and make sure that 3. Press the switch down and operate the
children and pets are not in the proximity window to the full down position.
of the window openings. One-touch up will now be functional.
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration
with the door closed. Calibrating with the
door open will cause the window to
continuously bounce back.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)

The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
E176215 WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
Press the control to open the window.
feature the window will not reverse
Lift the control to close the window. if it detects an obstacle. Take care
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when when closing the windows to avoid
just one of the windows is open. Lower the personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise. Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped) bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
Press or lift the switch fully and release it. The window will stop if you release the
Press or lift it again to stop the window. switch before the window closes fully.
Note: The window may disable for up to
five minutes if you cycle it up and down
repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to
the motor. Normal operation will resume
once the motor cools.
98
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock (If Equipped) EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
E176216
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear

window controls.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)

The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door. E144073
A Left-hand mirror.
GLOBAL OPENING (If Equipped)
B Adjustment control.
You can use the remote control to open C Right-hand mirror.
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: To operate this feature, accessory To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
delay must not be active. on, with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running, and then:
Opening the Windows 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the 2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
remote control. After you unlock your the position of the mirror.
vehicle, press and hold the remote control 3. Press the mirror control again. The
unlock button to open the windows. control light turns off.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
movement.
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
99
Windows and Mirrors
Telescoping Mirrors
This feature lets you extend the mirror
about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when
towing a trailer. You can manually pull out
or push in the mirrors to the desired
position.
E234001
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping

Mirrors (If Equipped)
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway
through their movement. Wait until the E234002
mirrors stop moving and press the control
again.
Power Telescoping Mirrors
Note: The left-hand and right-hand mirrors
move at different rates. For example, one This feature lets you position both mirrors
mirror may stop while the other one at the same time.
continues to move. This is normal.
Power-Folding Mirrors
To fold both mirrors:
1. Press the control.
2. Press control again to unfold the
mirrors.
E218902
A Extend.
B Retract.
100
Windows and Mirrors
To adjust your mirrors, press the Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
adjustment control to position the mirrors.
While the vehicle is running, the
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times forward-facing portion of the appropriate
within one minute, or repeated folding, mirror housing blinks when you switch on
unfolding and telescoping of the mirrors the direction indicator.
while holding the control down during full
travel, may disable the system to protect Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
the motors from overheating. Wait
approximately three minutes with the The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
vehicle running, and up to 10 minutes with housing light when you use your
the vehicle off, for the system to reset and transmitter to unlock the doors or when
for function to return to normal. you open a door.
Loose Mirror Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
If your power-folding mirrors are manually The lower, outer part of the mirror housings
folded, they may not work properly even light when you switch the headlamps or
after you re-position them. You need to parking lamps on.
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive. Spot Lamps (If Equipped)
• The mirrors feel loose. The area lights are on the forward-facing
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or portion of the mirror housing. You can
unfolded position. switch them on and off by using the
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal controls located on the instrument panel.
driving position. See Lighting (page 89).
To reset the power-fold feature, use the Trailer Towing Camera System (If
power-folding mirror control to fold and Equipped)
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding See Rear View Camera (page 238).
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors Blind Spot Information System (If
are manually folded. Equipped)
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) See Blind Spot Information System
(page 254).
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 154).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped) INTERIOR MIRROR

You can save and recall the mirror Manual Dimming Mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 161). WARNING
101
Windows and Mirrors
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you

to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

WARNING
E176217
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to The control is on the overhead console.
normal when the bright light from behind Press and hold the control to open the
is no longer present or if you shift into window. Pull and hold the control to close
reverse (R). the window.
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror. SUN VISORS
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
SLIDING WINDOWS (If Equipped)

Power Sliding Back Window (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
When operating the power sliding
back window, you must make sure E138666
all rear seat occupants and cargo are
not in the proximity of the back window. Rotate the sun visor toward the side
Do not leave children unattended in window and extend it rearward for extra
your vehicle and do not let them play shade.
with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.
102
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped) Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E162197 E191272
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. A Moonroof open.

B Moonroof vent.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
C Sunshade open.
WARNINGS D Sunshade close.
Do not leave children unattended in E Moonroof close.
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the moonroof. They may Moonroof Open
seriously injure themselves.
Press and release to open the moonroof.
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully
obstructions and make sure that opened position to reduce wind noise or
children and pets are not in the proximity rumbling that may happen with the
of the roof opening. moonroof fully open. Press and release the
control again to open the moonroof fully.
The moonroof controls are located on the Moonroof Vent
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its Press and release to vent the moonroof.
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time. Sunshade Open
Press and release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens automatically with
the moonroof. You can also open the
sunshade with the moonroof closed.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the sunshade fully,
press the control again.
103
Windows and Mirrors
Sunshade Close
Press and release to close the sunshade.
Moonroof Close
Press and release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent positions.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses
some distance if an obstacle is detected
while closing.
To override this feature, press and hold (E)
within two seconds after the roof comes
to a stop following a bounce-back reversal.
104
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
E219638
A Engine oil pressure gauge.

B Engine coolant temperature gauge.
C Fuel gauge.
D Transmission fluid temperature gauge.
E Speedometer.
F Information display. See General Information (page 114).
G Tachometer.
105
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E219651
A Engine oil pressure gauge.

B Engine coolant temperature gauge.
C Fuel gauge.
D Configurable. Transmission fluid temperature, Turbo boost or DEF gauge (diesel
engines only).
E Speedometer.
F Information display. See General Information (page 114).
G Tachometer.
106
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
should stay in the normal operating range the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
(between L and H). If the needle falls side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
below the normal range, stop your vehicle, located.
turn off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is The needle should move toward F when
correct, have your vehicle checked by an you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
authorized dealer. to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
Engine Coolant Temperature After refueling some variability in needle
Gauge position is normal:
WARNING • It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
Do not remove the coolant reservoir This is normal and depends upon the
cap when the cooling system is hot. slope of pavement at the gas station.
Wait 10 minutes for the cooling
system to cool down. Cover the coolant • The fuel amount dispensed into the
reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent tank is a little less or more than the
the possibility of scalding and slowly gauge indicated. This is normal and
remove the cap. Failure to follow this depends upon the slope of pavement
instruction could result in personal injury. at the gas station.
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At before the tank is full, try a different
normal operating temperature, the level gas pump nozzle.
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
Low Fuel Reminder
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as A low fuel reminder triggers when the
safely possible, switch off the engine and distance to empty value reaches 50 mi
let the engine cool. (80 km) to empty, with additional
warnings at 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km)
Fuel Gauge and 0 mi (0 km) to empty, provided the
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly message is cleared each time. An
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient. additional warning at 75 mi (120 km) to
empty is provided when the MyKey is being
used.
Variations:
Note: The distance-to-empty warning can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending
on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal.
107
Instrument Cluster
Driving type (fuel economy Distance-to-empty Fuel gauge position

conditions)
Highway driving 50 mi (80 km) 1/8th tank

Severe duty driving (trailer 50 mi (80 km) 1/4 tank
towing, extended idle)
Transmission Fluid Temperature WARNING LAMPS AND

Gauge
INDICATORS
Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level The following warning lamps and
indicator will be in the normal range. If the indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
transmission fluid temperature exceeds that may become serious. Some lamps
the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon illuminate when you start your vehicle to
as safely possible and verify the airflow is make sure they work. If any lamps remain
not restricted such as snow or debris on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
blocking airflow through the grill. Also, respective system warning lamp for further
higher than normal operating temperature information.
can be caused by special operation Note: Some warning indicators appear in
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or the information display and operate the
off-road use). Operating the transmission same as a warning lamp but do not
for extended periods with the gauge in the illuminate when you start your vehicle.
higher than normal area may cause
internal transmission damage. You need Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
to alter the severity of your driving
conditions to lower the transmission The speed control system
temperature into the normal range. If the indicator light changes color to
E144524
gauge continues to show high indicate what mode the system
temperatures, see an authorized dealer. is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 246).
Turbo Boost Gauge (If Equipped)
On (white light): Illuminates when the
Indicates the amount of manifold air adaptive cruise control system is turned
pressure in the engine. on. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
DEF Gauge (If Equipped) Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
Indicates the current DEF level. the adaptive cruise control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
108
Instrument Cluster
Adaptive Steering (If Equipped) Automatic High Beam (If Equipped)

The adaptive steering system Illuminates when this feature is
indicator illuminates if the on. See Automatic High Beam
E223375
system detects a fault during the Control (page 92).
continuous diagnostic checks.
Battery
Adaptive Steering Initialization (yellow,
flashing): The adaptive steering system If it illuminates while driving, it
has detected a difference between indicates a malfunction. Switch
steering wheel angle and the desired road off all unnecessary electrical
wheel angle. The steering wheel adjusts equipment and have the system checked
itself to correct this difference. This by your authorized dealer immediately.
adjustment is part of normal system
operation. Brake System
Adaptive Steering Off (yellow, solid): The
adaptive steering system is off. It is WARNING
possible that the steering wheel may not Driving your vehicle with the warning
be straight when the vehicle is driving lamp on is dangerous. A significant
straight ahead. If this message persists, decrease in braking performance
see an authorized dealer. may occur. It may take you longer to stop
Adaptive Steering Loss (red, solid): The your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
adaptive steering system integrity cannot soon as possible. Driving extended
be verified. Do not drive the vehicle and distances with the parking brake engaged
contact an authorized dealer immediately. can cause brake failure and the risk of
See Steering (page 261). personal injury.
Anti-Lock Braking System It illuminates momentarily when

It illuminates momentarily when you switch on the ignition to
E144522
you switch on the ignition to confirm that the lamp is
confirm that the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when
functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch on the ignition or begins to flash
you switch on the ignition or begins to flash at anytime, have the system checked as
at anytime, have the system checked as soon as possible.
soon as possible. Illuminates when you engage the parking
brake with the ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. You will continue If it illuminates when you are driving, check
to have the normal braking system that the parking brake is not engaged. If
(without ABS) unless the brake system the parking brake is not engaged, this
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system checked as soon as possible. system malfunction. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
109
Instrument Cluster
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped) Engine Oil

It illuminates when you switch If it illuminates with the engine
this feature off or in conjunction running or when you are driving,
E151262
with a message. See Blind Spot this indicates a malfunction.
Information System (page 254). Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
Check Fuel Cap (If Equipped) engine oil level.
See Engine Oil Check (page 334).
Illuminates when the fuel cap
may not be properly installed. Note: Do not resume your journey if it
Continued driving with this light illuminates despite the level being correct.
on may cause the Service engine soon Have the system checked by your authorized
warning indicator to come on. dealer immediately.
Fasten Seatbelt
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
It illuminates and a chime
Illuminates when you switch this sounds to remind you to fasten
feature on. See Using Cruise E71880 your seatbelt.
E71340 Control (page 245).
Front Airbag
Direction Indicator
If it fails to illuminate when you
Illuminates when the left or right start your vehicle, continues to
turn signal or the hazard warning E67017 flash or remains on, it indicates
flasher is turned on. If the a malfunction. Have the system checked
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for by your authorized dealer.
a burned out bulb.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Door Ajar
It illuminates when you switch
Displays when the ignition is on the front fog lamps on.
and any door is not completely
closed.
High Beam
Electronic Locking Differential (If Illuminates when you switch the
Equipped) high beam headlamps on. It will
flash when you use the
Illuminates when using the
headlamp flasher.
electronic locking differential.
E163170
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when hill descent is
Illuminates when the engine switched on.
coolant temperature is high. E163171
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
110
Instrument Cluster
Low Fuel Level Normally, it illuminates until the engine is

cranked and automatically turns off if no
Illuminates when the fuel level malfunctions are present. However, if after
is low or the fuel tank is nearly 15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
empty. Refuel as soon as indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
possible. Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 197).
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates if the tire pressure Stability Control
in one or more tires is below the Illuminates when the system is
correct tire pressure. active. If it remains illuminated
It also illuminates momentarily when you
E138639 or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp switch the ignition on, this indicates a
is functional. If it does not illuminate when malfunction. During a malfunction the
you switch the ignition on, or begins to system will switch off. Have the system
flash at any time, have the system checked checked by your authorized dealer
by your authorized dealer. immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 233).
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control Stability Control Off
Illuminates when a powertrain Illuminates when you switch the
or a 4WD fault has been system off. It will go out when
detected. Contact your E130458 you switch the system back on
authorized dealer as soon as possible. or when you switch the ignition off.
See Using Stability Control (page 233).
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
is running this indicates a Illuminates when the tow/haul
malfunction. The On Board feature has been activated. If the
Diagnostics system has detected a E161509 light flashes steadily, have the
malfunction of the vehicle emission control system serviced immediately, damage to
system. the transmission could occur.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas 4X2 (If Equipped)
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components. Illuminates momentarily when
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy two-wheel drive high is selected.
acceleration and deceleration) and have E163173 If the light fails to display when
your vehicle immediately serviced. the ignition is turned on, or remains on,
It illuminates when you switch the ignition have the system serviced immediately by
on prior to engine start to check the bulb your authorized dealer.
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.
111
Instrument Cluster
4X4 LOW (If Equipped) Water In Fuel (If Equipped)

Illuminates when four-wheel WARNING
drive low is engaged. If the light
E181780 fails to display when the ignition Do not drain the water-in-fuel
is turned on, or remains on, have the separator while the engine is running.
system serviced immediately by your Failure to follow this warning may
authorized dealer. result in fire, serious injury, death or
property damage.
4X4 HIGH (If Equipped)
During refueling, it is possible for
Illuminates when four-wheel you to pump
drive high is engaged. If the light water-contaminated diesel fuel
E181779 fails to display when the ignition into your fuel tank. Your vehicle’s fuel
is turned on, or remains on, have the system is equipped with a fuel filter and
system serviced immediately by your water separator to remove water from the
authorized dealer. fuel. The water in fuel indicator lights when
the fuel and water separator has a
Diesel Engine Brake (If Equipped) significant quantity of water in it and
requires immediate draining.
Illuminates when you switch the If the water in fuel indicator illuminates
manual engine brake on. See when the engine is running, stop your
E171217
General Information (page vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off
227). the engine, then drain the fuel and water
separator. See Fuel Quality (page 189).
Illuminates when you switch the
Allowing water to stay in the fuel system,
automatic engine brake on. See
after the water in fuel indicator illuminates,
E234452 General Information (page
could result in extensive damage or failure
227).
of the fuel injection system.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (If Equipped) Note: Do not drain the fuel and water
separator while the engine is running. Air will
With the key in the on position, enter into the fuel system causing the engine
illuminates when the DEF is not to operate properly.
E163176 contaminated, low or someone
has tampered with the DEF system. See AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 200). INDICATORS
Wait To Start (If Equipped) Headlamps On Warning Chime

Sounds when you remove the key from the
Illuminates when you switch the ignition and open the driver's door and you
ignition on as part of the have left the headlamps or parking lamps
pre-start system. Wait until the on.
wait to start indicator turns off before
attempting to start vehicle. See Starting
a Diesel Engine (page 180).
112
Instrument Cluster
Key in Ignition Warning Chime

Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime

Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
113
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION Information Display Controls

(Type 1 and 2) (If Equipped)
WARNING
electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be

controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Trailer options are not available if
E219650
your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h). • Press the up and down arrow buttons
Note: Some MyKey menu options only to scroll through and highlight the
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one options within a menu.
MyKey is programmed. • Press the right arrow button to enter a
This icon gives you the ability to sub-menu.
switch a feature on or off. A • Press the left arrow button to exit a
E204495 check in the box indicates the menu.
feature is enabled, and unchecked • Press the OK button to choose and
indicates the feature is disabled. confirm a setting or messages.
114
Type 1
Main Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings
Trip 1
Digital Speed
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
DTE
Average Fuel
Outside Temp
• Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Trip Odometer - Registers the mileage of individual trips.
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual trips.
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
• Outside Air - Shows the outside air temperature.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Note: Trip 2 information is the same as Trip 1.
115
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Average Speed
• Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel.
• Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
• Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time.
• Average Speed - Shows the average speed the vehicle has driven.
Driver Assist
DEF Gauge
DEF Status
Exhaust Filter
Engine Hours Engine Hours
Engine Idle
Dual Fuel Front Tank
Tank
Rear Tank
Hill Strt Asst.
Oil Temp Oil Temp
Tire Pressure
Trans. Temp.
Rear Park Aid
1 Select Your Setting
Brake Type
116
Driver Assist
1
Brake Effort
Trailer Sway
1 Trailer setting.
Settings
Vehicle A. Engine Off
Auto Regen
DTE Calculate Select Your Setting
Lighting Autolamp Delay Select Your Setting
Daytime Light
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Remote Unlock Select Your Setting
Oil Life Reset Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your
settings
Alarm Select Your Setting
Ask on Exit
Remote Start Climate Control Select Your Setting
Seats
Duration
System
Windows Remote Open
Remote Close
Wiper Courtesy Wipe
Controls
MyKey MyKey Status Shows information related to the configured MyKey(s).
Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your
settings.
117
Settings
911 Assist Select Your Setting
Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Vol. Limiter
Clear MyKeys Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your
settings.
Display Setup Units Select Your Setting
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
Type 2
Main Menu
Display Mode
Trip/Fuel
Towing
Off Road
Settings
Display Mode
DTE
Dual Fuel Tanks
DEF Gauge
DEF Status
118
Display Mode
Exhaust Filter Status
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
Transmission Temp.
fuel.
• Dual Fuel Tanks - Shows the distance to empty for the front and rear tanks.
• DEF Gauge - Shows DEF gauge graphic.
• DEF Status - Shows DEF status on demand screen.
• Exhaust Filter - Shows exhaust filter on demand screen.
• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure in psi.
• Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature.
• Transmission Temperature - Shows the transmission temperature value.
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
119
Trip/Fuel
Compass Select Your Setting
Average Speed
Trip 1 or 2
• Shows the time, mileage and average fuel economy of an individual journey. Also
shows DTE.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph, average mpg
and DTE.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Also shows
DTE.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Towing
Trailer Status Trailer Status Provides trailer status information for the
active trailer: Trailer Blind Spot status,
Trailer Reverse Guidance status, trailer
name, accumulated trailer miles, trailer
brake gain and output.
Trailer Light Check Provides status of the brake, park and
direction indicator light for the active
trailer.
Trailer Tire Displays the trailer tire pressure and options to customize the display.
Pressure
Trailer Trailer Sway Control
Options
Select Trailer
Change Trailer Settings Rename Trailer Follow onscreen
directions to
Reset Trailer confirm or modify
Distance your settings.
Change Blind Spot
Measure
120
Towing
Add Trailer Blind
Spot
Change Trailer
Sticker
Add Trailer Rev.
Guidance
Change Brake Type Select Your Setting
Change Brake Effort
Delete Trailer
Change Trailer Select Your Setting
Setup
Add Trailer Add Trailer
Trailer Brake Type Select Your Setting
Trailer Brake Effort
Change Trailer Follow onscreen
Setup directions to
confirm or modify
Trailer Rev. Guid- your settings.
ance
Connection Checklist Conventional
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Off Road
Off Road Status
Displays pitch, steering angle and roll.
121
Settings
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
DTE Calcula- Select Your Setting
tion
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Advanced Vehicle Auto Engine Off
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting Autolamp Select Your Setting
Delay
Daytime Lights
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Remote Select Your Setting
Unlock
Remote Start Climate
Control
Seats
Duration
System
Oil Life Reset Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.
Ask on Exit
Windows Remote Open
Remote Close
Wiper Courtesy Wipe
Controls
122
Settings
Rain Sensing
MyKey MyKey Status
Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Clear MyKeys Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
Display Units Select Your Setting
Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
123
Information Display Controls • Press the up and down arrow buttons

(Type 3) (If Equipped) to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
E219639
Type 3
Main Menu
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Towing
Off Road
Settings
124
MyView
Trip 1
Fuel Economy
Tire Pressure
Off Road Status
Configure MyView Add/Remove Trip/Fuel Screens Trip 1
Screens
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
Navigation/Compass
Truck Info Screens Turbo Boost
Transmission Temp
Trans. Temp. Gauge
Diesel Particulate Filter
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Gauge View
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
MyKey Status
Towing Screens Towing Status
Towing Information
Trailer Light Check
Off Road Screens Off Road Status
125
MyView
Reorder Screens Screen Selection 1 Up/Down moves selec-
-7 tion in the list
Press OK to select
• Trip 1/2 - Shows your trip timer, fuel used, trip odometer and average mpg.
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage and average mpg.
• Tire Pressure - Shows your car outline with tire pressure values.
• Off Road Status - Shows your pitch and roll screen.
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
Navigation/Compass
Compass Select Your Setting
Trip 1 or 2
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
fuel.
• Odo - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Navigation/Compass
• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in
Navigation is not set).
126
Truck Info
Turbo Boost Gauge
Transmission Temperature Gauge
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status
Diesel Particulate Filter Status
Dual Fuel Tanks
Engine Information
Transmission Temperature
• Turbo Boost Gauge - Shows the turbo boost gauge.
• Transmission Temperature Gauge - Shows the transmission temperature gauge.
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge - Shows diesel exhaust fluid gauge.
• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure in psi.
• Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status - Shows the diesel exhaust fluid status.
• Diesel Particulate Filter Status - Shows the diesel particulate filter status.
• Dual Fuel Tanks - Shows the front and rear fuel tank gauges.
• Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature.
• Transmission Temperature - Shows the transmission temperature value.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
127
Towing
Towing % Grade, steering angle, gain and output display
Status
Towing Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Trailer Reverse Guidance Status, Trailer
Informa- BLIS Status and Trailer Disconnected
tion
Trailer Provides status of the brake, park and direction indicator light for the active
Light trailer.
Check
Trailer Tire Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings.
Pressure
Trailer Trailer Sway Control
Setup
Select trailer Select Your Trailer
Change Trailer Settings Rename Trailer Follow onscreen
directions to
Reset Trailer confirm or modify
Distance your settings.
Change Blind Spot
Measurement
Add Blind Spot
Change Reverse
Guidance Sticker
Add Trailer Reverse
Guidance™
Change Brake Type
Change Brake Effort
Delete Trailer
Change Trailer
Setup
Add Trailer Trailer Brake Type Select Your Setting
Trailer Brake Effort
Trailer Setup Follow onscreen
directions to
confirm or modify
your settings.
128
Towing
Connec- Conventional Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
tion Check- modify your settings.
list Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Off Road
Off Road Status
Displays pitch, steering angle, roll, Elocker and 4X4.
Settings
Auto Highbeam
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alert
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Pre-Collision Alert Sensit- Select Your Setting
ivity
Collision
Warning
Cruise Select Your Setting
Control
DTE Calcula-
tion
Gauge Selec-
tion
Lane Mode Select Your Setting
Keeping
System Sensitivity
Alert Intensity
129
Settings
Advanced Vehicle Auto Engine Off
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting Autolamp Delay Select Your
Setting
Daytime Lights
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Remote Unlock Select Your
Setting
Oil Life Reset Follow onscreen directions to confirm
or modify your settings.
Ask on Exit
Power Running Select Your Setting
Boards
Remote Start Climate Control Select Your
Setting
Front Seats & Wheel
Duration
System
Windows Remote Open
Remote Close
Wiper Controls Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing
MyKey MyKey Status Shows information related to the
configured MyKey(s)
Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm
Do Not Disturb
130
Settings
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Clear MyKeys Follow onscreen directions to confirm
Display Setup Units Select Your Setting
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E184451
Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
Message Action
Active Park Fault The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
131
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control

Malfunction from engaging. See Using Cruise Control (page 245).
Adaptive Cruise Not A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-
Available tion properly. See Using Cruise Control (page 245).
Adaptive Cruise Not You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
Available Sensor water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
Blocked See Manual sensor to resolve. See Using Cruise Control (page 245).
Normal Cruise Active The system has disabled the automatic braking.
Adaptive Braking Off
Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.
Resume Control
Adaptive Cruise Speed Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.
Too Low to Activate
Adaptive Cruise Shift The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
Down distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
Adaptive Steering
Message Action
Adaptive Steering Initial- The adaptive steering system has detected a difference
ization between steering wheel angle and the desired road wheel
angle. The steering wheel adjusts itself to correct this differ-
ence. This adjustment is part of normal system operation.
Adaptive Steering Fault The adaptive steering system is off. It is possible that the
Service Required steering wheel may not be straight when the vehicle is driving
straight ahead. If this message persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Adaptive Steering Loss The adaptive steering system integrity cannot be verified. Do
Do Not Drive not drive the vehicle and contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
132
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
Message Action
Service AdvanceTrac The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AdvanceTrac Off The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac On The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac SPORT The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
MODE it on.
Traction Control Off The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 231).
Traction Control On The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 231).
Airbag
Message Action
Occupant Sensor Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

BLOCKED Remove blocked sensor.
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm and Security
Message Action
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm, Start Vehicle. Alarm (page 78).
133
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message Action
Engine Shuts Off In The engine is getting ready to shut off.

{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
Engine Shut Off For Fuel The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.
Economy
Engine Shuts Off in The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
{seconds to shut off:#0} the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
Battery and Charging System
Message Action
Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Low Battery Features The battery management system detects an extended low-
Temporarily Turned Off voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.
Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery
Battery is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
134
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message Action
Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot Not Available The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
Sensor Blocked See tion System (page 254).
Manual
Vehicle Coming From X The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 254).
Cross Traffic Not Avail- The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
able Sensor Blocked See system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
Manual System (page 254).
Cross Traffic System A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Fault dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Alert Deac- The system automatically turns off and displays this message
tivated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 254).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv- The system automatically turns off and displays this message
ated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 254).
Trailer Blind Spot Not Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or goose-
available Due to Invalid neck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or
Trailer longer than 33 ft (10 m).
135
Collision Warning System
Message Action
Collision Warning A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Malfunction dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
Available Sensor water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
Blocked See Manual sensor to resolve. See Driving Aids (page 252).
Collision Warning Not A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Available dealer as soon as possible.
Diesel Messages
WARNING
When the Exhaust Filter Cleaning
message appears in the information
display, do not park near flammable
materials, vapors or structures until filter
cleaning is complete.
Message Action
Exhaust Filter Cleaning Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine
actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel
Particulate Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust
soot). After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust
temperature will return to normal levels. This message is
NORMAL.
Exhaust Filter Over- The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
loaded Drive to Clean and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
Exhaust Filter Over- until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off.
loaded Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
Clean Now and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
Exhaust Filter at Limit until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off.
Drive to Clean Now
136
Message Action
Exhaust System Over- Your vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeded the
heated Stop Safely intended operating range. If this warning occurs, a tone
NOW sounds, followed by reduced engine power. The engine shuts
down when your vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h) . Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Warming Please In extremely cold weather, typically below -15°F (-26°C) and
Wait {seconds:00} sec if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will not
respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds. This
restriction allows your engine to circulate the oil properly in
order to avoid engine damage.
Exhaust Filter Drive Your diesel particulate filter is clean.
Complete
Exhaust Filter Cleaned Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only).
Exhaust Filter Cleaning The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only).
Stopped
DEF Level Range: XX mi/ The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining
km Refill Now diesel exhaust fluid.
DEF Level Empty Speed Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top
Limited to XX MPH / km/ speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must
h in XX mi/km replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 200).
DEF Level Empty Speed Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Your speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/ will be limited upon restart. You must replenish the diesel
h Upon Restart exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 200).
DEF Level Empty Speed The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the
Limited to XX MPH/km/ diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
h vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page
200).
DEF Level Empty Engine The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust
Idled Soon fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode.
You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal
operation of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic
Reductant System (page 200).
137
Message Action
DEF Level Empty Engine A problem exists with the selective catalytic reduction system.
Idled See Manual The vehicle will enter into an idle-only mode. If the exhaust
fluid is empty, you must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to
resume normal operation of your vehicle. See Selective
Catalytic Reductant System (page 200).
DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
to XX MPH/km/h in XX vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed
mi/km distance and count down from this point. Have the system
to XX MPH/km/h Upon vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Have
Restart the system checked by an authorized dealer.
to XX MPH/km/h vehicle’s top speed is limited. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Exhaust Filter Over Limit You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Service Now Ignoring the Exhaust Filter Over Limit Service Now warning
message could lead to reduced drivability and customer
expense, including damage to the diesel particulate filter.
Your new vehicle warranty may not cover this damage.
Water in Fuel Drain Filter The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity
and needs draining. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap (page 352).
Fuel Pressure Low A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low
fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed. See Fuel Quality
(page 189).
Doors and Locks
Message Action
X Door Ajar The door(s) listed is not completely closed.
138
Driver Alert
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Take a rest soon.
Suggested
Drivetrain
Message Action
To Engage Locking The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed

Differential Slow to XX requirement to engage.
mph/km/h
To Engage Locking The electronic locking differential requests the accelerator
Differential Release to be released in order to engage.
Accelerator Pedal
Check Locking Differen- An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is
tial present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Neutral Tow Enabled The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
Leave Transmission in indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four
Neutral wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
Engine
Message Action
Power Reduced to Lower Engine The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
Temp engine temperature.
139
Fuel
Message Action
Fuel Level Low An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Keys and Intelligent Access
Message Action
To START Press Brake A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.
No Key Detected The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 178).
Restart Now or Key is You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
Needed and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
Full Accessory Power Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.
Active
Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Max Number of Keys You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
Learned system.
Not Enough Keys You have not programmed enough keys to the system.
Learned
Engine ON Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.
140
Lane Keeping System
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
Malfunction Service as soon as possible.
Required
Front Camera Tempor- The system has detected a condition that has caused the
arily Not Available system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires you to
ility Clean Screen clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
tion Service Required as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
Wheel wheel.
Maintenance
Message Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
Change Engine Oil Soon The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Changing
the Engine Oil and Oil Filter (page 336).
Oil Change Required The oil life left is at 0%. See Changing the Engine Oil and
Oil Filter (page 336).
Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system
immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 350).
Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
Mode Contact Dealer not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
See Manual The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.
141
MyKey
Message Action
MyKey not Created You did not program a MyKey.

MyKey Active Drive MyKey is active.
Safely
Speed Limited to XX When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
MPH/km/h that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top Speed of You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.
MyKey Setting
Check Speed Drive You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.
Safely
Buckle Up to Unmute Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.
Audio
AdvanceTrac On - With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.
MyKey Setting
Traction Control On - With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.
MyKey Setting
MyKey Park Aid Cannot With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.
be Deactivated
Lane Keeping Alert On With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.
MyKey Setting
Off Road
Message Action
Hill Descent Control Active Hill descent control mode is active.

Hill Descent Control OFF Hill descent control mode is inactive.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
XX MPH/km/h or Less entry has not been met.
For Hill Descent Select Gear You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
142
Message Action
Hill Descent Driver Resume Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
Control resume control.
Hill Descent Control Fault A hill descent system fault is present.
Hill Descent Control Off System The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.
Cooling
Hill Descent Control Ready The hill descent control system is ready.
Park Aid
Message Action
Check Front Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
237).
Check Rear Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
237).
Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Park Brake
Message Action
To Release: Press Brake The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
and Switch attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
Park Brake Use Switch The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
to Release attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Release Park Brake The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Park Brake Not Applied The electric park brake is not fully applied.
Park Brake Not Released The electric park brake is not fully released.
143
Message Action
Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special
Mode mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
Park Brake Limited The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Function Service requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Required Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Power Steering
Message Action
Steering Fault Service The power steering system has detected a condition that
Now requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
Safely in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault The power steering system has detected a condition within
Service Required the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc- The steering lock system has detected a condition that
tion Service Now requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Remote Start
Message Action
To Drive: Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
and Gear Shift Button to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
Seats
Message Action
Memory Recall Not A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.
Permitted While Driving
Memory {0} Saved Shows where you have saved your memory setting.
144
Starting System
Message Action
To START Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .
Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Engine Start Pending The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.
Please Wait
Pending Start Cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 400).
Tire Pressure Monitor The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
Fault warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 400).
Tire Pressure Sensor A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
Fault use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 400). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trailer
Message Action
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain The current gain setting for the trailer brake.
value:#0.0}
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a
value:#0.0} No Trailer trailer is not connected.
Trailer Brake Module Fault Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 273).
Trailer Connected A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.
145
Message Action
Trailer Disconnected A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either

intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.
Trailer Wiring Fault There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 273).
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
Check Lamps lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
Check Lamps lamp.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
Manual a Trailer (page 273).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Manual See Towing a Trailer (page 273).
Trailer Tire Low Specified: One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified
tire pressure.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the
Fault warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is
Fault malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure
Capability Not Detected monitoring system.
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
Not Setup See Manual See General Information (page 114).
146
4WD
Message Action
Check 4x4 A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized

4x4 Shift in Progress The 4X4 system is making a shift.
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N When your vehicle is at a stop and you need to shift
into Neutral before you select 4X4 LOW.
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH When your vehicle is moving and you need to reduce
your speed to select 4X4 LOW.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N You select 2WD while your vehicle is at a stop in 4X4
LOW and you need to shift into Neutral.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH You select 2WD while your vehicle is operating in 4X4
LOW and you need to reduce your speed.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward May display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled The 4X4 system is temporarily disabled, and the overall
powertrain output response is reduced. The 4X4
system and powertrain response will be automatically
restored after the 4X4 system has had the opportunity
to cool down.
4x4 Restored The 4X4 system has been restored to its original
setting.
4x4 Temporarily Locked The 4X4 system is temporarily locked for added drive-
line protection and has automatically switched to 4H
setting.
147
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E217902
A Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
B Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
C Air distribution control: Press to switch air flow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
Note: At least one of these buttons remain on while the system is on.
D Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air
flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may
also turn on and off in Panel or Panel/Floor air flow modes during hot weather
in order to improve cooling efficiency.
E Temperature control: Adjusts the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
148
Climate Control
F MAX Defrost: Turn to the right to switch on defrost. Air flows through the
windshield vents and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated
rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
G MAX A/C: Turn to the left for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning turns on and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed.
H A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated
air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air
conditioning.
I Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
(page 164).
J Heated exterior mirrors: Press to switch the heated exterior mirrors on and
off.
149
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E217905
A AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired

temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside
or recirculated air adjust to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired
temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding
for more than two seconds.
B MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. The driver and passenger settings
set to HI, air flows through the windshield vents, and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield
of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
C Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
D Air distribution control: Press to switch air flow from the windshield,
instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
150
Climate Control
E Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air
flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may
also turn on and off in Panel or Panel/Floor air flow modes during hot weather
in order to improve cooling efficiency.
F MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. The driver and passenger settings set
to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest speed.
G DUAL: Press to switch on temperature control for the passenger side of the
vehicle. When dual zone is off, passenger temperature settings remain the same
as the driver settings.
H Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting on the
passenger side.
I A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air
conditioning.
J Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
(page 164).
K Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on
and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 165).
L Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
M Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Rear Window (page 154).
N Driver temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting on the driver
side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air

from the footwell air vents regardless of the
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE air distribution setting.
INTERIOR CLIMATE Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
General Hints switched off or with recirculated air always
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may switched on.
cause the windows to fog up.
151
Climate Control
Note: Do not place objects under the front Automatic Climate Control
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats. Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from not necessary. The system automatically
the air intake area at the base of the adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
windshield. selected temperature as quickly as possible.
Note: To improve the time to reach a For the system to function efficiently, the
comfortable temperature in hot weather, instrument panel and side air vents should
drive with the windows open until you feel be fully open.
cold air through the air vents. Note: If you select AUTO during cold
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
Manual Climate Control the windshield and side window vents. In
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
during humid weather, adjust the air until the engine warms up.
distribution control to the windshield air Note: If you select AUTO during hot
vents position. temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control Automatic climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest Press AUTO.

setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting. desired setting.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
152
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press AUTO.

setting.
midway point of the hot settings. desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1 Select MAX A/C. Select MAX A/C.

2 Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press AUTO.

setting.
midway point of the cold settings. desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
necessary.
3 Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.
153
Climate Control
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
1 Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button.
2 Press A/C. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
necessary.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
HEATED REAR WINDOW (If CABIN AIR FILTER

Equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
Press the button to clear the rear the following benefits:
window of thin ice and fog. The • It improves your driving comfort by
E184884
heated rear window turns off reducing particle concentration.
after a short period of time.
• It improves the interior compartment
Note: Make sure the engine is on before cleanliness.
operating the heated windows. • It protects the climate control
Note: Do not use razor blades or other components from particle deposits.
sharp objects to clean or remove decals You can locate the cabin air filter behind
from the inside of the heated rear window. the glove box.
The vehicle Warranty may not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
grid lines. installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS result in degradation or damage to the
system.
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 581).
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass For additional cabin air filter information,
when it is frozen in place. or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
154
Climate Control
REMOTE START (If Equipped)

You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display.
The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments.
You need to switch on certain
vehicle-dependent features, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not
turn on.
In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display). The heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.
155
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or • Do not recline the seatback more than
with the seatback reclined too far 30 degrees.
can take weight off the seat cushion • Adjust the head restraint so that the
and affect the decision of the passenger top of it is level with the top of your
sensing system, resulting in serious injury head and as far forward as possible.
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit Make sure that you remain
upright against your seat back, with your comfortable.
feet on the floor. • Keep sufficient distance between
Do not recline the seatback as this yourself and the steering wheel. We
can cause the occupant to slide recommend a minimum of 10 in
under the safety belt, resulting in (25 cm) between your breastbone and
serious injury in the event of a crash. the airbag cover.
Do not place objects higher than the • Hold the steering wheel with your arms
seatback to reduce the risk of serious slightly bent.
injury in the event of a crash or during • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
heavy braking. press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
E68595
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
When you use them properly, the seat, the head restraint when your vehicle is
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will moving.
provide optimum protection in the event The head restraint is a safety device.
of a crash. Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. An improperly
adjusted head restraint may not
adequately protect an occupant during an
impact from the rear.
156
Seats
WARNINGS The head restraints may consist of:

Install the head restraint properly to A An energy absorbing head
help minimize the risk of neck injury restraint.
in the event of a crash.
B Two steel stems.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright C Guide sleeve adjust and release
driving position before adjusting the head button.
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
the top of it is level with the top of your head button.
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are E Fold button.
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position. Adjusting the Head Restraint
Front Seat Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold buttons C and D.
2. Pull the head restraint up.
E138642
Installing the Head Restraint
Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
A and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint

B Note: The rear seat outboard head
E
restraints may fold forward for improved
C visibility.
1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
D
E166700 Front Row Center and Rear Seat Center
(Crew Cab) Head Restraints
Note: The SuperCab has rear outboard
head restraints that are not removable and
are bolted to the back wall.
157
Seats
Your vehicle may be equipped with head

restraints that are non-adjustable. The
non-adjustable head restraints consist of:
A B
E162872 E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright

A An energy absorbing head
driving or riding position.
restraint.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
B Two steel stems. your head to the desired position.
C Guide sleeve unlock and remove After the head restraint reaches the
button. forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
Removing the Head Restraint position.
1. Press and hold buttons C. Note: Do not attempt to force the head
2. Pull up the head restraint. restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
Installing the Head Restraint restraint releases to the upright position.
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves

and push the head restraint down until it MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
locks.
WARNING
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
Do not adjust the driver's seat or
The front head restraints tilt for extra seatback when your vehicle is
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the moving.
following:
158
Seats
Moving the Seat Backward and Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)

Forward
E166702
E175314
The lumbar support control is located on
Recline Adjustment the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or seat
backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden
seat movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
E175315 behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
159
Seats
E176038
Note: The engine must be running or the

Power Lumbar (If Equipped) vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. When the seatback and cushion
are both active, the massage will alternate
between zones
E176039
Multi-Contour Front Seats With

Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system turns off after E156301
20 minutes.
160
Seats
Massage mode Lumbar and bolster mode
A Back massage intensity Upper lumbar

adjustment
B Massage intensity decrease Lumbar decrease
*
and off
C Cushion massage intensity Lower lumbar
**
adjustment
D Massage intensity increase Lumbar increase
E On and off -
*
The massage feature defaults to an
alternating massage mode with back MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature defaults to the middle WARNINGS
lumbar mode. Before activating the memory seat,
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back make sure that the area immediately
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the surrounding the seat is clear of
cushion bolster. obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the Do not use the memory function
system displays directions for you to adjust when your vehicle is moving.
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function. To access and make This feature automatically recalls the
adjustments to the lumbar setting: position of the following:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle • Driver seat.
> Multi-contour Seat.
• Power mirrors.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
• Optional adjustable pedals.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity. The memory control is on the driver door.
To access and make adjustments to the

massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Low or High.
161
Seats
Note: Pressing any active memory feature

control - power seat, mirror (or any memory
button) during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your

Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
E142554
positions to the positions you desire.
Saving a Preset Position 2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
1. Switch the ignition on. sounds after about two seconds.
2. Adjust the features to the positions you Continue holding until you hear a
desire. second tone.
3. Press and hold the preset button until 3. Within three seconds, press the lock
you hear a single tone. button on the remote control you are
linking.
Note: You can save up to three preset
memory positions. To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
Note: You can save a memory preset at any the unlock button on the remote control.
time.
Note: If more than one linked remote
Recalling a Preset Position control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
1. Switch the ignition on. of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
2. Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If
position. The seat and mirrors move to Equipped)
the position stored for that preset.
If you enable the easy entry and exit
Note: You can only recall preset memory feature, it automatically moves the driver
positions when you switch the ignition off, seat rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you
or when the transmission is in park (P) or put the transmission in park (P) and
neutral (N) if you switch the ignition on. remove the key from the ignition.
Note: You can also recall a preset memory The driver seat returns to the previous
position by pressing the unlock button on position when you put the key in the
your remote control if it is linked to a preset ignition.
position.
You can enable or disable this feature
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your through the information display. See
memory position when the ignition is off Information Displays (page 114).
moves the seat to the easy entry position.
162
Seats
REAR SEATS (If Equipped) Returning the Seat to the Seating

Position
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion WARNING
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Check under the seat cushion to
You can flip each seat cushion up into a make sure no cargo or objects are
vertical storage position. under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.
E181250
Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks

into the vertical storage position.
Cushion Lock (If Equipped)

The locking key is in the keyfob. See
Remote Control (page 56). E166704
Pull the control on the bottom of the seat

cushion to release it from the storage
position.
Rear Under Seat Storage (If Equipped)

The rear seat has storage space under the
seat cushion.
E224956
Turn the key to lock or unlock.
163
Seats
Use your vehicle key to lock the storage

space.
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
E162739
A exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
Lift the lever and flip up the seat cushion seat. The heated seat may cause burns
to access the storage space and the power even at low temperatures, especially if
point (A). used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat.
E162740 • Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
To remove the storage space divider, seat to dry thoroughly.
squeeze the sides and lift it from the
storage tub. Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle

E162741 through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
164
Seats
Note: The heated seats may remain on

after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)

E146322
WARNING
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
People who are unable to feel pain
through the various heat settings and off.
to their skin because of advanced
More indicator lights indicate warmer
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
settings.
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions, The heated seat module resets at every
must exercise care when using the heated ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in
seat. The heated seat may cause burns the on position, press the heated seat
even at low temperatures, especially if switch to enable heating mode. When
used for long periods of time. Do not place activated, they turn off automatically when
anything on the seat that insulates against you switch off the engine.
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
or other pointed objects. This may damage (If Equipped)
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated Heated Seats
seat may cause serious personal injury.
WARNING
Do not do the following: People who are unable to feel pain
• Place heavy objects on the seat. to their skin because of advanced
• Operate the heated seat if water or any age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
seat to dry thoroughly. exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must use caution when using the heated
Note: The engine must be running to use seat. The heated seat may cause burns
this feature. even at low temperatures, especially if
The rear seat heat controls are on the rear used for long periods of time. Do not place
of the center console. anything on the seat that may block the
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This can
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles or
other pointed objects. This damages the
heating element and can cause the heated
seat to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
165
Seats
Do not do the following: Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle

• Place heavy objects on the seat. through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler
• Operate the heated seat if water or any settings.
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly. Note: The cooled seats may remain on after
you remote start your vehicle, based on your
Note: The engine must be running to use remote start settings. The heated seats may
this feature. also turn on when you start your vehicle if
they were on when you switched your
vehicle off.
Note: After 60 minutes of operation, the
cooled seats switch off. Press the cooled
seat symbol to switch the cooled seats on.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter

Replacement
E146322
Your vehicle has lifetime air filters that are
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle integrated with the seats. Regular
through the various heat settings and off. maintenance or replacement is not
More indicator lights indicate warmer required.
settings.
Note: The heated seats may remain on FRONT SEAT ARMREST (If
after you remote start your vehicle, based
Equipped)
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
Note: After 60 minutes of operation, the
heated seats switch off. Press the heated
seat symbol to switch the heated seats on.
Cooled Seats
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
E223578
1. Press the control to release the cushion

latch.
E146309 2. Lift the cushion to gain access to the
storage compartment.
166
Seats
The cupholder is located inside the storage Pull the strap located on the center
compartment. You can also flip the seatback to access the armrest and
cupholder so that it faces forward. See cupholders.
Center Console (page 174). The cupholders are located inside the rear
Cushion Lock seat armrest.
To open the cupholders:
The locking key is in the keyfob. Remove
the cover of the keyfob to access the 1. Push in gently on the center of the
locking key. See Remote Control (page plastic panel at the front edge of the
56). armrest. The cupholders will partially
open.
2. Pull the cupholder fully open before
using.
E224738
Turn the key to lock or unlock.
REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
E181222
167
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control

System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse E188211
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door The universal garage door opener replaces
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). the common hand-held garage door
A garage door opener which cannot detect opener with a three-button transmitter
an object, signaling the door to stop and integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
reverse, does not meet current federal The system includes two primary features,
safety standards. Using a garage door a garage door opener and a platform for
opener without these features increases remote activation of devices within the
the risk of serious injury or death. home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
Note: Make sure you keep the original systems, entry door locks and home or
remote control transmitter for use in other office lighting.
vehicles as well as for future system Additional system information can be
programming. found online at www.homelink.com,
Note: We recommend that upon the sale www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or lease termination of your vehicle, you or by calling the toll-free help line at
erase the programmed function buttons for 1-800-355-3515.
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section. In-Vehicle Programming
Note: You can program a maximum of This process is to program your in-vehicle
three devices. To change or replace any of HomeLink function button with your
the three devices after it has been initially hand-held transmitter.
programmed, you must first erase the Note: The programming steps below
current settings. See Erasing the Function assume you will be programming HomeLink
Button Codes. that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
168
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press

and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
E188212 For questions or comments, please contact
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
garage, switch your ignition to the on www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
position, but do not start your vehicle. or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program. Programming Your Garage Door
3. Hold your hand-held garage door Opener Motor
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
the HomeLink button you want to unit and you may need to remove the cover
program. or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have E142659
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator 1. Press the learn button on the garage
/ Canadian Programming. door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button steps.
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice 2. Return to your vehicle.
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
169
E188212 E188213
3. Press and hold the function button you 1. Press and hold the outer two function
want to program for 2 seconds, then buttons simultaneously for
release. Repeat this step. Depending approximately 10 seconds until the
on your brand of garage door opener, indicator light above the buttons
you may need to repeat this sequence flashes rapidly.
a third time. 2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
Gate Operator / Canadian
codes for all buttons.
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require Reprogramming a Single Button
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) To program a device to a previously trained
after several seconds of transmission – button, follow these steps:
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, NOT release the button.
some U.S. gate operators are designed to 2. The indicator light begins to flash after
“time-out” in the same manner. 20 seconds. Without releasing the
Note: If programming a garage door opener button, follow Step 1 in the
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the Programming section.
device during the “cycling” process to For questions or comments, contact
prevent possible overheating. HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
1. Press and release, every two seconds, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
your hand-held transmitter until the or by calling the toll-free help line at
HomeLink indicator light changes to a 1-800-355-3515.
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
170
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada

Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
171
Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point Locations

WARNING Note: Timed power points remain on for 30
minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode.
Do not plug optional electrical If you switch the vehicle off, the timed
accessories into the cigar lighter power points remain on for 75 minutes.
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by Power points may be in the following
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire locations:
or serious injury. • On the instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you • On the rear of the center console.
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating • In the seat bin.
of 20 amps.
110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC
Note: Do not plug in any device that Power Outlet
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points, this may result in damage to WARNING
vehicle systems.
Do not keep electrical devices
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the plugged in the power point whenever
accessory plug. the device is not in use. Do not use
Note: Do not use the power point over the any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 240 watts or power point, since it will defeat the safety
a fuse may blow. protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
Note: Always keep the power point caps multiple devices that can reach beyond
closed when not in use. the 400 watt load limit and could result in
Do not insert objects other than an fire or serious injury.
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow Note: This feature works only when the
the fuse. vehicle is running.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the Note: This feature has a maximum output
power point. of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P).
To prevent the battery from running out of Note: While in drive (D), the maximum
charge: outlet output is 300 watts.
• Do not use the power point longer than Note: When powering electric devices that
necessary when the vehicle is not require more than 10 watts in vehicles
running. equipped with keyless start, the vehicle
• Do not leave devices plugged in must remain running. It does not allow you
overnight or when you park your vehicle to switch the ignition off or switch the
for extended periods. ignition to accessory mode.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 400 watts. It is
on the instrument panel and rear of the
center console.
172
Auxiliary Power Points
Do not use the power point for certain

electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
E191617
extremely stable power supply such as
When the indicator light on the power point microcomputer-controlled electric
is: blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
You can use the 400 watt power outlet for
these types of electric devices:
• Electric hand drills.
• Rechargeable power tools.
• Video games.
• Laptops.
• Televisions.
173
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped) OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)

Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E224959
Press near the rear edge of the door to

open it.
UNDER SEAT STORAGE

Rear Under Seat Storage
E250516
A Storage compartment.
B Front storage compartment with
USB ports.
C Sliding cup holder.
D Center storage compartment
with auxiliary power point.
E Rear cup holders.
F AC power point.
G Heated rear seats.
H Auxiliary power point.
E229819
I USB charging ports.
1. Lift rear seat to access under seat
storage bin.
174
E235007 E235008
2. Lift front and side panels to expand 3. Lock the panels in an open position.
and lock them in place.
E235009
175
4. To collapse, lift lever and fold in the

side and front panels.
Note: Make sure the storage divider is not
locked into place when collapsing.
176
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow

storm or blowing snow conditions, the
engine air induction may become partially
WARNINGS
clogged with snow and ice. If this occurs,
Extended idling at high engine the engine may experience a significant
speeds can produce very high reduction in power output. At the earliest
temperatures in the engine and opportunity, clear all the snow and ice
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or away from the air induction inlet.
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle

may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5.0 mi E252522
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is

A (off) - The ignition is off.
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can Note: When you switch the ignition off and
disregard any unusual driving leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
characteristics during this period. the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
standard requirements regulating the accessories, such as the radio, to operate
impulse electrical field or radio noise. while the engine is not running.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
the accelerator pedal before and during position for too long. This could cause your
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal vehicle battery to lose charge.
when you have difficulty starting the C (on) - All electrical circuits are
engine. operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
177
D (start) - Cranks the engine. • Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
KEYLESS STARTING when the ignition is on and when your
vehicle starts.
Note: The system may not function if the
intelligent access key is close to metal
objects or electronic devices, for example STARTING A GASOLINE
keys or a cell phone. ENGINE - 6.2L/6.8L
Note: A valid intelligent access key must
be located inside your vehicle to switch the When you start the engine, the idle speed
ignition on and start your vehicle. increases. This helps to warm up the
engine.
Ignition Modes If the engine idle speed does not slow
down automatically, have your vehicle
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Move the transmission selector lever
E144447 to position P.
The keyless starting system has three • Turn the ignition key to the on position.
modes: Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Off: Turns the ignition off. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
• Without applying the brake pedal, 2. Turn the key to the start position to
press and release the button once start your vehicle.
when the ignition is in the on mode, or 3. When the engine starts, release the key
when your vehicle is running but is not and then gradually release the brake
moving. pedal as the engine speed increases.
On: All electrical circuits are operational Note: The engine may continue cranking
and the warning lamps and indicators for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
illuminate.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
• Without applying the brake pedal, first try, wait for a short period and try again.
press and release the button once.
Start: Starts your vehicle. The engine may Vehicles with an Ignition Key
not start when your vehicle starts. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
178
2. Turn the key to position D to start the Stopping the Engine When Your
engine. Vehicle is Moving
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal. WARNING
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 Switching off the engine when your
seconds as starter damage may occur. If vehicle is still moving results in a
the engine does not start, switch the significant decrease in braking
ignition off and wait 30 seconds before assistance. Higher effort is required to
trying again. apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle.
A significant decrease in steering
Vehicles with Keyless Start assistance could also occur. The steering
does not lock, but higher effort could be
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. required to steer your vehicle. When you
Note: If the push button ignition switch is switch the ignition off, some electrical
pressed again prior to the engine starting circuits, for example airbags, also turn off.
the ignition will switch to accessory mode If you unintentionally switch the ignition
and will not start. off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the
engine.
Note: If the brake pedal is released before
the engine has started, follow the engine
1. Put the transmission into neutral (N)
start sequence again.
and use the brakes to bring your vehicle
1. Fully depress the brake pedal. to a safe stop.
2. Press the center of the push button 2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
ignition switch. into park (P) and switch the ignition
3. When the engine starts, release the off.
brake pedal. 3. Apply the parking brake.
Failure to Start Automatic Engine Shutdown

If you cannot start the engine after three If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this ignition, it has a feature that automatically
procedure: shuts down the engine if it has been idling
1. Fully depress the brake pedal. for an extended period of time. The ignition
also turns off in order to save battery
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and power. Before the engine shuts down, a
hold it there. message appears in the information
3. Start the engine. display showing a timer counting down
from 30 seconds. If you do not intervene
Stopping the Engine When Your within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down.
Vehicle is Stationary Another message appears in the
information display to inform you that the
1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift engine has shut down in order to save fuel.
into park (P) and switch the ignition Start your vehicle as you normally do.
off.
2. Apply the parking brake.
179
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

Fuel Vehicles Only)
WARNING
The starting characteristics of all grades
of E85 ethanol make it unsuitable for use Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
when ambient temperatures fall below harmful and potentially lethal fumes
0°F (-18°C). Consult your fuel distributor into the passenger compartment. If
for the availability of winter grade ethanol. you smell exhaust fumes inside your
As the outside temperature approaches vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should immediately. Do not drive if you smell
supply winter grade ethanol, the same as exhaust fumes.
with unleaded gasoline.
If summer grade ethanol is used in cold Important Ventilating Information
weather conditions, 0°F (-18°C), you may If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
experience increased cranking times, rough engine idling for long periods of time, we
idle or hesitation until the engine has recommend that you do one of the
warmed up. following:
You may experience a decrease in • Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5
performance when the engine is cold when centimeters).
operating on E85 ethanol.
• Set your climate control to outside air.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in
the air intake system. Such fluid could
cause immediate explosive damage to the STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE -
engine and possible personal injury. 6.7L DIESEL
If you should experience cold weather
starting problems on E85 ethanol, and Read all starting instructions carefully
neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol before you start your vehicle.
nor an engine block heater is available, the For temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the
addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank use of the correct grade engine oil is
improves cold starting performance. Your essential for proper operation. Refer to
vehicle is designed to operate on E85 engine oil specifications for more
ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or information. See Capacities and
any mixture of the two. Specifications (page 433).
If the Engine Fails to Start Using the Your vehicle may have a cold weather
Preceding Instructions (Flexible Fuel starting strategy that prevents severe
Vehicles Only) engine damage by assisting in engine
lubrication warm-up. In extremely cold
1. Press the accelerator pedal down ambient temperatures, this strategy
one-third to one-half of its travel, and activates and prevents the accelerator
then crank the engine. pedal from being used for 30 seconds after
2. When the engine starts, release the you start your vehicle. A message appears
key, then gradually release the in the information display as your vehicle
accelerator pedal as the engine speed warms up. By not allowing the accelerator
increases. If the engine still does not pedal to be used, the engine oil is allowed
start, repeat Step 1. to properly lubricate the bearings
180
preventing engine damage due to lack of Vehicles with Keyless Start

proper lubrication. After the 30 second
warm-up period, the accelerator pedal will Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
be operational again and a message Note: If the push button ignition switch is
appears informing you the vehicle is ok to pressed again prior to the engine starting
drive. the ignition will switch to accessory mode
When you start the engine in extremely and will not start.
cold temperatures -15°F (-26°C), we Note: If the brake pedal is released before
recommend that you allow the engine to the engine has started, follow the engine
idle for several minutes before you drive start sequence again.
the vehicle.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
Before starting the engine check the
following: 2. Press the center of the push button
ignition switch.
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts. Note: A message will appear Engine Start
Pending, Please Wait.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off. 3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug
(P). System
Note: Do not press the accelerator during The diesel engine glow system consists of:
starting.
• Eight glow plugs (one per cylinder)
Vehicles with an Ignition Key • Glow Plug Control Module
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. • Engine Coolant Temperature sensor
1. Fully depress the brake pedal. • Barometric pressure sensor
2. Turn the key to position C • Environmental temperature sensor
Note: A message will appear Engine Start The powertrain and glow plug control
Pending, Please Wait. modules electronically control the glow
plug system. After you switch the ignition
3. Wait until the engine glow-plug on, the glow plug control module
indicator turns off. immediately energizes the glow plugs. The
4. Turn the key to position D to start the glow plug control module uses the engine
engine. coolant temperature, barometric pressure
sensor and environmental temperature
5. When the engine starts, release the
sensor to determine how long the glow
brake pedal.
plugs stay energized. The required time for
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 the glow plugs to be energized decreases
seconds as starter damage may occur. If as the coolant temperature, barometric
the engine does not start, switch the pressure and environmental temperature
ignition off and wait 30 seconds before increase.
trying again.
181
Automatic Engine Shutdown When the glow plug pre-heat indicator

turns off, turn the key to start. After you
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless start the engine, the glow plugs may
ignition, it has a feature that automatically remain on for a period. If you do not start
shuts down the engine if it has been idling the engine before the glow plug activation
for an extended period. The ignition also time ends, you will need to reset the glow
turns off in order to save battery power. plugs by switching the ignition off. After
Before the engine shuts down, a message the engine starts, allow it to idle for about
appears in the information display showing 15 seconds. This protects the engine. Do
a timer counting down from 30 seconds. not increase engine speed until the oil
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, pressure gauge indicates normal pressure.
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut down Cold Weather Operation
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat
you normally do. the engine to its normal operating
temperature. Long periods of idling,
Cold Weather Starting especially in cold weather, can cause a
buildup of deposits which can cause engine
WARNINGS
damage.
Do not use starting fluid, for example
ether, in the air intake system. Such Change to a lighter grade engine oil to
fluid could cause immediate make starting easier under these
explosive damage to the engine and conditions. Refer to engine oil
possible personal injury. specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 433).
Do not add gasoline, gasohol, alcohol
or kerosene to diesel fuel. This Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
creates a serious fire hazard and temperatures. Diesel fuel which has not
causes engine performance problems. been properly formulated for the ambient
conditions may gel which can clog the fuel
filters. One indication that the fuel filter(s)
We recommend that the engine block may be clogged is if the engine starts, stalls
heater be used for starting when the after a short time, and then does not
temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See restart. If you have been using biodiesel,
Engine Block Heater (page 185). you may need to use a fuel with lower
When operating in cold weather, you may biodiesel content, try another brand, or
use Motorcraft® cetane improvers or discontinue using biodiesel. Do not use
non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from alcohol based additives to correct fuel
a reputable manufacturer as needed. gelling. This may result in damage to the
fuel injectors and system. Use the proper
Switch the ignition on. Do not
anti-gel and performance improvement
start the engine until the
product. See Capacities and
glow-plug indicator turns off.
182
Your vehicle has a fuel and water separator WARNING

that recirculates fuel from the engine to
help prevent fuel filter clogging. To avoid To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
engine fuel starvation during cold weather and personal burn injuries, do not
operation of 32°F (0°C) or below, we start your engine with the air cleaner
recommend that the fuel level in your tank removed and do not remove it while the
should not drop below ¼ full. This helps engine is running.
prevent air from entering the fuel system
and stalling the engine. In order to operate the engine in
temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or lower, read
Your vehicle has a selective catalytic
the following instructions:
reduction system that uses Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) to operate properly. You need • Make sure that the batteries are of
to replenish your vehicle’s DEF at certain sufficient size and are fully charged.
intervals. When filling your vehicle’s DEF Check other electrical components to
tank in cold weather, take special care to make sure they are in optimum
prevent damage to the tank. See condition.
Selective Catalytic Reductant System • Use the proper coolant solution at the
(page 200). concentration recommended
In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the protecting the engine against damage
engine may slowly increase to a higher idle from freezing.
speed if you leave it idling in park (P). As • Try to keep the fuel tank full as much
the engine warms-up, the engine sound as possible at the end of operation to
level decreases due to the activation of prevent condensation in the fuel
PCM-controlled sound reduction features. system.
If you operate your vehicle in a heavy • Make sure you use proper cold weather
snowstorm or blowing snow conditions, engine oil and that it is at its proper
snow and ice can clog the engine air level. Also, if necessary, make sure to
induction. If this occurs, the engine may follow the engine oil and filter change
experience a significant reduction in power schedule found under the Special
output. At the earliest opportunity, clear operating conditions section listed in
all the snow and ice away from inside the the scheduled maintenance
air filter assembly. Remove the air cleaner information.
cover and the air filter and remove any • At temperatures of -9°F (-23°C) or
snow or ice. Remove any debris, snow or below, it is recommended that you use
ice, on the foam filter by brushing the an engine block heater to improve cold
surface with a soft brush. Once you have engine starting.
cleared all of the debris, reinstall the air
filter and cover. • If operating in arctic temperatures of
-20°F (-29°C) or lower, consult your
Do not use water, solvents, or a hard brush truck dealer for information about
for cleaning the foam filter. special cold weather equipment and
precautions.
183
We recommend the following cold Idle Control

weather idling guidelines:
Your vehicle may have a factory option for
• You can use Motorcraft® cetane a stationary elevated idle control through
improvers or non-alcohol-based the upfitter switches in the overhead
cetane improvers from a reputable console. This allows the operator to
manufacturer as needed. elevate the idle RPM for extended idle
• Maintain the engine cooling system periods, as well as aftermarket equipment
properly. such as PTO operation. You must configure
• Avoid shutting the engine down after this feature even if ordered from the
an extensive idling period. Drive your factory. See your authorized dealer for
vehicle for several miles with the required upfitting.
engine at normal operating Operation in Snow and Rain
temperatures under a moderate load.
• Consider using an engine block heater. Vehicle operation in heavy snowfall or
extreme rain conditions may feed
• For extended idle times use an excessive amounts of snow or water into
approved idle speed increase device. the air intake system. This could plug the
air filter with snow and may cause the
Winter Operating Tips for Arctic
engine to lose power and possibly shut
Operation -20°F (-29°C) and Below
down.
The following information is a guideline We recommend the following actions after
only and is not to be the only source of operating your vehicle up to 200 mi
possible solutions in resolving extreme (320 km) in snowfall or extreme rain:
cold temperature issues.
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
Starting Aids the hood and clear all the snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet (do not
WARNING remove the foam filter) and reset the
Do not use starting fluid, for example air filter restriction gauge.
ether, in the air intake system. Such Note: Removal of the foam filter degrades
fluid could cause immediate your vehicle performance during snow and
explosive damage to the engine and hot weather conditions.
possible personal injury.
• Extreme rain: The air filter dries after
about 15–30 minutes at highway
The use of the factory engine block heater speeds. At the earliest opportunity,
assists in engine starting in extreme cold open the hood and reset the air filter
ambient temperatures See Engine Block restriction gauge.
Heater (page 185).
Refer to Air filter and restriction gauge in
the Maintenance chapter for more
information. See Changing the Engine
Air Filter (page 364).
184
Operation in Standing Water • A chime sounds and the information

display will show ENGINE TURNS OFF
Ingestion of water into the diesel engine IN 30 (seconds) and start counting
can result in immediate and severe down
damage to the engine. If driving through
water, slow down to avoid splashing water • You can restart the five or 15-minute
into the intake. If the engine stalls, and you timer by changing the position of the
suspect ingestion of water into the engine, accelerator pedal, brake pedal or the
do not try to restart the engine. Consult park brake within the final 30 seconds
your dealer for service immediately. • When the timer reaches zero, the
Your fuel tank vents to the atmosphere by engine shuts down and this message
valves on top of the tank and through the will appear in your information display
fuel cap. If water reaches the top of the ENGINE TURNED OFF
tank, the valves may pull water into the • One minute after the engine has shut
fuel tank. Water in the fuel can cause down, the electrical system simulates
performance issues and damage the fuel key off, even though the ignition is still
injection system. in the on position, initiating normal
accessory delay period
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE • You must move the ignition to the off
position to reset the system before
- 6.7L DIESEL restarting your vehicle.
Switch the ignition off. The engine idle shutdown idle timer does
not start if:
To help prolong engine life, we
recommended you allow the engine to idle • The engine is operating in power
for three to five minutes, especially after take-off mode.
any of the following: • The engine coolant temperature is
• Continuous engine speed. below 60°F (16°C).
• High ambient temperature. • The exhaust emission control device is
regenerating.
• High GVW or GCW operation, for
example heavy loads or trailers.
This allows the turbo charged engine to ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
cool down. Equipped)
ENGINE IDLE SHUTDOWN WARNINGS

Failure to follow engine block heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instructions could result in property
engine idle shutdown system. This system damage or serious personal injury.
automatically shuts down your engine
Do not use your heater with
when it has been idling in P (Park) or N
ungrounded electrical systems or
(Neutral) for five minutes (parking brake
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
set) or 15 minutes (parking brake not set).
of electrical shock.
When the engine idle shutdown process
has started:
185
Note: The heater is most effective when • Use as short an extension cord as
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F possible.
(-18°C). • Do not use multiple extension cords.
For cold climates that are below 0°F • Make sure that when in operation, the
(-18°C) needing a temporary battery extension cord plug and heater cord
installation. Order the cold climate pack. plug connections are free and clear of
The heater acts as a starting aid by water. This could cause an electric
warming the engine coolant. This allows shock or fire.
the climate control system to respond • Make sure the heater, heater cord and
quickly. The equipment includes a heater extension cord are firmly connected.
element (installed in the engine block) and • Check for heat anywhere in the
a wire harness. You can connect the electrical hookup once the system has
system to a grounded 120-volt AC been operating for approximately 30
electrical source. minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
E236180
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
We recommend that you do the following a dry cloth if necessary.
for a safe and correct operation: The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a of energy per hour of use. The system does
clean area, clear of combustibles. not have a thermostat. It achieves
• locate the block heater cord in the front maximum temperature after
tow hook pocket. approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord does not improve system performance and
that is product certified by unnecessarily uses electricity.
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
186
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Automotive fuels can be harmful or

fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
WARNINGS
swallowed can cause death or
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
pressure in an overfilled tank may call a physician immediately, even if no
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray symptoms are immediately apparent.
and fire. The toxic effects of fuel may not be
The fuel system may be under visible for hours.
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
spray out, which could cause serious In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
personal injury. breathing of fuel vapor can cause
Automotive fuels can cause serious serious illness and permanent injury.
injury or death if misused or • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
mishandled. fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump contact lenses (if worn), flush with
nozzle can produce static electricity. water for 15 minutes and seek medical
This can cause a fire if you are filling attention. Failure to seek proper
an ungrounded fuel container. medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
a cancer-causing agent.
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
When refueling always shut the the skin, clothing or both, promptly
engine off and never allow sparks or remove contaminated clothing and
open flames near the fuel tank filler wash skin thoroughly with soap and
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone water. Repeated or prolonged skin
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid skin irritation.
inhaling excess fumes. • Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
Observe the following guidelines when for the treatment of alcoholism.
handling automotive fuel: Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
any open flames before refueling your
the skin, wash the affected areas
vehicle.
immediately with plenty of soap and
• Always turn off the vehicle before water. Consult a physician immediately
refueling. if you experience any adverse reactions.
187
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - E85 Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel engine damage that will not be covered by
Vehicles the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following recommended can impair the emission
identifiers: control system and cause a loss of vehicle
• Yellow fuel filler cap. performance.
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet. Do not use:
• Yellow fuel filler housing. • Diesel fuel.
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
door.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
E161513 manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Your vehicle is designed to operate on • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum prohibited by law.
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or The use of fuels with metallic compounds
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a such as methylcyclopentadienyl
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85). manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
Some fuel stations, particularly those in as MMT), which is a manganese-based
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as fuel additive, will impair engine
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane performance and affect the emission
rating below 87. We do not recommend control system.
these fuels. To maintain optimal vehicle and engine
For best overall vehicle and engine performance and to help minimize engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane deposits, the use of Top Tier detergent
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The gasolines is recommended.
performance gained by using premium fuel We recommend Top Tier detergent
is most noticeable in hot weather as well gasolines to help minimize engine deposits
as other conditions, for example when and maintain optimal vehicle and engine
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 273). performance. For additional information,
Do not be concerned if the engine refer to www.toptiergas.com.
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
188
Fuel and Refueling
Switching Between E85 and Using low sulfur diesel fuel

Gasoline (16-500 ppm) or high sulfur
diesel fuel (greater than 500
We do not recommend repeatedly ppm) in your diesel engine will cause
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If certain emission components to
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or malfunction which may also cause the
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as service engine soon light to illuminate
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your indicating an emissions-related concern.
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85 temperature. For best results at
exclusively, we recommend that you fill temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), it is
the fuel tank with regular unleaded recommended to use a diesel fuel which
gasoline at each scheduled oil change. has been seasonally adjusted for the
ambient conditions.
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL Fuel Requirements - Choosing The

Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Is Not Required
Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Required (United For the engine to operate reliably on
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the
Virgin Islands And Other Locales) engine must be a factory built high-sulfur
engine (available as a dealer order option
You should use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel for select markets) or an ultra low sulfur
fuel (also known as ULSD) designated as diesel fuel configured engine that has been
number 1-D or 2-D with a maximum of retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using
15-ppm sulfur in your diesel vehicle. You Ford Motor Company dealer service parts.
may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels Failure to use retrofit components other
containing up to 20% biodiesel, also than those available through your
known as B20. These fuels should meet authorized dealer will result in coolant
the ASTM D975 diesel or the ASTM D7467 system damage, engine overheating,
B6-B20 biodiesel industry specifications. selective catalyst reduction system or
Outside of North America, use fuels diesel particulate filter damage and
meeting EN590 or equivalent local market possible base engine damage.
standard.
Use only a diesel engine configured for use
Note: The vehicle Warranty does not cover with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
damage caused by using an improper type diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
of fuel or fuel additive. than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with (16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel
diesel fuel under any circumstances. (greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
Blending used oil with the fuel will designed to use only Ultra Low Sulfur
significantly increase your vehicle’s exhaust Diesel fuel may result in damage to engine
emissions and reduce engine life due to emission control devices and the
increased internal wear. aftertreatment system, potentially
rendering the vehicle inoperable.
189
Fuel and Refueling
Vehicles with engines configured for use • Follow the recommended service
with high sulfur diesel fuel are only maintenance intervals. See
available for sale in countries where ultra Scheduled Maintenance (page 581).
low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not • Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel
available or mandated by the government. tank for more than 1 month
Vehicles originally sold in a ultra low sulfur
diesel fuel market that are subsequently • Consider changing brands or reducing
exported to non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel biodiesel content if you have cold
markets will need to be retrofitted (at the temperature fuel gelling issues or a
customer’s expense using Ford authorized frequent LOW FUEL PRESSURE
dealer service parts) in order to be reliably message appearing
operated on non- ultra low sulfur diesel • Do NOT use raw oils, fats or waste
fuel. cooking greases
Biodiesel Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater

than 20% may cause damage to your
WARNING vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust
after-treatment hardware (exhaust
Do not mix diesel with gasoline, catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
gasohol or alcohol. This could cause Concentrations greater than 20% can also
an explosion. cause fuel filter restrictions that may result
in a lack of power or damage to fuel
Note: Do not use home heating oil, system components, including fuel pump
agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste and fuel injector failures.
cooking greases, biodiesel fuels greater than SAE 5W-40 or SAE 15W-40 oil is
20% or any diesel fuel not intended for recommended for fuels with greater than
highway use. Red dye is used to identify 5% biodiesel (B5). Refer to the Special
fuels intended for agricultural and operating conditions section under the
non-highway use. Damage to the fuel Schedule Maintenance chapter for more
injection system, engine and exhaust information about oil change intervals and
catalyst can occur if an improper fuel is other maintenance when operating on
used. biodiesel.
You may operate your vehicle on diesel Look for a label on the fuel pump to
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
known as B20. in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel content is often
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted indicated with the letter B followed by the
product from renewable fuel sources, such percent of biodiesel in the fuel. For
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste example, B20 indicates a fuel containing
cooking greases. 20% biodiesel. Ask the service station
attendant to confirm the biodiesel content
To help achieve acceptable engine of a diesel fuel if you do not see a label on
performance and durability when using the fuel pump.
biodiesel in your vehicle:
• Confirm the biodiesel content of the
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less
• Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality
that complies with industry standards
190
Fuel and Refueling
Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE

diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and
should not be stored in the fuel tank for Choosing the Right Fuel
more than 1 month. If you plan to park or
store your vehicle for more than 1 month,
then you should empty your vehicle fuel
tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill the
tank with a pure petroleum-based diesel
fuel and run your vehicle for a minimum of
30 minutes.
Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can
damage fuel system seals and plastics and
E161513
corrode steel parts.
During cold weather, if you have problems Your vehicle is designed to operate on
operating on biodiesel, you may need to regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
content, try another brand, or discontinue Some fuel stations, particularly those in
the use of biodiesel. high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
Diesel Fuel Additives
rating below 87. We do not recommend
It should not be necessary to add any these fuels.
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you For best overall vehicle and engine
use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms performance, premium fuel with an octane
to ASTM industry specifications. rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel performance gained by using premium fuel
injector system or engine. is most noticeable in hot weather as well
Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an as other conditions, for example when
equivalent cetane booster additive if you towing a trailer. See Towing (page 273).
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use Do not use any fuel other than those
Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance recommended because they could lead to
improver or an equivalent additive if there engine damage that will not be covered by
is fuel gelling. the vehicle Warranty.
Do not use alcohol-based additives to Note: Use of any fuel other than those
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel recommended can impair the emission
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol control system and cause a loss of vehicle
additives may result in damage to the fuel performance.
injectors and system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 433). Do not use:
The Vehicle Warranty may not cover • Diesel fuel.
repairs needed to correct the effects of • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
using an aftermarket product that does • Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
not meet Ford specifications in your fuel. or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
191
Fuel and Refueling
• Fuels containing metallic-based REFUELING - GASOLINE

additives, including manganese-based
compounds. WARNINGS
• Fuels containing the octane booster Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl fire can cause severe injuries.
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is Read and follow all the instructions
prohibited by law). on the pump island.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds Turn off your engine when you are
such as methylcyclopentadienyl refueling.
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
refueling your vehicle.
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission Keep sparks, flames and smoking
control system. materials away from fuel.
Do not be concerned if the engine Stay outside your vehicle and do not
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the leave the fuel pump unattended
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with when refueling your vehicle. This is
the recommended octane rating, contact against the law in some places.
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Do not use personal electronic
devices while refueling.
Avoid running out of fuel because this
Wait at least 10 seconds before
situation may have an adverse effect on
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
engine components.
allow any residual fuel to drain into
If you have run out of fuel: the fuel tank.
• You may need to cycle the ignition from Stop refueling after the fuel pump
off to on several times after refueling nozzle automatically shuts off for the
to allow the fuel system to pump the second time. Failure to follow this
fuel from the tank to the engine. On will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
restarting, cranking time will take a few and could lead to fuel overflowing.
seconds longer than normal. With
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
keyless ignition, just start the engine.
from its fully inserted position when
Crank time will be longer than usual.
refueling.
• Normally, adding 1 gal (4 L) of fuel is
enough to restart the engine. If the
vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1 gal (4 L) may be
required.
192
Fuel and Refueling
Use the following guidelines to avoid 5. To install the cap, align the tabs on the
electrostatic charge build-up when filling cap with the notches on the filler pipe.
an ungrounded fuel container: 6. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a
• Place approved fuel container on the turn clockwise until it clicks at least
ground. once.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in If the Check Fuel Cap light or a Check Fuel
the vehicle (including the cargo area). Cap message appears in the instrument
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact cluster and stays on after you start the
with the fuel container while filling. engine, you may not have installed the fuel
filler properly.
• Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position. If the fuel cap light remains on, at the next
opportunity, safely pull off of the road,
Fuel Filler Cap remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
WARNINGS light or Check fuel cap message may not
The fuel system may be under reset immediately. It may take several
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound driving cycles for the indicators to turn off.
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel A driving cycle consists of an engine
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may start-up (after four or more hours with the
spray out, which could cause serious engine off) followed by normal city and
personal injury. highway driving.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler
cap, excessive pressure or vacuum REFUELING - DIESEL
in the fuel tank may damage the fuel
system or cause the fuel cap to disengage WARNINGS
in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury. Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap, Stay outside your vehicle and do not
replace it with a fuel filler cap that is leave the fuel pump unattended
designed for your vehicle. The customer when refueling your vehicle.
warranty may be void for any damage to the Keep children away from the fuel
fuel tank or fuel system if the correct pump. Never let children pump fuel.
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified
fuel filler cap is not used. Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed
allow any residual fuel to drain into
design with a 1/4th turn on and off feature.
the fuel tank.
When fueling your vehicle:
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
1. Put your vehicle in park (P).
from its fully inserted position when
2. Switch the engine off. refueling.
3. Carefully turn the filler cap
counterclockwise until it spins off.
4. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel
filler pipe.
193
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS Diesel fuel must not be stored in a

When refueling always shut the galvanized container. The fuel will dissolve
engine off and never allow sparks or the zinc in the galvanized container. The
open flames near the fuel tank filler zinc will then remain in the fuel. If you run
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone the contaminated fuel through the engine,
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely the zinc will deposit in the fuel injectors
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid causing expensive-to-repair damage.
inhaling excess fumes. Diesel fuel dispensing nozzle fill rate
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the Your vehicle has a fuel fill pipe that is able
second time. Failure to follow this to accept fuel up to 20 gal (76 L) per
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank minute from an 1.2 in (30 mm)
and could lead to fuel overflowing. fuel-dispensing nozzle. Pumping fuel at
greater flow rates may result in premature
The fuel system may be under nozzle shut-off or spit back.
pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Truck stops have pumps and nozzles
sound, wait until it stops before completely designed for larger, heavy-duty trucks.
removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel When refueling at truck stops: if the nozzle
may spray out and injure you or others. shuts off repeatedly when refueling, wait
5–10 seconds; then use a slower rate of
If you do not use the proper fuel filler flow, do not depress the nozzle trigger as
cap, excessive pressure or vacuum far.
in the fuel tank may damage the fuel
system or cause the fuel cap to disengage Refueling
in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury. When fueling your vehicle do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap, it engages and remove the fuel tank
replace it with a fuel filler cap designed for filler cap. The fuel tank filler cap has
your vehicle. The vehicle Warranty may be an indexed design with a 1/4 turn
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel on/off feature. Carefully turn the filler
system if the correct genuine Ford or cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
Motorcraft® fuel filler cap is not used.
Fueling Tips
If air is allowed to enter the fuel system the
engine automatically purges any trapped
air. To purge the air sooner: prior to engine
start, prime the system by turning the key
to on for 30 seconds then to off. Repeat
this several times. The engine may run
rough and produce white smoke while air
is in the system. This is normal.
Use only clean, approved containers that
will prevent the entry of dirt or water
whenever you store diesel fuel.
194
Fuel and Refueling
E119081
4. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and

then slowly remove it.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
E139202 your vehicle checked immediately.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the Dual Fuel Tanks (If Equipped)
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank Your vehicle may have a dual fuel tank
filler pipe opening. delivery system which operates
independently and automatically. The fuel
A pump in the front fuel tank delivers fuel to
the engine. When the fuel level in the front
fuel tank drops below three quarter full,
fuel automatically transfers from the rear
fuel tank to the front fuel tank. Whenever
there is fuel in the rear fuel tank, the front
fuel tank level remains between half and
three quarter full.
Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel, you
must add fuel to the front fuel tank to
B restart the engine.
E139203
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower

position B when refueling. Holding the FUEL CONSUMPTION
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut The advertised capacity is the maximum
off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank is full. tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
195
Fuel and Refueling
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty

reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 114).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy

• Incorrect tire inflation pressures. See
Towing a Trailer (page 273).
• Fully loading your vehicle.
• Carrying unnecessary weight.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 188).
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
196
EMISSION LAW Tampering With a Noise Control

System
WARNING Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
Do not remove or alter the original • Removal or rendering inoperative by
equipment floor covering or any person other than for purposes of
insulation between it and the metal maintenance.
floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and
• Repair or replacement of any device or
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
element of the design incorporated into
from the engine and exhaust system heat
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
and noise. On vehicles with no original
control prior to its sale or delivery to
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
carry passengers in a manner that permits
use.
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions • The use of the vehicle after any person
may result in fire or personal injury. removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative may presume to constitute tampering as
emission control system components. follows:
Similar federal or provincial laws may • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any absorbers, fender apron barriers,
vehicle modification without first underbody noise shields or acoustically
determining applicable laws. absorptive material.
Tampering with emissions • Tampering or rendering inoperative the
control systems including engine speed governor, to allow engine
related sensors or the Diesel speed to exceed manufacturer
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced specifications.
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light. If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
197
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions. WARNINGS

• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
climactic conditions. harmful and potentially lethal fumes
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel into the passenger compartment. If
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. you smell exhaust fumes inside your
Regular maintenance or replacement is not vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
needed. immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
Noise Emissions Warranty, enables it to comply with applicable
Prohibited Tampering Acts and exhaust emission standards.
Maintenance To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation continue to work properly:
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb • Do not crank the engine for more than
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 10 seconds at a time.
(GVWR). The preceding statements • Do not run the engine with a spark plug
concerning prohibited tampering acts and lead disconnected.
maintenance, and the noise warranty • Do not push-start or tow-start your
found in the Warranty Guide, are vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
applicable to complete chassis cabs over Starting the Vehicle (page 306).
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
CATALYTIC CONVERTER vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle • Have the items listed in scheduled
on dry grass or other dry ground maintenance information performed
cover. The emission system heats up according to the specified schedule.
the engine compartment and exhaust Note: Resulting component damage may
system, creating the risk of fire. not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The normal operating temperature The scheduled maintenance items listed
of the exhaust system is very high. in scheduled maintenance information are
Never work around or attempt to essential to the life and performance of
repair any part of the exhaust system until your vehicle and to its emissions system.
it has cooled. Use special care when
If you use anything other than Ford,
working around the catalytic converter.
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
maintenance replacements or for service
high temperature after only a short period
of components affecting emission control,
of engine operation and stays hot after the
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
engine is switched off.
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
198
Illumination of the service engine soon 1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
indicator, charging system warning light or engine may misfire or run poorly.
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine fuel—the engine may misfire or run
power could indicate that the emission poorly.
control system is not working properly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
An improperly operating or damaged properly. See Refueling (page 192).
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
4. Driving through deep water—the
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
electrical system may be wet.
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately. You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
owners and anyone who manufactures,
out. After three driving cycles without these
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
or any other temporary malfunctions
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
present, the service engine soon indicator
are not permitted to intentionally remove
should stay off the next time you start the
an emission control device or prevent it
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
from working. Information about your
engine startup followed by mixed city and
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
highway driving. No additional vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
service is required.
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement. If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
Please consult your warranty information
available opportunity. Although some
for complete details.
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
Your vehicle has a computer known as the soon indicator on can result in increased
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
monitors the engine’s emission control engine and transmission smoothness and
system. The system protects the lead to more costly repairs.
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government Readiness for Inspection and
emission standards. The OBD-II system Maintenance (I/M) Testing
also assists a service technician in properly
Some state and provincial and local
servicing your vehicle.
governments may have
When the service engine soon Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II to inspect the emission control equipment
system has detected a on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may inspection could prevent you from getting
cause the service engine soon indicator to a vehicle registration.
illuminate. Examples are:
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
199
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out), REDUCTANT SYSTEM - DIESEL
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems Your vehicle may have a selective catalytic
have not been properly checked. In this reduction system. The system helps reduce
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M emission levels of oxides of nitrogen from
testing. the exhaust system. The system
automatically injects diesel exhaust fluid
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has into the exhaust system to enable correct
just been serviced, or the battery has selective catalytic reduction system
recently run down or been replaced, the function.
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To Note: Selective catalytic reduction systems
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M are not fitted to vehicles in markets where
testing, turn the ignition key to the on only high-sulfur diesel fuel is available.
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level
indicator blinks eight times, it means that In order for the system to operate correctly
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if you must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid
the service engine soon indicator stays on level.
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing. A warning message appears in the
information display when the diesel
The OBD-II system checks the emission exhaust fluid level is low. If a warning
control system during normal driving. A message appears, refill the diesel exhaust
complete check may take several days. fluid tank as soon as possible. See
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, Information Messages (page 131).
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
driving: Tank
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an WARNINGS
expressway or highway followed by 20 Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at reach of children. Avoid contact with
least four 30-second idle periods. skin, eyes or clothing. In case of
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least contact with your eyes, flush immediately
eight hours with the ignition off. Then, with water and get prompt medical
start the vehicle and complete the attention. In case of contact with your skin,
above driving cycle. The vehicle must clean immediately with soap and water. If
warm up to its normal operating you swallow any diesel exhaust fluid, drink
temperature. Once started, do not turn plenty of water, call a physician
off the vehicle until the above driving immediately.
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
200
WARNINGS
Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank in a well ventilated area. When
you remove the diesel exhaust fluid
tank filler cap or a diesel exhaust fluid
container cap, ammonia vapors may
escape. Ammonia vapors can be irritating
to skin, eyes and mucous membranes. )
E163354
Inhaling ammonia vapors can cause E163354
burning to the eyes, throat and nose and Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is
cause coughing and watery eyes. certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). Non-certified diesel exhaust
fluid use can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
fuel tank. This can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at
an authorized dealer, most highway truck
stops or you can contact roadside
assistance for help in finding a retailer that
sells diesel exhaust fluid. In addition, there
is a government website to help you find
the nearest location to purchase diesel
exhaust fluid:
http://www.discoverdef.com.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank

Using a Fuel Station Pump
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using
a nozzle is similar to fuel fill. The nozzle
shuts off automatically when the tank is
full.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank

Using a Container
E226045
The following procedure applies to
The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar
filler cap. The tank is behind the left-hand fluid containers. Always follow the
front wheel. Fill the tank using a fluid pump manufacturer's instructions.
at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a
1. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
diesel exhaust fluid container. We
container cap. Place the spout on to
recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust
the container and tighten it until you
fluid. See Capacities and Specifications
feel a strong resistance.
(page 428).
201
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning
filler cap. Messages and Vehicle Operations
3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until
the seal on the spout seats on to the WARNINGS
filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank. Diesel exhaust fluid must be refilled
When the tank is full the fluid will stop when low or replaced when
flowing automatically. contaminated or your vehicle speed
becomes limited to 50 mph (80 km/h). In
4. Return the container to the vertical these conditions, drive with caution and
position slightly below the diesel refill diesel exhaust fluid immediately. If
exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid the diesel exhaust fluid becomes empty
remaining in the spout to drain back in or contaminated and fluid is not replaced,
to the container. your vehicle becomes limited to engine idle
5. Remove the spout from the diesel only once stopped. In these conditions, be
exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the cautious where you stop your vehicle
diesel exhaust fluid tank cap. because you may not be able to drive long
6. Remove the spout from the diesel distances or maintain highway speeds until
exhaust fluid container and replace the you refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid.
cap. Tampering with or disabling the
Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in selective catalytic reduction system
the container retain it for later use. The results in severe vehicle performance
spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with limitation including eventual speed limiting
clean water prior to storage. Do not use the to 5 mph (8 km/h).
diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other
fluid. The information display shows a series of
messages about the amount of diesel
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in exhaust fluid available. A systems check
Cold Climates displays messages indicating the amount
Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays
ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C). a warning message indicating the
Your vehicle has a preheating system approximate distance remaining as the
which allows diesel exhaust fluid to fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears
operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not empty. See Information Messages
use your vehicle for an extended period (page 131).
when the ambient temperature is below As the diesel exhaust fluid level
12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may nears empty, the warning
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid E163176 symbol displays and a series of
freezes it may damage the tank. This is not tones and messages starting at 500 mi
covered by the vehicle warranty. (800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust
fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and
messages continue until you refill the
diesel exhaust fluid tank.
202
Continued driving without refilling results • Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on
in the following actions as required by the painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and components. Immediately wipe away
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled
(EPA): with a damp cloth and water. If it has
• Within a preset distance to empty, already crystallized, use warm water
speed is limited upon vehicle restart. and a sponge.
Prior to this occurring a message • Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct
appears in the information display. sunlight and in temperatures between
• Further vehicle operation without 23°F (-5°C) and 68°F (20°C).
refilling the diesel exhaust fluid tank • Diesel exhaust fluid freezes below 12°F
causes the engine to enter an idle-only (-11°C).
condition. This only occurs upon vehicle • Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid
refueling or at an extended idle. A bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could
message indicates the required actions cause damage to interior components
to resume normal operation. It is or release an ammonia odor inside your
required to add a minimum of 1.0 gal vehicle.
(3.8 L) of diesel exhaust fluid to the
tank to exit the idle-only condition, but • Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable,
your vehicle is still in the speed-limiting non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble
mode until you refill the tank liquid.
completely. • The system has a diesel exhaust fluid
quality sensor. Dilution of diesel
Note: For either vehicle speed limiting or
exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid
idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation
in the SCR system leads to a diesel
resumes when you refill the diesel exhaust
exhaust fluid system fault, eventually
fluid tank.
leading to the vehicle only operating in
Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid idle-only mode.
tank from empty, there may be a short delay • Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with
before detecting the increased level of fluid. water or any other liquid.
The increased level detection must occur
before your vehicle returns to full power. • An ammonia odor may be smelled
when the cap is removed or during
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines refill. Refill diesel exhaust fluid in a well
and Information ventilated area.
• Use only diesel exhaust fluid that

carries the American Petroleum
Institute (API) certified diesel exhaust
fluid trademark or ISO 22241.
• Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
diesel fuel tank.
• Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank.
• Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive.
• Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid
container once it is emptied.
203
Typical Diesel Exhaust Fluid Usage Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only
When Using the Power Take Off (PTO) condition, normal vehicle operation resumes
when you repair the contaminated system.
Continuous PTO use—Minimal PTO use To service a contaminated or inoperative
system, see an authorized dealer.
0–7,800 mi (0–12,550 km)
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
Contaminated Diesel Exhaust
Fluid or Inoperative Selective The filter forms part of the emissions
Catalytic Reduction System reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
Selective catalytic reduction systems are harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
sensitive to contamination of the diesel exhaust gas.
exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the Regeneration
fluid is important to avoid system
malfunctions. If you remove or drain the WARNING
diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the
same fluid to refill the tank. The system Do not park or idle your vehicle over
has a sensor to monitor fluid quality. dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The
A warning lamp illuminates and regeneration process creates very high
a message appears in the exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
E163176 information display if the system will radiate a considerable amount of heat
becomes contaminated or inoperative. during and after regeneration and after you
have switched the engine off. This is a
Continued driving without replacing diesel potential fire hazard.
exhaust fluid or having the selective
catalytic reduction system repaired results
in the following actions as required by the Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and Note: During regeneration at low speed or
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
(EPA): odor and could notice a clicking metallic
• Within a preset distance to empty, sound. This is due to high temperatures
speed is limited upon vehicle restart. reached during regeneration and is normal.
Prior to this occurring a message Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
appears in the information display. sound may be heard during the regeneration
• Further vehicle operation without process.
replacing contaminated diesel exhaust
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
fluid causes the engine to enter an
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
idle-only condition. This only occurs
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
upon vehicle refueling, vehicle idling in
out this process automatically.
park for 1 hour, or engine shutdown for
10 minutes or more and is indicated by
a message in the information display
indicating required actions to resume
normal operation.
204
If your journeys meet one of the following Your vehicle has a diesel particulate filter.
conditions: The diesel particulate filter is an inline filter
• You drive only short distances. in the exhaust system that reduces carbon
emissions by trapping exhaust particles
• You frequently switch the ignition on before they reach the tailpipe. The diesel
and off. particulate filter looks similar to a
• Your journeys contain a high level of traditional exhaust catalyst and is part of
acceleration and deceleration. the exhaust system under your vehicle. The
You must carry out occasional trips with filter couples to a diesel oxidation catalyst
the following conditions to assist the that reduces the amount of harmful
regeneration process: exhaust emitted from the tailpipe. As soot
gathers in the system, it begins to restrict
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable the filter. The system must periodically
conditions, which you will find at higher clean the soot that gathers inside the filter.
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a This is carried out in two ways, passive
main road or freeway for a minimum regeneration and active regeneration. Both
of 20 minutes. This drive may include methods occur automatically and require
short stops that will not affect the no actions from the driver. During either
regeneration process. one of these regeneration methods, you
• Avoid prolonged idling and always may notice a change in exhaust tone. At
observe speed limits and road certain times, the information display
conditions. shows various messages related to the
• Do not switch the ignition off. diesel particulate filter. See Information
Messages (page 131).
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500 Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance
and 3000 RPM.
You must properly maintain your vehicle's
Oxidation Catalytic Converter and diesel particulate filter in order for it to
Diesel Particulate Filter System (If function properly.
Equipped) Do not disregard maintenance messages
that appear in the information display.
WARNING Failure to follow the instructions of an
The normal operating temperature information message may degrade vehicle
of the exhaust system is very high. performance and could lead to engine
Never work around or attempt to damage that may not be covered by the
repair any part of the exhaust system until vehicle Warranty.
it has cooled. Use special care when Failure to perform active or operator
working around the diesel oxidation commanded regeneration when instructed
catalytic converter or the diesel particulate could result in a clogged diesel particulate
filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills
converter and the diesel particulate filter beyond the regeneration threshold, your
heat up to very high temperatures after vehicle disables the ability for active and
only a short period of engine operation and operator commanded regeneration. This
remain hot after you switch the engine off. could result in irreversible damage to the
diesel particulate filter requiring
replacement that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
205
Passive Regeneration shows a cleaning exhaust filter message,

which is the normal regeneration process.
In passive regeneration, the exhaust You can also choose operator commanded
system temperature and constituents regeneration to clean the exhaust system
automatically clean the filter by oxidizing at this point. See Information Messages
the soot. Cleaning automatically occurs (page 131).
during normal vehicle operating conditions
due to driving patterns. If you are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic active
Active Regeneration regeneration or you choose to perform
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter
Once the diesel particulate filter is full of while at idle, then operator commanded
exhaust particles, the engine control regeneration would need to be performed.
module commands the exhaust system to
clean the filter through active regeneration. Operator Commanded Regeneration
Active regeneration requires the engine (If Equipped)
computer to raise the exhaust temperature
to eliminate the particles. During cleaning, If your vehicle is operated with significant
the particles convert to harmless gasses. stationary operation, low speed drive
Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
continues trapping exhaust particles. drive cycles, a drive time is less than 10 -
15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully
The regeneration process operates more warm up, passive and active regeneration
efficiently when you drive your vehicle at may not sufficiently clean the diesel
a constant speed above 30 mph particulate filter system. Operator
(48 km/h) and at a steady engine speed commanded regeneration allows you to
for approximately 20 minutes. The manually start regeneration of the diesel
frequency and duration of regeneration particulate filter at idle to clean the filter.
fluctuates by how you drive your vehicle, If you are not sure whether your vehicle has
outside air temperature and altitude. For this feature, contact an authorized dealer.
most driving, regeneration frequency varies
from 100–500 mi (160–805 km) between When to Carry Out Operator Commanded
occurrences and each occurrence lasts Regeneration
9–35 minutes. You can usually reduce the
duration of regeneration if you maintain a You can use the operator commanded
constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h). regeneration feature when a message
appears in the information display and you
When the engine control module detects are not able to drive in a manner that
that the diesel particulate filter is nearly allows effective automatic active
full of particulates and you are not regeneration or if you choose to manually
operating your vehicle in a manner to allow start the regeneration of the diesel
effective automatic regeneration, particulate filter manually while the vehicle
messages appear in the information is idle. See Information Messages (page
display as a reminder for you to drive your 131).
vehicle in order to clean the diesel
particulate filter. If you drive your vehicle
in a manner to allow effective automatic
regeneration, the information display
206
Operator Commanded Regeneration How to Start Operator Commanded

Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position Regeneration
WARNINGS WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe
dry leaves, dry grass or other during regeneration. Hot exhaust
combustible materials. The gases can burn you badly.
regeneration process creates very high
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat Note: You cannot use the operator
during and after regeneration and after you commanded regeneration until the diesel
have switched the engine off. This is a particulate filter load percentage has
potential fire hazard. reached 100%. The diesel particulate filter
load percentage fluctuates up and down
Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe when driving your vehicle due to active and
during regeneration. Hot exhaust passive regenerations.
gases can burn you badly.
Note: During the use of operator
commanded regeneration, you may observe
Make sure that the louvers located at the a light amount of white smoke. This is
tip of the exhaust are clear of any normal.
obstructions as they are used to introduce
fresh air into the tailpipe to cool the You may not be able to use
exhaust gases as they leave the exhaust operator commanded
system. regeneration if the service engine
soon warning lamp appears in the
Before you start operator commanded information display
regeneration, do the following:
• Shift into park (P) and apply the Information Display Procedure
parking brake, on stable, level ground.
Start with your vehicle engine and when it
• Park your vehicle outside of any has reached the normal operating
structure. temperature, press the information display
• Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m) control button on the steering wheel. See
away from any obstructions and away Information Display Control (page 85).
from materials that can easily combust If a message advising that the exhaust
or melt, for example paper, leaves, filter is full appears in the information
petroleum products, fuels, plastics and display, press the OK button as instructed.
other dry organic material. Answer yes to this prompt and then follow
• Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8 the next prompts regarding the exhaust
tank of fuel. position required to initiate operator
commanded regeneration. Be sure to
• Make sure all fluids are at proper levels. understand each prompt. If you are not
sure what is being asked by each prompt,
contact an authorized dealer. The display
confirms the operation has started and
when it has finished.
207
If the diesel particulate filter is near or at Operator Commanded Regeneration

saturation, a message requesting with Automatic Regeneration Control
permission to initiate filter cleaning (If Equipped)
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 131). If your vehicle is operated with significant
Answer yes to this prompt and then follow stationary operation, low speed drive
the next prompts regarding exhaust cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
position required to initiate operator drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
commanded regeneration. Be sure to or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
understand each prompt. If you are not passive and active regeneration may not
sure what is being asked by each prompt, sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
contact an authorized dealer. The display filter system. You can switch off automatic
confirms the operation has started and regeneration until better driving conditions
when it has finished. You can also drive to are available, for example steady high
clean the filter. speed driving. You can then switch
automatic regeneration back on to clean
When the system is at the point the diesel particulate filter.
of oversaturation, the service
engine warning lamp illuminates Switching Automatic Regeneration
and a message appears in the information Control On and Off
display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning. To switch operator commanded
You must have your vehicle checked as regeneration on and off, use the
soon as possible. information display control on the steering
wheel. See Information Display Control
Once operator commanded regeneration
(page 85). Scroll to the exhaust cleaning
starts, engine speed increases to
message, a check in the box indicates the
approximately 2000 rpm and the cooling
feature is enabled, and unchecked
fan speed increases. You will hear a
indicates the feature is disabled.
change in audible sound due to engine
speed and cooling fan speed increases. How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator
It is not necessary to open the hood on the Commanded Regeneration
engine compartment. Once operator
If you need to cancel the operator
commanded regeneration completes, the
commanded regeneration, pressing the
engine speed returns to normal idling. The
brake, accelerator or switching the engine
exhaust system remains very hot for
off stops the procedure. Depending on the
several minutes even after regeneration is
amount of time you allowed the operator
complete. Do not reposition the vehicle
commanded regeneration to operate, soot
over materials that could burn until the
may not have had sufficient time to be fully
exhaust system has had sufficient time to
eliminated, but the exhaust system and
cool. Depending on the amount of soot
exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut
collected by the diesel particulate filter,
your vehicle off during operator
ambient temperature and altitude,
commanded regeneration, you may notice
operator commanded regeneration lasts
turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence
approximately 30 minutes.
caused by shutting off a diesel engine
during boosted operation and is considered
normal.
208
Filter Service and Maintenance

Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be replaced
with a new or remanufactured part at
approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine
and vehicle operating conditions.
If filter service is required, the
engine control system warning
lamp illuminates in the
If there are any issues with the
diesel particulate filter system,
the engine control system
warning lamp and a service
engine soon warning lamp
illuminate to inform you that
your vehicle requires service. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly

Maintenance
Aftermarket devices or modifications to
the exhaust system may reduce the
effectiveness of the exhaust system as
well as cause damage to the exhaust
system or engine. This may also degrade
vehicle performance and could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
209
Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Park (P)

This position locks the transmission and
WARNINGS prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Always fully apply the parking brake.
Make sure you shift into park (P) for Reverse (R)
vehicles with an automatic With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
transmission. Switch the ignition off and vehicle moves backward. Always come to
remove the key whenever you leave your a complete stop before shifting into and
vehicle. out of reverse (R).
When your vehicle is stationary, keep
the brake pedal fully pressed when Neutral (N)
shifting gears. Failure to follow this With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
instruction could result in personal injury, vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
death or property damage. Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
Understanding the Shift Positions the best fuel economy. The drive function
of Your Automatic Transmission allows automatic upshifts and downshifts
through gears one through six.
(If Equipped)
M (Manual)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the
driver can change gears up or down as
desired. By moving the gearshift lever from
drive position drive (D) to manual (M) you
now have control of selecting the gear you
desire using buttons on the shift lever. See
Understanding your SelectShift
E163183 Automatic™ transmission later in this
section.
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear: To return to normal drive (D) position,
1. Fully press down the brake pedal. move the shift lever back from manual (M)
to drive (D).
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear. The transmission operates in gears one
through six.
3. When you are finished driving, come to
a complete stop. Second (2)
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P). Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
210
Transmission
First (1) The tow/haul feature:

• Transmission operates in first (1) gear • Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
only. of transmission shifting.
• Provides maximum engine braking. • Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift assists you in controlling your vehicle
lever. when descending a grade.
• Does not downshift into first (1) gear • Depending on driving conditions and
at high speeds; allows for first (1) gear load conditions, may downshift the
when vehicle reaches slower speeds. transmission, slow your vehicle and
Forced downshifts control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul accelerator pedal. The amount of
feature on or off. downshift braking provided varies
• Press the accelerator to the floor. based upon the amount you press the
brake pedal.
• Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear. The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
Tow/Haul Mode trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using
WARNING tow/haul.
Do not use tow/haul when the road Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the
surface is slippery. Failure to follow Adaptive Steering System, enabling the
this instruction could result in the tow/haul feature adjusts the steering
loss of control of your vehicle. response. In tow/haul mode the Adaptive
Steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity
To activate tow/haul, press the to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds
button on the gearshift lever when maintaining the ease of parking and
E161509 once. The TOW HAUL indicator maneuverability at low speeds. See
light illuminates in the instrument cluster. Steering (page 261).
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever when
tow/haul is active. The TOW HAUL light
deactivates. Tow/haul also deactivates
when you power down your vehicle.
211
Transmission
Understanding your SelectShift The SelectShift Automatic transmission

Automatic™ transmission (If Equipped) feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
PRS (Progressive Range Selection)

Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience (for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep grade).
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The available
and selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.
E163184
All available gears display with the current
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift gear indicated. Press the – button again to
Automatic™ transmission gearshift lever. lock out gears beginning with the highest
The SelectShift Automatic transmission gear. Example: press the – button twice to
gives you the ability to change gears up or lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only the
down (without a clutch) as desired. available gears display and the
In order to prevent the engine from running transmission automatically shifts between
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to the available gears. Press the + button to
stall, SelectShift still automatically make unlock gears to allow the transmission to
some downshifts if it has determined that shift to higher gears. The transmission
you have not downshifted in time. shifts automatically within the gear range
Although SelectShift makes some you select.
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
Manual (M)
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
not be caused to the engine from (M) position allows you to manually select
over-revving. the gear you desire. Only the current gear
SelectShift does not automatically upshift, displays. Use the buttons on the gearshift
even if the engine is approaching the RPM lever to manually select gears. Press the
limit. It must be shifted manually by + button to upshift or the – button to
pressing the + button. downshift. Return the transmission to a
different gearshift position to deactivate
Note: Engine damage may occur if you manual control.
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting. Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
212
Transmission
Upshifts When Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy)
Shift from: Gasoline engines Diesel engines

1–2 15 mph (24 km/h) 12 mph (19 km/h)
2–3 25 mph (40 km/h) 19 mph (31 km/h)
3–4 40 mph (64 km/h) 26 mph (42 km/h)
4–5 45 mph (72 km/h) 34 mph (55 km/h)
5–6 50 mph (80 km/h) 46 mph (74 km/h)
Note: Do not drive your vehicle until you

Automatic Transmission Adaptive verify that the brake lamps are working.
Learning
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
This feature's design is to increase interlock feature that prevents the
durability and provide consistent shift feel gearshift lever from moving from park (P)
over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle when the ignition is on and the brake pedal
or transmission may have firm shifts, soft is not pressed.
shifts or both. This operation is normal and If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
does not affect function or durability of the of park (P) position with the ignition is on
transmission. Over time, the adaptive and the brake pedal pressed, a malfunction
learning process fully updates transmission may have occurred. It is possible that a
operation. Additionally, whenever you fuse has blown or your vehicle’s brake
disconnect the battery or install a new lamps are not operating properly. See
battery, the system must relearn the Fuse Specification Chart (page 318).
strategy.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
Brake-Shift Interlock lamps are working properly, the following
procedure allows you to move the gearshift
WARNINGS lever from park (P):
When doing this procedure, you need 1. Apply the parking brake. Switch the
to take the transmission out of park ignition key to 1 (off), then remove the
(P) which means your vehicle can key.
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking 2. Move the steering column to the full
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use down and full rearward position
wheels chocks if appropriate. (toward the driver’s seat).
If the parking brake is fully released, 3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
213
Transmission
4. Place fingers into hole where you

removed the gearshift lever boot and
pull top half of shroud up and forward
to separate it from the lower half of the
shroud. There is a hinge at the forward
edge of the top shroud. Roll the top
half of the shroud upward on the hinge
point to clear the hazard flasher button,
then pull straight rearward toward the
driver’s seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the E163186
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column. 9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as you rotate the halves together.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud

or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
E163185 Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked transmission and tires may occur, or the
position and remove the lower shroud engine may overheat.
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover. If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, you
may rock it out by shifting between forward
8. Apply the brake. Gently lift the override
and reverse gears, stopping between shifts
disk and move the gearshift lever into
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
neutral (N).
accelerator in each gear.
214
Transmission
POWER TAKE-OFF
WARNING
Use of auxiliary equipment that
exceeds the maximum Power
Take-Off (PTO) load specified in the
Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book can
adversely affect the performance of the
powertrain system. Refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about
the appropriate installation of additional
equipment.
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off,

or PTO, is often added to the engine or
transmission to operate utility equipment.
Examples include a wheel-lift for tow
trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire
service, and pumping fluids. PTO
applications draw auxiliary horsepower
from the powertrain, often while the
vehicle is stationary. In this condition, there
is limited cooling air flow through the
radiator and around the vehicle that
normally occurs when a vehicle is moving.
The aftermarket PTO system installer,
having the most knowledge of the final
application, is responsible for determining
whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and
alerting the user to the safe and proper
operation.
Ford Super Duty Vehicles are approved for
use as a stationary (including split shaft
capability) or mobile power source, within
limits and operating guidelines detailed in
the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas,
and through the Ford Truck Body Builders
Advisory Service.
215
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

Note: For important information regarding LOCK
the safe operation of this type of vehicle,

see General Information in the Wheels and
Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may F RE E
damage drive components. 4X4 mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these E163187
surfaces may produce some noise (such as
occasional clunks), but will not damage The 4WD system is engaged or disengaged
drive components. by rotating the control for both front wheel
hub locks from the FREE or LOCK position,
Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the then manually engaging or disengaging the
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), transfer case with the floor-mounted
the 4WD system will not perform a shift. shifter. For increased fuel economy in 2WD,
This is normal and should be no reason for rotate both hub locks to the FREE position.
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper operation. Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly
Note: You can switch on and switch off the (ESOF) 4WD system (If Equipped)
electronic locking differential by pulling the Note: If 4X4 Low is selected while the
4WD control (4WD vehicles) or turning the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
electronic locking differential control (2WD the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
vehicles). See Electronic Locking This is normal and should be no reason for
Differential (page 225). concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper system operation.
Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS)
4WD system (If Equipped) Note: Auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating the hub lock
Note: The vehicle should not be driven in control from AUTO to LOCK.
4X4 High or 4X4 Low modes with the hub
locks set to FREE as this condition may
damage driveline system components.
LOCK
A U TO
E163188
216
For proper operation, make sure that each 4X4 LOW

hub is fully engaged and that both hub
locks are set to the same position (both Continuously illuminates when
set to LOCK or both set to AUTO). To 4L is selected.
E181780
engage LOCK, turn the hub locks
completely clockwise; to engage AUTO, CHECK 4X4
turn the hub locks completely
counterclockwise. Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.
The ESOF 4WD system:
• provides 4x4 High engagement and
disengagement while the vehicle is Using a Manual Shift On Stop
moving. (MSOS) 4WD system (If Equipped)
• is operated by a rotary control located Note: High shift efforts may be encountered
on the instrument panel that allows when attempting to shift into and out of 4x4
you select 4x2, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low modes. It is recommended to allow the
operation. vehicle to roll at a speed below 3 mph
• uses auto-manual hub locks that can (5 km/h) when shifting between modes.
be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode
selected.
• will increase fuel economy when used
in the hub lock's recommended AUTO
mode.
4WD Indicator Lights

Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2 E233846
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an 2H (4X2)
authorized dealer.
For general on-road driving. Sends power
4X2 to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
Momentarily illuminates when optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
2H is selected. high speeds
E163173
4X4 HIGH 4H (4X4 High)
Continuously illuminates when Used for extra traction such as in snow or

4H is selected. icy roads or in off road situations. This
E181779 mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
217
N (Neutral) 3. Move the transfer case shift lever

through N (Neutral) directly to the
Only used when towing the vehicle. No desired position.
power to front or rear wheels.
4. If the transfer case does not, or only
4L (4X4 Low) partially moves to the desired position,
perform a shift with the transmission
Uses extra gearing to provide maximum in N (Neutral) and the vehicle rolling at
power to all four wheels at reduced a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
speeds. Intended only for off road
applications such as deep sand, steep 5. If shifting to 2H with the vehicle at a
grades or pulling heavy objects. complete stop, disengage the locking
hubs (optional) by rotating the hub
Shifting between system modes lock control from LOCK to FREE.
Note: Do not perform these operations if Using the N (Neutral) position

the rear wheels are slipping or when
applying the accelerator pedal. WARNING
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4x4 Always set the parking brake and
system shifts or engages. This is normal. In leave your vehicle with the
order to reduce engagement noise, it is transmission in park (P).
recommended that all shifts be performed
at speeds below3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: The vehicle should not be driven in
4X4 High with the hub locks disengaged as
this condition may damage driveline system
components.
Engage the locking hubs by rotating the
hub lock control from FREE to LOCK, then
move the transfer case lever from 2H to
4H at a stop or a vehicle speed below
3 mph (5 km/h).
Move the transfer case lever from 4H to E233846
2H at a stop or a vehicle speed below
3 mph (5 km/h), then disengage the The transfer case neutral position overrides
locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub the transmission and puts the vehicle in
lock control from LOCK to FREE. neutral regardless of transmission gearshift
For proper operation, make sure that both lever position. The vehicle can move
hubs are set to either FREE or LOCK. forward or backwards.
This position should only be used when
Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low) towing the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed
below 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
218
Using the Electronic Shift on the Shifting between system modes

Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal when a shift in progress message
displays improves engagement or
disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping or when applying
the accelerator pedal.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
E191851 You can move the control from 2H or 4H
at a stop or while driving. The information
2H (4X2) display may display a message indicating
a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
For general on-road driving. Sends power complete the message center will then
to the rear wheels only and should be used display the system mode selected.
for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
high speeds.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
4H (4X4 HIGH) system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Provides mechanically locked four-wheel Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use
drive power to both the front and rear on dry pavement.
wheels for use in off-road or winter 1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
conditions such as deep snow, sand or (5 km/h) or less.
mud. This mode is not for use on dry
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
pavement.
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
4L (4X4 LOW) position.
Provides mechanically locked four-wheel The information display will display a
drive power to both the front and rear message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
wheels for use on low traction surfaces, progress. The information display will then
but does so with additional gearing for display the system mode selected. If any
increased torque multiplication. Intended of the above shift conditions are not met,
only for off-road applications such as deep the shift will not occur and the information
sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy display will display information guiding the
objects. 4L (4X4 low) will not engage while driver through the proper shifting
your vehicle is moving above 3 mph procedures.
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or
from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.
219
If Shift Delayed Pull Forward appears in You should either know the terrain or
the information display, transfer case gear examine maps of the area before driving.
tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this Map out your route before driving in the
condition, place the transmission in a area. To maintain steering and braking
forward gear, move the vehicle forward control of your vehicle, you must have all
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the four wheels on the ground and they must
transmission back to neutral to allow the be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
transfer case to complete the range shift.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and
How Your Vehicle Differs From Utility Vehicles
Other Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
WARNING two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
the vehicle is moving can cause some
Vehicles with a higher center of momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive This is the front drivetrain coming up to
vehicles) handle differently than speed and the automatic locking hubs
vehicles with a lower center of gravity engaging and is not cause for concern.
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously a front air dam that can become damaged
increases the risk of losing control of your (due to reduced ground clearance) when
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and taking your vehicle off-road. This air dam
death. can be taken off by removing 15 bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be and rough terrain and have operating
higher to allow it to travel over rough characteristics that are somewhat
terrain without getting hung up or different from conventional vehicles, both
damaging underbody components. on and off the road.
The differences that make your vehicle so Power is supplied to all four wheels
versatile also make it handle differently through a transfer case. On four-wheel
than an ordinary passenger car. drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you
to select 4WD when necessary.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
Information on transfer case operation and
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
shifting procedures can be found in this
sudden changes in terrain can result in
chapter. Information on transfer case
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
maintenance can be found in the
you grip the steering wheel from the
Maintenance chapter. You should become
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
thoroughly familiar with this information
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage before you operate your vehicle.
from concealed objects such as rocks and
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
stumps.
mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.
220
Basic Operating Principles required. Avoid abrupt steering,

acceleration and braking. This could result
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
can affect the normal steering of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
characteristics of your vehicle. all available road surface to bring your
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
made slippery by loose sand, water,
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
• Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard sharp steering wheel movements.
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and If your vehicle goes from one type of
may damage drive components. 4H or surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
4L modes are only intended for gravel) there will be a change in the way
consistently slippery or loose surfaces. your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
Sand
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking. When driving over sand, try to keep all four
When your vehicle speed has been reduced wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
not turn the steering wheel sharply while to a lower gear and drive steadily through
returning your vehicle to the road. the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
returning to the road. You may lose control under high outside temperatures, use a low
if you do not slow down or if you turn the gear when possible. Low gear operation
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
damage to your vehicle rather than causes vehicle momentum to work against
attempt a sudden return to the road which you and your vehicle could become stuck
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways to the point that assistance may be
out of control or roll over. Remember, your required from another vehicle. Remember,
safety and the safety of others should be you may be able to back out the way you
your primary concern. came if you proceed with caution.
Emergency Maneuvers Mud and Water
In an unavoidable emergency situation Mud

where a sudden sharp turn must be made, Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
remember to avoid over-driving your speed or direction when you are driving in
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
emergency). Excessive steering can result does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth until you regain control of your vehicle.
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
221
After driving through mud, clean off residue If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. around because this could cause vehicle
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that safe location.
could damage drive components.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
Water climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
If you must drive through high water, drive resulting in loss of vehicle control.
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may E143949
damage the transmission. If the front or rear

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
axle is submerged in water, the axle
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
brake application and brake overheating.
should be checked and changed if
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
necessary.
overdrive or move the transmission
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
Although natural obstacles may make it braking as you could lose control. The front
necessary to travel diagonally up or down wheels have to be turning in order to steer
a hill or steep incline, you should always your vehicle.
try to drive straight up or straight down.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping brakes.
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
222
Driving on Snow and Ice If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow
WARNING
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or Do not spin the wheels at over
cables, then it is critical that you drive 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for and injure a passenger or bystander.
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead it may be rocked out by shifting between
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of forward and reverse gears, stopping
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
the direction of the slide until you regain lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
damage to the transmission may occur.
transmission damage.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
than a minute, damage to the transmission
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
and tires may occur or the engine may
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
overheat.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel Parking
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control. WARNINGS
Avoid sudden applications of power and If the parking brake is fully released,
quick changes of direction on snow and but the brake warning lamp remains
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and illuminated, the brakes may not be
steadily when starting from a full stop. working properly. Have your vehicle
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate Always set the parking brake and
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in leave your vehicle with the
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as transmission in park (P).
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
conditions. the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
Make sure you allow sufficient distance position, the engine and transmission are
between you and other vehicles for disconnected from the rest of the driveline.
stopping. Drive slower than usual and Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if
consider using one of the lower gears. In the automatic transmission is in P (Park)
emergency stopping situations, apply the or the manual transmission is in gear. Do
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake not leave the vehicle unattended with the
pedal. See Hints on Driving With transfer case in the N (Neutral) position.
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 229). Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
223
Maintenance and Modifications

The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
224
Rear Axle
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL • The electronic locking differential may

not engage if you press your
This axle provides added traction on accelerator pedal during an
slippery surfaces, particularly when one engagement attempt. A message may
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under display in the instrument display
normal conditions, the limited-slip axle guiding you to release the accelerator
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle pedal.
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration • In 4x2 or 4x4 High modes, the
during tight turns with low vehicle speed. electronic locking differential will
This is normal behavior and indicates the automatically disengage at speeds
axle is working. above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will
automatically reengage at speeds
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
• In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped) differential will automatically
disengage at speeds above 62 mph
Note: The electronic locking differential is (100 km/h) and will automatically
for off-road use only and is not for use on reengage at speeds below 56 mph
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking (90 km/h).
differential on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration. • The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the
The electronic locking differential is a electronic locking differential and
device housed in the rear axle that allows disable it during driving maneuvers
both rear wheels to turn at the same when necessary.
speed. The electronic locking differential
can provide additional traction should your When you switch the system on, if you do
vehicle become stuck. You can activate not meet the required conditions for
the differential electronically and shift it electronic locking differential activation,
on the fly within the differential operating the instrument cluster will display the
speed range. The differential is for use in appropriate information guiding you
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition through the proper activation process.
where you need maximum traction. It is Activating the Electronic Locking
not for use on dry pavement. Differential
The following conditions will affect the
electronic locking differential: Note: Do not use electronic locking
differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
• The electronic locking differential will Doing so will produce excessive noise,
not engage if your vehicle speed is vibration and increase tire wear.
above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2 or 4x4
High modes. Note: If the electronic locking differential
has difficulty disengaging, release the
• The electronic locking differential will accelerator pedal and turn the steering
not engage if your vehicle speed is wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4
Low.
225
Rear Axle
For 4WD vehicles • The vehicle speed is too high.

• The left and right rear wheel speed
difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
• The system has malfunctioned and is
accompanied by a message in the
information display. See your
authorized Ford dealer for assistance.
E227398
Pull the 4WD control knob toward you.
For 2WD vehicles
E183740
Turn the control to ON.

Once the indicator light
illuminates in the information
E163170 display, both rear wheel axle
shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the

indicator turns off while driving, one of the
following has occurred:
226
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION Anti-lock Brake System

This system helps you maintain steering
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
control during emergency stops by keeping
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
the brakes from locking.
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the This lamp momentarily
system checked by an authorized dealer. If illuminates when you switch the
your vehicle has continuous vibration or ignition on. If the light does not
shudder in the steering wheel while braking, illuminate during start up, remains on or
have it checked by an authorized dealer. flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
wheels, even under normal driving
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to If the brake warning lamp
brake noise. remains illuminated after you
E144522
See Warning Lamps and release the parking brake, have
Indicators (page 108). the system checked by an authorized
E144522 dealer.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking It also illuminates momentarily when you
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
few times when driving from a car wash or is functional. If it does not illuminate when
standing water to dry the brakes. you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
Brake Over Accelerator by an authorized dealer.
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady Diesel Engine Exhaust Braking (If
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to Equipped)
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the WARNINGS
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe Do not use tow/haul when the road
stop. Shift the transmission to park (P), surface is slippery. Failure to follow
switch the engine off and apply the parking this instruction could result in the
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for loss of control of your vehicle.
any interference. If none are found and the
Do not use diesel engine exhaust
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
braking when the road surface is
to the nearest authorized dealer.
slippery. Failure to follow this
Brake Assist instruction could result in the loss of
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you This feature increases engine braking at
press the brake pedal. It provides higher engine speeds to provide better
maximum braking efficiency as long as you grade descent control with less brake and
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping transmission wear and tear.
distances in critical situations.
Note: Use this when driving downhill and
carrying heavy loads or trailering.
227
Brakes
Benefits of engine braking are: Note: This feature offers smoother, less
• Lower brake temperature. aggressive engine braking during downhill
descents. It may not apply braking if the
• Reduced brake fade. vehicle speed is not increasing, although it
• Longer brake life. will apply full engine braking force when
• Improved driving and trailering control. needed to prevent acceleration. The system
automatically activates the engine brake
Press the button on the switch and, if necessary, downshifts the
bank next to the audio unit to transmission to lower gears to not exceed
E171217
switch the system on or off. your vehicle's set speed when the brake or
accelerator were last released.
There are two engine brake modes, manual
and automatic. Warning Lamp Conditions
Manual Engine Braking • Illuminates when this feature is
switched on and the system is
1. Press the button to switch on manual operating properly. See Warning
engine braking. Lamps and Indicators (page 108).
2. Release the accelerator pedal to • Flashes when the engine brake is
maximize engine braking. disabled due to a fault or the engine
3. Apply the brakes. The transmission does not meet the required braking
downshifts to lower gears. conditions.
Note: The engine braking feature only • Does not illuminate when the switch
functions when you release the accelerator. or indicator is faulty.
Note: You can shift the transmission to You can switch the system on at anytime.
lower gears with progressive range selection The system becomes active once the
(PRS) or manual shifting independent of braking conditions are met.
pressing the brakes.
Braking Conditions
Note: You can also use manual engine
braking with cruise control to improve grade • Your vehicle is in a forward gear.
descent control. • The engine speed is above about 1500
Note: If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise RPM.
Control, the speed control system uses the • Your foot is off the accelerator.
selected engine brake mode, transmission
You can use this feature with tow/haul or
gears, and brakes to maintain the set speed
progressive range selection to provide
and distance to the vehicle being followed.
further increased engine braking. The
Automatic Engine Braking transmission automatically upshifts to
prevent the engine from entering the red
1. Press the button twice to switch on zone on the tachometer. See Automatic
automatic engine braking. Transmission (page 210).
2. Release the accelerator or brake pedal.
The system remembers your vehicle
speed.
228
Brakes
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH If you are parking your vehicle on a grade

or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
The anti-lock braking system does not the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
eliminate the risks when: weight. This is normal and should be no
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in reason for concern. If needed, press and
front of you. hold the service brake pedal down, then
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning. try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
• You take corners too fast. cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
• The road surface is poor. parking brake may need to be serviced or
Note: If the system activates, the brake the vehicle may be overloaded.
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You HILL START ASSIST
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal. WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
PARKING BRAKE parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
WARNING brake.
Always set the parking brake fully You must remain in your vehicle
and make sure the transmission is when the system turns on. At all
placed in park (P). Failure to set the times, you are responsible for
parking brake and engage park could result controlling your vehicle, supervising the
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or system and intervening, if required. Failure
bodily injury. Turn the ignition to the lock to take care may result in the loss of
position and remove the key whenever you control of your vehicle, serious personal
leave your vehicle. injury or death.
The system will turn off if a
Apply the parking brake whenever your malfunction is apparent or if you rev
vehicle is parked. Press the pedal the engine excessively. Failure to
downward to set the parking brake. The take care may result in the loss of control
brake warning lamp in the instrument of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
cluster will illuminate and remains death.
illuminated until the parking brake is
released. The system makes it easier to pull away
To release, pull the brake release lever when your vehicle is on a slope without the
located at the lower left side of the need to use the parking brake.
instrument panel. When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
229
Brakes
automatically once the engine has Vehicles with Automatic Transmission

developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This You cannot turn the system on or off.
is an advantage when pulling away on a When you switch the ignition on, the
slope, for example from a car park ramp, system automatically turns on.
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist

1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill.Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off

Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
230
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when E166706
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order Use the traction and stability control
to increase traction. switch on the instrument panel to switch
the system off or on.
USING TRACTION CONTROL The switch illuminates when traction
control is off.
WARNING When you place your vehicle into
The stability and traction control four-wheel drive low mode the traction
light illuminates steadily if the control disables. Traction control resumes
system detects a failure. Make sure full operation when you put your vehicle
you did not manually disable the traction back into two-wheel drive mode.
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the System Indicator Lights and
stability control and traction control light Messages
is still illuminating steadily, have the The stability and traction control
system serviced by an authorized dealer light:
immediately. Operating your vehicle with E225465
the traction control disabled could lead to • Temporarily illuminates on engine
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, start-up.
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on. • Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be The stability and traction control
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. off light temporarily illuminates
E225466
on engine start-up and stays on
Note: When you switch traction control off, when you switch the traction control
stability control remains fully active. system off.
Note: For additional information on the
traction and stability control systems. See
Using Stability Control (page 233).
Switching the System Off

When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
231
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If a fault occurs in either the stability

control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving • The stability and traction control light
braking system, aftermarket roof illuminates steadily.
racks, suspension, steering system, • The stability control and traction
tire construction and wheel and tire size control systems do not enhance your
may change the handling characteristics vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
of your vehicle and may adversely affect the wheels.
the performance of the electronic stability • The Adaptive Steering system (if
control system. In addition, installing any equipped) automatically changes the
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with steering function to a fixed steering
and adversely affect the electronic stability ratio. See Steering (page 261).
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from If a driving condition activates either the
the front center console, the tunnel, and stability control or the traction control
the front seats in order to minimize the risk system you may experience the following
of interfering with the electronic stability conditions:
control sensors. Reducing the • The stability and traction control light
effectiveness of the electronic stability flashes.
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle • Your vehicle slows down.
rollover, personal injury and death. • Reduced engine power.
Remember that even advanced • A vibration in the brake pedal.
technology cannot defy the laws of • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
physics. It’s always possible to lose
• If the driving condition is severe and
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
pedal may move as the system applies
driving on any road condition can cause
higher brake force.
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or The stability control system has several
property damage. Activation of the features built into it to help you maintain
electronic stability control system is an control of your vehicle:
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road; Electronic Stability Control
this could reduce the operator’s ability to The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
control the vehicle potentially resulting in to prevent skids or lateral slides by
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, applying brakes to one or more of the
personal injury and death. If your electronic wheels individually and, if necessary,
stability control system activates, SLOW reducing engine power.
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each

time you switch the ignition on.
232
Stability Control
Roll Stability Control USING STABILITY CONTROL

The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which Control™ (RSC®)
it changes by applying the brakes to one The system automatically turns on each
or more wheels individually. time you switch the ignition on.
Traction Control The electronic stability control and roll
stability control portions of the system can
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability be turned off.
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See When you shift the transmission into
Using Traction Control (page 231). reverse R, the systems disable.
Use the traction and stability
control switch on the instrument
E130458 panel to switch the systems off
or on.
B
You can switch the traction control portion
of the system off independently.
If you cannot turn the systems off, see the
MyKey chapter for more information.
B
B
A
A B A
E72903
A Vehicle without stability control

skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
233
Stability Control
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Button func- Stability Roll stability Electronic Traction

tions control light control stability control system
control
Default at start- Illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled
up during bulb
check
Button pressed Illuminated Enabled Enabled
1 Disabled
momentarily
Button pressed illuminated
3 Disabled Disabled Disabled
and held for
more than 5
seconds
Double Press Illuminated Enabled Enabled
1
Enabled
2
(Pickup Only)
Button pressed Not illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled
again after
deactivation
Transfer case Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled
switched to
4
4WD Low
1
Electronic stability control has reduced sensitivity compared to fully active system.
2
Traction control has reduced sensitivity compared to fully active system.
3
Lamp light starts blinking for four seconds after entering the press and hold state.
4
Engaging 4WD Low automatically disables roll stability control, electronic stability control
and the traction control systems.
234
Terrain Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION USING HILL DESCENT

CONTROL
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control Press and release the hill
descent in all surface conditions and descent button located on the
circumstances, such as ice or instrument panel. A light in the
E163957
extremely steep grades. Hill descent cluster will illuminate and a chime will
control is a driver assist system and cannot sound when this feature is activated.
substitute for good judgment by the driver. To increase descent speed, press the
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle accelerator pedal until the desired speed
control, crash or serious injury. is reached. To decrease descent speed,
Hill descent control does not provide press the brake pedal until the desired
hill hold at zero miles per hour (0 speed is reached.
kilometers per hour). When stopped,
the parking brake must be applied or the Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it the desired descent speed is reached,
may roll away. remove your feet from the pedals and the
chosen vehicle speed will be maintained.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may
and maintain vehicle speed while be observed during hill descent control
descending steep grades in various surface operation. This is a normal characteristic of
conditions. the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph Hill descent modes
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20
mph (32 km/h), the system remains • At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
armed, but descent speed cannot be set When the Hill Descent Control switch
or maintained. is pressed and Hill Descent Control is
Hill descent control requires a cooling active, the Hill Descent Control telltale
down interval after a period of sustained will flash.
use. The amount of time that the feature • At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
can remain active before cooling varies When the Hill Descent Control switch
with conditions. The system will provide a is pressed and conditions are not
warning in the message center and a chime correct for hill descent activation, the
will sound when the system is about to Hill Descent Control system will be
disengage for cooling. At this time, enabled, the Hill Descent Control
manually apply the brakes as needed to telltale will be solid and a message will
maintain descent speed. display in the information display.
• At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed, the Hill Descent Control
system will be enabled, the telltale in
the cluster will not be illuminated and
a message will be displayed in the
235
Terrain Control (If Equipped)
Refer to the Information Displays for

additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 131).
236
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: The sensing system cannot be turned

off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
WARNINGS of Operation (page 63).
To help avoid personal injury, always The sensing system warns the driver of
use caution when in reverse (R) and obstacles within a certain range of your
when using the sensing system. vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb reflection. When receiving a detection warning, the
Always drive with due care and radio volume reduces to a predetermined
attention. Failure to take care may result level. After the warning goes away, the
in a crash. radio volume returns to the previous level.
Traffic control systems, inclement The sensing system can be switched off
weather, air brakes, external motors through the information display menu or
and fans may affect the correct from the pop-up message that appears
operation of the sensing system.This may once you shift the transmission into reverse
cause reduced performance or false alerts. (R). See General Information (page 114).
The system may not detect small or If a fault is present in the system, a warning
moving objects, particularly those message appears in the information
close to the ground. display and you cannot switch the system
on through the pop-up message. See
Information Messages (page 131).
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false beeps. For example, large trailer REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device The rear sensors are only active when the
that may block the normal detection zone transmission is in reverse (R). As your
of the system. vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the rate of the audible warning increases.
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and When the obstacle is less than 12 in
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors (30 cm) away, the warning sounds
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be continuously. If the system detects a
affected. Do not clean the sensors with stationary or receding object farther than
sharp objects. 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to seconds. Once the system detects an
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned object approaching, the warning sounds
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered again.
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms. See your
authorized technician.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide warnings.
Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer
is connected to prevent these warnings.
237
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
E231381 bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from camera system.
the rear bumper. There may be decreased Reverse your vehicle as slow as
coverage area at the outer corners of the possible, higher speeds may limit
bumper. your reaction time to stop your
The system detects certain objects while vehicle.
the transmission is in reverse (R) : Use caution when the tailgate is ajar.
• Your vehicle is moving toward a If the tailgate is ajar, the camera will
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph be out of position and the video
(5 km/h) or less. image may be incorrect. All guidelines
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a disappear when the tailgate is ajar. Some
moving object is approaching the rear vehicles may not come equipped with
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph guidelines.
(5 km/h) or less. Use caution when turning camera
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of features on or off when the
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving transmission is not in park (P). Make
object is approaching the rear of your sure your vehicle is not moving.
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The rear view camera system displays
The system provides audio warnings only what is behind your vehicle when you shift
when your vehicle is moving or when your the transmission into reverse (R).
vehicle is stationary and the detected During operation, lines appear in the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away display that represents the path of your
from the bumper. vehicle and proximity to objects behind it.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance

indication through the display screen. See
Rear View Camera (page 238).
238
Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees

what is being towed behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once the trailer tow connector is engaged.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
E223144
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
The rear view camera is located on the camera's view. Clean the lens with a
tailgate. soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
Using the Rear View Camera • The camera is misaligned due to
System damage to the rear of your vehicle.
The system uses three types of guides to Camera Guidelines
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
path of your vehicle when reversing. are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving while reversing Note: The centerline is only available if
in a straight line. This can be helpful Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
when backing into a parking space or Note: Some vehicles may not come
aligning your vehicle with another equipped with guidelines.
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the tailgate is ajar, no rear view camera
features are displayed.
Note: If the image does not turn off while
the transmission is not in reverse (R) and
you are driving over a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h), have the system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
239
Parking Aids
Always use caution while reversing.

Objects in the red zone are closest to your
A B C D E vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator
F
E142436
A Active guidelines
B Centerline
C Fixed guideline: Green zone E190459
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone The system will provide an image of your
E Fixed guideline: Red zone vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
F Rear bumper the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an Rear Camera Delay
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, the Selectable settings for this feature are ON
vehicle might deviate from the original and OFF.
intended path.
The active guidelines fade in and out
depending on the steering wheel position.
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.
240
Parking Aids
When shifting the transmission out of • Allows you to see a top-down view of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than the area outside your vehicle, including
park (P), the camera image remains in the the blind spots.
display until: • Provides visibility around your vehicle
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently to you in parking maneuvers such as:
increases. • Centering in a parking space.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P). • Obstacles near vehicle.
• You apply the parking brake on vehicles • Parallel parking.
with a manual transmission.
Camera Views
360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped) The camera button is located on
the instrument panel. Pressing
WARNINGS E205884 the camera button activates the
The 360 degree camera system still system.
requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of the When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D),
windows, and checking the interior and only images from the front cameras are
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. displayed. Press the camera button to
display the front camera image on the
Objects that are close to either display screen.
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the When in reverse (R), only images from the
screen due to the limited coverage of the rear cameras are displayed. When you shift
camera system. into reverse (R), the rear view camera
image automatically shows on the display
Use caution when turning camera screen.
features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make Advanced Camera Views (If Equipped)
sure your vehicle is not moving.
Additional camera views may be
available for vehicles with
E233726
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
specific features. Press the small
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
camera icon shown on the top left corner
speed, except when in reverse (R).
of the display screen to open the camera
The 360 degree camera system consists view menu.
of front, side and rear cameras. The
system: The following camera views can be
• Allows you to see what is directly in accessed in park (P), neutral (N) or drive
front or behind your vehicle. (D) when you press the camera button:
• Provides cross traffic view in front and • Front 360 + Normal: Contains the
behind your vehicle. normal front camera view next to a
360 degree camera view.
• Front Normal View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front of your
vehicle.
241
Parking Aids
• Front Split View: Provides an Keep Out Zone

extended view of what is in front of
your vehicle.
• Rear High View: Provides an image
of your truck bed and can be used to
assist you when backing up to align and
hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer.
• Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view
image from the back of your trailer
while reversing.
The following camera views can be
accessed when you shift into reverse (R):
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the E184448
normal rear camera view next to a 360
degree camera view. Press the zoom The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
(+) button to quickly access Rear yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
Normal View from this screen. vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image extended outside mirror position.
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
• Rear Split View: Provides an Front Camera
extended view of what is behind your
vehicle. WARNING
• Rear High View: Provides an image The front camera system still
of your truck bed and can be used to requires the driver to use it in
assist you when backing up to align and conjunction with looking out of your
hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer. vehicle.
• Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view
image from the back of your trailer
while reversing.
• Trailer Reverse Guidance View:
Provides an image of the rear of your
vehicle using the side cameras, useful
when reversing with a trailer. Use the
arrows at the bottom of the screen to
adjust the side camera position. See
Trailer Reversing Aids (page 275).
E184044
242
Parking Aids
The front video camera, located in the Center High-Mount Stop Lamp
grille, provides a video image of the area Camera (If Equipped)
in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance
to the driver while driving forward at low
speeds. To use the front video camera
system, place the transmission in any gear
except reverse (R). An image will display
once the camera enable button is pressed.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation
and/or road condition.
Side Camera
E231402
The center high-mount stop lamp camera

system is a variant of the rear view camera
that is mounted within the high-mount
stop lamp. It is designed to display the
contents of your truck bed or assist you
when backing up to align and hitch a fifth
wheel or gooseneck trailer. The center
high-mount stop lamp camera is not
meant as an alternative to the rear view
E231401 camera.
The side view camera, located in the
outside mirror, provide a video image of
the area on the sides of your vehicle. It aids
you while parking your vehicle, or when
parking with a trailer attached.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
E233763
The center high-mount stop lamp camera

view contains a dynamic guideline to help
you locate the center of your vehicle. This
view can only be accessed while in reverse
(R).
243
Parking Aids
Auxiliary Camera (If Equipped)

Note: The auxiliary camera works with
trailers up to 50 ft (15 m) in length.
Access the auxiliary camera view
E233727 by pressing the button on the
display screen when in reverse
(R).
The auxiliary camera system is a variant

of the rear view camera. It is designed to
display a rear view image from the back of
a trailer while reversing. The auxiliary
camera is not meant as an alternative to
the rear view camera.
244
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The indicator appears in the

E71340
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
Setting the Cruise Speed
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater 1. Drive to desired speed.
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
USING CRUISE CONTROL pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding Changing the Set Speed
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
result in loss of vehicle control, serious accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
injury or death. change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
When you are going downhill, your you previously set.
vehicle speed could increase above
the set speed. The system does not • Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
apply the brakes. speed in small increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
Note: Cruise control disengages if the until you reach the desired speed. Press
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph SET+ or SET-.
(16 km/h) below the set speed when driving • Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
uphill. the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Canceling the Set Speed

Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed

Press RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off

Note: You erase the set speed when you
E191329
switch the system off.
The cruise controls are on the steering Press OFF when the system is in standby
wheel. mode, or switch the ignition off.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press ON.
245
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE WARNINGS

CONTROL (If Equipped) Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
WARNINGS Do not use adaptive cruise control
Always pay close attention to with a snow plow blade installed.
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
does not replace attentive driving. Failing drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
to pay attention to the road may result in at all times.
a crash, serious injury or death.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
Do not use the adaptive cruise maintain the set gap between you and the
control when entering or leaving a vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
highway, on roads with intersections You can select four gap settings.
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved, The system uses a radar sensor that
or steep slopes. projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with aftermarket trailer
brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
E183737
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the The adaptive cruise controls are on the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss steering wheel.
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive cruise control may not On
detect stationary or slow moving Press ON.
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The indicator, current gap setting
Adaptive cruise control does not and set speed appear in the
detect pedestrians or objects in the E144529
road.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
246
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
E233874 Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
Note: When adaptive cruise control is should always apply the brakes when
active, the speedometer may vary slightly necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
from the set speed displayed in the crash, serious injury or death.
1. Drive to desired speed. Note: When you are following a vehicle and
2. Press SET+ or SET-. you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
3. A green indicator light, the current gap temporary acceleration to help you pass.
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display. Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster. A vehicle graphic
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
E233874 of the lane you are in.
5. A vehicle image illuminates if the • You set a new gap distance.
system detects a vehicle in front of you. The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
247
If the system determines that its maximum The selected gap appears in the
braking level will not be sufficient, an information display as shown by the bars
audible warning sounds when the system in the image.
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
take immediate action.
Graphic display, Dynamic behavior
Setting the Gap Distance bars indicated
between vehicles
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your 1 Sport.
vehicle speed.
2 Normal.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions. 3 Normal.
You can decrease or increase the distance 4 Comfort.
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control. Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed

WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you

override the set speed and gap distance.
E183739
When you override the system,
A Gap decrease. the green indicator light
E144529
illuminates and the vehicle
B Gap increase. image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
E233874
248
Changing the Set Speed Note: When towing with adaptive cruise
control, switch on Tow/Haul Mode and
• Press SET+ or SET- to change the set Diesel Engine Brake.
speed in small increments.
Note: Tow/Haul mode increases the time
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal gaps and allows more distance for braking.
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-. Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- to
downhill driving on steep grades, for
change the set speed in large
example in mountainous areas. The
increments. Release the control when
system needs additional engine braking in
you reach the desired speed.
these situations to reduce the load on the
The system may apply the brakes to slow vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set it from overheating.
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
active. Off
Canceling the Set Speed Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase. Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.
Resuming the Set Speed
Detection Issues
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it. WARNINGS
On rare occasions, detection issues
Press RES. Your vehicle speed returns to
can occur due to the road
the previously set speed and gap setting.
infrastructures, for example bridges,
The set speed displays continuously in the
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
information display when the system is
the system may brake late or
active.
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
Automatic Cancellation responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an required.
audible warning sounds and a message If the system malfunctions, have your
appears in the information display. vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Automatic braking releases.
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
Usage It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
system shuts down if it applies brakes for not illuminate if the system does not
an extended period of time. This allows the detect a vehicle in front of you.
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
249
In these cases, the system may brake late

or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
System Not Available

Note: If you disable electronic stability
control, adaptive cruise control is not
available.
The system may not turn on if there is:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E71621
Detection issues can occur:

A When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
E183741
B With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
these vehicles once they move behind a fascia panel.
fully into your lane.
A message displays if something obstructs
C There may be issues with the the radar signals from the sensor. The
detection of vehicles in front sensor is in the lower grille. The system
when driving into and coming out cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
of a bend or curve in the road. not function when something blocks the
sensor.
250
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:

Cause Action
The surface of the radar is dirty or Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
obstructed. or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is clean but the Wait a short time. It may take several
message remains in the display. minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the Do not use the system in these conditions
radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the Do not use the system in these conditions
road may interfere with the radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
You are in a desert or remote area with no Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
other vehicles and no roadside objects. control.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
The cruise control indicator light

Switching to Normal Cruise replaces the adaptive cruise
Control E71340 control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
WARNING setting does not display, and the system
Normal cruise control will not brake does not respond to lead vehicles.
when your vehicle is approaching Automatic braking remains active to
slower vehicles. Always be aware of maintain set speed.
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise

control to normal cruise control through
251
Driving Aids
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If System Settings

Equipped) The system sensitivity and intensity can
be adjusted through the display screen.
WARNING See General Information (page 114). The
system remembers the last selection. You
The system is designed to aid the do not need to readjust the setting each
driver. It is not intended to replace time you turn on your vehicle.
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and Sensitivity: This setting allows you to
attention. select where in the lane a warning is
provided. Increasing the sensitivity setting
moves the warning zones in closer to your
Note: The system works as long as the vehicle.
camera can detect one lane marking at a
speed above 40 mph (64 km/h).
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
The Lane Keeping System automatically
detects and tracks the road lane markings
using a camera mounted behind the
interior review view mirror. The system
notifies you to stay in your lane when the
front camera detects an unintentional lane
change is likely to occur.
E165517
Switching the System On and Off
A Normal
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
B Increased
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey, Note: The alert diagram illustrates general
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert. zone coverage. It does not provide exact
zone parameters.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
the system. You can only change the mode of the steering wheel vibration. Increasing
and intensity settings. the intensity causes a higher rate of haptic
feedback.
Press the button located on the
center console to switch the • High
E173233 system on or off. • Normal
• Low
252
Driving Aids
System Display • Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.

• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain,
fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (poor headlamp
illumination).
E233874 See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
When you switch on the system, an
Green: Indicates that the system is
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
available or ready to provide a warning on
markings appears in the display screen.
the indicated side(s).
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
still display if adaptive cruise control is
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
enabled.
warning.
While the system is on, the color of the
You can temporarily disable the system at
lane markings change to indicate the
any time by doing the following:
system status.
• Quick braking.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning • Fast acceleration.
on the indicated side(s). This may be • Using your direction indicator.
because: • Evasive steering maneuver.
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• Your turn indicator is active.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature

Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
253
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second

Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION

SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the blind spot information
system as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. The blind spot information system
is not a replacement for careful driving.
E227388
254
Driving Aids
The Blind Spot Information System is System Lights and Messages

designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It is only designed to alert E142442
you to moving vehicles in the blind spot
The Blind Spot Information System
zones.
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer the approaching vehicle is coming from.
than two seconds, the system does not When the Blind Spot Information System
trigger. is alerting on a vehicle and the
corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind
Using the System Spot Information System alert indicator
flashes as an increased warning level.
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive The alert indicator dims when the system
your vehicle forward above 5 mph detects nighttime darkness.
(8 km/h). Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
For automatic transmissions, the Blind an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
Spot Information System remains on while at the same time.
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot System Sensor Blockage
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Note: For automatic transmissions, the
Blind Spot Information System does not
function in reverse (R) or park (P).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except reverse (R).
E231384
255
Driving Aids
The system uses radar sensors that are Blind Spot Information System
located inside the tail lamp on each side with Trailer Tow (If Equipped)
of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow in
front of the sensors or driving in heavy rain
can cause system degradation. Also, other
types of obstructions in front of the sensor
can cause system degradation. This is
referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
appears in the display screen. The alert
E225007
indicators remain ON and the system no
longer provides any warnings. You can The Blind Spot Information System with
clear the warning but the alert indicators Trailer Tow is designed to aid you in
remain illuminated. detecting vehicles that may have entered
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in the detection area zone (A). The detection
two ways: area is on both sides of your vehicle and
trailer, extending rearward from the
• After the blockage in front of the
exterior mirrors to the end of your trailer.
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or When a trailer is attached and the
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic customer has set up a Blind Spot Trailer,
to allow the sensors to detect passing the Blind Spot Information System with
vehicles. Trailer Tow becomes active when driving
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF forward above 6 mph (10 km/h). See
and then back ON. Trailer Reversing Aids (page 275).
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a The Blind Spot Information System with
factory equipped trailer tow module and it Trailer Tow can be turned off in the
is towing a trailer, the sensors will instrument cluster. If the Blind Spot
automatically turn the Blind Spot Information System is turned off, then the
Information System off. If your vehicle has Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer Tow automatically turns off.
tow module, it is recommended to turn the
Blind Spot Information System off
manually. Operating the Blind Spot
Information System without the Blind Spot
Trailer Tow package and a trailer attached
will cause poor system performance.
256
Driving Aids
Setting up a Blind Spot Trailer The width of the trailer is measured at the
front of the trailer. It is not measured at the
widest point of the trailer. The maximum
width at the front of the trailer that the
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).
Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement; just measure
that it is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less.
E225008 • Trailer length measurement:
The trailer length is the distance between
A Trailer length the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the
B Trailer width trailer. The maximum length that the Blind
Spot Information System with Trailer Tow
C Trailer hitch ball
can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
You can set-up any trailer to work with the • Enter length of trailer:
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m).
Tow through the instrument cluster menu.
Toggling up or down using the menu
See General Information (page 114).
buttons will increase/decrease the
While setting up a trailer, a sequence of
measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select the
screens appear asking for trailer
length so that the value is equal to or
information. The Blind Spot Information
within 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measured
System with Trailer Tow specific screens
length. For example, if the actual measured
are described below:
length is 25 ft (7.6 m), then toggle the
• Select type of trailer screen - length in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). When
Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck. the length has been entered, the Blind Spot
The Blind Spot Information System with Information System with Trailer Tow setup
Trailer Tow only supports conventional is saved.
trailers. If fifth wheel or gooseneck is If you do not set up a Blind Spot Trailer, a
selected, the system automatically turns warning appears in the instrument cluster
off. when a trailer is connected stating that the
• Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer system has been turned off due to a trailer
screen? connect.
If no, the Blind Spot Information System Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or
turns off. cargo rack with electrical lighting, then the
length will be 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen. will remain on for trailers 3 ft (1 m) or less.
• Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and Note: Proper measurement and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)? measurement entry is required for Blind
If no, the Blind Spot Information System Spot Information System with Trailer Tow
turns off. to function as designed.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
• Trailer width measurement:
257
Driving Aids
System Operation Large box trailers may cause false alerts

to trigger when driving next to buildings or
If you select a trailer in the display screen near parking cars. A false alert may also
prior to connecting the trailer, the system occur while making a 90-degree turn.
will load that configuration and the
information cluster displays a message Trailers that are 8.5 ft (2.6 m) wide at the
when the trailer is connected. A second front and have a total length greater than
message appears stating Cross Traffic 20 ft (6 m) may have delayed alerts from
Alert has been turned off; the Blind Spot passing vehicles when the vehicle is
Information System with Trailer Tow still passing at high speed.
functions normally when driving forward. A box trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft
If no trailer has been set up and a trailer is (2.6 m) may cause early alerts when you
connected, the instrument cluster provides are over taking a vehicle.
a message indicating a trailer is connected When towing a clam shell or V-Nose box
followed by a message asking to select a trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m),
trailer from the existing list of trailers or to delayed alerts on merging vehicles that are
add a trailer. In order for the Blind Spot traveling the same speed as your vehicle
Information System with Trailer Tow to may occur.
function, an existing trailer must be
selected or a new trailer must be added. If System Errors
the request is ignored or if you exit the
screen, a message appears prompting you If the system senses a problem with the
that the system has been turned off due left or right sensor, the telltale illuminates
to a trailer connect. This message may not and a message appears in the display
appear until your vehicle speed reaches screen. See Information Messages
22 mph (35 km/h). (page 131).
The Blind Spot Information System with Switching the System Off and On
Trailer Tow activates when driving forward
for that particular trailer set up. If the You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
ignition is cycled, the Blind Spot Information System off in the display
Information System with Trailer Tow screen. See General Information (page
continues to function using the last trailer 114). When the Blind Spot Information
selected. System switches off, you do not receive
alerts and the display screen shows a
Trailer Considerations system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
The Blind Spot Information System with
the Blind Spot Information System on or
Trailer Tow is designed to work with any
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft (2.6 m)
or less and total length from the trailer Note: The Blind Spot Information System
hitch ball to the rear of the trailer is 33 ft remembers the last selected on or off
(10.1 m) or less. Different trailers may setting.
cause a slight change in performance as You can also have the Blind Spot
outlined below. Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
258
Driving Aids
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If Using the System

Equipped) Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
WARNING Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.
Do not use the cross traffic alert
system as a replacement for using Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect
the interior and exterior mirrors or vehicles that approach the rear of your
looking over your shoulder before reversing vehicle with a speed up to 37 mph
out of a parking space. The cross traffic (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the
alert system is not a replacement for sensors are partially, mostly or fully
careful driving. obstructed. Reversing slowly helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
Note: When a trailer is detected, Cross
Traffic Alert automatically turns off. In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you right is nearly maximized.
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
E142440
Zone coverage also decreases when

parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
259
Driving Aids
E142441
System Lights, Messages and

Audible Alerts
E231384
The system uses radar sensors that are

located in the tail lamp on each side of
E142442 your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow or
bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an this can cause degraded system
amber alert indicator in the outside mirror performance. See Blind Spot
on the side of your vehicle the approaching Information System (page 254). If the
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
also sounds an audible alert and a Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A Cross
message appears in the display screen Traffic Alert blocked message appears in
indicating a vehicle is coming from the right the display screen when the transmission
or left. Cross Traffic Alert works with the is shifted into reverse (R).
reverse sensing system that sounds its own
series of tones. See Rear Parking Aid
(page 237).
260
Driving Aids
System Limitations System Errors

Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations; If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
situations such as severe weather the left or right sensor a message appears
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor in the display screen. See Information
area may limit vehicle detection and cause Messages (page 131).
false alerts.
Switching the System Off and On
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance: Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects whenever the ignition is switched on and
obstructing the sensors. ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
• Approaching vehicles passing at
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
speeds greater than 37 mph
selected on or off setting.
(60 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
(12 km/h). Alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 114). When
• Backing out of an angled parking spot. you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you do
not receive alerts and the display screen
False Alerts shows a system off message.
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
factory equipped trailer tow module and it switched off permanently at an authorized
is towing a trailer, the sensors will dealer. Once switched off permanently,
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert the system can only be switched back on
off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no at an authorized dealer.
factory equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert STEERING
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross
Traffic Alert performance. Power Steering
Note: The system may illuminate the amber To help prevent damage to the power
alert indicator and sound the audible alert steering system:
during heavy rain even though no vehicle is • Never hold the steering wheel at its
approaching from left or right. furthest turning points (until it stops)
There may be certain instances when there for more than three seconds when the
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert engine is running.
system that illuminates the alert indicator • Do not operate the vehicle with a low
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some power steering pump fluid level (below
amount of false alerts are normal; they are the MIN mark on the reservoir).
temporary and self-correct.
• Some noise is normal during operation.
If excessive, check for low power
steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.
261
Driving Aids
• Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused The adaptive steering system continually
by low power steering fluid. Check for changes the steering ratio with changes to
low power steering pump fluid level vehicle speed, optimizing the steering
before seeking service by your dealer. response in all conditions. The system also
• Do not fill the power steering pump changes when you switch on the
reservoir above the MAX mark on the transmission tow/haul feature. When you
reservoir, as this may result in leaks select the tow/haul button, the adaptive
from the reservoir. steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity
to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds,
If the power steering system breaks down while maintaining the ease of parking and
(or if the engine is turned off), you can maneuverability at low speeds.
steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Note: The adaptive steering system is
designed with a locking device. With the
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: lock engaged, the adaptive steering system
• an improperly inflated tire remains mechanically locked at a fixed
• uneven tire wear steering ratio. You may also notice a click
when you switch the vehicle on or after you
• loose or worn suspension components switch it off, as the lock disengages or
• loose or worn steering components engages.
• improper vehicle alignment Note: If your vehicle loses electrical power
If any steering components are serviced or or detects a fault when you are driving, the
replaced, install new fasteners (many are system automatically shuts down and you
coated with thread adhesive or have retain normal steering function with a fixed
prevailing torque features which may not steering ratio. During this time it is possible
be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut. that the steering wheel may not be straight
Torque fasteners to specifications. when the vehicle is driving straight ahead.
In addition, the driver may notice that the
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds steering wheel angle required to steer the
may also make the steering seem to vehicle may be different.
wander or pull.
Note: During parking maneuvers, the
Adaptive Steering (If Equipped) adaptive steering system balances the driver
work load for various steering wheel inputs
Note: The adaptive steering system has and vehicle loading conditions. Under
diagnostic checks that continuously monitor extreme operating conditions the system
the system. If a fault is detected a message locking device may engage. This strategy
displays in the information display. If a red prevents overheating and permanent
warning message displays, stop your vehicle damage to the adaptive steering system.
as soon as it is safe to do so. The message Typical steering and driving maneuvers
may clear if the fault is no longer present. If allow the system to cool and return to
an adaptive steering system warning normal operation.
message appears each time you start your
vehicle, have the system checked as soon
as possible.
262
Driving Aids
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM

(If Equipped)
Principle Of Operation (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the E156131
brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail When your vehicle rapidly approaches
to press the brake pedal when necessary, another vehicle, a red warning light flashes
you may collide with another vehicle. and a tone sounds.
The collision warning system with The brake support system assists you in
brake support cannot help prevent reducing any collision speed by
all collisions. Do not rely on this pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
system to replace your judgment and the collision continues to increases after the
need to maintain correct distance and audio-visual warning, the brake support
speed. prepares the brake system for rapid
braking. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes, but if
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
the brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
brakes apply full stopping power.
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active Using the Collision Warning System
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h). WARNING
Note: The collision warning system will be The collision warning system’s brake
unavailable if you disable the electronic support reduces collision speed only
stability control. See Using Stability if you brake your vehicle before any
Control (page 233). collision. As in any typical braking situation,
you must press your brake pedal.
You can use your information display

E156130 control to adjust the collision warning
The system alerts you of certain collision system's sensitivity or to turn the system
risks. The system's sensor detects your On or Off. Your vehicle will remember
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles these settings across key cycles. You may
traveling in the same direction as your change the collision warning system
vehicle. sensitivity to any one of three possible
settings. See General Information (page
114).
263
Driving Aids
Note: It is recommended that you turn the Blocked Sensors

collision warning system off if a snow plow
or similar object is installed in such a way
that it may block the radar sensor. Your
vehicle will remember the selected setting
across key cycles.
Note: When possible, the manufacturer
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced E183741
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information (page If a blocked sensor message appears in the
114). information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
the sensor, and the collision warning
system will not work. Possible causes for
the blocked sensor message and corrective
actions are listed below.
Cause Action
The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
or obstructed obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is Wait a short time. The radar may take
clean but the message remains in the several minutes to reset after you remove
display the obstruction
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air The collision warning system is temporarily
interferes with the radar signals disabled. Shortly after weather conditions
improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road The collision warning system is temporarily
surface interferes with the radar signals disabled. Shortly after weather conditions
improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
264
Driving Aids
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support only reduces collision speed
if you first apply your brakes. You
must brake as you would in any typical
braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,

there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).
Damage to the front end of your vehicle
may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.
265
Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT Tire and Loading Label Information

Example:
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
E198719
Payload
PAYLOAD
E143816
266
Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

of cargo and passengers that your Rating)
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears GAWR is the maximum allowable
on the Tire and Loading label. The weight that a single axle (front or
label is either on the B-pillar or the rear) can carry. These numbers
edge of the driver door. Vehicles are on the Safety Compliance
exported outside the US and Certification label. The label is
Canada may not have a tire and located on the door hinge pillar,
loading label. Look for “The door-latch post, or the door edge
combined weight of occupants that meets the door-latch post,
and cargo should never exceed next to the driver seating position.
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum The total load on each axle must
payload. The payload listed on the never exceed its Gross Axle
Tire and Loading Information label Weight Rating.
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
plant. If you install any additional Rating)
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload. GVWR is the maximum allowable
Subtract the weight of the weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
equipment from the payload listed This includes all options,
on the Tire and Loading label. equipment, passengers and cargo.
When towing, trailer tongue It appears on the Safety
weight or king pin weight is also Compliance Certification label.
part of payload. The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
WARNING door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
The appropriate loading seating position.
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume The gross vehicle weight must
capacity (how much space is never exceed the Gross Vehicle
available) or by payload capacity Weight Rating.
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
267
Load Carrying
Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle’s braking system is rated

Example: for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
E198828 exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
WARNING
The gross combined weight must
Exceeding the Safety never exceed the Gross Combined
Compliance Certification Weight Rating.
label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard Note: For trailer towing
vehicle handling or performance, information refer to the RV and
engine, transmission and/or Trailer Towing Guide available at
structural damage, serious an authorized dealer.
damage to the vehicle, loss of WARNINGS
control and personal injury.
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Maximum Loaded Trailer Safety Compliance Certification
Weight label.
Maximum loaded trailer weight is Do not use replacement tires
the highest possible weight of a with lower load carrying
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can capacities than the original tires
tow. Consult an authorized dealer because they may lower your
(or the RV and Trailer Towing vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
Guide available at an authorized limitations. Replacement tires
dealer) for more detailed with a higher limit than the original
information. tires do not increase the GVWR
GCWR (Gross Combined and GAWR limitations.
Weight Rating) Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
GCWR is the maximum allowable in serious damage to your vehicle,
weight of the vehicle and the personal injury or both.
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
268
Load Carrying
Steps for determining the Helpful examples for calculating

correct load limit: the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants Suppose your vehicle has a
and cargo should never exceed 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your and luggage capacity. You decide
vehicle’s placard. to go golfing. Is there enough load
2. Determine the combined capacity to carry you, four of your
weight of the driver and friends and all the golf bags? You
passengers that will be riding and four friends average 220
in your vehicle. pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
3. Subtract the combined weight 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
of the driver and passengers The calculation would be: 1400 -
from XXX kg or XXX lb. (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
4. The resulting figure equals the - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
available amount of cargo and enough load capacity in your
luggage load capacity. For vehicle to transport four friends
example, if the “XXX” amount and your golf bags. In metric units,
equals 1,400 lb. and there will the calculation would be: 635
be five 150 lb. passengers in kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
your vehicle, the amount of (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
available cargo and luggage 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
load capacity is 650 lb. Suppose your vehicle has a
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.) 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
5. Determine the combined and luggage capacity. You and
weight of luggage and cargo one of your friends decide to pick
being loaded on the vehicle. up cement from the local home
That weight may not safely improvement store to finish that
exceed the available cargo and patio you have been planning for
luggage load capacity the past two years. Measuring the
calculated in Step 4. inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
6. If your vehicle will be towing a for twelve 100-pound
trailer, load from your trailer (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
will be transferred to your you have enough load capacity to
vehicle. Consult this manual to transport the cement to your
determine how this reduces the home? If you and your friend each
available cargo and luggage weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
load capacity of your vehicle. the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
269
Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do BED RAMPS (If Equipped)

not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In WARNINGS
metric units, the calculation would When sliding the ramp up or down,
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 take care not to get your fingers or
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = hands caught in the mechanism.
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. Failure to follow this instruction could
You will need to reduce the load result in personal injury.
weight by at least 240 pounds Make sure that you correctly install
(104 kilograms). If you remove the ramp to the tailgate plate. Failure
three 100-pound (45-kilogram) to follow this instruction could result
cement bags, then the load in personal injury.
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x Do not step or sit on the ramp when
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - it is in the stowed position. Failure to
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In Only install the ramp within the
metric units, the calculation would prescribed ramp angles. Failure to
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
Note: The ramp maximum capacity is
The above calculations also 800 lb (363 kg).
assume that the loads are Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground
positioned in your vehicle in a before usage.
manner that does not overload Note: For loading and unloading
the front or the rear gross axle equipment, your ramp should be set
weight rating specified for your between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees
vehicle on the Safety Compliance downward to avoid damage to the ramp
Certification label. claw and tailgate plate.
Note: When using your vehicle for off-road
Special Loading Instructions operation, remove the bed ramps from the
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks vehicle and store them in a safe location
and Utility-type Vehicles away from your vehicle.
WARNING Using the Bed Ramp

Loaded vehicles may handle 1. Remove the front and rear cables.
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
270
Load Carrying
E194380 E194382
2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew 5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate
the cam bolts. plate.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp
holder.
E211150
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of

the ramp to the open position.
Note: You can use a smooth surface tool
to rotate the stops.
E194383
6. Pull the location pin outward and

extend the ramp until the pin is seated
in the usage position, then set the ramp
on even ground.
271
Load Carrying
Stowing the Bed Ramp Installing the Ramp Holder

1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin
outward.
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position
until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has
been applied for your bed size.
3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate
plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the closed position.
E194387
1. Hook the top of the ramp holder over

the mounting plate and rotate the
ramp holder into position.
E194391
5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.

6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam
lever arms.
E194388
7. Attach the front and rear cables.
Note: Make sure you properly secure the 2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards
locking cable. If the locking cable is into the installed position.
unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise. 3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.
272
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER Note: To prevent your trailer from

accumulating distance, and the
WARNINGS trailer information status appearing
Do not exceed the GVWR or when you restart your vehicle after
the GAWR specified on the disconnecting your trailer, you must
certification label. deactivate your trailer. Using the
information display, go to the
Towing trailers beyond the Towing menu and then the Select
maximum recommended Trailer option. Select the No active
gross trailer weight exceeds the trailer option. See Information
limit of your vehicle and could Displays (page 114).
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural Your vehicle may have electrical
damage, loss of vehicle control, items, such as fuses or relays,
vehicle rollover and personal related to towing. See Fuses
injury. (page 318).
Do not exceed the lowest Your vehicle may have ability to
rating capacity for your modify trailer towing features.
vehicle or trailer hitch. Overloading See General Information (page
your vehicle or trailer hitch can 114).
impair your vehicle stability and Your vehicle's load capacity
handling. Failure to follow this designation is by weight, not by
instruction could result in the loss volume, so you cannot necessarily
of control of your vehicle, personal use all available space when
injury or death. loading a vehicle or trailer.
Do not cut, drill, weld or Towing a trailer places an extra
modify the trailer hitch. load on your vehicle's engine,
Modifying the trailer hitch could transmission, axle, brakes, tires
reduce the hitch rating. and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
273
Towing
Load Placement When driving with a trailer or

payload, a slight takeoff vibration
To help minimize how trailer or shudder may be present due to
movement affects your vehicle the increased payload weight.
when driving: Additional information regarding
• Load the heaviest items closest proper trailer loading and setting
to the trailer floor. your vehicle up for towing is
• Load the heaviest items located in another chapter of this
centered between the left and manual. See Load Limit (page
right side trailer tires. 266).
• Load the heaviest items above You can also find information in
the trailer axles or just slightly the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
forward toward the trailer available at your authorized
tongue. Do not allow the final dealer, or online.
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online

Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
274
Towing
TRAILER REVERSING AIDS Principle of Operation

Trailer reverse guidance is a driver
Trailer Reverse Guidance assistance feature that helps take the
WARNING guesswork out of getting your trailer
positioned where you want it, quickly and
Driving while distracted can result in easily, when driving in reverse (R).
injury. We strongly recommend that Each trailer you use with your vehicle has
you use extreme caution when using any to be setup once. Sticker placement is
device that may take your focus off the extremely important and there are specific
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe placement rules.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend Setting Up Trailer Reverse
against the use of any hand-held device Guidance
voice-operated systems when possible. Note: Your vehicle saves the trailer
Make sure you are aware of all applicable information when you enter it into the
local laws that may affect the use of system. A maximum of 10 trailers can be
electronic devices while driving. added to the system.
Note: You must always be aware of the Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer
vehicle and trailer combination and the Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect
surrounding environment. the electrical wiring harness. Check to
Note: The system does not detect or make sure that the wiring is working. See
prevent the vehicle or trailer from making Essential Towing Checks (page 287).
contact with obstacles in the surrounding Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
environment. level surface.
Note: Keep in mind that the front end of
the vehicle swings out when changing the
direction of the trailer.
Note: The system relies on user
measurements to determine sticker
placement and system limits. It is critical to
take the key measurements correctly. E209759
Incorrect measurements can result in the Make sure that the trailer and truck are in
improper function of the system up to and line with each other. You can do this by
including contact between the vehicle and putting the truck in drive (D) and pulling
trailer. straight forward.
Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
backing up. The system is not a replacement
for proper use of the throttle and brake
pedals.
Note: Some features associated with this
system do not work until you set it up.
E209760
275
Towing
Step 2: Follow the Information Display 8. A message appears in the information

Prompts display asking if you want to add trailer
reverse guidance. Select Yes to
1. Use the steering wheel controls to continue.
navigate to the towing menu.
9. Straighten out the trailer, if necessary.
2. Select Trailer Setup from the available
options. 10. The information display directs you
to the quick start guide for how to
3. Select Add a Trailer and press OK to proceed. The steps are also shown
confirm. here.
4. The system asks you to name the
trailer. Use the steering wheel controls Step 3: Placing the Target
to choose from the alphanumeric Place the entire sticker in the gray zone on
characters. Press the right arrow to the trailer outlined in the diagram. The
advance to the next character. When sticker is in the back cover pocket of the
you finish naming the trailer, press OK quick start guide.
to confirm.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the
5. Select the type of brake system for
following procedure.
your trailer. Select DEFAULT if your
trailer has electric, surge or no brakes. Note: Make sure nothing obstructs the rear
Press OK to select and advance to the view cameras view of the sticker. For
next screen example, items such as a jack handle or
Note: The default option is low. This is wiring.
recommended for most trailers. If the Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and
trailer's brakes require more initial voltage, clean horizontal surface. For best results
or if you prefer more aggressive braking, then apply the sticker when temperatures are
select the other options as required. above 32°F (0°C).
6. The system asks you to select your Note: Do not move stickers after they are
trailer type. You can use the system placed. Do not re-use any stickers if
with conventional, fifth wheel and removed.
goose neck trailers. For fifth wheel and
goose neck trailers, set up and sticker
placement are not required, however
some of the features do not operate
automatically with these trailer types.
Use the steering wheel controls to
select your trailer type.
Note: You can still manually control the
camera views on the touchscreen to help
you reverse goose neck and fifth wheel E224482
trailers.
7. If your vehicle includes a blind spot
information system, the system
prompts you to setup the trailer blind
spot feature. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 254).
276
Towing
Use the supplied measurement card, a

tape measure and pen to carefully mark
the area where to attach the sticker. The
sticker is supplied in the back cover pocket
of your quick start guide. Make sure the
entire sticker is within the gray zone
between the two arcs or distance markers
on the diagram, and is also visible in the
rear view camera display. It should be
between 7–20 in (17–51 cm) from the
trailer ball hitch.
Once you have found the correct location,
place the sticker.
Step 4: Take Measurements E231167
After you place the sticker on the trailer

you must take some measurements. Distance A
Note: You must take accurate The horizontal distance from the license
measurements for the system to operate plate to the center of the ball hitch on the
properly. trailer.
Note: Round measurement figures to the Distance B
nearest half inch.
The horizontal distance from the center of
Note: Round upward if the measured length the ball hitch to the center of the sticker.
is a quarter inch or greater. Round
downward if the measure length is less than Distance C
a quarter inch. For example 12.25 in
(31.11 cm) would be rounded up to 12.50 in The distance from the rear view camera to
(31.75 cm). 12.13 in (30.8 cm) would be the center of the sticker.
rounded down to 12.00 in (30.48 cm). Distance D
Note: Use consistent metric or imperial
The distance from the tailgate to the
units as required by your country or vehicle.
center of the trailer axle (single axle
The measurement card requires you to trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers
record four key distances (A, B, C, D). with dual axles or more).
Record the trailer name for these
measurements.
277
Towing
Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the Note: For best results, do not calibrate the
Information Display system at night.
Using the measurements you recorded, Using Trailer Reverse Guidance
enter the required data into the system.
Follow the on screen prompts to enter 1. Shift into reverse (R). Press the rear
each of the measurements taken in step camera button to expand the menu.
4. Use the up and down arrows to increase 2. Press the trailer icon.
or decrease the numbers as necessary.
Press OK to confirm each measurement. 3. Select the applicable trailer in the
Once you add the last measurement, the information display.
information display shows all of the 4. When in trailer reverse guidance mode,
entered measurements. You can choose you can see the camera view on the
to confirm or change the measurements. side your trailer is moving, or both sides
when the trailer is straight behind you.
Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location When the views change with the trailer
Check the rear view camera display to see direction, it is called auto mode. For
if the system identifies the sticker. The example, if you turn the trailer to the
system marks the sticker with a red circle. right, you see the right side of your
Confirm that the red circle shows over the vehicle and trailer. You can switch this
sticker image in the rear view camera view manually at any time by using the
display. arrow keys. To return to auto mode,
press the auto button.
Note: If the system cannot locate the
Note: Auto mode is the default setting.
sticker, try cleaning the camera lens. Make
sure the sticker is within the zone as Use the view that helps you the most when
indicated in step 3. reversing your vehicle and trailer.
The information display shows a Normal rear view camera view.
confirmation message when you Use this feature when you want
E263194
successfully confirm the target. to see your trailer hitch or what
is directly behind your vehicle.
Calibrating the System
Straight back-up mode. Use this
To complete setup, drive your vehicle feature when you want to keep
straight forward between 4–24 mph E224484
your trailer completely in line
(6–39 km/h), as directed by the with your truck. In this mode, a steering
information display. wheel graphic shows you which way to turn
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight your steering wheel to keep your trailer
during the calibration process. If the steering straight.
wheel is in a turned position, the calibration Note: It may be helpful to shift your vehicle
pauses. The information display prompts into drive (D), pull forward and straighten
you to drive straight forward to complete out the vehicle and trailer before engaging
the calibration. straight back-up mode.
The information display shows a message Left and right arrows let you see other
during calibration and after calibration is views regardless of your trailer angle. Use
complete them to switch views manually.
278
Towing
Note: If you're using a fifth wheel or goose When you turn the steering wheel, a small
neck trailer, or if you have not set up the representation shows you two zones to
trailer reverse guidance system, auto view warn you of a possible jackknife condition.
is not available. The view shows your truck and trailer
To change your view, use the arrows. You position and provides visual feedback to
can see the following views: help avoid a jackknife condition entirely.
• Full driver. The yellow zone warns you of a potential

jackknife position. When you enter into this
• Partial driver. zone, it is recommended to put your vehicle
• 50/50. back into drive (D) and pull forward.
• Partial passenger. Moving forward helps put the truck and
trailer back into an in-line position.
• Full passenger.
The red zone indicates that you need to
Zoom. Use this feature to zoom put the truck into drive (D) and pull
in the camera view. forward immediately.
E224485
Return. Ths feature takes you Troubleshooting

back to the 360-degree camera
E224486
system and out of the trailer Note: The system requires a clear view of
reverse guidance feature. the sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean for
Auto. Ths feature returns you to the system to operate correctly.
auto view.
E224487
Setup
In addition to multiple view options, your The system is designed to be used with a
touchscreen adds some features to give wide variety of trailers. However, there are
you more information. For example, after some trailers that do not have a proper
setting up a conventional trailer, the surface and location to mount the sticker.
display shows a small top-view These trailers are not supported. Attempts
representation of your truck and trailer. to place the sticker on a surface that does
This representation shows two, not meet the sticker placement
different-colored lines: A black line shows requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup
you where your trailer is in relation to your instruction, or entering inaccurate
vehicle. A white line gives you a projection measurements to proceed through setup
of where your trailer may go based on your can result in improper system function.
current steering wheel position Accurate measurements are critical to
Note: When you move the steering wheel, correct system function. If you need to
the white line indicates where the trailer check measurements or change them, you
may go based on your steering wheel input. can access them through the trailer menus
in the information display. Choose the
When you turn your steering wheel to the option to change the sticker from the
left, the trailer moves to the right. When you change trailer settings menu. It is not
turn your steering wheel to the right, the necessary to remove the sticker if you are
trailer moves to the left. just reviewing or changing measurements.
279
Towing
The following menu warnings or difficulties Measurement C has reached maximum or

may occur during setup. Tips to resolve minimum value:
them are listed below. • Make sure you follow the sticker
Measurement A has reached maximum or placement instructions in step 3 of the
minimum value: setup. Stickers placed outside the
• The system is designed to work with allowed zone adversely affect the
drawbars that have a license plate to system performance and could cause
hitch ball center measurement of improper feature function. If you have
9–16 in (229–406 mm) when installed. met all the criteria for sticker
Do not attempt to use drawbars that placement and you see this message,
have a length outside this range as the sticker is either too far below or too
system performance degrades and close to the camera to properly
could cause improper system function. recognize the sticker. In order for the
system to correctly operate, the sticker
• Make sure that the measurement being height must be lowered if you receive
made is the horizontal distance only the minimum warning or the sticker
from license plate and the hitch ball height must be raised if you receive the
center. A straight line distance that maximum warning.
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and makes • Only one sticker can be placed on
it inaccurate. Inaccurate the trailer for correct system
measurements degrade system function. The previous sticker must
performance and could cause improper be removed or covered so only one
system function. See step 4 of the sticker is visible to the camera.
setup instruction to review the • Measurement B and C must be
measurement instructions. measured again if a new sticker is
placed on the trailer.
Measurement B has reached maximum or
minimum value: Measurement D has reached maximum or
• Make sure you follow the sticker minimum value:
placement instruction in step 3 of the • Make sure that the measurement being
setup. Stickers placed outside the made is the horizontal distance only
allowed zone adversely affect the from tailgate to the center of the single
system performance and could cause axle or the center of all the axles on the
improper feature function. trailer. See step 4 of the setup for
• Make sure that the measurement being additional measurement instructions.
made is the horizontal distance only The system does not support trailer
from center of sticker to the hitch ball lengths outside the range allowed by
center. A straight line distance that the information display.
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and
causes an inaccurate value to be
entered into the system. See step 4 of
the setup for additional measurement
instructions.
280
Towing
System is circling something beside the The system is not available:

sticker or system cannot find the sticker: • The system relies on many
• Make sure the rear camera is clean and sub-systems in your vehicle to correctly
the sticker is clearly visible in the operate. If those sub-systems are not
camera image. Clean the camera and correctly operating, the system may
sticker if necessary. not be available.
• The camera system uses the entered • Low battery voltage is one
measurements to help locate the condition which prevents the
sticker. Inaccurate sticker system from operating. Please
measurements degrade the system's make sure the battery is correctly
ability to locate the sticker. Verify the charged if the system is not
measurements entered into the system available.
are accurate. • You may need to drive your vehicle
• Remove the incorrectly circled label or straight forward above 25 mph
decal if possible. (40 km/h) before the system is
• If you cannot resolve the issue, a new available again.
sticker location should be tried. The • If the message still displays, take your
new sticker location must meet the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
requirements noted in step 3 of the service.
setup instructions. Only one sticker can Sticker lost:
be placed on the trailer for correct
system function. The previous sticker • Check for the following if you receive
must be removed or covered so only the lost sticker message when using
one sticker is visible to the camera. the system.
• Stop your vehicle as soon as the
Calibration message displays.
The system monitors various vehicle • Make sure the sticker is visible in
parameters to ensure your vehicle is being the rear view camera image.
driven straight and the trailer straight • Clean the sticker and camera to
behind your vehicle. Any steering input or make sure they are unobstructed.
trailer movement pauses the calibration.
• Remove any items that may be
For best results: blocking the view of the sticker.
• Use a long, straight and smooth road Depending on your trailer
when attempting to calibrate. configuration and any equipment
mounted to your trailer, it is
• Drive straight forward.
possible for the sticker to be
• Drive between 4–24 mph blocked from the view of the
(6–39 km/h). camera as it rotates on the hitch
ball, but not be blocked during
System Operation setup. Remove the obstruction if
The following warnings or difficulties may possible. It may be necessary to
occur during feature operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed below.
281
Towing
remove the sticker from its current slowly turning the wheel until the trailer
location if the obstruction cannot is following your desired path and then
be cleared. Place a new sticker that holding the wheel in that position. If
is visible to the camera in all you would like to recalibrate the
positions of the trailer behind your system for straight backing, you can do
vehicle. so with the following procedure.
• You can change your sticker • Go into the trailer menu, select
location by going into the trailer trailer options, select change trailer
menu, selecting trailer options, setting and then select the change
selecting change trailer settings sticker option. Your saved
and then selecting the change measurements show. Do not
sticker option. The previous sticker change them, but continue to
must be removed. ONLY ONE confirm measurements. Once you
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED confirm the measurements, the
ON THE TRAILER FOR CORRECT system then prompts you to
SYSTEM FUNCTION. perform the calibration procedure.
• The camera system uses the Note: The system is designed to be used
entered measurements to help with the same trailer connection every time
locate the sticker. Inaccurate the trailer is chosen from the selection
measurements reduce the system’s menu. Using a different drawbar or a
ability to locate the sticker. Check different pin hole, on drawbars with more
the measurements entered into the than one pin hole, when connecting the
system are correct. Refer to the drawbar to your vehicle affects the trailer
step 4 of trailer reverse guidance measurements. Take the measurements
setup for instructions on again and update if required.
measurements.
• You can change your measurement TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
by going into the trailer menu,
selecting trailer options, selecting Equipped)
change trailer setting and then
selecting the change sticker option. WARNING
Disregard the prompt to remove
this sticker and continue to the next Turning off trailer sway control
step if you only plan to update the increases the risk of loss of vehicle
measurements for the current control, serious injury or death. Ford
sticker location. does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
System does not backup straight: may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
• Factors such as the drawbar the driver has significant trailer towing
connection to the hitch receiver, road experience, and can control trailer sway
camber, road grade and compliance in and maintain safe operation.
the trailer suspension can influence
how straight the system is able to Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
reverse your trailer when the wheel is sway, but reduces it once it begins.
not turned. You can compensate for
the trailer drifting to the right or left by Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
282
Towing
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too Note: Make sure to take into
high, the system may activate multiple consideration trailer2 frontal2 area.
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed. Do not exceed 60 ft (5.6 m ) trailer
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at frontal area for conventional
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces 2
trailers. Do not exceed 75 ft (6.9
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, 2
the stability control light flashes and the m ) trailer frontal area for fifth
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE wheel and gooseneck trailers.
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle Note: Exceeding this limitation
down, then pull safely to the side of the may significantly reduce the
road and check for proper tongue load and performance of your towing
trailer load distribution. See Load vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
Carrying (page 266). low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
RECOMMENDED TOWING performance and fuel economy.
WEIGHTS Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
WARNING by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
You must use the heavy-duty starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
drawbar pin supplied with elevation point.
your vehicle when using the Note: Certain states require
heavy-duty hitch. Failure to follow electric trailer brakes for trailers
this instruction could result in the over a specified weight. Be sure to
loss of control of your vehicle, check state regulations for this
personal injury or death. specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
Note: Vehicles with a heavy-duty to this specified weight, as your
hitch must use the drawbar pin vehicle's electrical system may not
stamped 21,000 LBS. You can include the wiring connector
obtain a replacement drawbar pin needed to use electric trailer
at your authorized dealer. brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight
calculated using the formula
following the chart.
283
Towing
Pickup and box delete

Maximum
Vehicle Engine Rear axle ratio GCWR
19,500 lb
3.73 (8,845 kg)
6.2L gas
22,000 lb
4.30 (9,979 kg)
F-250
23,500 lb
6.7L diesel 3.31, 3.55 (10,660 kg)
25,700 lb
6.7L diesel
1
3.31, 3.55 (11,657 kg)
19,500 lb
3.73 (8,845 kg)
6.2L gas
F-350 single 23,000 lb
4.30
rear wheel (10,433 kg)
28,700 lb
6.7L diesel 3.31, 3.55 (13,018 kg)
3.73 20,000 lb
(9,072 kg)
6.2L gas
4.30 23,500 lb
F-350 dual rear (10,660 kg)
wheel 3.55 36,000 lb
(16,329 kg)
6.7L diesel
4.10 40,000 lb
(18,144 kg)
4.30 42,800 lb
F-450 6.7L diesel (19,414 kg)
1 Trailer Tow Package.
284
Towing
Chassis cab
Rear axle Maximum
Vehicle Engine ratio GCWR
3.73 19,500 lb
(8,845 kg)
6.2L gas
F-350 single 4.30 23,000 lb
rear wheel (10,433 kg)
3.73 26,500 lb
6.7L diesel (12,020 kg)
3.73 20,000 lb
(9,072 kg)
6.2L gas
4.30 23,500 lb
F-350 dual rear (10,660 kg)
wheel 3.73 31,000 lb
(14,062 kg)
6.7L diesel
4.10 32,000 lb
(14,515 kg)
6.8L gas 4.88 28,000 lb
(12,701 kg)
F-450 dual rear 4.10 32,000 lb
wheel (14,515 kg)
6.7L diesel
34,500 lb
4.30 1
(15,649 kg)
4.88 28,000 lb
6.8L gas (12,701 kg)
F-550 dual rear
wheel (17500/ 4.10 32,000 lb
18000 lb (14,515 kg)
GVWR) 6.7L diesel
35,000 lb
4.30 (15,876 kg)
285
Towing
Chassis cab
Rear axle Maximum
Vehicle Engine ratio GCWR
4.88 28,000 lb
6.8L gas (12,701 kg)
F-550 dual rear
wheel (19000/ 32,000 lb
4.88
19500 lb (14,515 kg)
GVWR) 6.7L diesel
40,000 lb
4.88 1
(18,144 kg)
1 Requires optional GCWR Package.
This equals the maximum loaded

Calculating the Maximum trailer weight for this combination.
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
1. Start with the gross combined your vehicle. Reduce the total
weight rating for your vehicle payload by the final trailer tongue
model and axle ratio. See the weight.
previous chart.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
2. Subtract all of the following to determine the maximum trailer
that apply to your vehicle: weight allowed for your vehicle if
• Vehicle curb weight. you are not sure.
• Hitch hardware weight, such as For additional information on
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight trailer weights, reference the RV
distributing hardware. & Trailer Towing Guide available
• Driver weight. at your authorized dealer, or
online.
• Passenger(s) weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online

Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
286
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Trailer Towing Connector
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum vertical
load on the tow ball. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:

• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
E163167
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer. When attaching the trailer wiring connector
• See the instructions included with to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
towing accessories for the proper connector that works with the vehicle and
installation and adjustment trailer functions. Some seven-position
specifications. connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
connector and works correctly with your
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
vehicle.
maintenance information. See
Color Function
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives Yellow Left turn signal and stop lamp
you.
White Ground (-)
See Load Limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found Blue Electric brakes
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your Green Right turn signal and stop
vehicle's load. lamp
Vehicles with a diesel engine have an Orange Battery (+)
engine braking feature. See General
Information (page 227). Brown Running lights
Remember to account for the trailer Grey Reverse lights
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Some vehicles will have the ability to
modify trailer towing features. See
General Information (page 114).
287
Towing
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a

factory brake controller, the Battery (+)
Orange wire is powered when you start the A B C D E
engine and you apply the brakes at least
once when a trailer with brake lamps is
connected. If your vehicle is not equipped
with a factory brake controller, relays control
the system and it becomes active when you
power on your vehicle.
Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear

View Camera System
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Use the centerline (B) guideline to assist
you in setting your steering wheel properly
to help align the trailer hitch and tongue.
F
E142436
A Active guidelines.
B Centerline.
C Fixed guideline: Green zone.
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone.
E Fixed guideline: Red zone.
F Rear bumper.
Fixed guidelines are always shown in the

display, but the active guidelines only
display when the steering wheel is turned.
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, your
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
288
Towing
The active guidelines fade in and out Installing a 3 Inch Drawbar with 3/4
depending on the steering wheel position. Inch Pin Hole
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Refer to the Rear View Camera section for
additional information. See Rear View
Camera (page 238).
Hitches
Note: On pick-up trucks, the trailer hitch
provided on this vehicle enhances crash
protection for the fuel system. Do not
remove!
Note: Do not cut, drill, weld or modify trailer
E247903
hitches. Modifying trailer hitches can reduce
hitch rating. The pin sleeve should be inserted in the
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto 3/4 inch pin hole of the 3 inch drawbar.
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% for conventional towing or
15-25% for fifth wheel towing of the total
weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Hitch Components (If Equipped)

The following components are required.
Some are provided in certain vehicles.
• A trailer hitch with a 3 inch receiver and
5/8 inch hitch pin rated to tow up to
21,000 lb (9,525 kg). E247902
• A hitch pin sleeve stored in the glove Remove reducers before inserting the 3
box to be used when mounting the 3 inch drawbar. Insert the drawbar into hitch
inch drawbar. receiver.
• A cotter pin to help keep the hitch pin
in place.
289
Towing
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle

without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
E247909
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
Put the 5/8 inch hitch pin through pin hole. brake controls as required by law or the
Place the cotter pin around the neck of trailer manufacturer.
hitch pin.
Fifth-wheel Trailer Hitch (If Equipped)
Weight-distributing Hitches
Note: The mounting pads in the bed are
WARNING specifically designed for certain fifth-wheel
trailer hitches and gooseneck ball hitches.
Do not adjust the spring bars so that Do not use these mounting pads for other
your vehicle's rear bumper is higher purposes.
than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the Note: Contact an authorized dealer to
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause purchase gooseneck and fifth-wheel hitches
unpredictable handling, and could result that are compatible with your vehicle.
in serious personal injury. Your vehicle may be equipped with a
fifth-wheel prep package. This package
When hooking-up a trailer using a enables your vehicle to accept certain
weight-distributing hitch, always use the fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck
following procedure: ball hitches. The fifth-wheel trailer hitch
attaches to the four mounting pads in the
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
pick-up bed. An optional 7-pin trailer wiring
trailer, on a level surface.
connector may be in the bed as well. The
2. Measure the height to the top of your gooseneck ball hitch is a separate
vehicle's front wheel opening on the mounting pad from the fifth-wheel hitch,
fender. This is H1. located in the center of the bed.
290
Towing
Shorter pick-up boxes, such as the 6½-foot Note: If you install the hook with the latch
box on the F-250 and F-350, provide less facing toward the rear of your vehicle, you
clearance between the cab and the may not be able to fully close the safety
fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailer chain hook latch. If this occurs, install the
compared to longer box pick-ups, such as hook with the latch facing toward the front
an 8-foot box on the F-250 or F-350. When of your vehicle.
selecting a trailer and tow vehicle, it is
critical to check that this combination Trailer Brakes
provides clearance between the front of
the trailer and tow vehicle for turns up to WARNING
90 degrees. Failure to follow this Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
recommendation could result in the trailer brake system directly to your
contacting the cab of the tow vehicle vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
during tight turns that are typical during may not have enough braking power and
low-speed parking and turning maneuvers. your chances of having a collision greatly
This contact could result in damage to the increase.
trailer and tow vehicle.
Safety Chains Electric brakes and manual, automatic or

surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the install them properly and adjust them to
bumper. Always connect the safety chains the manufacturer's specifications. The
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer trailer brakes must meet local and federal
hitch. regulations.
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
hitch as recommended by the system operation is at the gross vehicle
manufacturer. Cross the chains under the weight rating, not the gross combined
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for weight rating.
turning tight corners. Do not allow the Separate functioning brake systems
chains to drag on the ground. are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller

(If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The anti-lock brake system does not
control the trailer brakes.
Use the integrated trailer brake
controller to properly adjust the
E265060
trailer brakes and check all
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch, connections before towing a trailer. Failure
make sure the latch is fully closed. to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
291
Towing
Note: The integrated Ford brake controller A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
is compatible with trailers equipped with Pressing these buttons adjusts the
electric-actuated drum brakes and controller's power output to the trailer
electric-over hydraulic brake systems. brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
Note: The integrated Ford brake controller
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
does not control hydraulic surge-style
braking). Pressing and holding a button
brakes.
raises or lowers the setting continuously.
The gain setting displays in the message
center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to switch on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for
adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer
E183395
brakes.
When used properly, the trailer brake • Stop lamps: Using the manual control
controller assists in smooth and effective lever lights both the trailer brake lamps
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s and your vehicle brake lamps.
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes Trailer brake control messages appear in
with a proportional output based on the the information display as follows:
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER:
You can adjust the amount of initial trailer Shows the current gain setting.
brake output by selecting one of three • TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=/ / / /
settings through the message center. / /: Displays when braking. The bars
Ford has tested the trailer brake controller indicate the amount of power going to
to be compatible with several major the trailer brakes.
brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer • TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays
brakes. Contact an authorized dealer for when the system senses a correct
information on which brands you can use. trailer wiring connection.
The controller user interface consists of • TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays
the following: when the system senses a trailer
disconnection.
Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake

Controller Effort
Choose either the electric option for trailers
with electromagnetic drum brakes, or the
electric over hydraulic option for trailers
with these brake systems.
292
Towing
Trailer Brake Effort Setting 4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)

buttons to increase or decrease the
The trailer brake controller allows the user gain setting to the desired starting
to customize how aggressively the trailer point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
brakes engage. The default value is the low starting point for heavier loads.
setting and is the recommended setting
for most trailers. If your trailer's brakes 5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
require more initial voltage, or if you prefer trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
more aggressive trailer braking, then select of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
either the medium or the high setting. squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake 6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
Controller Mode by squealing tires, reduce the gain
Choose the low, medium or high setting setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
for the required initial trailer brake output. increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
Procedure for Adjusting Gain point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
Note: Only perform this procedure in a lock-up may not be attainable even
traffic-free environment at speeds of with the maximum gain setting of 10.
approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
Information Display Warning Messages
The gain setting adjusts the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition. Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
You should change the setting as towing the trailer brake controller to determine
conditions change. Changes to towing exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, However, your Ford warranty does not cover
road conditions and weather. this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
The gain should be set to provide the
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock Displays in response to faults sensed by
when using the brakes. Locked trailer the trailer brake controller, accompanied
wheels may lead to trailer instability. by a single tone. If this message appears,
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good contact an authorized dealer as soon as
working condition, functioning normally possible for diagnosis and repair. The
and properly adjusted. See your trailer controller may still function, but with
dealer if necessary. degraded performance.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions. Displays when there is a short circuit on
the electric brake output wire.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a If this message displays, with no trailer
confirmation message appears in the connected, the problem is with your vehicle
information display. wiring or trailer brake controller. Contact
293
Towing
If the message only displays with a trailer • The controller interacts with the brake
connected, the problem is with the trailer control system and powertrain control
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for system of your vehicle to provide the
assistance. This can be a short to ground best performance on different road
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage conditions.
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency • Your vehicle's brake system and the
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes trailer brake system work
may be drawing too much current. independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
Points to Remember
not affect the operation of your
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer vehicle's brakes.
brake controller without consulting the • When you switch the engine off, the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may controller output is disabled and the
result. display and module shut down.
• Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller. Trailer Lamps
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure WARNING
above, whenever road, weather, trailer
or vehicle loading conditions change Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
from when the gain was initially set. to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
• Only use the manual control lever for resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
proper adjustment of the gain during dealer as soon as possible for assistance
trailer setup. Misuse, such as in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
application during trailer sway, could Additional electrical equipment may be
cause instability of trailer or tow required.
vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather Trailer lamps are required on most towed
conditions. The trailer brake controller vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
does not provide anti-lock control of lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can working.
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow Before Towing a Trailer
vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped Practice turning, stopping and backing up
with a feature that reduces output at to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) combination before starting on a trip.
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky When turning, make wider turns so the
or harsh. This feature is only active trailer wheels clear curbs and other
when applying the brakes using your obstacles.
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
294
Towing
When Towing a Trailer • If your vehicle is equipped with

AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
• Check your hitch, electrical connections may turn on during typical cornering
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km). This is normal. Turning the corner at a
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph slower speed while towing may reduce
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi this tendency.
(800 km). • If you are towing a trailer frequently in
• Do not make full-throttle starts. hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
• When stopped in congested or heavy gross combined weight rating (or any
traffic during hot weather, place the combination of these factors), consider
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and refilling your rear axle with synthetic
transmission cooling and to help A/C gear lubricant (if the axle is not already
performance. filled with it).
• Turn off the speed control with heavy • Allow more distance for stopping with
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
control may turn off automatically brake gradually.
when you are towing on long, steep • Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
grades. you must park on a grade:
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down 1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
brakes continuously, as they may 2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
overheat and become less effective.
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use 4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
this feature when towing. This provides of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
engine braking and helps eliminate included with vehicle.)
excessive transmission shifting for Your vehicle may be equipped with a
optimum fuel economy and temporary or conventional spare tire. A
transmission cooling. "temporary" spare tire is different in size
• If your vehicle is equipped with (diameter or width), tread-type
Adaptive Steering and you have (All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
enabled Tow/Haul, the Adaptive different manufacturer than the road tires
Steering system adjusts the steering on your vehicle. Consult information on the
response to match your vehicle’s load. tire label or Safety Compliance label for
The system reduces vehicle sensitivity limitations when using.
to steering inputs at higher vehicle
speeds while it maintains the ease of Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
parking and maneuverability at low Personal Watercraft (PWC)
speeds.
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after you remove the trailer from the water.
295
Towing
When backing down a ramp during boat Emergency Towing

launching or retrieval:
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
• Do not allow the static water level to (without access to wheel dollies,
rise above the bottom edge of the rear car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
bumper. vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
• Do not allow waves to break higher on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom and transmission configuration) under the
edge of the rear bumper. following conditions:
Exceeding these limits may allow water to • Your vehicle is facing forward for
enter vehicle components: towing in a forward direction.
• Causing internal damage to the • Place the transmission in neutral (N).
components. If you cannot move the transmission
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and into neutral (N), you may need to
reliability. override it. See Transmission (page
210).
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
axle lubricant, which is not normally
WARNING
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required. If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON towed.
FOUR WHEELS
Recreational Towing
WARNING
Note: Put your climate control system in
If your vehicle has a steering wheel recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
lock make sure the ignition is in the fumes from entering your vehicle. See
accessory or on position when being Climate Control (page 148).
towed.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We have
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles

Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels
on the ground, as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. It is recommended to
tow your vehicle with all four (4) wheels
off the ground, such as when using a
car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, you cannot
tow your vehicle.
296
Towing
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped Note: If you do not see the message in the
with a Manual-shift Transfer Case display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
1. Put the transmission in neutral (N).
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
2. Put the transfer case in neutral (N). transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
3. Put the hub locks in the FREE position. This is normal.
Always make sure that both hub locks
6. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
are set to the same position.
and turn the ignition as far as it will go
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped toward the off position (it will not turn
with an Electronic-shift Transfer Case fully off when the transmission is in
neutral). If your vehicle has an ignition
Only tow a four-wheel drive vehicle that key, you must leave the key in the
has an electronic-shift transfer case with ignition while towing. To lock and
all wheels on the ground. To do this, place unlock your vehicle, use the keyless
the transfer case in its neutral position and entry keypad or extra set of keys. If your
engage the four-wheel-down towing vehicle has intelligent access, press the
feature. engine START/STOP button once
Perform the steps in the following section without pressing the brake pedal. You
after positioning your vehicle behind the do not need to leave your keys in the
tow vehicle and properly securing them vehicle. You can lock and unlock your
together. vehicle as you normally do.
7. Release the brake pedal.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle. WARNINGS
Do not disconnect the battery during
Four-wheel-down Towing
recreational towing. It prevents the
1. Put the ignition in the on position, but transfer case from shifting properly
do not start the engine. If your vehicle and may cause the vehicle to roll, even if
has an ignition key, turn the key to on. the transmission is in park (P).
If your vehicle has intelligent access, Shifting the transfer case to its
press the engine START/STOP button neutral position for recreational
once without pressing the brake pedal. towing may cause the vehicle to roll,
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. even if the transmission is in park (P). It
3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to may injure the driver and others. Make sure
2H. you press the foot brake and the vehicle is
in a secure, safe position when you shift to
4. Shift the transmission to neutral (N). neutral (N).
5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch
from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its
times within seven seconds. neutral position while towing with all four
Note: If completed successfully, the wheels on the ground will damage vehicle
information display shows a message components.
indicating that your vehicle is safe to tow
with all wheels on the ground.
297
Towing
Note: You can check four-wheel-down 7. If the transfer case does not
towing status at any time by opening the successfully shift out of neutral (N),
driver's door or turning the ignition to the set the parking brake until you can have
accessory or on position and verifying a your vehicle serviced.
message displays in the cluster.
Resolving the Shift Delay Issue
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return
the transfer case to its 2H position: If the instrument cluster displays a shift
delay message, See Information
1. With your vehicle still properly secured Messages (page 131). You need to
to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in perform the following steps:
the on position, but do not start the
engine. If your vehicle has an ignition 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
key, switch the key to on. If your vehicle 2. Put the transmission into neutral (N),
has intelligent access, press the engine and then start the engine.
START/STOP button once without
pressing the brake pedal. 3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission to drive (D) and let the
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
3. Shift the transmission out of neutral You may hear an audible noise as the
(N) and into any other gear. transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
4. Release the brake pedal.
4. When the issue is resolved, the
Note: If completed successfully, the 2H
instrument cluster displays a message
indicator light illuminates and a
stating neutral tow is disabled.
confirmation message displays in the
instrument cluster.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
Note: If a message displays in the
instrument cluster stating there is a shift
delay, transfer case gear tooth blockage
may be present. See Resolving the Shift
Delay Issue after this section.
5. Apply the parking brake and disconnect
the vehicle from the tow vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake, start the
engine and shift the transmission to
drive (D) to make sure the transfer
case is out of neutral (N).
298
Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN • Keep the tires properly inflated and use

only the recommended size.
You need to break in new tires for • Use the recommended engine oil.
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During • Perform all regularly scheduled
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some maintenance.
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
Avoid driving too fast during the first economy:
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the • Sudden accelerations or hard
gears early. Do not labor the engine. accelerations.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 mi • Revving the engine before turning it off.
(1,600 km) before towing a trailer. Make • Idle for periods longer than one minute.
sure you use the specified engine oil. See • Warm up your vehicle on cold
Capacities and Specifications (page mornings.
428).
• Use the air conditioner or front
Do not add friction modifier compounds defroster.
or special break-in oils during the first few • Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation.
These additives may prevent piston ring • Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
seating. driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
• Carry unnecessary weight
Your fuel economy is affected by several (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
things, such as how you drive, the lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
conditions you drive under, and how you weight carried).
maintain your vehicle. • Driving with the wheels out of
You may improve your fuel economy by alignment.
keeping these things in mind: Conditions
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
moderate fashion. trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
• Drive at steady speeds without speed.
stopping. • Adding certain accessories to your
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
eliminate the need to stop. rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
• Combine errands and minimize fuel economy.
stop-and-go driving.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
• Close the windows for high-speed with the tonneau cover installed (if
driving. equipped).
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling • Using fuel blended with alcohol may
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less lower fuel economy.
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
299
Driving Hints
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower When driving through standing water, drive
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
(12–16 km) of driving. Your brake performance and traction may
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved be limited. After driving through water and
fuel economy as compared to driving as soon as it is safe to do so:
on hilly terrain. • Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
• Transmissions give their best fuel brakes and to check that they work.
economy when operated in the top • Check that the horn works.
cruise gear and with steady pressure
• Check that the exterior lights work.
on the gas pedal.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if
the steering power assist works.
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close the windows for high-speed FLOOR MATS
driving.
WARNINGS
DRIVING THROUGH WATER Use a floor mat designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle that does not
obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
WARNING follow this instruction could result in the
Do not drive through flowing or deep loss of control of your vehicle, personal
water as you may lose control of your injury or death.
vehicle. Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
Note: Driving through standing water can increase the risk of serious personal
cause vehicle damage. injury.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water Secure the floor mat to both
enters the air filter. retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with
Before driving through standing water,
the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
check the depth. Never drive through water
could result in the loss of control of your
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
vehicle, personal injury or death.
hubs.
Do not place additional floor mats
or any other covering on top of the
original floor mats. This could result
in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
E176913 the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
300
Driving Hints
• Certification to government safety laws

such as occupant protection and airbag
deployment, braking, and lighting. Look
for an Alterer’s Label on the vehicle
from the snowplow installer certifying
that the installation meets all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS).
• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity
(TARC) is on the lower right side of the
vehicle’s Safety Compliance
E142666
Certification Label. This applies to
Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 lb
To install the floor mats, position the floor (4,536 kg) GVWR or less. This is the
mat eyelet over the retention post and weight of permanently-attached
press down to lock in position. auxiliary equipment, such as snowplow
To remove the floor mat, reverse the frame-mounting hardware, that can
installation procedure. be added to the vehicle and satisfy
Ford compliance certification to
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may
make sure they are secure. require the auxiliary equipment installer
additional safety certification
responsibility. The Front Accessory
SNOWPLOWING Reserve Capacity (FARC) is for
customer convenience.
Ford recommends that the Super Duty
F-Series used for snow removal include • Rear ballast weight behind the rear
the snowplow package option. axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide
Installing the Snowplow front-to-rear weight balance for proper
braking and steering.
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting
and installing the snowplow are in the Ford • Front wheel toe may require
Truck Body Builders Layout Book, re-adjustment to prevent premature
snowplow section, found at uneven tire wear. Specifications are in
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical the Ford Workshop Manual.
installation affects the following: • Headlight aim may require
re-adjustment.
301
Driving Hints
• The tire air pressures recommended Snowplowing with your Airbag

for general driving are on the vehicle’s Equipped Vehicle
Safety Certification Label. The
maximum cold inflation pressure for WARNINGS
the tire and associated load rating is Do not attempt to service, repair, or
on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure modify the airbag supplemental
may require re-adjustment within these restraint system (SRS) or its fuses.
pressure limits to accommodate the Contact an authorized dealer.
additional weight of the snowplow
installation. Additional equipment for example
snowplow equipment may affect the
• Federal and some local regulations performance of the airbag sensors
require additional exterior lamps for increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult the Body Builders Layout Book for
your authorized dealer for additional instructions about the appropriate
information. installation of additional equipment.
Operating the Vehicle with the All occupants of the vehicle,
Snowplow Attached including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelt, even
Note: Do not use your vehicle for snow when provided with an airbag
removal until you have driven at least supplemental restraint system (SRS).
500 mi (800 km).
Ford recommends vehicle speed does not Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and
exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when passenger airbag supplemental restraint
snowplowing. system. The supplemental restraint system
The attached snowplow blade restricts will activate in certain frontal and offset
airflow to the radiator, and may cause the frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
engine to run at a higher temperature: sufficient frontal deceleration.
Attention to engine temperature is Careless or high speed driving while
especially important when outside plowing snow that results in sufficient
temperatures are above freezing. Angle vehicle decelerations can deploy the
the blade to maximize airflow to the airbags. Such driving also increases the risk
radiator and monitor engine temperature of accidents.
to determine whether a left or right angle
Never remove or defeat the tripping
provides the best performance.
mechanisms designed into the snow
Follow the severe duty schedule in your removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Scheduled Maintenance information for Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle
engine oil and transmission fluid change and the snow removal equipment as well
intervals. as possible airbag deployment.
Engine temperature while plowing

When driving with a plow, your engine may
run at a higher temperature than normal
because the attached snowplow blade will
restrict airflow to the radiator.
302
Driving Hints
• If you are driving more than 15 mi

(24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either
full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
• If you are driving less than 15 mi
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you will not
need to worry about blade position to
provide maximum airflow.
Transmission operation while

plowing
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over
34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low)

when plowing in small areas at speeds
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High)
when plowing larger areas or light snow
at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a
forward gear to R (Reverse) until the
engine is at idle and the wheels have
stopped.
303
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE • Towing — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,
Vehicles Sold in the United States: local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
Getting Roadside Assistance eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
To fully assist you should you have a disablement location or to the nearest
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company authorized dealer. If a member
offers a complimentary roadside requests a tow to an authorized dealer
assistance program. This program is that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
separate from the New Vehicle Limited the disablement location, the member
Warranty. shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
The service is available:
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
• For the coverage period listed on the eligible vehicle requires service at the
Roadside Assistance Card included in nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
your Owner's Manual portfolio. vehicle is operational but the trailer is
Roadside Assistance covers: not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire Vehicles Sold in the United States:
inflation kit). Using Roadside Assistance
• Battery jump start.
Complete the roadside assistance
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement identification card and place it in your
cost is the customer's responsibility). wallet for quick reference. This card is in
• Fuel delivery — independent service the owner's information portfolio in the
contractors, if not prohibited by state, glove compartment.
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
United States vehicle customers who
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
require Roadside Assistance, call
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
1-800-241-3673.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences If you need to arrange roadside assistance
within a 12-month period. for yourself, Ford Motor Company
• Winch out — available within 100 ft reimburses a reasonable amount for
(30 m) of a paved or county towing to the nearest dealership within
maintained road, no recoveries. 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
304
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting The flasher control is on the

Roadside Assistance instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of motorists.
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This • Press the flasher control and all front
program is eligible within Canada or the and rear direction indicators flash.
continental United States. • Press the button again to switch them
Canadian customers who require roadside off.
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using FUEL SHUTOFF

Roadside Assistance
WARNING
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your If your vehicle has been involved in a
wallet for quick reference. crash, have the fuel system checked.
Failure to follow this instruction
In Canada, this card is found in the could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
Assistance Program Coverage that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
The service is available 24 hours a day, are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
seven days a week. restart.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits Note: In the event that your vehicle does
may differ from the U.S. coverage. not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
If you require more information, please
refer to the coverage section of your The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
warranty guide, call us in Canada at fuel to the engine in the event of a
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at moderate to severe crash. Not every
www.ford.ca. impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
HAZARD FLASHERS you may restart your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
1. Switch off the ignition.
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle 2. Switch to start position.
is not running, the battery loses charge. As 3. Switch off the ignition.
a result, there may be insufficient power to
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
restart your vehicle.
fuel pump.
305
If your vehicle has a push button start Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
system: with an automatic transmission may cause
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your transmission damage.
vehicle. Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
2. Press the brake pedal and vehicle.
START/STOP to switch on your Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
vehicle. disabled vehicle as this could damage the
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal vehicle electrical system.
and press START/STOP to switch off Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
your vehicle. of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle two vehicles do not touch.
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP Connecting the Jumper Cables
without pressing the brake pedal.
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
WARNINGS as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
Batteries normally produce explosive parts. To avoid reverse polarity
gases which can cause personal connections, make sure that you correctly
injury. Therefore, do not allow identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
flames, sparks or lighted substances to terminals on both the disabled and booster
come near the battery. When working near vehicles before connecting the cables.
the battery, always shield your face and Do not attach the end of the positive
protect your eyes. Always provide correct cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
ventilation. located above the positive (+)
Keep batteries out of reach of terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
children. Batteries contain sulfuric current may flow through and cause
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or damage to the fuses.
clothing. Shield your eyes when working Do not connect the end of the
near the battery to protect against possible second cable to the negative (-)
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid terminal of the battery to be jumped.
contact with skin or eyes, flush A spark may cause an explosion of the
immediately with water for a minimum of gases that surround the battery.
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately. Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle

Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
306
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
1 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
3 4 Removing the Jumper Cables
2 Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable

to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive 1
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal 2
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine, 3
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground E142665
connection point if available.
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
307
2. Remove the jumper cable on the

negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped). E143886
• Your vehicle runs out of power. If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled professional towing service or, if you are a
in specific markets. member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
WARNINGS vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
Block the wheels to help prevent the
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
vehicle from moving.
any other means, vehicle damage may
Unexpected and possibly sudden occur.
vehicle movement may occur if you We produce a towing manual for all
do not take these precautions. authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
308
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive WARNINGS

vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such Always slowly remove the slack from
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed the recovery strap prior to pulling.
equipment. However, it is acceptable to Failure to do so can introduce
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your significantly higher loads which can cause
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle the recovery hooks to break off, or the
configuration, you perform the following recovery strap to fail which can cause
before towing: serious injury or death.
• If your vehicle has a manual-shift Never link two straps together with
transfer case, make sure the front a clevis pin. These heavy metal
wheel hub locks are in the FREE objects could become projectiles if
position before towing. the strap breaks and can cause serious
• If your vehicle has an electronic injury or death.
shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make
sure you switch the four-wheel drive Your vehicle comes equipped with
control to the 2H position before frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
towing. These hooks should never have a load
Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly applied to them greater than the gross
four-wheel drive vehicle with the front vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
wheels on the ground without disengaging Before using recovery hooks:
the front hubs may cause damage to the
automatic transmission. • Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or the applied load.
an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel
drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the • Never use chains, cables or tow straps
ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or with metal hook ends.
faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause • Only use recovery straps that have a
damage to the automatic transmission. minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
Note: Using wheel lift equipment to tow a
the stuck vehicle.
dual rear wheel vehicle requires removing
an outer rear wheel before towing. • Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
TOWING POINTS • Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
WARNINGS draped over the recovery strap to help
Using recovery hooks is dangerous absorb the energy in the event the
and should only be done by a person strap breaks.
familiar with proper vehicle recovery • Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
safety practices. Improper use of recovery loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
hooks may cause hook failure or separation weight rating specified on the
from the vehicle and could result in serious certification label.
injury or death.
309
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck

vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
310
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU

NEED Website
www.owner.ford.com
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle These are some of the items that can be
line will provide warranty service, we found online:
recommend you return to your selling • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
authorized dealer who wants to ensure City/State or Zip Code.
your continued satisfaction. • Owner Manuals.
Please note that certain warranty repairs • Maintenance Schedules.
require special training and equipment, so
• Recalls.
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means • Ford Extended Service Plans.
that, depending on the warranty repair • Ford Genuine Accessories.
needed, you may have to take your vehicle • Service specials and promotions.
to another authorized dealer.
In Canada:
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle Mailing address
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be Customer Relationship Centre
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
remanufactured or other parts that are P.O. Box 2000
authorized by Ford. Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Away From Home Telephone
If you are away from home when your 1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the Website
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer. www.ford.ca
In the United States:
Twitter
Mailing address
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
Ford Motor Company @FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248 Additional Assistance
Dearborn, MI 48126
If you have questions or concerns, or are
Telephone unsatisfied with the service you are
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) receiving, follow these steps:
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or
1-800-232-5952) Service Advisor at your selling or
Additional information and resources are servicing authorized dealer.
available online:
311
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
Manager. requires that, if a manufacturer or its
3. If you require assistance or clarification representative is unable to repair a motor
on Ford Motor Company policies, vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
please contact the Ford Customer applicable express warranty after a
Relationship Center. reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
In order to help us serve you better, please
replace the vehicle with one substantially
have the following information available
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
when contacting a Customer Relationship
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
Center:
the actual price paid or payable by the
• Vehicle Identification Number. consumer (less a reasonable allowance
• Your telephone number (home and for consumer use). The consumer has the
business). right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading. presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
In some states within the United States, conform the vehicle to its applicable
you must directly notify Ford in writing express warranties if, within the first 18
before pursuing remedies under your months of ownership of a new vehicle or
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
allowed a final repair attempt. occurs first:
Additionally, in some states within the 1. Two or more repair attempts are made
United States, a consumer has the option on the same non-conformity likely to
of submitting a warranty dispute to the cause death or serious bodily injury OR
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
on the same nonconformity (a defect
the extent allowed by state law, before
or condition that substantially impairs
pursuing replacement or repurchase
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
remedies provided by certain state laws.
OR
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
rights or other rights which are independent of nonconformities for a total of more
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
state replacement or repurchase laws. all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
312
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting program are usually decided within forty
in court any rights or remedies conferred days after you file your claim with the BBB.
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are not bound by the decision, and
You are also required to use BBB AUTO may reject the decision and proceed to
LINE before exercising rights or seeking court where all findings of the BBB Auto
remedies created by the Federal Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. in the court action. Should you choose to
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
redress by pursuing rights and remedies is then bound by the decision, and must
not created by California Civil Code Section comply with the decision within 30 days
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss of receipt of your acceptance letter.
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
not required by those statutes.
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
THE BETTER BUSINESS You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE new vehicle, information about your
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a will need to be completed, signed and
warranty concern has not been resolved returned to the BBB along with proof of
using the three-step procedure outlined ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the review the claim for eligibility under the
Services you need section, you may be Program Summary Guidelines.
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program. You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the BBB AUTO LINE
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Company to explore options for settlement Arlington, Virginia 22201
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
during mediation or you do not want to requested by calling the Ford Motor
participate in mediation, and if your claim Company Customer Relationship Center
is eligible, you may participate in the at 1-800-392-3673.
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
will be scheduled so that you can present
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
your case in an informal setting before an
procedures, or to discontinue this process
impartial person. The arbitrator will
at any time without notice and without
consider the testimony provided and make
obligation.
a decision after the hearing.
313
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE GETTING ASSISTANCE

MEDIATION/ARBITRATION OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
Canadian dealers. In those cases where country, contact the appropriate foreign
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford embassy or consulate. These officials can
of Canada and the authorized dealer to inform you of local vehicle registration
resolve a factory-related vehicle service regulations and where to find unleaded
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
Canada participates in an impartial third sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
party mediation/arbitration program
If you cannot find the proper fuel
administered by the Canadian Motor
recommended for your vehicle, contact
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
our Customer Relationship Center.
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
without proper conversion may damage
a disagreement when all other efforts to
the effectiveness of your emission control
produce a settlement have failed. This
system and may cause engine knocking or
procedure is without cost to you and is
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
Company or Ford of Canada is not
and expensive legal proceedings.
responsible for any damage caused by use
In the CAMVAP program, impartial of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at also result in difficulty importing your
mutually convenient times and places in vehicle back into the United States.
an informal environment. These impartial
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
arbitrators review the positions of the
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
parties, make decisions and, when
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
appropriate, render awards to resolve
and/or Puerto Rico , Central America, the
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
CAMVAP services are available in all contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Canadian territories and provinces. For Assistance Center:
more information, without charge or
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 Customer Relationship Centers in:
or visit www.camvap.ca.
314
Customer Assistance
Customer Relation-
Phone Fax E-mail
ship Center
Asia Pacific N/A N/A apemcrc@ford.com

Caribbean and
+1 313 594 4857 - expcac@ford.com
Central America
Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
Middle East 80004441066 971 4 3327 266 menacac@ford.com
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
Puerto Rico and U.S.
+1-800-841-3673 N/A prcac@ford.com
Virgin Islands
Sub-Saharan Africa +1-313-594-4857 N/A ssacrc@ford.com
infokr1@ford.com or
South Korea +63-2-717-6410 N/A
infokr@lincoln.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new ORDERING ADDITIONAL
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
OWNER'S LITERATURE
If you are in another foreign country, To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In contact Helm, Incorporated at:
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
HELM, INCORPORATED
communicate your concern with the
47911 Halyard Drive
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
Attention: Customer Service
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective Or to order a free publication catalog, call
Customer Relationship Center as toll free: 1-800-782-4356
previously listed. Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
315
Customer Assistance
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached If NHTSA receives similar

by their website: complaints, it may open an
www.helminc.com investigation, and if it finds that a
(Items in this catalog may be purchased safety defect exists in a group of
by credit card, check or money order.) vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
Obtaining a French Owner’s NHTSA cannot become involved
Manual in individual problems between
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
from your authorized dealer or by Company.
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this To contact NHTSA, you may call
section. the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS http://www.safercar.gov; or write
(U.S. ONLY) to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
E142557
Washington, D.C. 20590
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a You can also obtain other
crash or could cause injury or information about motor vehicle
death, you should immediately safety from
inform the National Highway http://www.safercar.gov.
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Ford Motor Company. (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
316
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Phone 1–800–333–0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1–800–565-3673
317
Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART The power distribution box is in the engine

compartment. It has high-current fuses
Power Distribution Box that protect your vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.
WARNINGS If the battery has been disconnected and
Always disconnect the battery before reconnected, some features will need to
servicing high current fuses. be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 354).
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
E252492
318
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Fuse Rating Protected Components

Number
1 1 Powertrain control module.

20A
2 1 Emissions - malfunction indicator lamp.
20A
3 1 Cooling fan.
20A
A/C compressor.
Engine brake.
4 1 Noise suppression cap.
20A
Mass air flow sensor.
Emissions.
Glow plugs.
Urea.
5 1 Compressed natural gas fuel control
15A
module.
Fuel sensor.
6 — Not used.
7 — Not used.
8 — Not used.
9 — Not used.
10 1 Heated exterior mirrors.
15A
11 — Compressed natural gas relay.
12 2 Heated rear window.
40A
13 — Not used.
14 — Powertrain control module relay.
15 1 Horn.
20A
16 1 A/C clutch relay power.
10A
17 — Rear heated window and heated mirrors
relay.
18 — Trailer park lamp relay.
19 — Not used.
319
Fuses

Number
20 — Supplemental air heater bank #1 relay.

21 — Not used.
22 — Not used.
23 — Not used.
24 — Cooling fan relay.
Supplemental air heater bank #3 relay.
25 — Glow plug module power relay.
26 — Not used.
27 2 Trailer tow battery charge relay (if
30A
equipped).
28 — Not used.
29 — Run-start relay.
30 1 4x4 module.
10A
31 1 Adaptive cruise control.
5A
Run-start.
32 1 Anti-lock brake system module.
5A
Run-start.
33 1 Powertrain control module - ignition status
10A
power run.
Run-start.
Engine control module.
Transmission control module.
34 1 Blind spot information system.
10A
Run-start.
Front camera.
Rear camera.
35 — Not used.
36 — Blower motor relay.
37 — Trailer tow battery charge relay (only on
non-trailer brake controller vehicles).
38 — A/C compressor clutch relay.
320
Fuses

Number
39 — Horn relay.
40 — Supplemental air heater bank #2 relay.
41 2 Glow plugs.
25A
42 2 Trailer tow lighting module (if equipped).
40A
43 2 Front blower motor.
40A
44 3 Voltage quality.
50A
Body control module power.
45 3 Active front steering.
60A
46 3 Supplemental air heater bank #2.
50A
47 3 Cooling fan.
50A
Supplemental air heater bank #3.
48 3 Body control module run power 1 bus.
50A
49 3 Inverter.
60A
50 3 Body control module run power 2 bus.
50A
51 3 Body control module B+ feed.
60A
52 3 Anti-lock brake system pump.
60A
53 3 Supplemental air heater bank #1.
50A
54 3 Trailer brake control module.
30A
55 3 Climate controlled seat module.
30A
56 3 Auxiliary lighting module.
40A
57 2 Power running boards.
30A
58 2 Compressed natural gas fuel control
30A
module relay.
321
Fuses

Number
59 2 Anti-lock brake system valve.

30A
60 — Not used.
61 2 Driver power seat.
30A
62 2 Auxiliary power point #1 (instrument
20A
panel).
63 2 Starter motor.
30A
64 2 Auxiliary power point #2.
20A
65 2 Trailer tow lighting module (if equipped).
30A
66 2 Auxiliary power point #3 (center console).
20A
67 2 Passenger power seat.
30A
68 2 Auxiliary power point #4 (USB charger, rear
20A
center console).
69 2 4x4 module.
25A
70 2 Auxiliary power point #5 (rear center
20A
console).
71 — Not used.
72 2 Trailer tow left hand/right hand stop/turn
30A
(if equipped, not present with trailer brake
controller).
73 — Not used.
74 — Not used.
75 2 Fuel pump.
30A
76 — Not used.
77 2 Wiper motor.
30A
78 — Not used.
322
Fuses

Number
79 2 Power sliding rear window.

30A
80 1 4x4 module.
25A
81 1 4x4 solenoid.
10A
82 1 Power telescoping mirrors.
10A
83 1 Rear heated seats.
20A
84 1 Trailer tow backup lamps (if equipped).
10A
85 — Not used.
86 — Not used.
87 — Not used.
88 1 Multi contour seats.
10A
89 — Not used.
90 1 Spot light module.
10A
91 1 Upfitter interface module.
10A
92 — Not used.
93 — Not used.
94 1 Transmission control module.
15A
95 1 Powertrain control module keep alive
10A
power.
96 1 Rain sensor.
5A
97 1 Run/Start control for Auxiliary power point
10A
#5
323
Fuses

Number
98 1 Alternator sense.
10A
99 1 Trailer tow parking lamps.
30A
1 Micro fuse.
2M case fuse.
3 J case fuse.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse

Passenger Compartment Fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
Panel
The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of
the passenger footwell behind a trim panel.
To remove the trim panel, pull it toward
you and swing it away from the side. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves
on the panel, and then push it shut.
E145984
324
Fuses

Number
1 — Not used.
2 1 Memory seat switch (lumbar power).
7.5A
3 1 Driver door unlock relay.
20A
4 1 Aftermarket electronic brake controller.
5A
Trailer brake controller Brake On/Off.
Customer access circuits.
5 — Not used.
6 — Not used.
7 — Not used.
8 2 Driver window switch mirror fold.
10A
9 2 Brake On/Off / Pressure Switch.
10A
10 — Not used.
11 2 Combined sense security module.
5A
12 2 Front climate control module.
7.5A
13 2 Instrument cluster.
7.5A
Smart data link.
Steering column control module.
14 2 Extended power restraints module.
10A
15 2 Smart datalink connector power.
10A
16 1 Tailgate release solenoid.
15A
17 2 Head-up display.
5A
18 2 Push button ignition switch.
5A
Ignition switch.
Key inhibit.
19 2 Transmission control switch (tow/haul).
7.5A
Select Shift switch.
325
Fuses

Number
20 2 Active front steering module.

7.5A
21 2 Head-up display.
5A
Humidity sensor.
22 2 Upfitter switch.
5A
Run/Start.
PTO relays.
23 1 Accessory delay.
10A
Power windows.
Moonroof.
Power folding mirrors relay.
Inverter.
Window/moonroof switch illumination.
24 1 Central locking system relay.
20A
25 1 Left-hand front smart window motor.
30A
Door zone module.
26 1 Right-hand front smart window motor.
30A
Door zone module.
27 1 Moonroof.
30A
28 1 Sony amplifier - 10 channel.
20A
29 — Not used.
30 — Not used.
31 1 Adjustable pedals switch.
15A
32 1 SYNC.
10A
GPS module.
Display.
Radio frequency receiver.
33 1 Radio.
20A
34 1 Run-start relay.
30A
35 1 Extended power restraints module.
5A
326
Fuses

Number
36 1 Lane keeping system.

15A
Automatic high beam control.
Auto-dimming mirrors.
Rear heated seats.
Camera module.
37 1 Heated steering wheel.
20A
38 3 Rear power window switch.
30A
1 Micro 2 fuse.
2 Micro 3 fuse.
3 Circuit breaker.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating. E217331
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and If electrical components in the vehicle are
could start a fire. not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
327
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout Fuse Type
A Micro 2
B Micro 3
C Maxi
D Mini
E M Case
F J Case
G J Case Low Profile
328
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Working with the Engine On
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help WARNING

maintain its roadworthiness and resale To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
value. There is a large network of and/or personal burn injuries, do not
authorized dealers that are there to help start your engine with the air cleaner
you with their professional servicing removed and do not remove it while the
expertise. We believe that their specially engine is running.
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
They are supported by a wide range of
(P).
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle. 2. Block the wheels.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the OPENING AND CLOSING THE
necessary parts and service. Check your HOOD
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered. 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, handle located under the left hand side
fluids and service parts conforming to of the instrument panel.
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation. E166491
• Keep all open flames and other burning 2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
material (such as cigarettes) away locate the secondary release lever
from the battery and all fuel related under the front of the hood near the
parts. center of your vehicle.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
329
Maintenance
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders

hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is closed properly and fully
latched.
E190266
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.2L
A B C D
E222143
J I H G F E
A. Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 363).
B. Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 318).
C. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 347).
D. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 350).
330
Maintenance
E. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 351).
F. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 339).
G. Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 351).
H. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 334).
I. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 334).
J. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 354).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.7L DIESEL

F-Super Duty
E234258
A. Air filter restriction gauge. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 364).
C. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 334).
D. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 347).
E. Engine oil fill. See Engine Oil Check (page 334).
331
Maintenance
F. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 350).

G. Engine cooling system coolant reservoir (primary high-temperature cooling
system). See Engine Coolant Check (page 343).
H. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 354).
I. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 351).
J. Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 351).
K. Secondary cooling system coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page
343).
L. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 354).
M. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 364).
Use only recommended fuel, lubricants,

Scheduled Maintenance fluids and service parts conforming to Ford
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
The recommended scheduled designed and built for best performance
maintenance services are required because in your vehicle. See Capacities and
they are considered essential to the life Specifications (page 433).
and performance of your vehicle. See
Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page
585).
332
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.8L
A B C D E
E222144
J I H G F
A. Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 363).
C. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 347).
D. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 334).
E. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 350).
F. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 351).
G. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 339).
H. Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 351).
I. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 334).
J. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 354).
333
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.2L/ 2. Run engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature.
6.8L
3. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
A B 4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 329).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. For 6.2L V8 See
E161560
Under Hood Overview (page 330). For
6.8L Triton See Under Hood
A MIN Overview (page 333).
B MAX 7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 334).
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.7L 8. Make sure that the oil level is between
DIESEL the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
A B and Specifications (page 421).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
E71362
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
A MIN Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
B MAX 3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil

ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.2L/6.8L
WARNING
To check the engine oil level consistently Do not remove the filler cap when
and accurately, do the following: the engine is running.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
334
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental engine oil Note: Do not add oil further than the
additives because they are unnecessary maximum mark. Oil levels above the
and could lead to engine damage that may maximum mark may cause engine damage.
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.7L

DIESEL
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
E142732 sure the transmission is in park (P) or
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines neutral (N).
by the American Petroleum Institute (API). 2. Run engine until it reaches normal
An oil with this trademark symbol operating temperature.
conforms to the current engine and 3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
emission system protection standards and ground.
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification 4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
Advisory Committee (ILSAC). minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
To top up the engine oil level do the soon after you switch the engine off
following: may result in an inaccurate reading.
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine 5. Open the hood. See Opening and
oil filler cap before you remove it. Closing the Hood (page 329).
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. For 6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
6.2L V8 See Under Hood Overview a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
(page 330). For 6.8L Triton See Under Hood Overview (page 331).
Hood Overview (page 333).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford again to check the oil level. See
specifications. See Capacities and Engine Oil Dipstick (page 334).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
4. Recheck the oil level. the maximum and minimum marks. If
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the the oil level is at the minimum mark,
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 433).
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong 9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
resistance. dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
335
Maintenance
Note: If the oil level is between the Note: Soak up any spillage with an
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level absorbent cloth immediately.
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Engine lubrication for severe
Note: The oil consumption of new engines service operation
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km). The following conditions define severe
operation for which engine operation with
Adding Engine Oil SAE 5W-40 oil which meets Ford
specification, WSS-M2C171-F1, is
WARNING recommended. Oil and oil filter change
Do not remove the filler cap when intervals will be determined by the
the engine is running. Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ as noted
previously.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
and could lead to engine damage that may AND OIL FILTER
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
To top up the engine oil level do the WARNINGS
following: Do not handle a hot oil filter with
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine bare hands.
oil filler cap before you remove it.
Continuous contact with used motor
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See oil has caused cancer in laboratory
Under Hood Overview (page 331). mice. Protect your skin by washing
Turn it counterclockwise and remove with soap and water.
it.
3. Add engine oil of the proper viscosity If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel
and grade that meets Ford engine, an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™
specifications. See Capacities and calculates the proper oil change service
Specifications (page 433). You may interval. When the information display
have to use a funnel to pour the engine indicates: OIL CHANGE REQUIRED, change
oil into the opening. the engine oil and oil filter. See
4. Recheck the oil level. Information Displays (page 114).
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the The engine oil filter protects your engine
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. by filtering harmful, abrasive or sludge
particles and particles significantly smaller
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
than most available will-fit filters. See
it clockwise until you feel a strong
Motorcraft Parts (page 423).
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the 1. Unscrew the oil filter and oil pan drain
maximum mark. Oil levels above the plug and wait for the oil to drain.
maximum mark may cause engine damage. 2. Replace the filter.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap 3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug.
correctly.
336
Maintenance
4. Refill the engine with new oil. See CHANGING THE CRANKCASE
Capacities and Specifications (page
433). VENT FILTER ELEMENT (If
5. For diesel engines, you need to reset Equipped)
the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™. See
Information Displays (page 114). WARNING
Engine lubrication for severe Do not dispose of engine oil or oil
service operation filters in the household refuse or the
public sewage system. Use an
The following conditions define severe authorized waste disposal facility.
operation for which engine operation with
SAE 5W-40 API CJ-4 is recommended. Oil Do not clean or recondition the filter
and oil filter change intervals will be element.
determined by the Intelligent Oil Life
Monitor™ as noted previously. We recommend that you demand the use
of genuine Ford and Motorcraft® parts
• Frequent or extended idling (over 10 whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
minutes per hour of normal driving). maintenance or repair. Use the correct
• Low-speed operation/stationary use. specification filter element. See
• If vehicle is operated in sustained Capacities and Specifications (page
ambient temperatures below -9°F 433).
(-23°C) or above 100°F (38°C). Note: Operating your vehicle without a filter
• Frequent low-speed operation, element or with an unapproved filter
consistent heavy traffic less than element may result in damage to the turbo
25 mph (40 km/h). charger or exchanger and could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered by
• Operating in severe dust conditions.
• Operating the vehicle off road.
• Towing a trailer over 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
• Sustained, high-speed driving at Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum
loaded weight for vehicle operation).
• Use of fuels with sulfur content other
than ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD).
• Use of high-sulfur diesel fuel.
337
Maintenance
1 6
5
4
A
3 7
C
E211404
2
8. Fully tighten all of the bolts to between
3–4 lb.ft (4.5–6 Nm) in the sequence
shown.
9. Record the engine mileage and update
the service log accordingly.
E211403
A Filter cover. OIL CHANGE INDICATOR

B Filter element. RESET
C Filter housing. Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
1. Clean the filter cover and remove the indicator.
bolts.
2. Carefully remove the filter cover. From the main menu scroll to:
3. Remove used filter element from the Message Action and description
filter housing and carefully dispose of
it. Settings Press the right arrow button,
4. Make sure that the sealing surfaces on then from this menu scroll
the filter housing and cover are clean to the following message.
and free of debris. Conveni- Press the right arrow button,
5. Install the new filter element. ence then from this menu scroll
6. Install the filter cover. to the following message.
7. Install the bolts finger-tight. Oil Life Press the right arrow button,
Reset then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
338
Maintenance
Message Action and description When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
Hold OK to Press and hold the OK the intervals listed in the scheduled
Reset button until the instrument maintenance information. See Scheduled
cluster displays the Maintenance (page 581).
following message. Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
Reset Successful between the MIN and the MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
When the oil change indic- Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
ator resets the instrument level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
cluster displays 100%.
Maintain coolant concentration within
Remaining Life 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
{00}%
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
If the instrument cluster checked using a refractometer. We
displays one of the following recommend, Robinair® Coolant and
messages, repeat the Battery Refractometer 75240 (Rotunda
process. tool part number: ROB75240). We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
Not Reset coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Reset Cancelled
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK - windshield washer fluid outside of its
6.2L/6.8L specified function and vehicle location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
WARNINGS system sealants, or non-specified additives
Never remove the coolant reservoir as they can cause damage to the engine
cap when the engine is running or cooling or heating systems. Resulting
hot. component damage may not be covered by
Do not put coolant in the windshield
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the Adding Coolant
windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield. WARNING
To reduce the risk of personal injury, Never remove the coolant reservoir
make sure the engine is cool before cap when the engine is running or
unscrewing the coolant pressure hot.
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
339
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted 1. Drain the cooling system.

coolant meeting the correct specification 2. Chemically clean the cooling system.
in order to avoid plugging the small We recommend Motorcraft Premium
passageways in the engine cooling system. Cooling System Flush.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 428). Incorrect prediluted coolant 3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon
use can cause damage not covered by the as possible.
vehicle Warranty. Water alone, without prediluted coolant,
If the coolant level is at or below the can cause engine damage from corrosion,
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant overheating or freezing.
immediately. Do not use the following as a coolant
To top up the coolant level do the substitute:
following: • Alcohol.
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure • Methanol.
escapes as you unscrew the cap. • Brine.
2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
correct specification. See Capacities methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to damage from overheating or freezing.
reach the correct level.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn the coolant. These can be harmful and
it clockwise until you feel a strong compromise the corrosion protection of
resistance. the coolant.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive Recycled Coolant
your vehicle.
We do not recommend the use of recycled
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant as an approved recycling process
coolant may change color from orange to is not yet available.
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change Dispose of used engine coolant in an
does not indicate the coolant has degraded appropriate manner. Follow your
nor does it require the coolant to be drained, community’s regulations and standards
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to for recycling and disposing of automotive
be replaced. fluids.
Do not mix different colors or types of
prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing
of prediluted coolant or using an incorrect
prediluted coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without prediluted
coolant in order to reach a vehicle service
location. On arrival do the following:
340
Maintenance
Severe Climates If the engine reaches a preset

over-temperature condition, the engine
If you drive in extremely cold climates: automatically switches to alternating
• It may be necessary to increase the cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
coolant concentration above 50%. acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
• A coolant concentration of 60% When this occurs, your vehicle still
provides improved freeze point operates, however:
protection. Coolant concentrations • Engine power is limited.
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the • The air conditioning system turns off.
coolant and may cause engine Continued operation increases the engine
damage. temperature, causing the engine to
If you drive in extremely hot climates: completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
• It may be necessary to decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%. When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
• A coolant concentration of 40%
checked as soon as possible to minimize
provides improved overheat
engine damage.
protection. Coolant concentrations
below 40% decrease the freeze and When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
corrosion protection characteristics of
the coolant and may cause engine WARNINGS
damage. Fail-safe mode is for use during
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme emergencies only. Operate your
climates should use prediluted coolant for vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
optimum cooling system and engine as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
protection. in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
Fail-Safe Cooling vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily may completely shut down without
drive your vehicle before any incremental warning, potentially losing engine power,
component damage occurs. The fail-safe power steering assist, and power brake
distance depends on ambient assist, which may increase the possibility
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. of a crash resulting in serious injury.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
If the engine begins to overheat, the hot.
coolant temperature gauge moves toward
the red zone:
Your vehicle has limited engine power
A warning lamp illuminates and when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
a message may appear in the vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
information display. maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
341
Maintenance
Remember that the engine is capable of You may notice a reduction in vehicle
automatically shutting down to prevent speed caused by reduced engine power in
engine damage. In this situation: order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
mode if certain high-temperature and
possible and switch the engine off.
high-load conditions take place. The
2. If you are a member of a roadside amount of speed reduction depends on
assistance program, we recommend vehicle loading, grade and ambient
that you contact your roadside temperature. If this occurs, there is no
assistance service provider. need to pull off the road. You can continue
3. If this is not possible, wait a short to drive your vehicle.
period for the engine to cool. The air conditioning may automatically
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant turn on and off during severe operating
level is at or below the minimum mark, conditions to protect the engine from
add prediluted coolant immediately. overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
5. When the engine temperature cools,
operating temperature, the air conditioning
you can re-start the engine. Have your
turns on.
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage. If the coolant temperature gauge moves
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
increases the chance of engine damage. temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
Engine Coolant Temperature display, do the following:
Management (If Equipped) 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
WARNING park (P).
To reduce the risk of crash and injury, 2. Leave the engine running until the
be prepared that the vehicle speed coolant temperature gauge needle
may reduce and the vehicle may not returns to the normal position. After
be able to accelerate with full power until several minutes, if the temperature
the coolant temperature reduces. does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the 3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
engine may temporarily reach higher a cool. Check the coolant level.
temperature during severe operating
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
conditions, for example ascending a long
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
or steep grade in high ambient
immediately.
temperatures.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
At this time, you may notice the coolant the engine and continue.
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
342
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK - Adding Coolant

6.7L DIESEL WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
WARNINGS engine is hot. Failure to follow this
Never remove the coolant reservoir instruction could result in personal
cap when the engine is running or injury.
hot.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
Do not put coolant in the windshield cap when the engine is running or
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the hot.
windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
To reduce the risk of personal injury, interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
make sure the engine is cool before windshield washer fluid outside of its
unscrewing the coolant pressure specified function and vehicle location.
relief cap. The cooling system is under
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
system sealants, or non-specified additives
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
as they can cause damage to the engine
slightly.
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
Do not add coolant further than the component damage may not be covered by
MAX mark. the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted
When the engine is cold, check the coolant approved to the correct
concentration and level of the coolant at specification in order to avoid plugging the
the intervals listed in the scheduled small passageways in the engine cooling
maintenance information. See Scheduled system. See Capacities and
Maintenance (page 581). Specifications (page 433). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
coolant reservoir.
or cooling system components and may
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
Maintain coolant concentration within models may not be approved to Ford
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze specifications and may cause damage to
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F the cooling system. Resulting component
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be damage may not be covered by the vehicle
checked using a refractometer. We do not Warranty.
recommend the use of hydrometers or
If the coolant level is at or below the
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
concentration.
immediately.
343
Maintenance
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant engine coolant per month, have your
recovery system, add coolant to the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
coolant recovery reservoir when the engine Operating an engine with a low level of
is cool. Add prediluted coolant to the coolant can result in engine overheating
maximum level. For all vehicles which have and possible engine damage.
a coolant degas system with a pressurized Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
cap, or if it is necessary to remove the coolant may change color from orange to
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator, pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
follow these steps to add engine coolant: clear and uncontaminated, this color change
1. Turn the engine off and let it cool. does not indicate the coolant has degraded
2. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
escapes as you unscrew the cap. the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
3. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with
prediluted engine coolant to within the Note: In case of emergency, you can add a
minimum and maximum range on the large amount of water without coolant in
engine coolant reservoir. If you order to reach a vehicle service location.
removed the radiator cap in an Water alone, without coolant, can cause
overflow system, fill the radiator until engine damage from corrosion, overheating
the coolant is visible and the radiator or freezing. When you reach a service
is almost full. If coolant is added to location, you must have the cooling system
bring the level within the minimum and drained, flushed and refilled using the
maximum range when the engine is not correct specification prediluted coolant or
cold, the system may remain under antifreeze concentrate. See Capacities and
filled. Specifications (page 433).
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn Do not use the following as a coolant
it clockwise until you feel a strong substitute:
resistance. • Alcohol.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant • Methanol.
reservoir the next few times you drive • Brine.
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
coolant level to the proper level. methanol antifreeze.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
use the approved antifreeze concentrate damage from overheating or freezing.
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See Do not add extra inhibitors or non-specified
Capacities and Specifications (page 433). additives to the coolant. These can be
Using water that has not been deionized harmful and compromise the corrosion
may contribute to deposit formation, protection of the coolant.
corrosion or plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
344
Maintenance
Engine and Secondary Cooling 11. Check the secondary cooling system.
System Refill Procedure Repeat Step 5 until the coolant level
has stabilized (is no longer dropping
The following procedure should be used after each step) and the lower
when refilling the engine or secondary passenger side of the secondary
cooling systems after it has been drained radiator is warm to the touch
or become extremely low: (indicating secondary thermostat is
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the open and coolant is flowing through
engine off and let it cool. the entire system).
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick 12. Reinstall the pressure relief cap. Shut
cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap the engine off and let it cool.
counterclockwise until pressure begins 13. Check the coolant level in the
to release. reservoir before you drive your vehicle
3. Step back while the pressure releases. the next few times.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure 14. If necessary, add prediluted engine
has been released, use the cloth to turn coolant to the coolant reservoir until
it counterclockwise and remove the the coolant level is within the
cap. minimum and maximum range as
listed on the reservoir. After any
5. Slowly add prediluted engine coolant coolant has been added, check the
to the coolant reservoir until the coolant concentration.
coolant level is within the minimum
and maximum range as listed on the Recycled Coolant
reservoir.
6. Reinstall the pressure relief cap. We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
7. Start and run the engine at 2000 rpm is not yet available.
for 2 minutes.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
8. Shut engine off, and remove the appropriate manner. Follow your
pressure relief cap as previously community’s regulations and standards
outlined. for recycling and disposing of automotive
9. If required, add prediluted engine fluids.
coolant to the coolant reservoir until
the coolant level is within the minimum Severe Climates
and maximum range as listed on the
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
reservoir.
• It may be necessary to increase the
10. Engine cooling system: Repeat
coolant concentration above 50%.
Step 5 until the coolant level has
stabilized (is no longer dropping after • A coolant concentration of 60%
each step) and the upper radiator provides improved freeze point
hose at the radiator is warm to the protection. Coolant concentrations
touch (indicating that the engine above 60% decrease the overheat
thermostat is open and coolant is protection characteristics of the
flowing through the radiator). coolant and may cause engine
damage.
345
Maintenance
If you drive in extremely hot climates: • Robinair® Coolant and Battery

• You can decrease the coolant Refractometer 75240 –
concentration to 40%. Recommended refractometer to test
coolant concentration. (Rotunda tool
• Coolant concentrations below 40% part number: ROB75240).
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the • Rotunda 328-R071–ELC (Antifreeze
coolant and may cause engine Coolant ELC Contamination Kit) –
damage. Evaluates the corrosion inhibitor
additive strength. Note the first step is
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme to verify the vehicle’s coolant
climates should use prediluted engine concentration is in the correct range of
coolant for optimum cooling system and 40 – 60%. Coolant concentrations
engine protection. outside this range will not provide valid
test results. If the report results in a
Checking Coolant Corrosion pass, for example the cooling system
Inhibitor Additive Strength does not show excessive
At specific mileage intervals as listed in the contamination, the corrosion inhibitor
scheduled maintenance information additive strength is sufficient, and no
chapter, the coolant corrosion inhibitor action is required. If the report results
additive should be checked. An information as insufficient (does not pass), the
message may display in the optional corrosion inhibitor additive strength of
information display at this time. The the coolant is too low. If the engine
purpose of checking is to verify the correct cooling system corrosion inhibitor
engine coolant concentration (freeze point additive strength is low, add 47 fl oz
protection) and corrosion inhibitor additive (1.4 L) of Motorcraft Specialty Orange
level (strength) of the coolant for Engine Coolant Revitalizer. If the
maximum engine performance and secondary cooling system corrosion
protection. inhibitor additive strength is low, add
16 fl oz (0.47 L) of Motorcraft Specialty
Three products are available to confirm Orange Engine Coolant Revitalizer.
the life and health of the coolant, one tool,
• Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
a test kit and a coolant inhibitor additive:
Coolant Revitalizer – Additive to
boost the corrosion inhibitor level
based upon the test results of the
Antifreeze Coolant ELC Contamination
Kit. The Revitalizer may be added two
times over the life of the coolant. If
additional dosages are required, the
cooling system must be flushed and
refilled per the instructions in the
Workshop Manual.
Make sure to follow the proper coolant and
additive specifications. See Capacities
346
Maintenance
Coolant Change Do not use supplemental transmission

fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in agents. The use of these materials may
the scheduled maintenance information, affect transmission operation and result
the coolant should be changed. The in damage to internal transmission
information display may display a message components.
to change coolant at this time. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct Checking Automatic Transmission
specification. See Capacities and Fluid
For scheduled intervals of the fluid checks
Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan and changes, See Scheduled
Clutch) Maintenance (page 581). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
Your vehicle may have an engine driven However, the fluid level should be checked
cooling fan drive (also called a fan clutch). if the transmission is not working properly,
This fan drive changes the fan speed to i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly
match the vehicle’s changing cooling air or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
flow requirements. Fan speed, fan noise
level and fuel consumption all will increase Automatic transmission fluid expands
based on the driving conditions that when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid
include trailer towing, hill climbing, heavy check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal
loads, high speed and high ambient operating temperature (approximately
temperature, individually or in combination. 19 mi (30 km)). Verify that the
transmission fluid temperature gauge,
The fan drive is designed to provide the located on the instrument cluster, is within
minimum fan speed (and resulting normal range.
minimum fan noise and fuel consumption)
required to meet the ever changing vehicle 1. Drive the vehicle 19 mi (30 km)until it
cooling air flow requirements. You will hear reaches normal operating temperature.
the amount of fan noise increasing and 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
decreasing as the engine power engage the parking brake.
requirements and vehicle driving conditions 3. With the engine running, parking brake
change as you drive. This is to be expected engaged and your foot on the brake
as being normal to the operation of your pedal, move the gearshift lever through
vehicle. High levels of fan noise might also all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient
be heard when your engine is first started, time for each gear to engage.
and should normally decrease after driving
for a short time. 4. Latch the gearshift lever in P and leave
the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
FLUID CHECK necessary, refer to the Under Hood
Overview in this chapter for the
Have an authorized dealer check and location of the dipstick.
change the transmission fluid and filter at
the correct service interval. See
347
Maintenance
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully

seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the
fluid level. The fluid should be in the
designated area for normal operating
temperature or ambient temperature.
Low Fluid Level

Type A
E163741
Type B
E163739
Type B
E163742
For vehicles equipped with 5-speed

transmissions, check the fluid at the
normal operating temperature of 151°F
(66°C) to 170°F (77°C) on a level surface.
For vehicles equipped with 6-speed
transmissions, check the fluid at the
normal operating temperature of 196°F
(91°C) to 215°F (102°C) on a level surface.
E163740
The normal operating temperature can be
reached after approximately 19 mi
Do not drive the vehicle if there is no (30 km).
indication of fluid on the dipstick and the
ambient temperature is above 50°F High Fluid Level
(10°C). Type A
Correct Fluid Level
Type A
348
Maintenance
• the dipstick handle.

• See Capacities and Specifications
(page 421).
If necessary, add fluid in 8 fl oz (250 ml)
increments through the filler tube until the
level is correct.
Type A
E163743
Type B
E163745
Type B
E163744
Fluid levels above the safe range may

result in transmission failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid may cause
shift and engagement concerns, and
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an
overheating condition. E163746
Adjusting Automatic Transmission If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be

Fluid Levels removed by a qualified technician.
Note: Use of a non-approved automatic Note: An overfill condition of transmission
transmission fluid may cause internal fluid may cause shift and engagement
transmission component damage. concerns, and possible damage.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the
correct type is used. The type of fluid used
is normally indicated on:
349
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental transmission BRAKE FLUID CHECK

fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may WARNINGS
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission Do not use any fluid other than the
components. recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
TRANSFER CASE FLUID vehicle control, serious personal injury or
CHECK (If Equipped) death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
E164246
1. Clean the filler plug.

2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the
fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through the filler
opening so that the fluid level is at the
bottom of the opening.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
350
Maintenance
1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It

should be between the MIN and MAX
range. Do not add fluid if the level is
within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to between the MIN
and MAX range.
3. Switch the engine on.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering
wheel left and right several times.
5. Switch the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir.
Do not add fluid if the level is between
the MIN and MAX range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small
amounts, continuously checking the
level until it is between the MIN and
E170684
MAX range. For proper fluid type, See
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir Capacities and Specifications (page
cap must remain in place and fully tight, 421). Be sure to put the cap back on the
unless you are adding fluid. reservoir.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
POWER STEERING FLUID If you operate your vehicle in
CHECK temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
Check the power steering fluid. See protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). If antifreeze protection in cold weather could
adding fluid is necessary, use only result in impaired windshield vision and
MERCON LV ATF increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: This procedure is for vehicles with
gasoline engines. Vehicles with diesel Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
engines are similar. See Under Hood low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Overview in your diesel supplement. Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient
temperature.
351
Maintenance
State or local regulations on volatile Your vehicle has a diesel fuel conditioner
organic compounds may restrict the use module. The module is mounted between
of methanol, a common windshield washer the outboard side of the fuel tank and the
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids frame rail.
containing non-methanol antifreeze Note: The module is at the front of the fuel
agents should be used only if they provide tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank
cold weather protection without damaging on some models.
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system. You should drain water from the
module assembly whenever the
warning light illuminates or a
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER message appears in the information
WATER TRAP - 6.7L DIESEL display advising you to drain the water
separator. This occurs when approximately
WARNING 6.76 fl oz (200 ml) of water accumulates
in the module. If you allow the water level
Do not dispose of fuel in the to exceed this level, the water may pass
household refuse or the public through to the engine and may cause fuel
sewage system. Use an authorized injection equipment damage.
waste disposal facility.
Filter Location
Use the tables below to find the location
of your filter.
Pick-up Truck
Cab Type Box Length Filter Location
Regular. 8 ft (2.4 m)
Left side of fuel tank.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
SuperCab.
8 ft (2.4 m)
In front of fuel tank.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
Super Crew Cab.
8 ft (2.4 m) Left side of fuel tank.
Chassis Cab
Cab Type Fuel Tank Type Filter Location
Chassis Cab. Single midship fuel tank Right side of fuel tank.
Right side of midship fuel
Chassis Cab. Aft axle/midship fuel tanks
tank.
Chassis Cab. Single aft axle fuel tank Front of fuel tank.
352
Maintenance
Draining the Diesel Fuel

Conditioner Module
1. Switch the engine off.
2. Access the underside of your vehicle.
2
E226212
4. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner

module. Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise until it stops. Do not
use any tools to loosen the drain plug.
E226475 Drain the filter, approximately 0.5 gal
(2 L), into an appropriate container.
3. The diesel fuel conditioner module is
Do not re-use the fuel drained from the
on the left-hand frame rail.
module.
5. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise
until it stops and you feel a strong
resistance. Do not use any tools to
tighten the drain plug.
FUEL FILTER - 6.2L/6.8L

Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
353
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft

maintenance-free battery which normally
WARNINGS does not require additional water.
Batteries normally produce explosive When a battery replacement is required,
gases which can cause personal you must use a recommended
injury. Therefore, do not allow replacement battery that matches the
flames, sparks or lighted substances to electrical requirements of the vehicle.
come near the battery. When working near Note: After cleaning or replacing the
the battery, always shield your face and battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
protect your eyes. Always provide correct cover or shield.
ventilation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, components to the vehicle, it may adversely
excessive pressure on the end walls affect the low voltage battery performance
could cause acid to flow through the and durability. This may also affect the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and performance of other electrical systems in
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the the vehicle.
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric If you see any corrosion on the battery or
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or terminals, remove the cables from the
clothing. Shield your eyes when working terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
near the battery to protect against possible can neutralize the acid with a solution of
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid baking soda and water.
contact with skin or eyes, flush Because your vehicle’s engine is
immediately with water for a minimum of electronically controlled by a computer,
15 minutes and get prompt medical some control conditions are maintained
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a by power from the battery. When the
physician immediately. battery is disconnected or a new battery
Battery posts, terminals and related is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
accessories contain lead and lead and fuel trim strategy for optimum
compounds. Wash hands after driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
handling. vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
This vehicle may have more than one driveability and performance.
battery. Removing the battery cables
from only one battery does not To restore the settings, do the following:
disconnect your vehicle electrical system. 1. Apply the parking brake.
Make sure you disconnect the battery
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may 3. Switch off all accessories.
cause serious personal injury or property 4. Press the brake pedal and start your
damage. vehicle.
354
Maintenance
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal Systems included are:

operating temperature. While the • Heated rear window.
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. Reset the • Heated seats.
power windows bounce-back feature. • Climate control.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 98). • Heated steering wheel.
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 446). • Audio unit.
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one • Navigation system.
minute. A message may appear in the information
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) displays to alert you that battery
to completely relearn the idle trim and protection actions are active. These
fuel trim strategy. messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
Note: If you do not allow the engine to indicate an electrical problem or that the
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the battery requires replacement.
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer After battery replacement, or in some
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel cases after charging the battery with an
trim strategy. external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are time to relearn the battery state of charge.
operating on E85, you may experience poor During this time your vehicle must remain
starts or an inability to start the engine and fully locked with the ignition switched off.
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned. Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries may temporarily disable some electrical
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek systems.
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries. Electrical Accessory Installation
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 To make sure the battery management
days without recharging the battery, we system works correctly, do not connect an
recommend that you disconnect the electrical device ground connection
battery cables to maintain battery charge directly to the battery negative post. This
for quick starting. can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
Battery Management System (If incorrect system operation.
Equipped)
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
The battery management system monitors components to the vehicle, it may adversely
battery conditions and takes actions to affect battery performance and durability.
extend battery life. If excessive battery This may also affect the performance of
drain is detected, the system temporarily other electrical systems in the vehicle.
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
355
Maintenance
CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES
A
E142463 E165794
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of 2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and
the blade to check for roughness. separate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or 3. Install in the reverse order.
cloth. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back on the windshield. The wiper arms will
CHANGING THE WIPER automatically return to their normal position
BLADES when you turn the ignition on.
• Replace wiper blades at least once per
You can manually move the wiper arms
year for optimum performance.
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under • You can improve poor wiper quality by
the blades. cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away

from the glass.
356
Maintenance
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142465
E142592 4. On the wall or screen you will observe

a flat zone of high intensity light
A 8 feet (2.4 meters) located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
B Center height of lamp to ground edge of the high intensity light zone is
C 25 feet (7.6 meters) not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
D Horizontal reference line
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure

B
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a A
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the E223774
other.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
illuminate the wall or screen and open
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
the hood.
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
Note: A. LED headlamp.
B. Halogen headlamp.
357
Maintenance
6. Repeat steps 3 thru 5 to adjust the

other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment

Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury. E224990
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
them cool down before you remove off.
them.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Use the correct specification bulb. See 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
Bulb Specification Chart (page 361). and remove it.
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
stated. the bulb holder.
Front Park and Direction Indicator Headlamp Bulbs

Lamp Bulbs
Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs,
Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs, remove the air intake pipe. See Changing
remove the air intake pipe. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 363).
the Engine Air Filter (page 363). To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove
To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with
the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with diesel engine only.
diesel engine only.
358
Maintenance
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition

off.
2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
bumper.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Handle a halogen bulb carefully and
keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb
only by its plastic base and do not touch the
glass. The oil from your hand could cause
E224991 the bulb to break the next time the fog
lamps are operated.
off. Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear
2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp Bulbs
and remove it. Pickup Models - Vehicles without Blind
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from Spot Information System
the bulb holder.
Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlamps are operated.
5
Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
E223775

off.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
E163826
359
Maintenance
3. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp Chassis Cabs

assembly and carefully pull the lamp
assembly from the tailgate pillar by
releasing the two retaining tabs.
and remove it.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Pickup Models - Vehicles with Blind

Spot Information System
E163828
4
off.
2. Remove the screws and the lamp lens
from lamp assembly.
out.
Cargo Lamp and Central High

Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs
off.
E224204
5 6
2. Remove the screws and carefully pull
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition the lamp assembly from the vehicle to
off. expose the bulb sockets.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
3. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp
assembly and carefully pull the lamp
assembly from the tailgate pillar by
releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Remove the screws from the blind spot
information system module cover.
and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight E187290
out.
and remove it.
360
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight 2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
out. bumper.
License Plate Lamp Bulb and remove it.
out.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
E163830
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
off.
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Specification Power (Watt)
Headlamps. H13/9008 60/55

Front side marker lamps. W5W 5
Front fog lamps. 9140 40
Front direction indicator and parking
T20/7444NA 28/8
lamps.
Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direc- 3157 27/7
tion indicator and rear side marker
lamps. Low series.*
Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direc- LED LED
lamps. High series.*
Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direc- 3157 27/7
lamps.**
Reversing lamps.* W21W 21
Reversing lamps.** 3157 27/7
361
Maintenance
License plate lamp. Low series. 168 5

License plate lamp. High series. LED LED
Central high mounted brake lamp. 912 12.8
Central high mounted cargo lamp. 912 12.8
Side direction indicator and mirror LED LED
clearance lamp.
Front clearance lamp. LED LED
Rear clearance lamp. LED LED
Front identification lamp. LED LED
Rear identification lamp. LED LED
Underhood lamp. LED LED
*
Pickup only.
**
Chassis cab only.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Map lamp. LED LED

Glove compartment lamp. LED LED
Interior lamp. LED LED
Overhead console lamp. LED LED
Luggage compartment lamp. LED LED
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
362
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR

FILTER - 6.2L/6.8L x4
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not 2
start your engine with the air cleaner 3
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Use the correct specification air filter

element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
423).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter 4
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct 1
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 581).
E226426
1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor

electrical connector. (6.8L only)
2. Remove the air intake tube securing
clamp.
3. Pull the air intake tube away from the
air filter housing.
4. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover. Remove the air
filter housing cover.
363
Maintenance
x4
5
E226427 2
5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
6. Install in the reverse order.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR

FILTER - 6.7L DIESEL 1
WARNING E226429
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage 1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
and personal burn injuries, do not electrical connector.
start your engine with the air cleaner
2. Remove the air intake tube securing
removed and do not remove it while the
clamp.
engine is running.
3. Pull the air intake tube away from the
air filter housing.
Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page 4. Remove the clips that secure the air
423). filter housing cover. Remove the air
filter housing cover.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 581).
364
Maintenance
Air Filter Restriction Gauge

5
6
E226430
5. Remove the air filter element from the

air filter housing.
6. Remove the foam filter from the air
filter housing.
7. Install in the reverse order.
E226428
The air filter restriction gauge is in the

upper housing of the air filter assembly.
Check the air filter restriction gauge
whenever you open the hood to carry out
general engine maintenance or at least
every 7,500 mi (12,000 km). If you operate
your vehicle in extremely dusty conditions,
check the gauge at least every 500 mi
(800 km) or two weeks, whichever occurs
first. Change the air filter element when
the restriction gauge reads near the
change filter line and the gauge is yellow.
Allowing the restriction gauge to reach
maximum affects engine performance and
fuel economy.
365
Maintenance
Operating your vehicle in heavy snowfall Your vehicle has two fuel filters. The first
or extreme rain conditions may allow filter mounts on top of the engine on the
excessive amounts of snow or water into left-hand side. The second filter is inside
the air intake system. This could restrict air the diesel fuel conditioner module. The
flow and cause the engine to lose power module is attached to the fuel tank in
or shut down. different locations depending on the
configuration of your truck. See table
After installing a new air filter element, you
below for configurations.
must reset the gauge by pressing the reset
button. Note: The module is at the front of the fuel
tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank
After operating your vehicle during heavy
on some models.
snowfall or extreme rain, do the following:
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open Regular fuel filter changes are an
the hood and clear any snow and ice important part of engine maintenance;
from the air filter housing inlet and failing to keep with the scheduled
reset the air filter restriction gauge. maintenance could lead to engine
performance issues and fuel injection
• Extreme rain: The air filter element system damage. See Scheduled
dries out after approximately 15–30 Maintenance (page 581).
minutes of driving at highway speeds.
At the earliest opportunity, open the Use only recommended service parts
hood and reset the air filter restriction conforming to specifications. See
gauge. Motorcraft Parts (page 423).
Note: Do not remove the foam filter. Note: Using fuel that has high levels of
impurities may require more frequent filter
replacements than the service interval
CHANGING THE ENGINE- specifies.
MOUNTED AND DIESEL FUEL
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module
CONDITIONER MODULE FUEL Filter
FILTERS - 6.7L DIESEL
Filter Location
WARNING Use the tables below to find the location
Do not dispose of fuel in the of your filter.
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
366
Maintenance
Pick-up Truck
Cab Type Box Length Filter Location
Regular. 8 ft (2.4 m)
Left side of fuel tank.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
SuperCab.
8 ft (2.4 m)
In front of fuel tank.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
Super Crew Cab.
8 ft (2.4 m) Left side of fuel tank.
Chassis Cab
Cab Type Fuel Tank Type Filter Location
Chassis Cab. Single midship fuel tank Right side of fuel tank.
Right side of midship fuel
Chassis Cab. Aft axle/midship fuel tanks
tank.
Chassis Cab. Single aft axle fuel tank Front of fuel tank.
2. Locate your filter.

Removal
E247666
1. For 2017 models, disconnect the fuel

line quick connect coupling from the in
tank fuel pump. For 2018 models and
later, skip this step but insure that the
fuel filler cap is closed before draining
the filter. If the cap isn't closed, the
filter will siphon the fuel tank even with
the anti-siphon valve.
367
Maintenance
3
4
E226213
5
5. Fully loosen the bolts securing the
lower portion of the diesel fuel
conditioner module housing.
E226212
Note: Do not fully remove the bolts from
the lower portion of the diesel fuel
3. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner conditioner module housing.
module. Turn the drain plug
6. Remove the lower portion of the diesel
counterclockwise until it stops. Do not
fuel conditioner module housing.
use any tools to loosen the drain plug.
Drain the filter, approximately 0.53 gal
(2 L), into an appropriate container.
Do not re-use the fuel drained from the
module.
368
Maintenance
The engine-mounted fuel filter is a plastic

disposable cartridge.
7 Removal
E226563
E226215
7. Slide the filter element toward the
drain plug to disengage the securing 1. Disconnect the fuel lines by squeezing
clips. the connector tabs and pulling the lines
straight off.
Installation
1. Slide the filter element into the housing 3
and fully engage the securing clips.
2. Install the lower portion of the housing.
Tighten the bolts until you feel a strong
resistance. Maximum torque 7 lb.ft
(9 Nm).
3. Connect the electrical connector.
4. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise
until it stops and you feel a strong
resistance. Do not use any tools to 2
tighten the drain plug.
Engine-mounted Fuel Filter

E226214
Although the fuel system is not fully
pressurized when the vehicle is off, some 2. Rotate the filter fully counterclockwise
residual pressure may remain in the fuel until the peg is at the far end of the slot.
system since it can take some time for the 3. Pull the filter straight up from the
pressure to completely bleed off. bracket and discard the filter.
Therefore, we recommend you place an
absorbent cloth below the filter connectors
to absorb any fuel that may drain.
369
Maintenance
Installation
1. Install the new filter into the filter
bracket. Turn the filter clockwise to
lock it in place.
2. Reconnect the fuel lines.
370
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your dealer has many quality products Materials
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B
Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & WSS-M99P43-B
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37- WSS-M14P19-A
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
• Never use strong household detergents

or soap, for example dish washing or
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH • Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft to the touch, or during strong or direct
Detail Wash. sunlight.
371
Vehicle Care
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft Exterior Plastic Parts

terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting. For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird spots are present, we recommend
droppings, insect deposits and road tar. Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover. Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
• Remove any exterior accessories, for however, pressure washing may be used
example antennas, before entering a under the following conditions:
car wash. • Do not use water pressure higher than
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
can damage painted surfaces. If these • Do not use water hotter than 179°F
substances come in contact with your (82°C).
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as • Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
possible. angle pattern.
Cleaning the Headlamps • Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses vehicle's surface.
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them. Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when damage graphics and cause the edges to
they are dry. peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Exterior Chrome Parts Underbody
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product Regularly clean the underside of your
to bumpers and other chrome parts. vehicle using water. Keep body and door
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. drain holes free of debris or foreign
We recommend Motorcraft Custom material.
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to Under Hood
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning For removing black rubber marks from
product on chrome surfaces longer under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
than the time recommended. Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
• Using non-recommended cleaners can and Tar Remover.
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
WAXING
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
can scratch the chrome surface. car's paint from the elements. We
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal recommend that you wash and wax the
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. painted surface once or twice a year.
372
Vehicle Care
When washing and waxing, park your • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct Degreaser on all parts that require
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
applying wax. Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
• Use a quality wax that does not contain Shampoo.
abrasives. • Never wash or rinse the engine while it
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions is hot or running; water in the running
to apply and remove the wax. engine may cause internal damage.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
back-and-forth motion, not in circles. spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black) • Cover the battery, power distribution
colored trim. The wax will discolor or box, and air filter assembly to prevent
stain the parts over time. water damage when cleaning the
engine.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
CLEANING THE EXHAUST -
• Grained door handles.
6.7L DIESEL
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings. WARNINGS
• Windshield cowl area. Failure to maintain the functional
• Do not apply wax to glass areas. holes, in the tailpipe section of the
exhaust, clean and free of debris or
• After waxing, your car's paint should foreign material may result in the holes
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and becoming blocked or plugged. Do not
smudges. modify or remove the tail-pipe section.
Blocked or plugged holes or
CLEANING THE ENGINE removal/modification of the system could
result in elevated exhaust gas
Engines are more efficient when they are temperatures which may result in
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep vehicle/property damage or personal
the engine warmer than normal. injury.
When washing: The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
• Take care when using a power washer Never work around or attempt to
to clean the engine. The high-pressure repair any part of the exhaust system until
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts it has cooled. Use special care when
and cause damage. working around the diesel oxidation
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold catalytic converter and/or the diesel
water to avoid cracking the engine particulate filter (DPF). The diesel
block or other engine components.
373
Vehicle Care
WARNINGS To clean the windshield and wiper blades:

oxidation catalytic converter and/or the • Clean the windshield with a
DPF heats up to a high temperature after non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
only a short period of engine operation and cleaning the interior of the windshield,
can stay hot even after the engine is turned avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
off. Failure to follow these instructions may instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
result in personal injury. any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
E163380 The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
The visible holes in the exhaust tip and the grid lines.
holes under the shield just inboard of the
right rear tire(s) are functional. The holes
need to be kept clear of mud/debris or CLEANING THE INTERIOR
foreign material to maintain proper
function of the exhaust system. Clean and WARNINGS
remove debris or foreign material if present Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
as needed. Spraying with a hose during or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as
regular washing of vehicle should help these actions may weaken the belt
keep holes clean and clear of debris or webbing.
foreign material.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND chemical solvents or strong
WIPER BLADES detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
Car wash chemicals and environmental affect performance of the side airbag in a
fallout can result in windshield and wiper crash.
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
374
Vehicle Care
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
equipped with side airbags: the gloss of the upper portion of the
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a instrument panel. The dull finish in this
vacuum cleaner. area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength • Do not use any household cleaning
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
• If grease or tar is present on the instrument panel, interior trim and
material, spot-clean the area first with cluster lens.
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose • Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
Cleaner. have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
cleaning, clean the entire area to the interior painted surfaces.
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set. • Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
• Do not use household cleaning If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
products or glass cleaners, which can Your warranty may not cover these
stain and discolor the fabric and affect damages.
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials. If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT soft cloth as quickly as possible.
CLUSTER LENS 2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
WARNING available leather cleaning product for
Do not use chemical solvents or automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
strong detergents when cleaning the or stain remover on an inconspicuous
steering wheel or instrument panel area.
to avoid contamination of the airbag 3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
system. clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
Note: Follow the same procedure as clean, soft cloth.
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather 4. If necessary, apply more soap and
instrument panels and leather interior trim water solution or cleaning product to
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
(page 376). soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, 5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
these areas. motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
375
Vehicle Care
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. With King Ranch Edition
Your vehicle has seating covered in
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If premium, top-grain leather that is
Equipped)
extremely durable, but still requires special
care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.
Without King Ranch Edition
Regular cleaning and conditioning
Note: Follow the same procedure as maintains the appearance of the leather.
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim Cleaning
surfaces.
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean, For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
soft cloth. a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
For cleaning and removing spots and stains and water solution.
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a • Clean spills as quickly as possible.
commercially available leather cleaning • Test any cleaner or stain remover on
product for automotive interiors. an inconspicuous part of the leather as
cleaners may darken the leather.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area. • Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,
orange juice or oil-based products on
You should: the leather as they may permanently
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a stain the leather.
vacuum cleaner. • Do not use household cleaning
• Clean and treat spills and stains as products, alcohol solutions, solvents
soon as possible. or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
or plastics.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather: Scratches
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
Because the leather in the seat comes
leather conditioners.
from genuine steer hides, there may be
• Household cleaners. evidence of naturally occurring markings,
• Alcohol solutions. such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are
• Solvents or cleaners intended
considered to be proof of a genuine leather
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
product.
plastics.
In order to lessen the appearance of
certain scratches and other wear marks,
apply conditioner on the affected area
following the same instructions as in the
Conditioning section.
376
Vehicle Care
Conditioning Note: Some car washes could damage

wheel rims and covers.
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
are available at the King Ranch Saddle Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
Shop. Visit the website at harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
www.krsaddleshop.com, or call cleaners or abrasive materials could
1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United damage wheel rims and covers.
States. If you are unable to obtain King
Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another VEHICLE STORAGE
premium leather conditioner.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
outlined in the Cleaning section. days or more, read the following
• Make sure the leather is dry then apply maintenance recommendations to make
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner sure your vehicle stays in good operating
to a clean, dry cloth. condition.
• Rub the conditioner into the leather We engineer and test all motor vehicles
until it disappears. Allow the and their components for reliable, regular
conditioner to dry, then repeat the driving. Under various conditions,
process for the entire interior. If a film long-term storage may lead to degraded
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean engine performance or failure unless you
cloth. use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
CLEANING THE WHEELS (If General
Equipped) • Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel • Protect from sunlight, if possible.
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if • If vehicles are stored outside, they
available. require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge. Body
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
use Ford approved bug and tar remover remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
if available. exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
after cleaning.
stored in exposed locations.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an • Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
extended period after cleaning the wheels prevent rust.
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discs, brake pads and linings. discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
377
Vehicle Care
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage Battery

compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil. • Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and days without recharging the battery,
solvents. we recommend that you disconnect
Engine the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to Note: It is necessary to reset memory
storage because used engine oil features if battery cables are disconnected.
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage. Brakes
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle • Make sure the brakes and parking brake
with the climate controls set to defrost release fully.
until the engine reaches normal Tires
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift • Maintain recommended air pressure.
through all the gears while the engine
is running. Miscellaneous
• We recommend that you change the • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
engine oil before you use your vehicle and pins under your vehicle are covered
again. with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
Fuel system every 15 days to lubricate working parts
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel and prevent corrosion.
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle. Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
Cooling system storage, do the following:
• Protect against freezing temperatures. • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
• When removing your vehicle from or grease film build-up on window
storage, check coolant fluid level. surfaces.
Confirm that there are no cooling • Check windshield wipers for any
system leaks and that fluid is at the deterioration.
recommended level. • Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
378
Vehicle Care
• Check tire pressures and set tire

inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
379
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION Notice to utility vehicle and truck

owners
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your WARNINGS
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the Utility vehicles have a significantly
tires from that fitted at the factory, the higher rollover rate than other types
speedometer may not display the correct of vehicles.
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized Vehicles with a higher center of
dealer to have the system reprogrammed. gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
If you intend to change the size of the vehicles) handle differently than
wheels from that fitted by the vehicles with a lower center of gravity
manufacturer, you can check the suitability (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
with an authorized dealer. excessive speed and abrupt steering in
Additional information related to the these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
functionality and maintenance of your tires increases the risk of losing control of your
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
Care (page 382). death.
The Ford recommended tire inflation In a rollover crash, an unbelted
pressures can be found on the Tire Label, person is significantly more likely to
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
of the driver's door. This information can Do not become overconfident in the
also be found on the Safety Compliance ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Certification Label (affixed to either the Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the may accelerate better than a two-wheel
door edge that meets the door last post; drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
next to the driver’s seating position). won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
Ford strongly recommends maintaining vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire E145298
size combination (if equipped).
380
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
differently than passenger cars in the initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
various driving conditions that are drive while the vehicle is moving can cause
encountered on streets, highways and a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not These sounds are normal and are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high cause for concern.
as passenger cars any more than low-slung In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
sports cars are designed to perform spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there
Study your owner's manual and any is a significant difference between the size
supplements for specific information about of a spare and the remaining tires,
equipment features, instructions for safe four-wheel drive functionality may be
driving and additional precautions to limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive
reduce the risk of an accident or serious (page 216).
injury.
How your vehicle differs from
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped) other vehicles
WARNING Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
Do not become overconfident in the from some other vehicles in a few
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive

(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 216). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 329). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle. E145299
381
Wheels and Tires
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying As a result of the above dimensional

capacity and to allow it to travel over differences, Sport utility vehicles and
rough terrain without getting hung up trucks often will have a higher center of
or damaging underbody components. gravity and a greater difference in center
• Shorter - to give it the capability to of gravity between the loaded and
approach inclines and drive over the unloaded condition. These differences that
crest of a hill without getting hung up make your vehicle so versatile also make
or damaging underbody components. it handle differently than an ordinary
All other things held equal, a shorter passenger car.
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs TIRE CARE
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater Information About Uniform
maneuverability in tight spaces, Tire Quality Grading
particularly in off-road use.
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
E168583
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
382
Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new Traction AA A B C

pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread, WARNING
winter-type snow tires, The traction grade assigned
space-saver or temporary use to this tire is based on
spare tires, light truck or LT type straight-ahead braking traction
tires, tires with nominal rim tests, and does not include
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or acceleration, cornering,
limited production tires as defined hydroplaning or peak traction
in Title 49 Code of Federal characteristics.
Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).
U.S. Department of The traction grades, from highest
Transportation Tire quality to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades: The U.S. Department of grades represent the tire’s ability
Transportation requires Ford to stop on wet pavement as
Motor Company to give you the measured under controlled
following information about tire conditions on specified
grades exactly as the government government test surfaces of
has written it. asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
Treadwear performance.
The treadwear grade is a Temperature A B C
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested WARNING
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. The temperature grade for
For example, a tire graded 150 this tire is established for a
would wear one and one-half (1 tire that is properly inflated and
½) times as well on the not overloaded. Excessive speed,
government course as a tire underinflation, or excessive
graded 100. The relative loading, either separately or in
performance of tires depends combination, can cause heat
upon the actual conditions of their buildup and possible tire failure.
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to The temperature grades are A
variations in driving habits, service (the highest), B and C,
practices, and differences in road representing the tire’s resistance
characteristics and climate. to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
383
Wheels and Tires
test wheel. Sustained high *Standard load: A class of

temperature can cause the P-metric or Metric tires designed
material of the tire to degenerate to carry a maximum load at set
and reduce tire life, and excessive pressure. For example: For
temperature can lead to sudden P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
tire failure. The grade C for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
corresponds to a level of Increasing the inflation pressure
performance which all passenger beyond this pressure will not
car tires must meet under the increase the tire’s load carrying
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety capability.
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A *Extra load: A class of P-metric
represent higher levels of or Metric tires designed to carry a
performance on the laboratory heavier maximum load at 42 psi
test wheel than the minimum (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
required by law. pressure beyond this pressure will
Glossary of Tire Terminology not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes, *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
recommended inflation pressure air pressure.
and the maximum weight the *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
vehicle can carry. standard unit of air pressure.
*Tire Identification Number *Cold tire pressure: The tire
(TIN): A number on the sidewall pressure when the vehicle has
of each tire providing information been stationary and out of direct
about the tire brand and sunlight for an hour or more and
manufacturing plant, tire size and prior to the vehicle being driven for
date of manufacture. Also referred 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
to as DOT code.
*Recommended inflation
*Inflation pressure: A measure pressure: The cold inflation
of the amount of air in a tire. pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
384
Wheels and Tires
B-pillar: The structural member Information on P Type Tires

at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door. E
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
C D F
the tire next to the rim. G
B
H
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the A
I
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle. M J
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated. L
K
E142543
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
Both United States and Canada rating. The definitions of these
Federal regulations require tire items are listed below. (Note that
manufacturers to place the tire size, load index and speed
standardized information on the rating for your vehicle may be
sidewall of all tires. This different from this example).
information identifies and
describes the fundamental A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
characteristics of the tire and also by the Tire and Rim Association,
provides a U.S. DOT Tire that may be used for service on
Identification Number for safety cars, sport utility vehicles,
standard certification and in case minivans and light trucks. Note: If
of a recall. your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
385
Wheels and Tires
B. 215: Indicates the nominal Note: You may not find this
width of the tire in millimeters information on all tires because it
from sidewall edge to sidewall is not required by federal law.
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire. Letter mph ( km/h)
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio rating
which gives the tire's ratio of M 81 (130)
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. N 87 (140)
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim Q 99 (159)
diameter in inches. If you change R 106 (171)
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the S 112 (180)
new wheel diameter.
T 118 (190)
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to U 124 (200)
how much weight a tire can carry. H 130 (210)
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not, V 149 (240)
contact a local tire dealer.
W 168 (270)
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it Y 186 (299)
is not required by federal law. Note: For tires with a maximum
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed speed capability over 149 mph
rating. The speed rating denotes (240 km/h), tire manufacturers
the speed at which a tire is sometimes use the letters ZR. For
designed to be driven for extended those with a maximum speed
periods of time under a standard capability over 186 mph (299
condition of load and inflation km/h), tire manufacturers always
pressure. The tires on your vehicle use the letters ZR.
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
pressure. These speed ratings may Number: This begins with the
need to be adjusted for the letters DOT and indicates that the
difference in conditions. The tire meets all federal standards.
ratings range from 81 mph (130 The next two numbers or letters
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). are the plant code designating
These ratings are listed in the where it was manufactured, the
following chart. next two are the tire size code and
386
Wheels and Tires
the last four numbers represent *Treadwear The treadwear grade

the week and year the tire was is a comparative rating based on
built. For example, the numbers the wear rate of the tire when
317 mean the 31st week of 1997. tested under controlled conditions
After 2000 the numbers go to four on a specified government test
digits. For example, 2501 means course. For example, a tire graded
the 25th week of 2001. The 150 would wear 1½ times as well
numbers in between are on the government course as a tire
identification codes used for graded 100.
traceability. This information is *Traction: The traction grades,
used to contact customers if a tire from highest to lowest are AA, A,
defect requires a recall. B, and C. The grades represent the
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
AT: All Terrain, or controlled conditions on specified
AS: All Season. government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
J. Tire Ply Composition and marked C may have poor traction
Material Used: Indicates the performance.
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in *Temperature: The temperature
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire grades are A (the highest), B and
manufacturers also must indicate C, representing the tire's
the ply materials in the tire and the resistance to the generation of
sidewall, which include steel, heat and its ability to dissipate
nylon, polyester, and others. heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the laboratory test wheel.
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the M. Maximum Inflation
tire. (affixed to either the door Pressure: Indicates the tire
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the manufacturers' maximum
door edge that meets the permissible pressure or the
door-latch post, next to the pressure at which the maximum
driver's seating position), or Tire load can be carried by the tire. This
Label located on the B-pillar or pressure is normally higher than
the edge of the driver's door. the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
L. Treadwear, Traction and pressure which can be found on
Temperature Grades: the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
387
Wheels and Tires
that meets the door-latch post, A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated

next to the driver's seating by the Tire and Rim Association,
position), or Tire Label located on that is intended for service on light
the B-pillar or the edge of the trucks.
driver's door. The cold inflation B. Load Range and Load
pressure should never be set lower Inflation Limits: Indicates the
than the recommended pressure tire's load-carrying capabilities
on the vehicle label. and its inflation limits.
The tire suppliers may have C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
additional markings, notes or at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
warnings such as standard load maximum load and tire pressure
or radial tubeless. when the tire is used as a dual;
Additional Information defined as four tires on the rear
Contained on the Tire Sidewall axle (a total of six or more tires on
for LT Type Tires the vehicle).
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not D. Maximum Load Single lb
apply to this type of tire. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
B a single; defined as two tires
C (total) on the rear axle.
A Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
D
E142544
B
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
388
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio

which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
B C D lower indicate a short sidewall.
A E D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
Inflating Your Tires
E142545 Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
T type tires have some additional properly inflated. Remember that
information beyond those of P a tire can lose up to half of its air
type tires. These differences are pressure without appearing flat.
described below:
Every day before you drive, check
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, your tires. If one looks lower than
designated by the Tire and Rim the others, use a tire gauge to
Association, that is intended for check pressure of all tires and
temporary service on cars, sport adjust if required.
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks. At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
B. 145: Indicates the nominal check the tire pressure with a tire
width of the tire in millimeters gauge (including spare, if
from sidewall edge to sidewall equipped). Inflate all tires to the
edge. In general, the larger the inflation pressure recommended
number, the wider the tire. by Ford Motor Company.
389
Wheels and Tires
You are strongly urged to buy a Tire Label (affixed to either the
reliable tire pressure gauge, as door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
automatic service station gauges or the door edge that meets the
may be inaccurate. Ford door-latch post, next to the
recommends the use of a digital driver's seating position), or Tire
or dial-type tire pressure gauge Label located on the B-pillar or
rather than a stick-type tire the edge of the driver's door.
pressure gauge. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
Use the recommended cold uneven treadwear patterns and
inflation pressure for optimum tire adversely affect the way your
performance and wear. vehicle handles.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
patterns. to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
WARNING maintain the inflation pressure at
Under-inflation is the most the levels specified by Ford, your
common cause of tire failures vehicle may experience a condition
and may result in severe tire known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
cracking, tread separation or severe vibration and oscillation in
blowout, with unexpected loss of the steering wheel after the vehicle
vehicle control and increased risk travels over a bump or dip in the
of injury. Under-inflation increases road that does not dampen out by
sidewall flexing and rolling itself. Shimmy may result from
resistance, resulting in heat significant under-inflation of the
buildup and internal damage to tires, improper tires (load range,
the tire. It also may result in size, or type), or vehicle
unnecessary tire stress, irregular modifications such as lift-kits. In
wear, loss of vehicle control and the event that your vehicle
accidents. A tire can lose up to experiences shimmy, you should
half of its air pressure and not slowly reduce speed by either lifting
appear to be flat! off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
Always inflate your tires to the will cease as the vehicle speed
Ford recommended inflation decreases.
pressure even if it is less than the Maximum Inflation Pressure is
maximum inflation pressure the tire manufacturer's maximum
information found on the tire. The permissible pressure and the
Ford recommended tire inflation pressure at which the maximum
pressure is found on the Safety load can be carried by the tire. This
Compliance Certification Label or pressure is normally higher than
390
Wheels and Tires
the manufacturer’s recommended Note: If you are checking tire

cold inflation pressure which can pressure when the tire is hot, (for
be found on the Safety example, driven more than 1 mile
Compliance Certification Label [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
(affixed to either the door hinge reduce air pressure. The tires are
pillar, door-latch post, or the door hot from driving and it is normal for
edge that meets the door-latch pressures to increase above
post, next to the driver's seating recommended cold pressures. A
position), or Tire Label located on hot tire at or below recommended
the B-pillar or the edge of the cold inflation pressure could be
driver's door. The cold inflation significantly under-inflated.
pressure should never be set lower Note: If you have to drive a
than the recommended pressure distance to get air for your tire(s),
on the Safety Compliance check and record the tire pressure
Certification Label or Tire Label. first and add the appropriate air
When weather temperature pressure when you get to the
changes occur, tire inflation pump. It is normal for tires to heat
pressures also change. A 10°F up and the air pressure inside to go
(6°C) temperature drop can up as you drive.
cause a corresponding drop of 1 2. Remove the cap from the valve
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. on one tire, then firmly press the
Check your tire pressures tire gauge onto the valve and
frequently and adjust them to the measure the pressure.
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance 3. Add enough air to reach the
Certification Label or Tire Label. recommended air pressure.
To check the pressure in your Note: If you overfill the tire, release
tire(s): air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
1. Make sure the tires are cool, recheck the pressure with your tire
meaning they are not hot from gauge.
driving even a mile.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
391
Wheels and Tires
Note: Some spare tires operate at All tires with Steel Carcass Plies
a higher inflation pressure than the (if equipped):
other tires. For T type mini-spare This type of tire utilizes steel cords
tires, (see the Dissimilar spare in the sidewalls. As such, they
wheel and tire assembly cannot be treated like normal light
information for a description. Store truck tires. Tire service, including
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). adjusting tire pressure, must be
For full-size and dissimilar spare performed by personnel trained,
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel supervised and equipped
and tire assembly information for according to Federal Occupational
a description. Store and maintain Safety and Health Administration
at the higher of the front and rear regulations. For example, during
inflation pressure as shown on the any procedure involving tire
Safety Compliance Certification inflation, the technician or
Label or Tire Label. individual must utilize a remote
6. Visually inspect the tires to inflation device, and ensure that
make sure there are no nails or all persons are clear of the
other objects embedded that trajectory area.
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak. WARNING
7. Check the sidewalls to make Always inflate steel carcass
sure there are no gouges, cuts or tires with a remote air fill with
bulges. the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away
Tire Inflation Information from the wheel and tire assembly.
WARNING
An inflated tire and rim can
be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or
maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to
re-inflate a tire which has been run
flat or seriously under-inflated
without first removing the tire
from the wheel assembly for
inspection. Do not attempt to add
air to tires or replace tires or
wheels without first taking
precautions to protect persons
and property.
392
Wheels and Tires
E161437
it needs to be repaired or replaced.

Inspecting Your Tires and For your safety, tires that are
Wheel Valve Stems damaged or show signs of
Periodically inspect the tire treads excessive wear should not be used
for uneven or excessive wear and because they are more likely to
remove objects such as stones, blow out or fail.
nails or glass that may be wedged Improper or inadequate vehicle
in the tread grooves. Check the tire maintenance can cause tires to
and valve stems for holes, cracks, wear abnormally. Inspect all your
or cuts that may permit air tires, including the spare,
leakage and repair or replace the frequently, and replace them if
tire and replace the valve stem. one or more of the following
Inspect the tire sidewalls for conditions exist:
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
393
Wheels and Tires
Tire Wear or suspected have the tire

inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNINGS
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
E142546 such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
When the tread is worn down to (load, speed, inflation pressure)
one sixteenth of an inch (2 the tires experience throughout
millimeters), tires must be their lives.
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and In general, tires should be
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear replaced after six years
indicators, or wear bars, which regardless of tread wear or even
look like narrow strips of smooth if they have not been used.
rubber across the tread will However, heat caused by hot
appear on the tire when the tread climates or frequent high-load
is worn down to one sixteenth of conditions can accelerate the
an inch (2 millimeters). aging process and may require you
to replace tires more frequently.
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear You should replace your
bars, the tire is worn out and must spare tire when you replace
be replaced. the road tires or after six years due
to aging even if it has not been
Damage used.
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
394
Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification WARNINGS

Number Only use replacement tires
Both United States and Canada and wheels that are the same
Federal regulations require tire size, load index, speed rating and
manufacturers to place type (such as P-metric versus
standardized information on the LT-metric or all-season versus
sidewall of all tires. This all-terrain) as those originally
information identifies and provided by Ford. The
describes the fundamental recommended tire and wheel size
characteristics of the tire and also may be found on either the Safety
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Compliance Certification Label
Identification Number for safety (affixed to either the door hinge
standard certification and in case pillar, door-latch post, or the door
of a recall. edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating
This begins with the letters DOT position), or the Tire Label which
and indicates that the tire meets is located on the B-Pillar or edge
all federal standards. The next of the driver’s door. If this
two numbers or letters are the information is not found on these
plant code designating where it labels, then you should contact
was manufactured, the next two your authorized dealer as soon as
are the tire size code and the last possible. Use of any tire or wheel
four numbers represent the week not recommended by Ford can
and year the tire was built. For affect the safety and performance
example, the numbers 317 mean of your vehicle, which could result
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 in an increased risk of loss of
the numbers go to four digits. For vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
example, 2501 means the 25th personal injury and death.
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes To reduce the risk of serious
used for traceability. This injury, when mounting
information is used to contact replacement tires and wheels, you
customers if a tire defect requires should not exceed the maximum
a recall. pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
Tire Replacement additional precautions listed
Requirements below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
Your vehicle is equipped with tires re-lubricate and try again.
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
395
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS The two front tires or two rear tires

When inflating the tire for should generally be replaced as a
mounting pressures up to 20 psi pair.
(1.38 bar) greater than the The tire pressure sensors mounted
maximum pressure on the tire in the wheels are not designed to
sidewall, the following be used in aftermarket wheels.
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the The use of wheels or tires not
tire: recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
1. Make sure that you have the operation of your tire pressure
correct tire and wheel size. monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
2. Lubricate the tire bead and system indicator is flashing, the
wheel bead seat area again. system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft incompatible with your tire
(3.66 m) away from the wheel pressure monitoring system, or
and tire assembly. some component of the system
may be damaged.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection. Replacing a Tire That is
Greenhouse Gas Certified
For a mounting pressure
more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) The tires installed on this vehicle
greater than the maximum at the factory as original
pressure, a Ford dealer or other equipment are certified for
tire service professional should do Greenhouse Gas and Fuel
the mounting. Efficiency regulations.
Always inflate steel carcass Replacement tires must be of
tires with a remote air fill with equal or lower rolling resistance
the person inflating standing at a level (TRRL or Crr). Consult with
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away your tire supplier(s) for
from the wheel and tire assembly. appropriate replacement tires.
Important: Remember to replace

the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
396
Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices If you feel a sudden vibration or

ride disturbance while driving, or
WARNINGS you suspect your tire or vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in has been damaged, immediately
snow, mud or sand, do not reduce your speed. Drive with
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the caution until you can safely pull
tires can tear the tire and cause off the road. Stop and inspect the
an explosion. A tire can explode in tires for damage. If a tire is
as little as three to five seconds. under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
Do not spin the wheels at replace it with your spare tire and
over 34 mph (55 km/h). The wheel. If you cannot detect a
tires may fail and injure a cause, have the vehicle towed to
passenger or bystander. the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and Tire and Wheel Alignment
safety.
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
*Observe posted speed limits. pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns. misaligned or cause damage to
*Avoid potholes and objects on your tires. If your vehicle seems to
the road. pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
*Do not run over curbs or hit the alignment. Have an authorized
tire against a curb when parking. dealer check the wheel alignment
Highway Hazards periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
No matter how carefully you drive or the rear can cause uneven and
there’s always the possibility that rapid treadwear of your tires and
you may eventually have a flat tire should be corrected by an
on the highway. Drive slowly to the authorized dealer. Front-wheel
closest safe area out of traffic. drive vehicles and those with an
This may further damage the flat independent rear suspension may
tire, but your safety is more require alignment of all four
important. wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
397
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation Rotating your tires at the

recommended interval (as
WARNING indicated in the Scheduled
If the tire label shows Maintenance chapter) will help
different tire pressures for the your tires wear more evenly,
front and rear tires and the vehicle providing better tire performance
has a tire pressure monitoring and longer tire life. Sometime
system, then you need to update irregular tire wear can be
the settings for the system corrected by rotating the tires.
sensors. Always perform the
system reset procedure after tire
rotation. If you do not reset the
system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven

wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or E142548
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation. Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
Note: Your vehicle may be tires at left of diagram).
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
398
Wheels and Tires
E166988
Dual rear wheel drive vehicle - six

tire rotation (front tires at top of E227387
diagram).
If your vehicle is equipped with Note: When installing 17-inch dual
dual rear wheels it is rear wheels, align the valve stems
recommended that the front and facing each other.
rear tires (in pairs) be rotated only
side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be
adjusted for the tires new
positions in accordance with
vehicle requirements.
399
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS • Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains

rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
WARNING and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
Snow tires must be the same size, damage to your vehicle.
load index, speed rating as those • Remove the tire chains when they are
originally provided by Ford. Use of no longer needed. Do not use tire
any tire or wheel not recommended by chains on dry roads.
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could If you have any questions regarding snow
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle chains or cables, please contact your
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and authorized dealer.
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
case or power transfer unit failure. SYSTEM
Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring
with 20 inch wheels and tires. System
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather WARNING
treads to provide traction in rain and snow. The tire pressure monitoring system
However, in some climates, you may need is not a substitute for manually
to use snow tires and cables. If you need checking tire pressures. You should
to use cables, it is recommended that steel periodically check tire pressures using a
wheels (of the same size and pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
specifications) be used, as cables may chip maintain tire pressures could increase the
aluminum wheels. risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
Note: The suspension insulation and rollover and personal injury.
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your Each tire, including the spare (if
vehicle when using snow tires and chains. provided), should be checked
Follow these guidelines when using snow monthly when cold and inflated
tires and chains: to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
• If possible, avoid fully loading your placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
vehicle your vehicle has tires of a different size
• Use only SAE Class S chains. than the size indicated on the vehicle
• Install chains securely, verifying that placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
the chains do not touch any wiring, should determine the proper tire inflation
brake lines or fuel lines. pressure for those tires.)
400
Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
Monitoring System (TPMS) that license-exempt RSS standard(s).
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale Operation is subject to the following two
when one or more of your tires is conditions:
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, • This device may not cause harmful
when the low tire pressure telltale interference.
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate • This device must accept any
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a interference received, including
significantly under-inflated tire causes the interference that may cause undesired
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. operation.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
and tire tread life, and may affect the
Monitoring System
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure E142549
telltale. When the system detects a

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
approximately one minute and then remain
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
continuously illuminated. This sequence
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
When the malfunction indicator is care when changing the tire to avoid
illuminated, the system may not be able damaging the sensor.
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
You should always have your tires serviced
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
by an authorized dealer.
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate Check the tire pressure periodically (at
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent least monthly) using an accurate tire
the TPMS from functioning properly. gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
Always check the TPMS malfunction chapter.
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
401
Wheels and Tires
Understanding Your Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system

Monitoring System measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
Single Rear Wheel vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, one or more of your tires are
under-inflated and needs to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
E224333 When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
Dual Rear Wheel system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
E224332
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
402
Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required

warning light
Solid warning light Tire under inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
Tire rotation without On vehicles with different front and rear
sensor training tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 382).
Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
light assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
403
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset

Procedure
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire WARNING
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to To determine the required
your tires. pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the
Safety Compliance Certification
It may take up to two minutes of driving Label (on the door hinge pillar, door-latch
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn post or the door edge that meets the
off after you have filled your tires to the door-latch post, next to the driver seat) or
recommended inflation pressure. the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitoring system reset procedure after
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic each tire rotation.
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure To provide the vehicle's load carrying
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 capability, some vehicles require different
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the recommended tire pressures in the front
vehicle is stationary overnight with the tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
outside temperature significantly lower pressure monitoring system equipped on
than the daytime temperature, the tire these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 low tire pressure warning light at two
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient different pressures; one for the front tires
temperature. This lower pressure value and one for the rear tires.
may be detected by the tire pressure Since tires need to be rotated to provide
monitoring system as being significantly consistent performance and maximum tire
lower than the recommended inflation life, the tire pressure monitoring system
pressure and activate the system warning needs to know when the tires are rotated
light for low tire pressure. to determine which set of tires are on the
If the low tire pressure warning light is on, front and which are on the rear. With this
visually check each tire to verify that no tire information, the system can detect and
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as properly warn of low tire pressures.
necessary. Check the air pressure in the System reset tips:
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
404
Wheels and Tires
• To reduce the chances of interference 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring

from another vehicle, perform the system sensors in the tires using the
system reset procedure at least three following system reset sequence
feet (one meter) away from another starting with the left front tire in the
Ford Motor Company vehicle following clockwise order: Left front
undergoing the system reset procedure (driver's side front tire), Right front
at the same time. (passenger's side front tire), Right rear
• Do not wait more than two minutes (passenger's side rear tire), Left rear
between resetting each tire sensor or (driver's side rear tire).
the system will time-out and the entire 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
procedure will have to be repeated on stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
all four wheels. air pressure until the horn sounds.
• A double horn will sound indicating the Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
need to repeat the procedure. the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
Performing the System Reset Procedure double horn is heard, the reset procedure
(Single Rear Wheel) was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
Read the entire procedure before 7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
attempting. stem on the right front tire. Decrease
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph the air pressure until the horn sounds.
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes, 8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
then park in a safe location where you stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
can easily get to all four tires and have air pressure until the horn sounds.
access to an air pump.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
2. Place the ignition in the off position and stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
keep the key in the ignition. air pressure until the horn sounds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position Training is complete after the horn
with the engine off. sounds for the last tire trained (driver's
side rear tire), the system indicator
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off stops flashing, and a message is shown
three times. You must accomplish this in the information display.
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn 10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
will sound once, the system indicator beeps are heard, the reset procedure
will flash and a message is shown in was unsuccessful and you must
the information display. If this does not repeat it. If after repeating the
occur, please try again starting at Step procedure and two short beeps are
2. If after repeated attempts to enter heard when the ignition is turned to
the reset mode, the horn does not off, seek assistance from your
sound, the system indicator does not authorized dealer.
flash and no message is shown in the
information display, seek service from
your authorized dealer.
405
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
air pressure as indicated on the system sensors in the tires using the
Safety Compliance Certification following system reset sequence
Label (affixed to either the door hinge starting with the left front tire in the
pillar, door-latch post, or the door following order: Left front (driver's side
edge that meets the door-latch post, front tire), Right front (passenger's side
next to the driver's seating position) front tire), Right outer rear (passenger's
or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar side rear outer tire), Right inner rear
or the edge of the driver's door. (passenger's side rear inner tire), Left
outer rear (driver's side rear outer tire),
Performing the System Reset Procedure Left inner rear (driver's side rear inner
(Dual Rear Wheel) tire).
For further information see 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
Understanding Your Tire Pressure stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
Monitoring System and refer to Dual air pressure until the horn sounds.
Rear Wheel, earlier in this section.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
Read the entire procedure before the sensor identification code has been
attempting. learned by the module for this position. If a
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph double horn is heard, the reset procedure
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes, was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
then park in a safe location where you 7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
can easily get to all six tires and have stem on the right front tire. Decrease
access to an air pump. the air pressure until the horn sounds.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and 8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
keep the key in the ignition. stem on the right outer rear tire.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position Decrease the air pressure until the horn
with the engine off. sounds.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
three times. You must accomplish this stem on the right inner rear tire.
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode Decrease the air pressure until the horn
has been entered successfully, the horn sounds.
will sound once, the system indicator 10. Remove the valve cap from the valve
will flash and a message is shown in stem on the left outer rear tire.
the information display. If this does not Decrease the air pressure until the
occur, please try again starting at Step horn sounds.
2. If after repeated attempts to enter 11. Remove the valve cap from the valve
the reset mode, the horn does not stem on the left inner rear tire.
sound, the system indicator does not Decrease the air pressure until the
flash and no message is shown in the horn sounds. Training is complete
information display, seek service from after the horn sounds for the last tire
your authorized dealer. trained, the system indicator stops
flashing, and a message is shown in
406
Wheels and Tires
12. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn The trailer tire pressure monitoring system
beeps are heard, the reset procedure is an added safety feature that allows you
was unsuccessful and you must to view your trailer tire pressures through
repeat it. If after repeating the the information display. See General
procedure and two short beeps are Information (page 114). Tire pressure
heard when the ignition is turned to sensors are mounted into each tire on your
off, seek assistance from your trailer. The sensors send a message to your
authorized dealer. vehicle indicating the current trailer tire
13. Set all six tires to the recommended pressure.
air pressure as indicated on the If the trailer tire pressure monitoring
Safety Compliance Certification system detects that a tire is low, a warning
Label (affixed to either the door hinge message appears in the information
pillar, door-latch post, or the door display. The trailer tire pressure status
edge that meets the door-latch post, screen in the information display highlights
next to the driver's seating position) the tire with a low pressure.
or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar
The main function of the trailer tire
or the edge of the driver's door.
pressure monitoring system is to warn you
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring when your trailer tires need air. It can also
System (If Equipped) warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended.
Note: Additional equipment may be See Information Messages (page 131).
required for your vehicle to support trailer
tire pressure monitoring. See your authorized When a Temporary Spare or New Tire
dealer for more information. is Installed
Note: The trailer tire pressure monitoring If you have replaced a trailer tire with a new
system is not a substitute for proper tire or spare tire, a warning message appears
maintenance. It is your responsibility to and pressure readings are no longer
maintain correct tire pressures at all times. displayed for that tire.
Note: If a trailer tire is repaired, replaced or To restore the full function of the trailer
broken down for service, the screw and valve tire pressure monitoring system:
on the trailer tire pressure sensor should be • Have the damaged wheel and tire
replaced. See your authorized dealer for assembly repaired and remounted to
details. your trailer.
• Install the trailer tire pressure
monitoring sensor into the new wheel
and tire assembly.
• Perform the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring

System Reset Procedure
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation, or when a new trailer tire
E235807 pressure sensor is installed into a trailer tire.
407
Wheels and Tires
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
can be reset through the menu in the Assembly Information
information display. See General
Information (page 114). Performing the WARNING
trailer setup process also resets the trailer Failure to follow these guidelines
tire pressure monitoring system. could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
WARNING tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
you should replace it as soon as possible
becomes damaged it may not
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
function.
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
tire pressure monitoring system, the is damaged, it should be replaced rather
indicator light will illuminate when the spare than repaired.
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
equipped with tire pressure monitoring is defined as a spare wheel and tire
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
Note: You should only use tire sealants in wheels.
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring Full-size dissimilar spare
system sensor. When driving with the full-size dissimilar
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
decrease your speed. Hold the steering • Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe wheel and tire assembly at a time.
place on the side of the road.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
pressure monitoring system, have a flat and tire assembly.
serviced by an authorized dealer in order
to prevent damage to the system sensors. When driving with the full-size dissimilar
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
(page 400). Replace the spare tire with a recommended that you do not:
road tire as soon as possible. During • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD.
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have • Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is
the authorized dealer inspect the system stationary.
sensor for damage.
• Use 4WD on dry pavement.
408
Wheels and Tires
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare When driving with the full-size dissimilar
wheel and tire assembly can lead to spare wheel and tire assembly additional
impairment of the following: caution should be given to:
• Handling, stability and braking • Towing a trailer.
performance. • Driving vehicles equipped with a
• Comfort and noise. camper body.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Driving vehicles with a load on the
• Winter weather driving capability. cargo rack.
• Wet weather driving capability. Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
• Four-wheel drive capability.
and seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and

Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire,
jack and associated tools, see the
following table for their locations:
Tool Location
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only) Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper.
Jack Fastened to the floor pan behind the rear-
most seat on the passenger side.
Jack handle, lug wrench, lug wrench exten- Regular Cab: Fastened to floor behind the
sion (only available on dual rear wheel driver seat.
vehicles) and wheel chock (only available Super Cab and Crew Cab: Fastened to the
on single rear wheel vehicles equipped with floor under the rear seat on the driver's side.
a diesel engine)
Removing the Spare Tire (With

Spare Tire Carrier Only)
The following tools are required to remove
the spare tire:
E162795
409
Wheels and Tires
One handle extension and two typical 1. Fully insert the jack handle (with one
extensions. To assemble, align the button extension) through the bumper hole
with the hole and slide the parts together. and into the guide tube. You will feel
some resistance when you turn the jack
To disconnect, press the button and pull
handle assembly.
apart.
2. Turn the handle counterclockwise and
lower the spare tire until you can slide
the tire rearward and the cable is slack.
3. Remove the retainer through the center
of the wheel. If your vehicle is equipped
with a tether, perform the following
steps.
E162796
One wheel nut wrench. Slide over the

square end of the jack handle.
E162800
4. Lift the spare tire on end to access the

tether attachment.
5. Use the lug wrench to remove the lug
nut from the spare tire tether.
6. If not replacing the spare or flat tire to
the underbody storage area, raise the
E162797 wheel retainer up into the installed
position.
7. Use the attached fastener strap (on
the spare tire tether) to attach the
tether end to the winch retainer prior
to raising to the installed position.
E227181
410
Wheels and Tires
Tire Change Procedure Note: Do not use impact tools or power

tools operating at over 200 RPM on the
WARNINGS spare wheel carrier winch, which may cause
When one of the front wheels is off it to malfunction and prevent a secure fit.
the ground, the transmission alone Override the winch at least three times
will not prevent the vehicle from (there is an audible click each time) to make
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the sure the wheel and tire fit securely.
transmission is in park (P). Note: Passengers should not remain in the
To help prevent your vehicle from vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
moving when changing a wheel, shift Park on a level surface, set the parking
the transmission into park (P), set brake and activate the hazard flashers.
the parking brake and use an appropriate
block or wheel chock to secure the wheel
diagonally opposite to the wheel being
changed. For example, when changing the
front left wheel, place an appropriate block
or wheel chock on the right rear wheel.
No person should place any portion
of their body under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
E142551
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel. 1. Turn the engine off and block the wheel
Always use the jack provided as that is diagonally opposite of the flat
original equipment with your vehicle. tire using the wheel chock.
If using a jack other than the one Note: Lock the manual hub on the wheel
provided, make sure the jack capacity is if the vehicle is a 4x4.
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
2. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you
wrench and spare tire from the
are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
stowage locations.
contact the authorized dealer.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove
Only use the spare wheel carrier to any wheel trim.
stow the wheel provided with your
vehicle. Other wheel sizes could 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut ½ turn
cause the spare wheel carrier to fail if it counterclockwise, but do not remove
does not fit securely or is too heavy. them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
Note: For vehicles with dual rear wheels,
insert the lug wrench extension into the lug
wrench to reach the lug nuts.
411
Wheels and Tires
F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel

Vehicles
E162803
Front driver side (4x4)

E162801
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat
1. Insert the hooked end of the jack area on the outboard side of the differential.
handle into the jack and use the handle
to slide the jack under the vehicle.
2. Position the jack according to the
following guides:
E162804
Front passenger side (4x4)

Note: View shown from the rear of the
E162802 vehicle to clearly identify the jack point.
Place the jack directly under the axle.
Front (4x2)
E162805
412
Wheels and Tires
Rear 7. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug

wrench. Make sure the jack is securely
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
fastened so it does not rattle when
avoid damage to the vehicle.
driving.
Jacking the Vehicle 8. Unblock the wheels.
1
6 7
4 3
8 5
E162811 E161441 2
1. Turn the jack handle clockwise until 8-lug nut torque sequence
the wheel is completely off the ground
10 1
and high enough to install the spare
tire.
2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug 3 8
wrench.
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, 5
making sure the valve stem is facing 6
outward for all front wheels and single
rear wheel vehicles. If you are replacing 7
an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel 4
vehicles, the valve stem must be facing
outward. If you are replacing the E169375 2 9
outboard wheel, the valve stem must
be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts 10-lug nut torque sequence
until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until
the wheel has been lowered.
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 419).
6. Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat
or spare tire if the vehicle is equipped
with a spare tire carrier.
E162820
413
Wheels and Tires
When installing the wheel center 1. Slide the notched end of the jack
ornaments, make sure that the ornament handle over the release valve and use
retention towers on the back side of the the handle to slide the jack under the
ornament are aligned with the studs or lug vehicle. Make sure the valve is closed
nuts. The retention towers are designed to by turning it clockwise.
be installed over the studs or nuts and 2. Position the jack according to the
retain to the flange on the lug nut. following guides:
E162821 E162813
If the ornament retention towers are Front (4x2): F-350 dual rear wheel
aligned between the studs or lug nuts, the
ornament is improperly installed. This Note: Place the jack directly under the
improper installation may appear and I-beam.
sound correct, but will not keep the
ornament on the vehicle. Ornaments
improperly installed in this manner will fall
off or become loose with minimal force or
impact.
F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and

F-550 Vehicles
E162814
Front driver side (4x4): F-350 dual rear

wheel
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat
area on the outboard side of the differential
housing.
E162812
414
Wheels and Tires
E162815 E162817
Front passenger side (4x4): F-350 dual Rear: F-350 dual rear wheel
rear wheel
Note: View shown from the rear of the
vehicle to clearly identify the jack point.
Note: Place the jack directly under the axle
and inboard of the radius arm so that the
jack clears the radius arm.
E162818
Rear: F-450 and F-550
Jacking the Vehicle
E162816
Front: F-450 and F-550
E162819
1. Insert the jack handle into the pump

linkage.
415
Wheels and Tires
2. Use an up-and-down motion with the 1

jack handle to raise the wheel
6 7
completely off the ground.
Note: Hydraulic jacks are equipped with a
pressure release valve that prevents lifting
loads which exceed the jack's rated 4 3
capacity.
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
4. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, 8 5
making sure the valve stem is facing E161441 2
outward on all front an inboard rear
wheels. If you are replacing the 8-lug nut torque sequence
outboard wheel, the valve stem must
be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts 10 1
until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until 3
the wheel has been lowered. 8
5. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the
release valve counterclockwise. 5 6
Opening the release valve slowly will
provide a more controlled rate of
descent. 7 4
6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See 2 9
E169375
Technical Specifications (page 419).
7. Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat 10-lug nut torque sequence
or spare tire if the vehicle is equipped
with a spare tire carrier. Installing Dual Rear Wheel Ornaments
8. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug
wrench. Make sure the jack is securely
fastened so it does not rattle when
driving.
9. Unblock the wheels.
A B
E162822
1. Align the ornament with the lug nuts.

A is the clip and B is the flange.
416
Wheels and Tires
E162823 E162825
2. Hold the ornament so that all of the

retention clips are sitting on the flange
of the lug nuts.
C D
B E162826
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire

E162824
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage
3. Use your hand or rubber mallet to tap instructions may result in failure of cable or
the ornament in a star pattern. There loss of spare tire.
should be an even gap between the Note: If you are stowing a tire that requires
ornament and the wheel. reattaching it to the vehicle with a tether,
4. Be sure to install all the clips on the perform these steps first, then proceed with
nuts over the flanges so that there is the following steps.
an even gap all around and the 1. Place the tire on end with the valve
retention clips are fully seated. stem facing toward the front of the
vehicle.
2. Place the tether into the bolt holes in
the wheel and attach the lug nut using
the lug wrench.
417
Wheels and Tires
to the maximum tightness. Tighten to

the best of your ability, to the point
where the ratchet/slip occurs, if
possible. The spare tire carrier will not
allow you to overtighten. If the spare
tire carrier ratchets or slips with little
effort, take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer for assistance at your
earliest convenience.
6. Check that the tire lies flat against the
frame and is properly tightened. Try to
E162800 push or pull, then turn the tire to be
sure it will not move. Loosen and
3. Lay the tire on the ground with the retighten, if necessary. Failure to
valve stem facing up. properly stow the spare tire may result
4. Slide the wheel partially under the in failure of the winch cable and loss
vehicle and install the retainer through of the tire.
the wheel center. Pull on the cable to 7. Repeat this tightness check procedure
align the components at the end of the when servicing the spare tire pressure
cable. (every six months, per scheduled
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until maintenance information), or at any
the tire is raised to its stowed position time that the spare tire is disturbed
underneath the vehicle. The effort to through service of other components.
turn the jack handle increases 8. If removed, install the spare tire lock
significantly and the spare tire carrier into the bumper drive tube with the
ratchets or slips when the tire is raised spare tire lock key and jack handle.
418
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Bolt size lb.ft (Nm)
M14 x 1.5 165 lb.ft (224 Nm)

*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque
at 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing
a flat tire, wheel removal).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified
torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers), and again at 500 miles (800 kilometers) of new
vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat
tire, wheel removal).
It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque procedures.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer
and the nut. Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads or the wheel stud threads.
E161443
419
Wheels and Tires
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
420
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L
Engine 6.2L V8 Engine
Cubic inches 378

Required fuel Minimum 87 octane
Firing order 1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap 0.041-0.047 in (1.04-1.20 mm)
Compression ratio 9.8:1
Drivebelt Routing
E163761
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL
Engine 6.7L Diesel
Cubic inches 406

Required fuel Low Sulfur Diesel up to B20
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
421
Drivebelt Routing Dual Alternator

Single Alternator
E224820
E224819
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.8L
Engine 6.8L V10 Engine
Cubic inches 413

Required fuel Minimum 87 octane
Firing order 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap 0.039 - 0.043 in (1.00 - 1.10 mm)
422
Drivebelt Routing 6.8L Engines without A/C

6.8L Engines with A/C
E163763
E163762
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.2L
Component Motorcraft Part number
Air filter element FA-1928

Oil filter FL-820-S
Battery (XL) BXT-65-650
Battery (all except XL) BXT-65-750
Spark plugs-platinum SP-526
Windshield wiper blade WW-2247
Transmission fluid filter FT-187
Cabin air filter FP-79
For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available

at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s
specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle
performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related
to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581).
423
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.7L DIESEL
Engine oil filter FL-2051S

Foam pre-filter FA-1927
Air filter FA-1926
Fuel filter FG-1147
Battery (Two) BXT-65-750
Windshield wiper blade WW-2247
Cabin air filter FP-79
Transmission filter FT-187

specification SAE/USCAR-36.
424
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.8L
Air filter element. FA-1928

Oil filter. FL-820-S
Battery (XL). BXT-65-650
Battery (all except XL). BXT-65-750
Spark plugs-platinum. SP-509
Windshield wiper blade. WW-2247
Transmission fluid filter FT-187
Cabin air filter. FP-79

specification SAE/USCAR-36/USC-D.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 585).
425
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142477
A World manufacturer identifier

B Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
C Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D Engine type
E142476 E Check digit
F Model year
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification G Assembly plant
number. H Production sequence number
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
426
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION TRANSMISSION CODE

LABEL DESIGNATION
E167469
E167814
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a The transmission code is on the Safety
Safety Compliance Certification Label be Compliance Certification Label. The
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where following table shows the transmission
the Safety Compliance Certification Label code along with the transmission
may be located. The Safety Compliance description.
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
Description Code
Six-speed automatic transmission 6R140 P

Six-speed automatic transmission 6R100 S
Six-speed automatic transmission 6R140W W
427
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L

Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter) 7.0 qt (6.6 L)

Engine coolant 21.3 qt (20.2 L)
Brake fluid Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid
reservoir
Front axle 2.7 qt (2.6 L)
Rear axle-10.5 inch (E-Locker) 3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)
Rear axle-10.5 inch (non E-Locker) 3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)
Rear axle-Dana M300 3.78 qt (3.58 L) *
Automatic transmission fluid (6R100) 16.7 qt (15.8 L) **
Automatic transmission fluid (6R140) 17.4 qt (16.5 L) **
Transfer case fluid 1.9 qt (1.8 L)
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required
Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle 26.5 gal (100.3 L)
location)
Fuel tank (All except 176 inch wheelbase 34.5 gal (130.6 L)
and incomplete vehicles)
Fuel tank (176 inch wheelbase) 48.5 gal (183.6 L)
Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle - 40 gal (151.4 L)
location)
428
Item Capacity
A/C refrigerant 27 oz (0.77 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil 4.1 fl oz (120 ml)
*For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. This added friction
modifier should be included in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
**Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-A

Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
Optional motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
Optional motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
Engine coolant (U.S.): WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Canada): WSS-M97B44-D2
CVC-3DIL-B
Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Front axle fluid : WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
429
Name Specification
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (10.50 inch axle) (E-Locker/non E-Locker): WSS-M2C942-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300 except 3.73 ratio Chassis WSP-M2C197-A
Cab) (U.S.):
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A
CXY-80W90-1L
Friction Modifier EST-M2C118-A
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.) : WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A
CXT-10-LV12
Transfer case fluid (U.S.): WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Transfer case fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A
CXT-10-LV12
Power steering fluid: WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON LV MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
Spindle bearing: WSS-M2C192-A
High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing
Grease
XG-11
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
430
Name Specification
Windshield washer fluid (Canada): WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
A/C refrigerant (U.S.): WSH-M17B19-A
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
A/C refrigerant (Canada): WSH-M17B19-A
CYN-16-R
A/C refrigerant compressor oil: WSH-M1C231-B
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
Multi-purpose grease: ESB-M1C93-B
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
Lock cylinders (U.S.): -
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada): -
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
Transmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake WSD-M1C227-A
pedal shift:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
grade, this may lead to:
recommended viscosity grade that meet
• Component damage which is not API SN requirements and display the API
covered by the vehicle warranty. Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
• Longer engine cranking periods. not use oil labeled with API SN service
• Increased emission levels. category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
431
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low

Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
damage and possible failure.
E142732 Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
An oil that displays this symbol conforms only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
to current engine, emission system and The use of any other fluid may cause
fuel economy performance standards of transmission damage.
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil Alternative Engine Oil for
additives because they are unnecessary Extremely Cold Climates
and could lead to engine damage that may To improve engine cold start performance,
not be covered by your vehicle warranty. we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:

Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 WSS-M2C953-A1
XO-0W30-QSP
432
E240523
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL

Capacities
WARNING
Item Capacity
Engine oil (includes filter change) 13.0 qt (12.3 L)

Engine coolant (primary high-temperature 35.1 qt (33.2 L)
1
cooling system loop)

Engine coolant additive (primary high- 47.3 fl oz (1.4 L)
2
temperature cooling system loop)

Engine coolant (secondary cooling system) 15.1 qt (14.3 L)
1
Engine coolant additive (secondary cooling 16.0 fl oz (473 ml)

2
system)
reservoir
433
Item Capacity

Rear axle- Dana M275 3.61 qt (3.42 L)
Rear axle- Dana M300 3.78 qt (3.58 L)
3
Automatic transmission fluid 17.4 qt (16.5 L)

4,5

Fuel Tank (142 inch and 148 inch wheel- 29.0 gal (109.8 L)
base, middle location)
Fuel Tank (160 inch and 164 inch wheel- 34.0 gal (128.7 L)
base, middle location)
Fuel Tank (176 inch wheelbase, middle 48 gal (181.7 L)
location)
Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle 106.0 qt (100.3 L)
location)
Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle - 40.0 gal (151.4 L)
location)
Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Middle and 66.5 gal (251.7 L)
Aft- axle -locations)
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (complete 7.4 gal (28 L)
vehicle)
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (incomplete 7.2 gal (27.3 L)
vehicle)
434
Item Capacity

6
1
Use the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Using any other coolant may
result in vehicle damage.
2
Per addition if required.
3
For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A this added friction
modifier should be included in the total lube volume 3.58 L (3.78 qt).
4
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
5
Capacities may be higher if the vehicle is equipped with a cooler. Always check to make
sure the fluid level is in the acceptable range.
6
This system uses mineral-based refrigerant oil to lubricate O-rings and fittings.
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C171-F1

1
Motorcraft® SAE 10W-30 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil
XO-10W30-QSD
Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C171-F1
1
CXO-10W30-LSD12
1,3
XO-15W40-QSD
Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C171-F1
1,3
CXO-15W40-LSD12
1,2,3
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor Oil
XO-5W40-5QSD
435
Name Specification
1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor Oil
XO-0W40-DAS
Engine and secondary cooling system coolant (U.S.): WSS-M97B44-D2
VC-3DIL-B
Engine and secondary cooling system coolant (Canada): WSS-M97B44-D2
CVC-3DIL-B
Engine and secondary cooling system coolant additive --
(U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® Specialty Orange Engine Coolant Revitalizer
VC-12
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF): WSS-M99C130-A
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid
PM-27-Gal / PM-27-Jug
Cetane Booster & Performance Improver (U.S.): --
Motorcraft® Cetane Booster & Performance Improver
PM-22-A
Cetane Booster & Performance Improver (Canada): --
Motorcraft® Cetane Booster & Performance Improver
PM-22-B
Anti-Gel & Performance Improver (U.S.): --
Motorcraft® Anti-Gel & Performance Improver
PM-23-A
Anti-Gel & Performance Improver (Canada): --
Motorcraft® Anti-Gel & Performance Improver
PM-23-B
PM-20
XY-80W90-QL
Gear Lubricant
436
Name Specification
XY-75W85-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M275) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M275) (Canada): WSL-M2C192-A
CXY-75W140-1L
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada) : WSL-M2C192-A
CXY-80W90-1L
XL-3
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.): WSS-M2C938-A
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-QLVC
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): WSB-M8B16-A2
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
XT-10-QLVC
437
Name Specification

Grease
XG-11
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
YN-19
CYN-16-R
YN-12-D
XL-5-A
Lock cylinders (U.S.): --
XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada): --
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
pedal shift:
XG-1-E
3
1 For biodiesel fuel blends (B20 max), use
See the SAE viscosities grades chart for
SAE 5W-40 or SAE 15W-40 oil that meets
correct temperature usage.
2
Ford specification WSS-M2C171-F1.
For severe duty service, use SAE 5W-40
oil that meets Ford specification
WSS-M2C171-F1.
438
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet

the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
Note: An engine block heater is
recommended at temperatures below
–10°F (–23°C).
Engine Oil Specifications

The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel
engines is important for satisfactory
operation. Determine which oil viscosity
best suits the temperature range you
expect to encounter for the next service
interval from the following SAE viscosity
grade chart.
E163370
439

Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.8L

Capacities
WARNING
Item Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter) 7.0 qt (6.6 L)

Engine coolant 26.7 qt (25.3 L)
reservoir
Rear axle-Dana M300 3.78 qt (3.58 L)
1
Automatic transmission fluid 17.4 qt (16.5 L)

2

Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle 26.5 gal (100.3 L)
location)
Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle - 40 gal (151.4 L)
location)
440
Item Capacity

1
For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. This added friction
modifier should be included in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
2
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C945-A

Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A
CXO-5W20-LSP12
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
CXO-5W30-LSP12
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
Engine coolant (U.S.): WSS-M97B44-D2
VC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Canada): WSS-M97B44-D2
441
Name Specification
CVC-3DIL-B
PM-20
XY-80W90-QL
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300 With HD Tow Option) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A
XY-75W140-Q
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (U.S.): WSP-M2C197-A
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A
CXY-80W90-1L
XL-3
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.) : WSS-M2C938-A
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
442
Name Specification

XT-10-QLVC
Grease
XG-11
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
YN-19
CYN-16-R
YN-12-D
XL-5-A
Lock cylinders (U.S.): -
XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada): -
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
pedal shift:
XG-1-E
443
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet An oil that displays this symbol conforms
the defined specification and viscosity to current engine, emission system and
grade, this may lead to: fuel economy performance standards of
• Component damage which is not ILSAC.
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use supplemental engine oil
• Longer engine cranking periods. additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
• Increased emission levels.
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Reduced fuel economy. Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
• Degraded brake performance. or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark. Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for

Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
E142732
Materials
Name Specification

Oil:
WSS-M2C947-A
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP
444
E240522
445
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION AM and FM frequencies are established by

the Federal Communications Commission
Radio Frequencies and Reception (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Factors Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or

CD and CD Player Information heat sources for extended periods.
Note: CD units play commercially pressed MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due Structure
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs Audio systems capable of recognizing and
may not function correctly when used in playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
Ford CD players. and folder structures work as follows:
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade • There are two different modes for MP3
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
as the label may peel and cause the CD to WMA track mode (system default) and
become jammed. You should use a MP3 and WMA folder mode.
permanent felt tip marker rather than • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please disc. The player numbers each MP3
contact an authorized dealer for further and WMA track on the disc (noted by
information. the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped T001 to a maximum of T255. The
discs or discs with a scratch protection film maximum number of playable MP3 and
attached. WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
Always handle discs by their edges only. model of radio present.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
446
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents In track mode, the system displays and
a folder structure consisting of one plays the structure as if it were only one
level of folders. The CD player numbers level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc regardless of being in a specific folder). In
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file folder mode, the system only plays the
extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through AM/FM
the disc files.
WARNING
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how Driving while distracted can result in
the system reads the structures you create. loss of vehicle control, crash and
While various files may be present (files injury. We strongly recommend that
with extensions other than MP3 and you use extreme caution when using any
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA device that may take your focus off the
extension are played; other files are road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
ignored by the system. This enables you to operation of your vehicle. We recommend
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a against the use of any hand-held device
variety of tasks on your work computer, while driving and encourage the use of
home computer and your in-vehicle voice-operated systems when possible.
system. Make sure you are aware of all applicable
E235504
447
Audio System
A SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes, for example AM, FM.
B AUX: Press to access the AUX and SYNC features, it also cancels the menu or
list browsing.
C CLOCK: Press to display the clock.
D TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS
mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station.
E Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station in the selected category. In CD mode, press to
select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or
backward through the current track.
F MENU: Press to access different audio system features.
G Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
H Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and
off.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS

satellite radio, may not be available in your
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: location. Check with an authorized dealer.
AM/FM/CD/SYNC Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
WARNING from what you see here.
448
Audio System
E217906
A Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information.

B Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To
store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone
number.
C Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
D OK and cursor arrows: Press the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set, or press MENU to exit.
E TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS
449
Audio System
F Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
find the next or previous station in the category you select. In CD mode, press
to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or
G CD slot: Insert a CD.
H Eject: Press to eject a CD.
I Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and
off.
J PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See your
SYNC information.
K MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure.
L MEDIA: Press to open the media source menu. You can press this multiple
times to change to CD or to a SYNC-Media device or scroll through the media
sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK to select a source.
M Clock: Press to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow controls to change
the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing MENU and
scrolling to Clock Settings. If not in phone mode, press to display the clock.
N RADIO: Press to listen to the radio or change radio stations. Press the function
buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions.
O SIRIUS: Press to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio.
P CD: Press to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the radio screen
to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
Q SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you
make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the
settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for
each audio source independently.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to

Menu Structure scroll through the options.
Note: Depending on your system, some Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
options may appear slightly different. Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press MENU. Press OK to confirm a selection.
450
Audio System
Radio
Manual Tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.
Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.
AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-
AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
RDS Text Display Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.
SIRIUS
Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.

Electronic Serial Number Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN) (ESN). You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS to activate, modify or track your account.
Check Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel.
Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by
pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number.
Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.
Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Alerts Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams.
The system alerts you when the selection is playing on
another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.
Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.
Skip No Stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.
Parental Lockout Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
451
Audio System
Audio Settings
Speed Compensated Adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind
Volume noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7.
Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.
Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
DSP Choose between the stereo modes.
CD Settings
Scan All Select to scan all disc selections.

Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.
CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
Clock Settings
Set Date and Time Select to set the time and calendar date.
24 Hour Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
Display Settings
Brightness Select to change display brightness.

Language Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Temp. Setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
452
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS

satellite radio, may not be available in your
AM/FM/CD/TOUCHSCREEN location. Check with an authorized dealer.
DISPLAY Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
WARNING information.
E217907
453
Audio System
A Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and
off.
B Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
find the next or previous station in the category you select. In CD mode, press
to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or
C Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
D TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS
E MEDIA: Press to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM.
F CD slot: Insert a CD.
G Eject: Press to eject a CD.
The multicast indicator appears in FM

mode (only) if the current station is
DIGITAL RADIO broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not digital channels where new or different
available in all markets. content is available. HD1 signifies the main
HD Radio technology is the digital programming status and is available in
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your analog and digital broadcasts. Other
system has a special receiver that allows multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
it to receive digital broadcasts (where only available digitally.
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
454
Audio System
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you • Memory presets allow you to save an
can access the following functions: active channel as a memory preset.
• Scan allows you to hear a brief Touch and hold a memory preset slot
sampling of all available stations. This until the sound returns. There is a brief
feature still works when HD Radio mute while the radio saves the station.
reception is on, although it does not Sound returns when finished. When
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
see the HD logo appear if the station preset, the sound mutes before the
has a digital broadcast. digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access a station you save if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
455
Audio System
Potential Station Issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. The
multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in
recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location.
direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. below.
*
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. below.
*
HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables No action required. This is
when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. normal behavior.
*
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from DTS U.S. and foreign patents. SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos
are proprietary trademarks of DTS Ford SiriusXM® broadcasts a variety of music,
Motor Company and DTS are not news, sports, weather, traffic and
responsible for the content sent using HD entertainment satellite radio channels. For
Radio technology. Content may be more information and a complete list of
changed, added or deleted at any time at SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit
the station owner's discretion. www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
456
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system may mute.
SiriusXM satellite radio is a

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted news, weather, traffic and entertainment
right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. Your factory-installed
programming including canceling, moving SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
or adding particular channels, and its prices, hardware and a limited subscription term,
at any time, with or without notice to you. which begins on the date of sale or lease
Ford Motor Company shall not be of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
responsible for any such programming for availability.
changes.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
E208625
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
457
Audio System
Troubleshooting
Message Condition Action
Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not
or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
SIRIUS system failure tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SiriusXM satellite or Siri- you move into an open area,
usXM tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
Updating… Update of channel No action required. The
programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
1-888-539-7474 subscription issues.
None found All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
Check Channel Guide skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
458
Audio System
USB PORT
WARNING
E205592
Note: The rear console USB ports are for

charging only. See Center Console (page
174).
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
459
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications • Use the advanced voice recognition

system that works with your system.
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and • Charge your USB device (if your device
portable media player. This allows you to: supports this).
• Make and receive calls. *
These features are not available in all
• Access and play music from your markets and may require activation.
portable music player. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
• Use 911 Assist and applications, such market.
as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNC Make sure that you review your device's
*
AppLink. manual before using it with SYNC.
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands. Support
• Stream music from your connected The SYNC support team is available to
phone. help you with any questions you cannot
• Text message. answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
460
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. When using SYNC:

In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. • Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. or damaged. Place cords and cables
Times are subject to change due to out of the way, so they do not interfere
holidays. with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
SYNC Owner Account • Do not leave playing devices in your
Why do I need a SYNC owner account? vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
• Essential for keeping up with the latest device's manual for further information.
software downloads available for
SYNC. • Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have. Privacy Information
Driving Restrictions When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
For your safety, certain features are your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
speed-dependent and restricted when your phone. This profile is created in order to
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h). offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
Safety Information
things, this profile may contain data about
WARNING your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
Driving while distracted can result in including history of calls when your cellular
loss of vehicle control, crash and phone was not connected to the system.
injury. We strongly recommend that In addition, if you connect a media device,
you use extreme caution when using any the system creates and retains an index of
device that may take your focus off the supported media content. The system also
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe records a short development log of
operation of your vehicle. We recommend approximately 10 minutes of all recent
against the use of any hand-held device system activity. The log profile and other
while driving and encourage the use of system data may be used to improve the
voice-operated systems when possible. system and help diagnose any problems
Make sure you are aware of all applicable that may occur.
electronic devices while driving. The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
461
System data cannot be accessed without USING VOICE RECOGNITION

special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor This system helps you control many
Company and Ford of Canada will not features using voice commands. This
access the system data for any purpose allows you to keep your hands on the
other than as described absent consent, a wheel and focus on what is around you.
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government Initiating a Voice Session
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may Press the voice button. A list of
seek to access the information available voice commands
independently of Ford Motor Company and E142599 appears in the display.
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist. Global Voice Commands
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 476). These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
(cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You

can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
help This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
(main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses

Helpful Hints
between words.
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is • You can interrupt the system at any
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from time while it is speaking by pressing the
open windows and road vibrations may voice button. You can cancel a voice
prevent the system from correctly session by pressing and holding the
recognizing spoken commands. voice button.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
462
System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of

interaction in order to help you learn to use
The system provides feedback through the system. You can change these settings
audible tones, prompts, questions and at any time.
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of Adjusting the Interaction Level
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less Press the voice button. When
instruction and feedback. prompted, say:
E142599
Voice Command Action and Description
voice settings
Then either of the following:
interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
voice settings
Then either of the following:
confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
463
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation off The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
To disable this automatic fan speed

Changing the Voice Settings reduction feature during voice sessions,
In addition to using voice commands to press and hold the climate control AC and
change the voice settings, you can also use Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
the menu in the audio display. release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
To change the voice settings press the the above sequence.
Menu button then select:
Menu Item
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
SYNC-Settings
Hands-free calling is one of the main
Voice settings
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
Note: Depending on the current climate dependent on your cellular phone's
control settings, the fan speed may functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
automatically go down while issuing voice phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
commands or while making and receiving support the following functions:
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
• Answering an incoming call.
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal • Ending a call.
operation once the voice session ends. Fan • Using privacy mode.
speed can also be adjusted normally during
• Dialing a number.
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan • Redialing.
speed to desired setting. • Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
464
Other features, such as text messaging 4. When prompted on your cell phone’s
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook display, confirm that the PIN provided
download, are phone-dependent features. by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
To check your phone's compatibility, see on your cell phone. Your phone is now
your phone's manual and visit paired and the display indicates that
www.SYNCMyRide.com, the pairing was successful. If you are
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
www.syncmaroute.ca. enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
Pairing a Phone for the First Time is successful.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC Depending on your phone's capability and
allows you to make and receive hands-free your market, the system may prompt you
calls. with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
Note: SYNC can support downloading up SYNC automatically tries to connect with
to approximately 4000 entries per first upon vehicle start-up) and
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. downloading your phonebook.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into Using Voice Commands
park (P) for automatic transmission or first Make sure to switch on your
gear for manual transmission. phone's Bluetooth feature
Using the Audio System
E142599 before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio Press the voice and when prompted
system. say:
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the Voice Command Action and Descrip-
search. See your device's manual if tion
necessary. (pair ([Bluetooth] Follow the instruc-
2. Press the PHONE button. When the device | phone | tions on the audio
audio display indicates there is no Bluetooth audio) | display.
paired phone, select the option to add. add phone)
3. When a message to begin pairing You can say any of the voice commands
appears in the audio display, search for that appear within open and close brackets
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing that are separated by |. For example,
process. where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.
465
Depending on your phone's capability and SYNC may prompt you with more cell
your market, the system may prompt you phone options. Your cell phone may also
with questions, such as setting the current prompt you to give SYNC permission to
phone as the primary phone (the phone access information. For more information
SYNC automatically tries to connect with on your cell phone’s capability, see your
first upon vehicle start-up) and cell phone’s manual and visit the website.
downloading your phonebook.
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Press the voice button. When
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition prompted, say any of the
and the radio. Shift the transmission into E142599 following:
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Voice Command
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio (phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
system.
Then say any of the following:
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the call (___)
search. See your device's manual if
necessary. call ___ at home
2. Press the PHONE button. call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
3. Select the option for Bluetooth call ___ on (cell | mobile)
Devices.
4. Press the OK button. call ___ on other
5. Select the option to add. This starts dial [[a] number] 1
the pairing process.

6. When a message to begin pairing ([go to] privacy | transfer to phone 2
appears in the audio display, search for | privacy on)

SYNC on your device.
(hold call [on] | place call on hold) 2
7. When prompted on your cell phone’s

display, confirm that the PIN provided join (calls | call) 2
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed

on your cell phone. Your phone is now mute call [on] 2
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are (mute call off | un-mute call) 2
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen. (turn ringer on | silent mode off)
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful. (turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
466
Voice Command
To access text messages say:
[text] (messages | message) 3
Voice Command
help [text] (messages | message)
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the Then say any of the following:
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Home". (listen to | read) ([text] message)
1
See Dial table below. forward (text | [text] message)
2
These commands are only valid while in reply to (text | [text] message)
a phone call.
3 call [sender]
See the text message table below.
Phonebook Hints
Dial Commands
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
Press the voice button and when prompted
name browse phonebook, select a contact
say any of the following commands:
and press:
Voice Commands
Menu Item
411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
Hear it
700 (seven hundred)
Changing Devices Using Voice
800 (eight hundred) Commands
900 (nine hundred) Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple
Clear (deletes all entered digits) phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say:
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9>
Plus
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the

phone button or press any button on the
audio system.
467
on the steering wheel or select the end call

Voice Command option in the audio display.
(connect | You can state the name of Receiving Calls

device) ___ the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy” Accepting calls
or“My iPod”. SYNC may When receiving a call, you can answer the
ask you to confirm the type call by pressing the accept call button on
of device (Phone, USB, or the steering wheel or use the screen.
Bluetooth Audio).
To use the screen to accept a call
Making Calls select:
Menu Item
E142599 Accept
Press the voice button. When Rejecting Calls

prompted, say:
When receiving a call, you can reject the
Voice Command call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
call [[a] name]
dial [[a] SYNC prompts you to say To use the screen to reject a call select:
number] the numbers that you wish Menu Item
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system Reject
confirms it. You can then
say: Ignore the call by doing nothing.
When the system has stated the Phone Options during an Active
number, you say any of the following: Call
Voice Command During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
(dial | send) This initiates the call. putting a call on hold or joining calls.
(delete | This erases the spoken To access this menu, choose one of the
correct) digits. options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
To end the call, press the end call button from the following options:
468
Menu Item Description and action
Mic. off Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the

microphone on, select the option again.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call History Access your call history log.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the

Accessing Features through the phone menu.
Phone Menu 2. Select one of the options available.
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
469
Display Description and action
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.
Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
Speed Dial Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages.
BT Devices Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
Phone settings View various settings and features on your phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature

Text Messaging and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
When a new message arrives, an audible
SYNC allows you to receive, send, tone sounds and the audio display
download and delete text messages. The indicates you have a new message.
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have To hear the message you can say:
to take your eyes off the road.
Voice command Description and
Receiving a Text Message action
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. (listen to | read) Select this option
Your phone must support downloading text ([text] message) to have the system
messages using Bluetooth to receive read the message
incoming text messages. to you.
470
Using the screen you also have the following options:

Menu Description and action
Item
Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
Reply to Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
sender through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Forward Press the OK button to forward the message to
msg. anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and

Sending, Downloading and Deleting then press the OK button.
Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
Choose from the following options:

Menu Description and action
Item
New Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.
View Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.
Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.
More... Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.
471
Sending a Text Message Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
Note: You can only send a text message to
and selecting the text option from the audio
one recipient at a time.
display or by replying to a received message
1. Select the send option when the in the inbox.
desired selection highlights in the audio
display. Accessing Your Phone Settings
2. Select the confirmation option when These are phone-dependent features. Your
the contact appears. phone settings allow you to access and
3. Press the OK button again to confirm adjust features such as your ring tone and
when the system asks if you want to text message notification, modify your
send the message. A pre-defined phonebook, and set up automatic
signature appears on each text download.
message. 1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:

Set as master If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Phone status See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.
Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
472
Menu Item Phonebook preferences
Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Auto-download When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
Sorting Pref. Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
First/Last name Last/First name
1. Press the PHONE button.

Bluetooth Devices 2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you and then press the OK button.
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
Select from the following options:

Add Pair additional phones to the system.

1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
473
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio

display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Delete Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Conn. Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Discon. Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and

System Settings then press the OK button.
1. Press the MENU button.
474
Scroll to select from the following options:

Display Description and action
Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's

Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Set defaults Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Master reset Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Install on SYNC Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 462).
Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
475
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
SERVICES (If Equipped)
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
In order for the following features to work, operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
your cellular phone must be compatible in which 911 is the emergency number.
with SYNC. To check your phone's Note: Before setting this feature on, make
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or Notice later in this section for important
www.syncmaroute.ca. information.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
an emergency. or off, that setting applies for all paired
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
to and use certain applications such as a voice message plays or a display message
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
compatible). started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by Note: Every phone operates differently.
market. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
911 Assist using this feature.
WARNINGS If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
before a crash, the system will not pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
dial for help which could delay vehicle may be able to contact emergency
response time, potentially increasing the services by dialing 911 through a paired and
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an can learn more about the 911 Assist
emergency call if you can do it feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
yourself. Dial emergency services www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
immediately to avoid delayed response www.syncmaroute.ca.
time which could increase the risk of See Supplementary Restraints System
serious injury or death after a crash. If you (page 46). Important information about
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds airbag deployment is in this chapter.
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional. See Roadside Emergencies (page 304).
Important information about the fuel pump
Always place your phone in a secure shut-off is in this chapter.
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
476
Setting 911 Assist On or Off • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have adequate network coverage,
Press Menu then select battery power and signal strength.
Menu Action and Description • The vehicle must have battery power
Item and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
SYNC-Applications emergency number.
911 Assist Select the desired option, on In the Event of a Crash
or off.
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
If you choose not to activate this Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
feature you will have the following damage or loses its connection to SYNC
options: during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
Menu Action and Description to connect to a previously paired cell
Item phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Voice Provides a display and voice Before making the call:
Reminder reminder at phone connection
ON at vehicle start. • SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
Voice Provides a display reminder If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
Reminder only without a voice reminder attempts to dial 911.
OFF at phone connection. • SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
To make sure that 911 Assist works 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
properly: your screen or press and hold the
• SYNC must be powered and working phone button on your steering wheel".
properly at the time of the incident and If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
throughout feature activation and use. makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on message plays for the 911 operator, and
before the incident. then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
• You must pair and connect a to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible provide your name, phone number and
cell phone to SYNC. location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone information electronically.
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time 911 Assist May Not Work If
of the incident.
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
477
911 Assist Privacy Notice Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may Some apps work automatically with no
disclose to emergency services that your setup. Other apps want you to configure
vehicle has been in a crash involving the your personal settings and personalize your
deployment of an airbag or activation of experience by creating stations or favorites.
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or We recommend you do this at home or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable outside of your vehicle.
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other Note: AppLink is not available if your
details about your vehicle or crash to assist vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
911 operators to provide the most system.
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do To Access Using the SYNC Menu
not switch the feature on.
Press the MENU button to access the
SYNC Mobile Apps menu on-screen. Then select:
The system enables voice and steering Menu Action and Description
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled Item
smartphone apps. When an app is running SYNC-Apps
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice Mobile Scroll through the list of
commands and steering wheel controls. Apps available applications and
Note: You must pair and connect your select a particular app or
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. select:
Note: iPhone users need to connect the Find New Apps
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and Accessing an App's Menu
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website. When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps wheel control to access the app menu.
will vary by region.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
478
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:

Menu Item Action and Description
mobile (apps | Say the name of the application after the tone.
applications) The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
help Use this command to discover the available voice commands.
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:

mobile (apps | applications) SYNC prompts you to say the name of an

app to start it on SYNC.
list [mobile] (apps | applications) SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.
find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications) Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the

App Permissions system may ask you to grant certain
App permissions are organized by groups. permissions, for example:
You can grant these group permissions • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
individually. You can change a permission information to the app such as, but not
group status any time when not driving, by limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
using the settings menu. consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
479
• To allow your vehicle to provide location based apps.

location information, including: GPS
Note: You only need to grant permissions
and speed.
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
and voice capabilities while running in any damages or loss of privacy relating to
a background state. Push notifications usage of an app, or dissemination of any
may be particularly useful for news or vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
All Apps You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps each connected device the first time you
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC select a mobile app using the system.
requires user consent to send and receive Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
app authorization information and updates not responsible for any additional charges
using the data plan associated with the you may receive from your service provider,
connected device. when your vehicle sends or receives data
Data is sent to Ford in the United States through the connected device. This includes
through the connected device. The any additional charges incurred due to
information is encrypted and includes your driving in areas when roaming out of a home
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous network.
usage statistics and debugging App Status
information. Updates may take place
automatically. You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
480
There are three possible statuses:

Update Needed The system has detected a new app

requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Up-To-Date No update is required.
Updating... The system is trying to receive an update.
Update settings
Request Update Select this option from the settings menu

to manually preform a needed update.
Disable Updates Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
Confirm that the USB device has been

formatted correctly and has the following
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR specifications:
MEDIA PLAYER • USB 2.0.
You can access and play music from your • File format must be FAT16/32.
digital music player over your vehicle's The format of the audio files on the USB
speaker system using the system's media device must be:
menu or voice commands. You can also • MP3.
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album. • Non DRM protected WMA.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up • WAV.
to 15,000 songs. • AAC.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any Connecting Your Digital Media
digital media player including: iPod, Zune, Player to the USB Port
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, Note: If your digital media player has a
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
481
To Connect Using Voice Commands To Connect Using the System Menu

Plug the device into one of the vehicle's 1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports. USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
Press the voice button and when either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
prompted, say: source list in the audio display.
Voice Command Action and Descrip-
tion
(USB [stick] | iPod You can now play

| MP3 [player]) music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do

not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To view USB content select:

Message Description and Action
Browse USB Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Message
You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE Albums
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the Genres
following:
Browse USB
Message
Reset USB
Play all
Media Voice Commands
Playlists
Press the voice button and when
Songs prompted say:
E142599
Artists
482
Voice Command Description and Action
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".
Command Description and Action
pause Pauses device playback.

play Resumes device playback.
play [album] ___
play all Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | Plays the next track on the current media.
chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | Plays the previous track on current media.
podcast | chapter | episode]
[play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
repeat (one | track) [on] Repeats the current track.
483
Command Description and Action
shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current playlist in a random order.

(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle off
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | At any time during playback, you can press
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what the voice button and ask the system what is
| which) (song | track | artist) is this | playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what (if populated) of the current track.
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it • Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
could be the name of anything, such as a • Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles". Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
Examples of USB Commands
music from your cellular phone through
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive Bluetooth.
ways to find and play a song using voice. To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press
For example, if we have a song called the MEDIA button and select:
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
Menu Item
play this song:
• Play song "Penny Lane". BT audio
• Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
Press the MEDIA button and select either

Media Menu Features USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list
in the audio display to start USB playback.
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.
484
Options This will enter the media menu.
Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the

Accessing Your USB Song Library audio display) to select USB playback.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Browse USB This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
If there are no media files to access, the

display indicates there is no media.
485
If there are media files, you have the following options:

Display Description and Action
Play all Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*
in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*
or MTP).
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
*
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by album.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
486
Display Description and Action
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and

then press the OK button.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
USB 2 (If Equipped)

Using Voice Commands
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
You can access and view your USB songs additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
using voice commands. at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
port. inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
Press the voice button and when
You can plug in an additional USB device
prompted, say any of the following
into the second USB port.
commands:
You can access both USB devices by using
Accessing and Viewing USB Media voice commands.
(browse | search | show) all (album | To access a USB device press the voice
albums) button and when prompted say:
(browse | search | show) all (artist | Voice command
artists)
USB 1
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres) USB 2
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists) Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs one you plug in first). When you connect a
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks) second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
(browse | search | show) album ___
Bluetooth Devices and System
(browse | search | show) artist ___
Settings
(browse | search | show) genre ___
You can access these menus using the
(browse | search | show) playlist ___ audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 464).
487
Voice Commands for Audio Voice Command

Sources
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
Your voice system allows you to change (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
audio sources with a simple voice | which) (song | track | artist) is this |
command. (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
E142599 help
*
Press the voice button and when If equipped.
prompted say:
Radio Voice Commands
Voice Command
If you are listening to the radio,
(music | audio | entertainment) [system] press the voice button, and then
E142599 say any of the commands in the
Below are a few examples of voice following table.
commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
[tune [to]] AM1 tone, say:
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | Voice Command
autoset)
Radio
[tune [to]] AM 2
You can then say any of the following
Bluetooth (audio | stereo) commands.
(disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) [tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
Radio [tune [to]] AM preset ___
tune [to] SAT *
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
Sirius * [tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
488
Voice Command Voice Commands
[tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___

[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM]) [tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM preset ___ tune [to] [Sirius]
FM ___ HD ___ * Help
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___ [tune [to]] Sirius You can say the
[channel] ___ channel number (0-
HD ___ * 233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
[tune [to]] preset ___
CD Voice Commands
Tune
If you are listening to a CD, press
help the voice button, and then say
*
E142599 any of the commands in the
If equipped.
following table.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped) If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
To listen to Sirius satellite radio, say:
press the voice button and, after
E142599 the tone, say: Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play

Voice Commands
You can then say any of the following
Sirius commands.
pause
When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice play
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table. [play] next track
Voice Commands [play] previous track
tune [to] SAT [play | change to] track [number] ___
[tune [to]] SAT 1 repeat (track | song) [on]
[tune [to]] SAT 2 repeat folder [on]
[tune [to]] SAT 3 repeat off
[tune [to]] preset ___ (shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |

songs) [on]]
[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
489
Voice Command Use the website at any time to check your

phone's compatibility, register your
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | account and set preferences as well as
disc) [on] access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
shuffle off
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Phone issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
The audio control settings Review your phone's manual

There is excessive back-
on your phone may be about audio adjustments.
ground noise during a phone
affecting SYNC perform-
call.
ance.
Try turning off the device,
During a call, I can hear the
This may be a possible resetting the device,
other person but they
phone malfunction. removing the device's
cannot hear me.
battery, then trying again.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent Try turning off the device,
feature. resetting the device or
removing the device's
SYNC is not able to down- battery, then trying again.
load my phonebook. Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
This may be a possible the Add Contacts feature.
phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
The system says Phonebook Try pushing your phonebook
Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using
phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. the Add Contacts feature.
empty or missing contacts.
490
Phone issues
If the missing contacts are

stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
resetting the device or
This is a phone-dependent removing the device's
feature. battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
I am having trouble from SYNC, deleting SYNC
connecting my phone to from your device and trying
SYNC. again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
This may be a possible Bluetooth connection on
phone malfunction. your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
491
Phone issues
Turn off the Auto phone-

book download setting.
This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review
feature. your phone's compatibility.
Text messaging is not Try turning off the device,
working on SYNC. This may be a possible resetting the device or
phone malfunction. removing the device's
USB and media issues

resetting the device,
removing the device's
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
I am having trouble This may be a possible
connecting my device. device malfunction. Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
SYNC does not recognize
leaving the device in your
my device when I turn on the This is a device limitation.
vehicle during very hot or
car.
cold temperatures.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
Bluetooth audio does not This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your
stream. feature. phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
492
USB and media issues
Make sure you correctly

connect the device to SYNC,
The device is not connected.
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre Make sure that all song
information. details are populated.
SYNC does not recognize
The file may be corrupted.
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
The song may have copy-
change the USB settings
right protection, which does
from mass storage to MTP
not allow it to play.
class.
Voice command issues
Review the phone voice

commands and the media
You may be using the wrong
voice commands at the
voice commands.
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand After pressing the voice icon,
what I am saying. wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
You may be speaking too
appears before saying a
soon or at the wrong time.
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
commands at the beginning
the name of a song or artist. voice commands.
of the media section.
493
Say the song or artist

exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
You may be saying the by Prince and the Revolution
name differently than the or Prince and the New
way you saved it. Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
The system may not be them. LOLA requires you to
reading the name the same say "L-O-L-A".
way you are saying it. Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the
voice commands. contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
SYNC does not understand Wilson, say "Call Joe
or is calling the wrong Wilson".
contact when I want to
make a call. Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it. read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
494
The system works better if

The system may not be
you list full names, such as
reading the name the same
"Joe Wilson" rather than
way you are saying it.
"Joe".
Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special charac-
may be very short and ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
similar, or they may contain the system does not recog-
special characters. nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
Your phonebook contacts have to spell it. JAKE
may be in CAPS. requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Ensure you have a compat-

ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
AppLink Mobile Applica-
ally, ensure your phone is
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
paired and connected to
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
SYNC in order to find
find any applications.
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
AppLink-enabled apps are latest version of the app
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on from your phone's app store.
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device. Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or
495
AppLink issues
login on the app on the

phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
Sometime apps do not menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open finding the particular app
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC, and choosing 'Force stop.'
cannot find any apps. over ignition cycles, for Don't forget to restart the
example. app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is There is a Bluetooth bug on Reset the Bluetooth on your
connected, my app(s) are some older versions of the phone by turning it off and
running, I restarted them, Android operating system then turning Bluetooth back
but I still cannot find any that may cause apps that on. If you are in your vehicle,
apps. were found on your previous SYNC should be able to
vehicle drive to not be found automatically re-connect to
again if you have not turned your phone if you press the
off Bluetooth. "Phone" button.
496
AppLink issues
Unplug the USB cable from

the phone, wait a moment,
My iPhone phone is and plug the USB cable
connected, my app is back in to the phone. After a
The USB connection to
running, I restarted the app few seconds, the app should
SYNC may need to be reset.
but I still cannot find it on appear in SYNC's Mobile
SYNC. Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
I have an Android phone. I
volume of the device by
found and started my media
The bluetooth volume on using the device's volume
app on SYNC, but there is no
the phone may be low. control buttons which are
sound or the sound is very
most often found on the
low.
side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of apps you do not want SYNC
bluetooth ports apps can to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have SYNC" setting, disable that
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your setting in the app's settings
phone listed in SYNC's phone than the number of menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu. available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
497
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION Getting to Know Your System

The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
WARNING with a variety of features using the
Driving while distracted can result in touchscreen and voice commands. By
loss of vehicle control, crash and integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
injury. We strongly recommend that phone, the touchscreen provides easy
you use extreme caution when using any interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
device that may take your focus off the control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe 3 compatible apps.
against the use of any hand-held device Using the Touchscreen
while driving and encourage the use of To operate the touchscreen, you can
voice-operated systems when possible. simply touch the item or option that you
Make sure you are aware of all applicable want to select. The button changes color
local laws that may affect the use of when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
E205444
498
Item Menu Item Action and Description
A Status Bar This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.
B Home This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.
C Clock This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 546).
D Outside This displays the current outside temperature.
Temperature
E Feature Bar You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
The touchscreen allows you quick access The Status Bar

to all of your comfort, navigation,
Additional icons also display in the status
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar bar depending on market, vehicle options
you can quickly select the feature you want and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
to use.
icons may move to the left or right
Note: Your system is equipped with a depending on what options are active.
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
499
E249671
Callout Item Description
A Driver Temper- This shows the temperature the driver selects through
ature the climate control system.
B Heated steering When you activate the heated steering wheel option
wheel on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
(If equipped) steering wheel.
C Passenger When the passenger's temperature has been
Temperature adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.
D Microphone Mute This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.
E Mute This icon displays when the audio system is muted.
500
Callout Item Description
F Download This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software

update. Pressing the icon shows more details about
the new software.
G Wi-Fi This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.
H Wi-Fi in Range An available Wi-Fi network is within range.
I Signal Strength This icon displays the phone and roaming signal
strength.
J Text Message This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.
K 911 Assist Off This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.
L In-Call This icon displays when a phone call is active.
M Bluetooth This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.
Messages may also appear in the status

bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
Feature Bar Item Functions
Audio Allows you to control the media playing in

your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Climate Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.
Phone Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.
501
Feature Bar Item Functions
Navigation Allows you to see your vehicle's location on

a virtual road map, get driving directions to
(If equipped) your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Apps Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
Settings You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
When using voice commands, words and

Cleaning the Touchscreen icons may appear in the status bar
You can remove fingerprints with a dry, indicating the status of the voice command
clean, soft cloth. session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 510).
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the Using the Steering Wheel Controls
cloth and try to clean it again.
Depending on your vehicle and option
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of package, you can use different controls on
solvent to clean the touchscreen. your steering wheel to interact with the
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the touchscreen system in different ways.
touchscreen. VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Using Voice Recognition Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
Using voice commands allows you to keep
again to stop the voice prompt and
your hands on the wheel and focus on
immediately begin speaking. Press and
what is in front of you. The system provides
hold to end a voice session.
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations SEEK NEXT:
depending on the situation and the chosen • While in radio mode, press to seek
level of interaction (voice settings). between memory presets.
The system also asks short questions • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure mode, press to seek between songs or
of your request or when there are multiple press and hold to fast seek.
possible responses to your request.
502
SEEK PREVIOUS: • DISP: Switch the display on or off. You

• While in radio mode, press to seek can also touch the screen to switch the
between memory presets. display back on.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD • Temperature, fan and climate
mode, press to seek between songs or control buttons: Control the
press and hold to fast seek. temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call Climate Control (page 148).
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or 911 Assist
reject an incoming call.
WARNINGS
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
be combined with PHONE REJECT and before a crash, the system will not
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with dial for help which could delay
PHONE ACCEPT. response time, potentially increasing the
M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
between media sources (modes). Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
See Steering Wheel (page 82). emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
Using Your Bezel Controls immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
Depending on your vehicle and option serious injury or death after a crash. If you
package, you may also have these controls do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
on your instrument panel: of the crash, the system or phone may be
• Power: Switch the audio system on damaged or non-functional.
and off. Always place your phone in a secure
• VOL: Control the volume of playing location in your vehicle so it does not
audio. become a projectile or get damaged
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
would in audio modes. serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
• Eject: Eject a CD from the audio working properly.
system.
• SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
to advance through available media set on before the incident.
modes.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
• SOUND: Press to access the Sound
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
menu where you can adjust sound and
in which 911 is the emergency number.
other audio settings.
• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to Note: Before setting this feature on, make
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
preset. See Audio System (page 446). Notice later in this section for important
information.
503
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
that setting applies for all paired phones. If must have the ability to make and
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is maintain an outgoing call at the time
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the of the incident.
status bar. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
Note: Every phone operates differently. must have adequate network coverage,
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most battery power and signal strength.
cellular phones, some may have trouble • The vehicle must have battery power
using this feature. and be located in the U.S., Canada or
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding in a territory in which 911 is the
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety emergency number.
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped In the Event of a Crash
vehicle may be able to contact emergency Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
services by dialing 911 through a paired and activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
can learn more about the 911 Assist phone sustains damage or loses its
feature, by visiting: connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
Website previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
www.owner.ford.com services.
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
See Supplementary Restraints System (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
(page 46). Important information about If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
airbag deployment is in this chapter. attempts to dial 911.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 304). • SYNC says the following, or a similar
Important information about the fuel pump message: "SYNC will attempt to call
shut-off is in this chapter. 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view phone button on your steering wheel."
the settings information. See Settings
(page 546). If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
To make sure that 911 Assist works message plays for the 911 operator, and
correctly: then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
• SYNC must be powered and working to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
properly at the time of the incident and provide your name, phone number and
throughout feature activation and use. location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
information electronically.
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
504
911 Assist May Not Work If • Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist check your vehicle.
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC power cords or cables are broken, split
system has no power. or damaged. Place cords and cables
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle out of the way, so they do not interfere
are the ones paired and connected to with the operation of pedals, seats,
the system. compartments or safe driving abilities.
911 Assist Privacy Notice • Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may could cause them damage. See your
disclose to emergency services that your device's user guide for further
vehicle has been in a crash involving the information.
deployment of an airbag or activation of • For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or are speed-dependent. Their use is
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable limited to when your vehicle is traveling
of electronically or verbally disclosing to at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
911 operators your vehicle location or other sure that you review your device's
details about your vehicle or crash to assist manual before using it with SYNC 3.
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do Speed-restricted Features
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on. Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
Safety Information so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
• Screens crowded with information,
Driving while distracted can result in such as Point of Interest reviews and
loss of vehicle control, crash and ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
injury. We strongly recommend that sports scores, movie times or ski
you use extreme caution when using any conditions.
device that may take your focus off the • Any action that requires you to use a
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe keyboard is restricted, such as entering
operation of your vehicle. We recommend a navigation destination or editing
against the use of any hand-held device information.
voice-operated systems when possible. • All lists are limited so the user can view
Make sure you are aware of all applicable fewer entries (such as phone contacts
local laws that may affect the use of or recent phone call entries).
electronic devices while driving. See the following table for more specific
examples.
505
Restricted features
Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone.

Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.
System Functionality Editing the keypad code.
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
Wi-Fi Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Text Messages Viewing received text messages.
Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Website
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
www.syncmaroute.ca
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest SYNC Connect with Ford Pass (If
software and connected features.
Equipped)
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have. With a SYNC Connect-equipped vehicle,
• Maintain account permissions. you can use Ford Pass to track your
vehicle’s location and remotely access
Visit the website to sign up and register. vehicle features such as start, lock and
unlock and vehicle status including fuel
Website level and approximate mileage. You can
also schedule specific times to remotely
www.owner.ford.com start your vehicle so it’s ready to hit the
www.syncmyride.ca road as soon as you are. Ford Pass is
available through a free download via the
Apple App Store® or Google Play™.
Message and data rates may apply.
Services may be limited by mobile phone
network coverage area.
506
Updating Your System Updating Over Wi-Fi

You can choose to download the update To update your System over Wi-Fi your
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi
automatic updates. access point. Data rates may apply.
USB Updates To connect your system to Wi-Fi,

select:
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC Menu Item
software update page.
Settings
Website Wi-Fi
www.owner.ford.com Available You can then select your
www.syncmyride.ca Wi-Fi Wi-Fi network. You may
www.syncmaroute.ca Networks have to enter the security
code if the network is
The website notifies you if an update is secured. The system
available. You can then select to download confirms when it has
the update. connected to the network.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum You must also give the system permission
requirements. Once you have inserted the to update automatically. Upon vehicle
USB drive into your computer, choose to delivery, the System asks you if you would
start the download. Follow the instructions like to use the automatic update feature.
provided to download the files to the USB If you agree to automatic updates, you can
drive. press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
The installation of most files occurs in the access it through the General Settings. See
background, and does not interrupt your Settings (page 546). You can also perform
use of the system. Navigation updates a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
cannot be installed in the background, Troubleshooting (page 560).
because the files are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.
Please refer to the website for any further
actions.
507
Support
If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select: The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
Menu Item able to answer on your own.
Settings Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
General For Ford:

United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Automatic From this menu, you can
System enable automatic updates. Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Updates If you already are not Times are subject to change due to
currently connected to Wi- holidays.
Fi access point, the system
prompts you to set up a Privacy Information
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature. When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
When the system is connected via Wi-Fi
phone. This profile helps in offering you
and automatic updates are enabled, your
more cellular features and operating more
system checks for software updates
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
periodically. If a new version is available, it
may contain data about your cellular
downloads at that time. Software
phone book, text messages (read and
downloads can take place for up to 30
unread), and call history, including history
minutes after you have switched your
of calls when your cell phone was not
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
connected to the system. In addition, if you
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
connect a media device, the system
a download does not complete for any
creates and retains an index of supported
reason, the download continues where it
media content. The system also records a
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
minutes of all recent system activity. The
a banner displays on the touchscreen
log profile and other system data may be
indicating the system update. Select the
used to improve the system and help
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
diagnose any problems that may occur.
for two ignition cycles.
The cellular profile, media device index,
To switch this feature off: and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
Menu Item accessible only in your vehicle when the
Settings cellular phone or media player is
connected.
General If you no longer plan to use the system or
Automatic In this menu selection, you your vehicle, we recommend you perform
System can change the selection a Master Reset to erase all stored
Updates for automatic updates to information. You can find more information
OFF. about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 546). System
508
data cannot be accessed without special or where required by law enforcement,

equipment and access to your vehicle's other government authorities, or other third
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and parties acting with lawful authority. Other
Ford of Canada do not access the system parties may seek to access the information
data for any purpose other than as independently of Ford Motor Company and
described absent consent, a court order, Ford of Canada.
HOME SCREEN
E205446
Item Tile Home screen display
A Audio Shows the active media source.
509
Item Tile Home screen display
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space

contains the compass.
B Phone The name of the connected phone appears on the
screen. The status of the phone features also
appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge,
911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging
and roaming.
C 1 This map displays your current location or current
Navigation
route in real time.
When you have navigation active, you also see the
next turn and the length of time and distance to
your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the audio information.
1 If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays You can access each feature controlled by
to access that feature. SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
Anytime you select the home button, the
commands push the voice
system returns you to this screen. E142599 button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice be the name of anything, such as artist, the
commands, to control features like audio name of contact or number. The context
and climate controls. By using voice and the description of the command tell
commands, you can keep your hands on you what to say for this dynamic option.
the wheel and your eyes on the road. There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Main Menu Brings you to the main menu.

Go back Returns you to the previous screen.
Cancel Ends the voice session.
List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands.
___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
510
Phone List of Commands

Navigation List of Commands
Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Included here are some of the most Audio Voice Commands

popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command Description
Sirius Channel ___ 1 You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
FM ___
FM ___ HD ___ 1 Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-
connected device.
USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
Play Playlist ___ selection. Your system must finish indexing
Play Artist ___ before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Play Album ___ Penny Lane".
511
Play Podcast ___

Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

Climate Voice Commands climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
You can control the temperature of the setting.
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:

Climate Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F

(15.5–29.5°C).
Phone Voice Commands

Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Pair Phone Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing

process. See Settings (page 546).
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
512
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.
Please make sure that you are saying the

contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command Description
<0-9> If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.
Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.
Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Reply to Message
513
Navigation Voice Commands (If point of interest.

Equipped) ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
Setting a Destination category or a major brand name, where
You can use any of the following major brand name is a chain with more
commands to set a destination or find a than 20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find a ___ State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.
Find Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.
Destination Nearest State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
___ like to search for.
Destination Previous Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Destination
Favorite Destinations Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.
Destination Home Allows you to route to your home address.
Destination My Work Allows you to route to your work address.
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:

Cancel Route Cancels the current route.

Detour Allows you to select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt.
Show Route Displays the active route.
Route Summary Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.
514
Where Am I Provides current location.

Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map.
Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map.
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)

The following voice commands are always available:
Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.
Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
app mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app, followed by app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link

Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
515
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Show Traffic Displays a list of traffic incidents.

Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices Displays a list of fuel prices.
Show 5 Day Fore- Displays the 5 day weather forecast.
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands

You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.
Standard
Interaction Mode Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.
Advanced
Phone Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.
Phone Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call.
Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
Note: Depending on the current climate

You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts. control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
commands or while making and receiving
control up or down to your desired setting.
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
516
To disable this automatic fan speed

reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
E205443
Message Message and description
A Sources
B Direct Tune
C Presets
517
You can access these options using the Sources

touchscreen or voice commands.
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
SIRIUS 1
CD 1
USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.

Bluetooth Stereo
Apps If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio Once you have entered the station's

call numbers, you can select:
Tuning a Station
Menu item Action and descrip-
You can use the tune or seek controls on tion
the radio bezel to select a station.
Enter Press to begin
To tune a station using the playing the station
touchscreen, select: you have entered.
Menu item Cancel Press to exit

without changing
Direct Tune the station.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in Presets

the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are To set a new preset, tune to the station
currently listening to. and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
You can press the backspace button to briefly while the system saves the station
delete the previously entered number. and then returns.
518
There are two preset banks available for SiriusXM satellite radio is a
AM and three banks for FM. To access subscription-based satellite radio service
additional presets, tap the preset button. that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
The indicator on the preset button shows news, weather, traffic and entertainment
which bank of presets you are currently programming. Your factory-installed
viewing. SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If that begins on the date of sale or lease of
Activated) your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active For more information on extended
subscription. subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
E234451 Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:

Menu item Action and description
Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter The system tunes to the station you select.
Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
519
Menu item Action and description
Replay Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Live When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
There are three preset banks available for

Memory Presets SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
To set a preset, tune to the station then
preset button shows which bank of presets
press and hold one of the memory preset
you are currently viewing.
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
the station is stored. Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
interference ence and the audio system may mute.
520
Troubleshooting tips
Message Cause Action
Acquiring Signal Radio requires more than two No action required. This
seconds to produce audio for message should disappear
the selected channel. shortly.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or If this message does not clear
system failure present. shortly, or with an ignition key
SIRIUS system failure cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Satellite acquiring The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
signal… usXM satellite or SiriusXM you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.
Updating… Update of channel program- No action required. The
ming in progress. process may take up to three
minutes.
Questions? Call 1- Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
888-539-7474 longer available. 539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
None found. Check All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
channel guide. category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked. that station.
SIRIUS Subscription SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
updated channels available for your
vehicle.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio

HD Radio™ Information (If Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Available) Settings (page 546).
Note: This feature may not be available in Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
all markets. available in all markets.
521
HD Radio technology is the digital The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your station, and then changes to orange when
system has a special receiver that allows digital audio is playing. When this logo is
it to receive digital broadcasts (where available, you may also see Title and Artist
available) in addition to the analog fields on-screen.
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital The multicast indicator appears in FM
broadcasts provide a better sound quality mode (only) if the current station is
than analog broadcasts with free, broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
crystal-clear audio and no static or The highlighted numbers signify available
distortion. For more information, and a digital channels where new or different
guide to available stations and content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming, please visit: programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
Website multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
www.hdradio.com
Note: There is also an additional feature
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a for stations that have more than 1 HD
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
you may notice the following indicators on HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
your screen: Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
E142616
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message Action and description
Presets Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.

Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
522
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or The radio is shifting between No action required. The recep-
blending in and out. analog and digital audio. tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the
HD2 or HD3, multicast broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available.
preset or Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is available.
523
Potential station issues
Issues Cause Action
Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
HD3 multicast channel preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current
when recalling a preset available in your current recep- location.
or from a direct tune. tion area.
Text information does Data service issue by the radio 1
Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently broadcaster.
playing audio.
There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
information shown for broadcaster. 1
currently selected
frequency.
1 You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under CD (If equipped)

license from DTS Inc. and foreign patents.
HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos Once you select this option, the system
are proprietary trademarks of DTS Inc. Ford returns you to the main audio screen.
Motor Company and DTS Inc. are not The current audio information appears on
responsible for the content sent using HD the screen.
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
The following buttons are also available:

Button Function
Browse You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
524
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or Bluetooth Stereo or USB
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:

Button Function
Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Shuffle Play the tracks in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
play buttons to control the audio playback. provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
To get more information about the buttons allow you to skip forward or
currently playing track, press the cover art backward within a track.
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button Function
Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the

Now Playing playlist.
New Search This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
525
Button Function
Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
USB Ports Supported Media Players, Formats

and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
E211463
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
The USB ports are in the center console or from your USB device by metadata tags.
behind a small access door in the Metadata tags, which are descriptive
instrument panel. software identifiers embedded in the
This feature allows you to plug in USB media files, provide information about the
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives file.
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they If your indexed media files contain no
support this feature. information embedded in these metadata
Select this option to play audio from your tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
USB device. metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
Apps 50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 543).
526
CLIMATE may look different from one of the screens

shown below. Your screen may not contain
Touch the climate button on the all of the features shown.
touchscreen to access your climate control Note: You can switch temperature units
features. Depending on your vehicle line between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
and option package, your climate screen Settings (page 546).
E206820
A Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.

B Heated steering wheel: Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel
on and off. It takes about 5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F (23°C)
in temperatures as low as -4°F (-22°C). The wheel maintains an approximate
temperature of 90°F (32°C) and operates independently from the heated seats
and other climate-control functions. The heating element is in between the
leather covering and foam core to help provide maximum heat without adversely
affecting the feel of the steering wheel.
Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on.
527
Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the
vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated steering wheel may
also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your
vehicle off.
Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the
wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.
C Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the
windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the
driver and passenger temperatures are set to HI. You can use this setting to
defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister
vents.
D AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.
E Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the
climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
F DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch
it off and link the passenger temperature to the driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button.
Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically
turn on when you or your passenger adjust the passenger temperature.
G Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.
H Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that
circulates in your vehicle.
Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX
A/C.
I A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and
passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated
Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even when you switch the air conditioning
A/C button off.
528
Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When

recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down
the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the
interior.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or the system may not allow
Recirculated air to turn on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk
of fogging. It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor
airflow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
J Manual airflow distribution controls: Select these controls individually,
together, or with Defrost to direct the air flow to the area you desire.
Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor
vents.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the

PHONE First Time
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with
WARNING the system before using the functions in
Driving while distracted can result in hands-free mode.
loss of vehicle control, crash and Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
injury. We strongly recommend that begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
you use extreme caution when using any necessary.
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe To add a phone, select:
against the use of any hand-held device Menu Item
voice-operated systems when possible. Add Phone
local laws that may affect the use of 1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
electronic devices while driving. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
Hands-free calling is one of the main 3. Select your vehicle's make and model
features of the system. Once you pair your as it displays on your phone.
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number
While the system supports a variety of appearing on your phone matches the
features, many are dependent on your cell six-digit number on the touchscreen.
phone’s functionality. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
529
6. Your phone may prompt you to give At a minimum, most cell phones with
the system permission to access Bluetooth wireless technology support the
information. To check your phone’s following functions:
compatibility, see your phone’s manual • Answering an incoming call.
or visit the website.
• Ending a call.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select: • Dialing a number.
Menu Item • Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Add Phone
Other features, such as text messaging
Then select: using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
To check your phone’s compatibility,
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. see your phone’s manual or visit the
2. Select your phone's name when it website:
appears on the touchscreen. Websites
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the owner.ford.com
six-digit number on the touchscreen. www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
Phone Menu
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access This menu becomes available after pairing
information. To check your phone’s a phone.
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
530
G
E251249
A Recent Displays your recent calls.

Call List You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down
menu at the top of the screen. You can choose:
All Incoming Outgoing Missed
B Contacts All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabet-
ical order.
A-Z Jump Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.
C Phone Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the
Settings phone settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring
tones and alerts.
531
D Change Gives you access to the list of paired or connected

Device Bluetooth devices allowing you to change or select a
device.
E Text Displays all recent text messages.
Messages
F Phone Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Keypad Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call Press this button to begin a
call.
G Do Not Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatic-
Disturb ally. Text message notifications do not display on the
screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Users with phones having voice services

may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 510). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
532
To call a number in your contacts, To accept the call, select:

select:
Menu Item
Accept
Contacts You can then select the Note: You can also accept the call by
name of the contact you pressing the phone button on the steering
want to call. Any numbers wheel.
stored for that contact
display along with any To reject the call, select:
stored contact photos. You
can then select the Menu Item
number that you want to
call. The system begins the Reject
call. Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
To call a number from your recent calls, wheel.
select:
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
Menu Item Action and Description logs it as a missed call.
Recent Call You can then select an During a Phone Call
List entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call. During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
To call a number that is not stored in with the call duration.
your phone, select: The phone status items are also visible:
Menu Item Action and Description • Signal Strength.
• Battery.
Phone Select the digits of the
Keypad number you wish to call. • 911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 546).
Call The system begins the call. You can select any of the following during
Pressing the backspace button deletes the an active phone call:
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
533
Item
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
End Call Immediately end a the cell phone or
phone call. You can back to SYNC 3.
also press the
button on the Text Messaging
steering wheel.
Note: Downloading and sending text
Keypad Press this to access messages using Bluetooth are cell
the phone keypad. phone-dependent features.
Mute You can switch the Note: Certain features in text messaging
microphone off so are speed-dependent and not available
the caller does not when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
hear you. 3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View View the text on the touchscreen.
Call To call the sender.
Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Close To exit the screen.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) some SYNC 3 features.
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
and Android Auto to access your phone. features use mobile data.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Apple CarPlay
Auto, you can:
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
• Make calls. newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
• Send and receive messages. the latest iOS version is recommended.
• Listen to music. 1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
• Use your phone's voice assistant. USB Port (page 459).
534
2. Follow the prompts on the

touchscreen. Menu Item
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple Android Auto Preferences
CarPlay. Enable Android Auto
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when Note: Android Auto must be switched on
plugged into a USB port. after plugging in your device.
To disable this feature from the To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select: Settings screen, select:
Menu Item Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select: device and select:
Disable Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple Note: You may need to slide your Settings
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
app. Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay To return to SYNC 3, select the
support. speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
Android Auto touchscreen, and then touch the option to
Android Auto is compatible with most return to SYNC.
devices with Android 5.0 or newer. Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
1. Download the Android Auto app to support.
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require NAVIGATION
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be Your navigation system is comprised of
available within your current market. two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 459).
3. To switch this feature on from the
Settings screen, scroll left on the
screen and select:
535
Map Mode North up (2D map) always

shows the northern direction to
Map mode shows advanced viewing be upward on the screen.
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks E207749
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of 3D map mode provides an
buildings, visible land use, landscape elevated perspective of the map.
features, and detailed railroad Adjust this viewing angle and
infrastructure for the most essential cities E207748 rotate the map 180 degrees by
around the globe. touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value. Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
3D city models are complete 3D models map away from your vehicle’s
of entire city areas including navigable current location.
E207751
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in Mute: Press to mute the audio
3D map mode only. Coverage of these navigation guidance. Press the
varies and improves with updated map button again to un-mute the
releases. E251780 guidance.
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207752 E251779
Select the zoom out icon to see Points of Interest (POI)

a farther away view of the map. grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
E207753 E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
You can adjust the view in preset at the same location a box is used to
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in display a single category icon instead of
or out of the map. repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
The information bar tells you the names clutter. When you select the box on the
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover map, a pop-up appears indicating how
over them with the crosshair curser. many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can change your view of the map by You can scroll through and select POIs
tapping on the location indicator icon on from this list.
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options: If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
Heading up (2D map) This station icons automatically display on the
always shows the direction of map.
forward travel to be upward on
E207750 the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
536
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic You can choose to display traffic icons on
and Travel Link (where available), traffic the map representing twelve different
flow will be indicated on the map by green types of incidents. See Settings (page
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red 546).
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is You can set a destination by hovering
indicated where the information is above a location and selecting:
available and varies across the US.
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item Description
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search Street Address
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
537
Latitude and Longitude

(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Delete Select this option to remove all previous destinations.
All
Home Select to navigate to your set Home destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
Home A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:
Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Work Select to navigate to your set Work destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
Work A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:
Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Favorites Favorites include any location you have previously saved.
To add Favorites:
Add a Select this button and enter a location into the destination
Favorite bar.
Search Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.
Save Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.
538
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
(POI) Categories configuration):
Food
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
See All Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:

Save This saves the destination to your favorites.

Start This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Fastest Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Shortest Uses the shortest distance possible.
Economical Route Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.
539
Once you have chosen you destination, press:

Start The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
During active navigation, touch the bottom

Navigation Menu of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
To access the Navigation menu, press:

Button
Menu
You can then select:
Screen View Full Map A full screen map displays during navigation.
Highway Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
Exit Info of the screen during navigation.
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.
Turn List Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.
540
Button
Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Navigation Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 546).
Settings
Where Am I? Provides your current location city and the nearest road.
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.
View Route Press this to see a map of the full route.
Detour An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.
Edit Waypoints Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can Optimize Order
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:
To return to Go
your route
press:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying

Waypoints glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route. 2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
To add a waypoint: has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:
541
Menu Item
Add Waypoint The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.
You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order
for you by pressing:
To return to your route, press: Go
SYNC AppLink cityseeker (If Equipped)
The AppLink app allows you to use some Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone. information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
First Mile Navigation Canada and 15 in Mexico).
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation

E225487
When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your cityseeker, when available, is a service that
destination. provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
POI Search hotels and attractions.
Your paired phone can be used to access When you have selected a point of interest,
additional points of interest (POI). These the location and information appear, such
points of interest can only be access when as address, phone number and a star
your phone is paired. rating.
Send To Car Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
You can send destinations to your average room or meal price and the web
navigation system using a computer or address. This screen displays the point of
phone using AppLink. interest icons.
542
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide The system calculates a reasonable

information such as star rating, average efficient route based on available speed
cost, review, handicap access, hours of limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
operation, and website address. know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
information such as star rating, price
difference in minutes or miles with the
category, review, check-in and checkout
SYNC 3 route.
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include: Navigation Map Updates
• Restaurant
Annual navigation map updates are
• Business center available for purchase through your
• Handicap facilities dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
• Laundry the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
• Refrigerator visit:
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center Website
• Internet access www.navigation.com/sync
• Pool
• Wi-Fi You need to specify the make and model
Attractions include nearby landmarks, of your vehicle to determine if there is an
amusement parks, historic buildings and update available.
more. cityseeker can provide information HERE is the digital map provider for the
such as star rating, reviews, hour of navigation application. If you find map data
operation and admission price. errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
Equipped) evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available investigation by e-mail.
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate Map coverage includes the USA (including
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
and Travel Link information. It helps you Canada and Mexico.
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the APPS
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps The system enables voice, steering wheel,
(page 543). and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.
543
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
vary by market. is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
Note: You must pair and connect your the required app is running on the mobile
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to device.
access AppLink.
Menu Item Action and Descrip-
Note: iPhone users need to connect the tion
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps, Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search
supported smartphone devices and and connect to
troubleshooting tips please visit: compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Websites
owner.ford.com Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps

www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
Note: Make sure you have an active account using the data plan associated with the
for the app that you have downloaded. connected device.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure The connected device sends data to Ford
your personal settings and personalize your in the United States. The information is
experience by creating stations or favorites. encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
We recommend you do this at home or module number, odometer, usage
outside of your vehicle. statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
Note: We encourage you to review the necessary to provide this service,
smartphone app’s terms of service and troubleshoot, and improve products and
privacy policies because Ford is not services and to offer you products and
responsible for your app or its use of data. services that may interest you where
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system allowed by law.
feature. Accessing mobile apps through Note: You must enable mobile apps for
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto each connected device the first time you
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps select a mobile app using the system.
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
Smartphone Connectivity information to any time.
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3, not responsible for any additional charges
the app needs to be running in the you may receive from your service provider,
background of your phone. If you shut down when your vehicle sends or receives data
the app on your phone, it shuts down the through the connected device. This includes
app on SYNC 3 as well. any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
544
You can enable and disable apps through SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
settings. See Settings (page 546). Equipped)
App Permissions WARNING

The system organizes the app permissions Driving while distracted can result in
into groups. You can grant these group loss of vehicle control, crash and
permissions individually. You can change injury. We strongly recommend that
a permission group status any time when you use extreme caution when using any
not driving, by using the settings menu. device that may take your focus off the
While in the settings menu, you can also road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
see the data included in each group. operation of your vehicle. We recommend
When you launch an app using SYNC 3, against the use of any hand-held device
the system may ask you to grant certain while driving and encourage the use of
permissions, for example Vehicle voice-operated systems when possible.
information, Driving characteristics, GPS Make sure you are aware of all applicable
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You local laws that may affect the use of
can enable all groups or none of them electronic devices while driving.
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
permission control. not be available in all markets.
Note: You are only prompted to grant Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
permissions the first time you use an app Travel Link, your vehicle must have
with SYNC 3. navigation.
Note: If you disable group permissions, Note: A paid subscription is required to
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC access and use these features. Go to
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
settings menu. information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
545
Traffic on Route Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
Traffic Nearby places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Area Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
Sound
SETTINGS Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:
Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.
Sound Settings
Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.
Treble Adjusts the high frequency level.
Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level.
Bass Adjusts the low frequency level.
Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.
546
Sound Settings
Speed Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
Compensated or turns the feature off.
Vol.
Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings Stereo
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Podcast Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Cover Art Priority Media Player Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.
Gracenote® The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.
Gracenote® Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
Management such as genre, artist, album.
547
Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Informa- This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
tion media device.
Update Media Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.
Index
You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Clock Format Select how time displays.

Auto Time Zone When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.
Update This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
Reset Clock to When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any Bluetooth

updates you make to the settings.
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
Menu Item Action
Bluetooth Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Phone

Bluetooth-enabled device.
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth the system before using the functions in
device is the same as pairing a phone. See hands-free mode.
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
548
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.

To add a phone, select: 2. Select your phone's name when it
Menu Item appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
Add Phone appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the pairing is successful.
system on your phone.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
3. Select your vehicle's make and model the system permission to access
as it displays on your phone. information. To check your phone’s
4. Confirm that the six-digit number compatibility, see your phone’s manual
appearing on your phone matches the or visit the website.
six-digit number on the touchscreen. Other features, such as text messaging
5. The touchscreen indicates when the using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
pairing is successful. download, are phone-dependent features.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give To check your phone’s compatibility,
the system permission to access see your phone’s manual or visit the
information. To check your phone’s website:
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website. Website
Alternatively, to add a phone, select: owner.ford.com

www.syncmyride.ca
Menu Item www.syncmaroute.ca
Add Phone
Once you have paired a device you can
Then select: adjust the following options.
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
View Devices
Add a Bluetooth You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
Device the previous table.
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Connect Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
549
Disconnect
Make Primary Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.
Delete Removes the selected device from the system.
Pressing the info icon next to the device

name allows you to see phone and device
information
Manage Contacts
Auto-Download Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
Contacts phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name Last Name
Re-download Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.
Contacts
Delete Contacts Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Set Phone Ringtone

No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.
Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
550
Text Messaging
No Alert No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
You can enable and disable the following options as well:

Mute Audio in When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
Privacy duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Roaming When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
Warning you attempt to place a call.
Low Battery When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
Notification is running low.
Select this button to modify the on or off

911 Assist setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
Note: This service is only available in the you can adjust the following option:
United States and Canada.
Set Emergency You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-
Contacts book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911
Assist call process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
551
FM HD Radio Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.

AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Avail-
able)
Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.
Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.
Sirius XM (If equipped)

Set Category for After selecting a category, seek function only stops on channels which
Seek are inside that selected category.
Parental Select to create a personal identification number (PIN). This allows
Lockout you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Edit Alerts Select to switch on, off or delete alerts.
The Electronic Serial Number can also be found on this screen. This number is necessary
to activate, modify or track your account through Sirius XM.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
552
Map Preferences
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
A rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting.
Once this feature is activated you can select Select POIs
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
Incident Map This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
Icons to have displayed on the navigation map.
Route Preferences
Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Route Preferences
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest Fastest Eco
Always Use ___ Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
Route calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Automatically The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
Find Parking you approach your destination.
Eco Time Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
Penalty setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
553
Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a

Guidance route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Toll If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation
Roads route.
Avoid If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing
Ferries/Car a navigation route.
Trains
Navigation Preferences
Navigation Preferences
Guidance You can adjust how the system provides prompts.
Prompts
Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.
Voice Only Only voice instructions are given.
Tones Only Only a tone sounds to prompt you.
The connected devices sends data to Ford

Mobile Apps in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
You can enable the control of compatible module number, anonymous usage
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or statistics and debugging information.
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable Updates may take place automatically.
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization Note: All Mobile Apps may not be
information and updates using the data compatible with the system.
plan associated with the connected device.
554
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford

is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Mobile Apps Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.

Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile This provides information on the current state of available app
Apps updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps…
The system has No update is The system is trying to receive
detected a new app required. an update.
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
Request Update Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
555
Request Update
All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.
There may also Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
be SYNC 3 sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
enabled apps can see which signals are included in each group.
listed under
these options.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for General

any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any Access and adjust the system settings,
vehicle data that you approve Ford to voice features, as well as phone, navigation
provide to an app. and wireless settings.
Menu Item
Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English,

Spanish or French.
Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Touch Panel Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatic-
ally updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.
About SYNC Information pertaining to the system and its software.
Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system.
Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
System Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi & Hotspot
You can access the following:
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
556
Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
Available This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
Wi-Fi Available The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
Notifications network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped)

You can access the following:
Wi-Fi Hotspot Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.

On/Off
Settings Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.
Data Usage Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.
Manage Devices Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle Note: It is the account owner’s
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition responsibility to remove the vehicle from
is On and may remain operational while the the vehicle network carrier account when
ignition is Off. ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier agreement, your vehicle network carrier for more
information.
coverage and availability.
557
Note: : Data, e.g. the Vehicle Identification Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between Ford and the Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
vehicle network carrier to provide the This sets the color to the highest intensity.
Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with You can drag the colors up and down to
your vehicle network carrier agreement, increase or decrease the intensity.
coverage and availability, and may be used
to enable a seamless transition from an old To switch ambient lighting off, press the
to new embedded modem and to confirm active color once or drag the active color
any updates are successfully delivered. all the way down to zero intensity.
Note: : For your convenience data usage Vehicle
may be available for monitoring under
Settings but may not reflect actual or Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
current usage. The vehicle network carrier these features.
is responsible for providing information You can select the following features to
about your account. Please contact the update their settings.
vehicle network carrier for more information.
Note: : Ford may need to update operating Door Keypad Code (If equipped)
system software on your vehicle, including Select this button to add or erase a
security updates and bug fixes, to keep personal door keypad code. To add or
connected services current, like Vehicle erase a personal code, you first need to
Hotspot, without prior notice to you. enter the five-digit factory set code. You
Note: If you do not have an active vehicle can find this code on the owner's wallet
hotspot data plan, open your web browser card in the glove box or from your
and go to a website using the HTTP protocol authorized dealer.
to be automatically redirected to the vehicle
network carrier landing page where you can
purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will
not automatically redirect.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:

Message Action and Description
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park When the reverse sensing system detects an object, it displays red,
Aids yellow and green highlights at the top of the image.
Rear Camera You can enable or disable this option using the slider.
Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
558
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN) shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
Selecting this button on the settings menu registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.

Mode You can select:
Auto The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Night The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Off The screen goes black and does not display anything.
To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Auto Dim Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item
Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts

and confirmations.
Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts
name with you before making a call.
Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.
559
Valet Mode To enable valet mode, enter your chosen

PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
Valet mode allows you to lock the system. PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN. To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
When you select valet mode a pop up phone and all of your options are available
appears informing you that a four digit again.
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code. Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
Note: If the system is locked and you refer to the tables below.
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center. To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
United States: 1-800-392-3673 website.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
Cell phone issues
Issue Possible cause Possible solution
There is back- The audio control

ground noise settings on your cell Refer to your device's manual about audio
during a phone phone may be affecting adjustments.
call. SYNC 3 performance.
During a call, I Try switching your cell phone off, resetting

can hear the it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
other person Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
malfunction.
but they cannot 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
hear me. icon on the phone screen.
During a call, I To restart your system, shut down the
cannot hear the engine, open and close the door, and then
The system may need to
other person lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
be restarted.
and they cannot Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
hear me. and the lighted USB port is off.
This is a cell phone-
SYNC 3 is not Check your cell phone's compatibility.
dependent feature.
able to down-
load my phone- Possible cell phone Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
book. contacts from your phone. Refer to your
malfunction.
cell manual.
560
Cell phone issues
You must switch on your cell phone and

the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
The system contacts from your phone. Refer to your
says "Phone- cell manual.
book down-
If the missing contacts are stored on your
loaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
memory.
book is empty or
is missing You must switch on your cell phone and
contacts. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
dependent feature.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
I am having Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
trouble deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
connecting my again.
cell phone to Possible cell phone
SYNC 3. malfunction. Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
dependent feature.
Text messaging Possible cell phone Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
is not working malfunction. it or removing the battery, then try again.
on SYNC 3.
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
561
Cell phone issues
• Press the blue circle to the right of the

device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward

incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
dependent feature.
incoming text messages.
Audible text
messages do Because each cell phone is different, refer
not work on my to your device's manual for the specific cell
cell phone. This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
tion. differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
562
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try

switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
I am having Possible device malfunc- cable.
trouble tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
connecting my
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
device.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my temperatures.
vehicle.
This is a device-
dependent feature. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
Bluetooth audio The device is not player on your device.
does not connected.
stream.
The device is in a bad Try switching your device off, resetting it or
state. removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popu-
song title, album or genre lated.
SYNC 3 does information.
not recognize
The file may be Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
music that is on
corrupted. version.
my device.
The song may have Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
563
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
The file format is not Convert the file to a supported format. See
supported by SYNC 3. Entertainment (page 517).
The device needs to be Update media index. See Settings (page
re-indexed. 546).
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
When I connect to SYNC 3.
my device, I
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
sometimes do This is a device limitation.
select AirPlay from the devices Control
not hear any
Center, then select Dock Connector.
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
The device or media Connect a compatible device or media
song informa-
player is incompatible. player.
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.
Wi-Fi Issues
Failed connec- Password error. Verify password.

tion.
Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.
Multiple Access points Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
within range with the the default name unless it contains a
same SSID. unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.
564
Wi-Fi Issues
Disconnecting Weak signal probably Position the vehicle close to the hotspot
after successful due to distance from the with the front of the vehicle facing the
connection. hotspot, obstruction or hotspot direction and remove obstacles if
high interference. possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave
and cordless phones may cause interfer-
ence.
Poor signal seen There may be an If the vehicle is equipped with heated
by SYNC 3 obstruction between windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
despite being SYNC 3 and the hotspot. that the windshield is not facing the
near a hotspot. hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the windows in the
direction of the hotspot if that is feasible.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.
A hotspot is not The hotspot was defined Please set the network to visible and try
listed in the list as a hidden network. again.
of available
networks.
565
Wi-Fi Issues
SYNC 3 is not SYNC 3 does not SYNC 3 currently does not provide a
seen when currently provide a hotspot.
searching for hotspot.
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.
Software down- Poor signal strength, too Check the signal quality (under network
load takes too far from the hotspot, details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excel-
long. hotspot is supporting lent, test with another high-speed equipped
multiple connections, hotspot where the environment is more
slow Internet connection predictable.
or other problems.
SYNC 3 seems It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if
to connect with no new software. The the hotspot requires a subscription, you
a hotspot and connected hotspot may may contact the service provider.
the signal be a managed one and it
strength is requires either a
excellent but subscription or agreeing
the software is to the terms and condi-
not being tions.
updated.
566
AppLink issues
AppLink Mobile Make sure you have a compatible smart-

Applications: phone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
When I select an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
You did not connect an
"Find Mobile higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
Applink Compatible
Apps," SYNC 3 connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
phone to SYNC 3.
does not find find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
any applica- iPhone users must also connect to a USB
tions. port with an Apple USB cable.
Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
My phone is AppLink-enabled apps
is running on your phone. Some apps
connected, but I are not installed and
require you to register or login to the app
still cannot find running on your mobile
on the phone before using them with
any apps. device.
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
My phone is
Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
connected, my the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
properly close and re-
app(s) are
open their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
running, but I then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
SYNC 3, over ignition
still cannot find
cycles, for example. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
any apps.
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.
567
AppLink issues
My Android There is a Bluetooth issue Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
phone is on some older versions it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
connected, my of the Android operating SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-
app(s) are system that may cause connect to your phone if you press the
running, I apps that were found on "Phone" button.
restarted them, your previous vehicle
but I still cannot drive to not be found
find any apps. again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.
My iPhone is Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
connected, my a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
app is running, I You may need to reset to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
restarted the the USB connection to should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
app but I still SYNC 3. Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
cannot find it on and restart it.
SYNC 3.
I have an Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
Android phone. device by using the device's volume control
I found and buttons which are most often found on the
started my side of the device.
media app on The Bluetooth volume on
SYNC 3, but the phone may be low.
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.
Some Android devices Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
have a limited number of want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see
Bluetooth ports that SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
some of the
apps can use to connect. app's settings menu on the phone.
AppLink apps
If you have more AppLink
running on my
apps on your phone than
phone listed in
the number of available
the SYNC 3
Bluetooth ports, you will
Mobile Apps
not see all of your apps
Menu.
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
568
Review the cell phone voice commands

and the media voice commands at the
You may be using the beginning of their respective sections.
SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active
not understand
voice session to find a list of voice
what I am
commands there.
saying.
You may be speaking too Wait for the system to prompt you before
soon or at the wrong you state your command.
time.
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
Make sure you are saying the complete title
SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
not understand appears on your device.
Nettles".
the name of a
song or artist. If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
The song or artist name
may have some special Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
characters that are not and playlists names do not have any special
being recognized by characters like *, - or +.
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does exactly as it appears on your phone. For
the name exactly as it
not understand example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
appears on your phone-
or is calling the say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
book.
wrong contact is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
when I want to The contact name may
make a call. Make sure that your contact names do not
contain special charac-
have any special characters like *, - or +.
ters.
569
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation

The SYNC 3 rules of the selected language to the
voice control contact names stored on your cell phone.
system is having You may not be saying Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
trouble recog- the name exactly as it manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
nizing foreign appears on your phone- for phonebook and then contact name.
names stored book. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
on my cell 3 will read the contact name to you, giving
phone. you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
trouble recog- rules of the selected language to the names
You may be saying the
nizing foreign stored on your media player or USB flash
foreign names using the
tracks, artists, drive. It is able to make some exceptions
currently selected
albums, genres for very popular artist names (for example,
language for SYNC 3.
and playlist U2) such that you can always use the
names from my English pronunciation for these artists.
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
The system voice.
generates voice
prompts and SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3 uses text-to- features for a wide range of languages.
the pronunci-
speech voice prompt Dialing a contact name directly from the
ation of some
technology. phonebook without pre-recording (for
words may not
be accurate for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
my language. track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
570
Personal Profiles
Issue Possible cause and solution
Personal Profiles have not been set up.

An invalid profile name was entered.
A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
I cannot create a profile.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
The keyfob selected was already associ-
ated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.
I cannot link a keyfob. A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.
A different Personal Profile is active than
My personalized settings do not save.
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
My profile will not recall. The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.
571
Personal Profiles
Issue Possible cause and solution
The keyfob being used is not linked to a

profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
My preset positions recall but my profile Personal Profiles is turned off.
does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not. The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
I lost a keyfob. Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
I lost all profiles. a new keyfob to replace lost one.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.
572
General
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a

The language single module for text display, voice control
selected for the and voice prompts. The country where you
instrument bought your vehicle dictates the four
cluster and languages based on the most popular
information and
SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
entertainment is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
the currently selected
display does not
language for the instru- current active language.
match the
ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3
ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
language
display. Dialing a contact name directly from the
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth phonebook without pre-recording (for
audio, voice example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
control and track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
voice prompts). from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3

troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
573
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories • Step bars.

that are available for your vehicle, please • Wheel well liners.
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site: Interior style
Web Address (United States) • Ambient lighting.

• Cargo organizers.
www.Accessories.Ford.com
• Custom seat covers*.
• Floor liners.
Web Address (Canada)
• Floor mats.
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Lifestyle
Ford Custom Accessories are available for • Ash cup/smoker's package.
your vehicle through an authorized dealer. • Bed cargo net, tie down plates and
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace cleats.
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be • Bed extender.
defective in factory-supplied materials or • Bedliners and bedmats.
workmanship during the warranty period, • Bed ramps.
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories. • Hitches.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your • Racks and carriers*.
vehicle through the warranty that provides • Sportliner cargo liner*.
the greatest benefit: • Tonneau/bed cover*.
• 24 months, unlimited mileage. • Tow hooks.
• The remainder of your new vehicle • Towing accessories.
limited warranty.
• Trailer back-up camera.
Contact an authorized dealer for details • Trailer brake control.
and a copy of the warranty.
• Truck bed camping tent*.
Exterior style • Trailer TPMS.
• Commercial graphics*. Peace of mind
• Commercial LED warning strobe
lights*. • Back-up alarm*.
• Hood deflectors. • Bed hooks*.
• Exhaust tip. • Bumper and hitch-mounted parking
sensors*.
• Running boards.
• Ford Telematics.
• Side window deflectors*.
• Keyless entry keypad.
• Splash guards.
• Protective seat covers*.
• Stainless-steel wheel covers*.
• Remote start and alarms.
• Roadside assistance kits*.
574
Accessories
• Cruise control. • An authorized dealer needs to install

• Tool or Cargo boxes*. mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
• Vehicle security system. operation of your vehicle, particularly
• Wheel locks. if the manufacturer did not design the
• Wheel well liners. mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
*The accessory manufacturer designs,
develops and therefore warrants Ford • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
Licensed Accessories, and does not design any non-Ford electrical or electronic
or test these accessories to Ford Motor accessories or components to your
Company engineering requirements. vehicle, you may adversely affect
Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the battery performance and durability. In
manufacturer’s limited warranty details, addition, you may also adversely affect
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed the performance of other electrical
Accessories product limited warranty from systems in the vehicle.
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep AUXILIARY SWITCHES(IfEquipped)
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your For maximum vehicle performance, keep
vehicle: the following information in mind when
• When adding accessories, equipment, adding accessories or equipment to your
passengers and luggage to your vehicle:
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight • When adding accessories, equipment,
capacity of the vehicle or of the front passengers and luggage to your
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
indicated on the Safety Compliance capacity of the vehicle or of the front
Certification label). Ask an authorized or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
dealer for specific weight information. indicated on the Safety Compliance
• The Federal Communications Certification label). Ask an authorized
Commission (FCC) and Canadian dealer for specific weight information.
Radio Telecommunications • The Federal Communications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use Commission (FCC) and Canadian
of mobile communications systems Radio Telecommunications
that are equipped with radio Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
transmitters, for example two-way of mobile communications systems
radios, telephones and theft alarms. equipped with radio transmitters, for
Any such equipment installed in your example, two-way radios, telephones
vehicle should comply with Federal and theft alarms. Any such equipment
Communications Commission (FCC) installed in your vehicle should comply
and Canadian Radio with Federal Communications
Telecommunications Commission Commission (FCC) and Canadian
(CRTC) regulations and should be Radio Telecommunications
installed only by an authorized dealer. Commission (CRTC) regulations, and
should be installed by an authorized
dealer.
575
Accessories
• An authorized dealer needs to install When switched on, the auxiliary switches
mobile communications systems. provide electrical battery power for a
Improper installation may harm the variety of personal or commercial uses.
operation of your vehicle, particularly Switches 1 through 4 provide 25 amps.
if the manufacturer did not design the Switches 5 and 6 provide 40 amps.
mobile communication system The relay box for the auxiliary switches is
specifically for automotive use. in the rear of the engine compartment,
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add near the back wall. See your authorized
any non-Ford electrical or electronic dealer for service.
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect The relays are coded as shown:
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
E220728
The auxiliary switch option package

provides six switches mounted in the
overhead console. These switches operate
when the vehicle is running or from battery
power, depending on the switchable fuse
AUXF4's location in the upfitter relay box.
We recommend, however, that the engine
remain running to maintain battery charge
when using the auxiliary switches for
extended periods of time or higher current
draws.
Note: When your vehicle has a diesel
engine, use the auxiliary switches only when
the engine is running. The glow plugs also
drain battery power when the ignition key is
in the on position. Using the auxiliary
switches, even for limited amounts of time,
can cause your battery to drain quickly and E220729
prevent your vehicle from restarting.
576
Accessories
Each switch includes a blunt-cut, sealed panel on the right-hand side of the
wire. The wires are under the instrument passenger footwell.
E220730
The power leads are coded as shown:
Switch Circuit Number Wire Color Fuse Amp Rating
AUX 1 CB117A Brown with green 25A

trace
AUX 2 CB114A Violet with orange 25A
trace
AUX 3 CB116A Blue with green 25A
trace
577
Accessories
Switch Circuit Number Wire Color Fuse Amp Rating
AUX 4 CB113A Gray with brown 25A

trace
AUX 5 CB115A Brown with blue 40A
trace
AUX 6 CB118A Gray with orange 40A
trace
Upfitter Interface Module (If Equipped)

The Upfitter Interface Module (UIM) is an
electronic control module that operates
equipment (such as lift buckets, cranes,
motors, salt spreaders and snow plows)
with external relays.
If you replace the module, it will require
additional programming by the upfitter.
Obtain this data directly from the upfitter
company. The upfitter contact information
is in the vehicle door opening.
For more information on the Upfitter
Interface Module and the auxiliary
switches, contact your upfitter.
578
Ford Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING That means you get:

COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. Lincoln dealership.
Ford Protect Extended Service • Repairs performed by factory trained
Plans (U.S. Only) technicians, using genuine parts.
Ford Protect extended service plan means Rental Car Reimbursement

peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and 1st day Rental Benefit
provides more protection beyond the New If you bring your car into your dealer for
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford the day.
Protect extended service plans!
Extended Rental Benefits
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
One trip to the Service Center could easily repairs, you are eligible for rental car
exceed the price of your Ford Protect coverage, including warranty repairs, and
extended service plan. With Ford Protect Field Service Actions.
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising Roadside Assistance
repair costs.
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle including:
Components • Towing, flat-tire change and battery
There are four mechanical Ford Protect jump starts.
extended service plans with different levels • Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for • Travel expense reimbursement for
details. lodging, meals and rental car.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most • Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
comprehensive coverage. With over coverage or other transportation.
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to Transferable Coverage
list what’s not covered.
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, Protect extended service plan coverage
and includes many high-tech items. expires, you can transfer any remaining
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
more peace of mind.
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
579
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Ford Protect Extended Service

Vehicle Plan (CANADA ONLY)
Ford Protect extended service plan also You can get more protection for your
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
covers all scheduled maintenance, and extended service plan. Ford Protect
selected wear items. The coverage is extended service plan is the only service
prepaid, so you never have to worry about contract backed by Ford Motor Company
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
Covered maintenance includes: you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Rental reimbursement.
• Spark plugs.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
wear items.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Protection against repair costs after
• Shock absorbers. your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Struts. Coverage expires.
• Engine Belts. • Roadside Assistance benefits.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and There are several Ford Protect extended
o-rings. service plans available in various time,
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if distance and deductible combinations.
equipped). Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
• Cabin air filter replacement every and rental. When you purchase Ford
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric Protect extended service plan, you receive
vehicles only). added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Interest Free Finance Options
Mexico, provided by a network of
Just a 10% down payment will provide you participating authorized Ford Motor
with an affordable, no interest, no fee Company dealers.
payment program allowing you all the Note: Repairs performed outside of
security and benefits Ford Protect Canada, the United States and Mexico are
extended service plan has to offer while not eligible for Ford Protect extended
paying over time. You are pre-approved service plan coverage.
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended This information is subject to change. For
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan Ford Protect extended service plan that is
P.O. Box 321067 right for you.
Detroit, MI 48232
580
GENERAL MAINTENANCE Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®

Replacement Parts
INFORMATION
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
Carefully following the maintenance exceed our specifications. Parts installed
schedule helps protect against major repair at your dealership carry a nationwide
expenses resulting from neglect or 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
inadequate maintenance and may help to parts and labor limited warranty.
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
completed maintenance with your vehicle. may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
We have established regular maintenance emissions compliance.
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you Convenience
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes; Many dealerships have extended evening
one is to maintain the reliability of your and Saturday hours to make your service
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost visit more convenient and they offer one
of owning your vehicle down. stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
It is your responsibility to have all from general maintenance to collision
scheduled maintenance performed and to repairs.
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
manual. See Capacities and or body shops. Please contact your dealer
Specifications (page 421). for details.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance Protecting Your Investment
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance. Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your reliability, durability and resale value. To
Dealership? maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
Factory-Trained Technicians make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
Service technicians participate in extensive
intervals.
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the Your vehicle is equipped with the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
dealership about the training and displays a message in the information
certification their technicians have display at the proper oil change interval.
received. This interval may be up to one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km).
581
When the oil change message appears in Additives and Chemicals

the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil This owner's manual and the Ford
change within two weeks or 500 mi Workshop Manual list the recommended
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life We do not recommend using chemicals or
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil additives not approved by us as part of
Change Indicator Reset (page 338). your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you Oils, Fluids and Flushing
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
your last oil change. Never exceed one year normal operating characteristic and, by
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil itself, does not necessarily indicate a
change intervals. concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built as the factory-trained technicians at your
with multiple, complex, performance dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
systems. Every manufacturer develops that also show signs of overheating or
these systems using different foreign material contamination
specifications and performance features. immediately.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
your vehicle. fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
Ford Motor Company has recommended viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
maintenance intervals for various parts sub-systems during scheduled
and component systems based upon maintenance. It is critical that systems are
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company flushed only with new fluid that is the same
relies upon this testing to determine the as that required to fill and operate the
most appropriate mileage for replacement system or using a Ford-approved flushing
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at chemical.
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance Owner Checks and Services
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information. Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
We strongly recommend the use of only month or at six-month intervals.
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
582
Check Every Month
Air filter restriction gauge.

Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
583
Multi-Point Inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
1
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Tires including the spare for wear and
2
proper pressure
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service

advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
584
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

Gasoline Engine
Normal Maintenance Intervals
7,500 mi (12,000 km)or Six Months Whichever Comes First
Change engine oil and filter.

1
Rotate tires , inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Perform multi-point inspection recommended.
1
Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels
only if unusual wear is noted.
15,000 mi (24,000 km)or 12 Months Whichever Comes First
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer for requirements.

Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine coolant concentration, freeze-point protection, level and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings. Four-wheel
drive vehicles.
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.
Other Maintenance Items
Every 15,000 mi Replace cabin air filter.

(24,000 km)
Every 30,000 mi Replace engine air filter.
(48,000 km)
Every 60,000 mi Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seal if non-
(96,000 km) sealed bearings are used.
Every 97,000 mi
Replace spark plugs.
(156,000 km)
585
Other Maintenance Items

1
Every 105,000 mi Change engine coolant.
(168,000 km) 2
Inspect accessory drive belt or belts.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter on 6-speed
transmission. Consult dealer for requirements.
Replace the accessory drive belt or belts if not replaced
within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km) Replace front wheel bearings and seals if non-sealed
bearings are used.
Change axle(s) fluid. See exceptions.
Change transfer case fluid if equipped.
1
Initial replacement at six years or 105,000 mi (168,000 km), then every three years or
45,000 mi (72,000 km).
2
If not replaced, inspect the belt or belts every 15,000 mi (24,000 km).
This means you do not have to remember

Diesel Engine to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor an oil change is due by displaying a
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life message in the information display.
Monitor that determines when you should The following table provides examples of
change the engine oil based on how you vehicle use and its impact on oil change
use your vehicle. By using several intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
important factors in its calculations, the change intervals depend on several factors
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning and generally decrease with severity of
your vehicle and reduces environmental use.
waste at the same time.
When to Expect the Message Prompting You to Change Your Oil
Miles (km) Vehicle Use and Example
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi Normal commuting with highway driving.

(12,000–16,000 km) No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
5,000–7,500 mi Severe
(8,000–12,000 km)
586
When to Expect the Message Prompting You to Change Your Oil
Miles (km) Vehicle Use and Example
Moderate to heavy load or towing.

Mountainous or off-road conditions.
Extended idling, 200-300 hours.
Extended hot or cold operation.
Extreme
2,500–5,000 mi Maximum load or towing.
(4,000–8,000 km) Extreme hot or cold operation.
Use of high sulfur diesel fuel.
Note: Use the appropriate special operating condition for maintenance information when
using high sulfur diesel fuels, operating your vehicle off-road or in dusty conditions, such as
unpaved roads.
Note: For every hour that your vehicle idles, it has accumulated the equivalent of
approximately 25 mi (40 km).
Normal Maintenance Intervals
1
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
2
Change the engine oil and filter.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank.
3
Rotate the tires , inspect the tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant concentration freeze-point
protection, level and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
587
1
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
Inspect the front axle and U-joints. Lubricate any grease fittings. Four-wheel drive
vehicles.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
3
1
Other maintenance items
Every 20,000 mi Replace the cabin air filter.

(32,000 km)
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant
(48,000 km) concentration freeze-point protection, additive corrosion
inhibitor strength, coolant level, and hoses. Add coolant
additive if necessary.
Every 45,000 mi Replace the air inlet foam filter.
(72,000 km)
Every 60,000 mi Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seal
(96,000 km) if using non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
At 90,000 mi (144,000 km) Inspect the accessory drive belt or belts.2
Change the crankcase ventilation filter element if

Every 100,000 mi equipped. Dual rear wheel and incomplete chassis
(160,000 km) configurations only.
3
Change the engine and secondary cooling system coolant.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. Consult
dealer for requirements.
Every 150,000 mi Replace the accessory drive belt or belts if not replaced
(240,000 km) within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km)
Replace the front wheel bearings and seals if using non-
sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
588
1
Other maintenance items
Change axle(s) fluid. See exceptions.

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped.
1
You can perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last oil
change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
Note: When adding coolant additive, do not exceed the specified maximum of 50 fl oz
(1.4 L) for the engine and 20 fl oz (473 ml) for the secondary cooling system. Operating the
engine with excessive coolant additive may cause overheating which could lead to severe,
permanent engine damage.
2
Perform follow-up inspections every 15,000 mi (24,000 km) after the initial inspection.
Replace the belt or belts at 150,000 mi (240,000 km).
3
Initial replacement is at six years or 105,000 mi (168,000 km), then every three years or
45,000 mi (72,000 km).
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Gasoline Engine
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Inspect frequently, service Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease
as required fittings.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
589

1
Rotate tires , inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.
or six months.
Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease
fittings.
Every 30,000 mi Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
(48,000 km) non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 60,000 mi Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
1
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Inspect frequently, service Replace engine air filter.

as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect brake system.
Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if equipped
with grease fittings.
1
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease
or six months fittings.
or six months or 200 engine
hours.
590
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Every 60,000 mi Replace spark plugs.
(96,000 km)
1
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Inspect frequently, service Replace engine air filter.

as required
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
1
depth.
or six months
Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease
fittings.
1
Off-road operation
Inspect frequently, service Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints, Lubricate
as required if equipped with grease fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
591
Off-road operation
1
depth.
1
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only)
Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Diesel Engine
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the

information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
(24,000 km) or six months, filters.
600 engine hours
Every 30,000 mi Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using
(48,000 km) non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles)
592
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine concentration (freeze-point protection) and additive
hours (corrosion inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if
necessary.
Every 60,000 mi Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Frequent or Extended Idling (Over 10 Minutes Per Hour of Normal Driving) or Frequent
Low-speed Operation if your Vehicle is Used for Stationary Operation

(24,000 km), six months or filters.
600 engine hours
necessary.
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
593
Frequent Low-speed Operation, Consistent Heavy Traffic Under 25 mph (40 km/h) or
Long Rush-hour Traffic

600 engine hours
necessary.
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Sustained High-speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Maximum Loaded Weight
for Vehicle Operation)

600 engine hours
594
Sustained High-speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Maximum Loaded Weight
for Vehicle Operation)
necessary.
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: When adding coolant additive, do not exceed the specified maximum of 48 fluid
ounces (1.4 liters) for the engine and 16 fluid ounces (473 ml) for the secondary cooling
system. Operating the engine with excessive coolant additive may cause overheating which
could lead to severe, permanent engine damage.
Operating in Sustained Ambient Temperatures Below -9°F (-23°C) or Above 100°F (38°C)

600 engine hours
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km) Rotate the tires1, inspect the tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary.
Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods.
595
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km), Change the engine oil and filter.2
six months or 300 engine
hours Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
(24,000 km), 6 months or filters.
600 engine hours
(48,000 km)
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using
non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles)
1
2
Off-road Operation
As required Inspect functional holes in each leg of the twin exhaust

tips and the holes under the shield just inboard of the right
rear tire to make sure they are clean and clear of debris or
foreign materials. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter of your
owner’s manual for more information.
Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods.
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km), Rotate the tires1, inspect the tires for wear and measure
six months or 300 engine tread depth.
hours
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary.
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km) Change the engine oil and filter.2
or 300 engine hours
600 engine hours
(48,000 km)
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using
non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles).
596
Off-road Operation
Every 50,000 mi Change the rear axle fluid (Dana rear axles only - some F-
(80,000 km) 350s; all F-450s and F-550s).
Change the transfer case fluid. (Four-wheel drive vehicles)
Inspect the front axle fluid. (Four-wheel drive vehicles)
1
2
Using Biodiesel, up to and Including 20% Biodiesel (B20)

300 engine hours
Using Fuel Other Than Ultra-low Sulfur Diesel Fuel - Vehicles Operated Where Ultra-low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel is not Required or Available

or three months (if using
high sulfur fuel with more
than 500 ppm sulfur)
or six months (if using high
sulfur fuel with fewer than
500 ppm sulfur)
wide-open throttle for long periods above

Exceptions 45 mph (72 km/h), change the rear axle
fluid every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) if the
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance rear axle is filled with non-synthetic fluid.
Axle(s) and transfer case (4X4 only) fluid This interval can be waived and the
changes or level checks are not required 150,000 mi (240,000 km) service interval
unless a leak is suspected or the assembly can continue if the rear axle is filled with
has been submerged in water. During long 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) or at
597
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals

XY-75W140-QL, or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
equivalent for complete refill of North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
Traction-Lok rear axles. See Capacities locations with similar climates using an
and Specifications (page 421). American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
Additional Axle Maintenance for Dual mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
Rear Wheels oil change interval is 3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Change rear axle fluid every 250,000 mi If the available API SM or SN oils are not
(400,000 km) under normal driving available, then the oil change interval is
conditions on all commercial applications. 2,000 mi (3,000 km).
When operating your vehicle at or near
maximum gross vehicle weights, change Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
the rear axle fluid every 60,000 mi Replacement
(96,000 km). In addition, follow this The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
60,000 mi (96,000 km) schedule when filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
operating your vehicle under the special and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
operating conditions where noted. these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
California Fuel Filter Replacement air filter and cabin air filter.
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has Diesel Particulate Filter
determined that the failure to perform this Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
maintenance item does not nullify the up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
emission warranty or limit recall liability not removed during the regeneration
before the completion of your vehicle's process. The filter may need to be replaced
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, with a new or remanufactured part at
urges you to have all recommended approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
maintenance services performed at the Actual mileage varies depending on engine
specified intervals and to record all vehicle and vehicle operating conditions.
service.
In this case, the engine control system sets
a service light (wrench icon) to inform you
to bring your vehicle to the dealer for
service. If there are any issues with the
oxidation catalyst or particulate filter
system, a service light (wrench or engine
icon) sets by the engine control system to
inform you to bring your vehicle into a
dealer for service.
598
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
599
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
600
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
601
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
602
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
603
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
604
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
605
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
606
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
607
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
608
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC Note: We test and certify your vehicle to

meet electromagnetic compatibility
COMPATIBILITY legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
WARNINGS responsibility to make sure that any
Do not place objects or mount equipment an authorized dealer installs on
equipment on or near the airbag your vehicle complies with applicable local
cover, on the side of the seatbacks legislation and other requirements.
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
that may come into contact with a equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
instructions may increase the risk of must keep to the parameters in the
personal injury in the event of a crash. following table. We do not provide special
Do not fasten antenna cables to provisions or conditions for installations or
original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and use.
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic
modules and airbags.
Car
E239120
609
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
610
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-88 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
Note: After the installation of radio

frequency transmitters, check for END USER LICENSE
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
AGREEMENT
standby and transmit modes.
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
Check all electrical equipment: LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• With the ignition ON.
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
• With the engine running. have acquired a vehicle having several
• During a road test at various speeds. devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
Check that electromagnetic fields include software licensed or owned by
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
transmitter installed do not exceed ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
applicable human exposure requirements. software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
611
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") liable for any damages arising out of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY errors in the speech recognition
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE process. It is your responsibility to
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT monitor any speech recognition
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, functions included in the system.
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF Decompilation and Disassembly:
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). You may not reverse engineer,
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This decompile, translate, disassemble or
EULA grants you the following license: attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• You may use the SOFTWARE as SOFTWARE nor permit others to
installed on the DEVICES and as reverse engineer, decompile or
otherwise interfacing with systems disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and/or services provide by or through and only to the extent that such activity
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third is expressly permitted by applicable
party software and service providers. law notwithstanding this limitation or
Description of Other Rights and to the extent as may be permitted by
Limitations the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
• Speech Recognition: If the with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE includes speech • Limitations on Distributing,
recognition component(s), you should Copying, Modifying and Creating
understand that speech recognition is Derivative Works: You may not
an inherently statistical process and distribute, copy, make modifications
that recognition errors are inherent in to or create derivative works based on
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
612
Appendices
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may charges from your wireless service

permanently transfer your rights under provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
this EULA only as part of a sale or or third party software and services
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you suppliers provide or make available to
retain no copies, you transfer all of the you Supplemental Components and
SOFTWARE (including all component no other EULA terms are provided
parts, the media and printed materials, along with the Supplemental
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Components, then the terms of this
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
recipient agrees to the terms of this COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, designated agent reserve the right to
any transfer must include all prior discontinue without liability any
versions of the SOFTWARE. Internet-based services provided to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any you or made available to you through
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY the use of the SOFTWARE.
may terminate this EULA if you fail to • Links to Third Party Sites: The
comply with the terms and conditions SOFTWARE may provide you with the
of this EULA. ability to link to third party sites. The
• Internet-Based Services third party sites are not under the
Components: The SOFTWARE may control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
contain components that enable and its affiliates and/or its designated
facilitate the use of certain agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
Internet-based services. You COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
acknowledge and agree that FORD designated agent are responsible for
MOTOR COMPANY, third party (I) the contents of any third party sites,
software and service suppliers, its any links contained in third party sites,
affiliates and/or its designated agent or any changes or updates to third
may automatically check the version party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
of the SOFTWARE and/or its other form of transmission received
components that you are utilizing and from any third party sites. If the
may provide upgrades or supplements SOFTWARE provides links to third
to the SOFTWARE that may be party sites, those links are provided to
automatically downloaded to your you only as a convenience, and the
DEVICES. inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
• Additional Software/Services: The FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR and/or its designated agent.
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or • Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
its designated agent to provide or make You recognize your obligation to drive
available to you SOFTWARE updates, responsibly and keep attention on the
supplements, add-on components, or road. You will read and abide with the
Internet-based services components DEVICES operating instructions
of the SOFTWARE after the date you particularly as they pertain to safety
obtain your initial copy of the and you agree to assume any risk
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental associated with the use of the
Components".) SOFTWARE updates DEVICES.
may cause you to incur additional
613
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You

If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the subject to U.S. and European Union export
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or applicable international and national laws
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
replacement copy for the existing other governments.
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
this EULA, including any additional EULA you any rights in connection with any
terms accompanying the upgrade trademarks or service marks of FORD
SOFTWARE. MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: party software and service providers.
All title and intellectual property rights in PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
limited to any images, photographs, provided in the documentation for the
animations, video, audio, music, text and DEVICES product support, such as the
"applets" incorporated into the vehicle owner guide.
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the Should you have any questions concerning
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may please refer to the address provided in the
not copy the printed materials documentation for the DEVICES.
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title No Liability for Certain Damages:
and intellectual property rights in and to EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
the content which may be accessed MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
through use of the SOFTWARE is the SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
property of the respective content owner AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
and may be protected by applicable LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
copyright or other intellectual property CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
rights to use such content outside its CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
intended use. All rights not specifically PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
granted under this EULA are reserved by LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
and third party software and service PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
services which may be accessed through EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the VEHICLE.
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
614
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation

Information Read and follow features may require manual
instructions: (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
• Before using your SYNC® system, read while driving can distract your attention
and follow all instructions and safety and could cause an accident or other
information provided in this end user serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not and legal manner before attempting
following precautions found in the these operations.
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries. • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
General Operation as an aid. Make your driving decisions
• Voice Command Control: Certain based on your observations of local
functions within the SYNC® system conditions and existing traffic
may be accomplished using voice regulations. Any such feature is not a
commands. Using voice commands substitute for your personal judgment.
while driving helps you to operate the Any route suggestions made by this
system without removing your hands system should never replace any local
from the wheel or eyes from the road. traffic regulations or your personal
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not judgment or knowledge of safe driving
access any function requiring a practices.
prolonged view of the screen while you • Route Safety: Do not follow the route
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal suggestions if doing so would result in
manner before attempting to access a an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
function of the system requiring would be placed in an unsafe situation,
prolonged attention. or if you would be directed into an area
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the that you consider unsafe. The driver is
volume excessively. Keep the volume ultimately responsible for the safe
at a level where you can still hear operation of the vehicle and therefore,
outside traffic and emergency signals must evaluate whether it is safe to
while driving. Driving while unable to follow the suggested directions.
hear these sounds could cause an • Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
accident. used by this system may be inaccurate
• Navigation Features: Any navigation because of changes in roads, traffic
features included in the system are controls or driving conditions. Always
intended to provide turn by turn use good judgment and common sense
instructions to get you to a desired when following the suggested routes.
destination. Please make certain all • Emergency Services: Do not rely on
persons using this system carefully any navigation features included in the
read and follow instructions and safety system to route you to emergency
information fully. services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
615
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Disclaimer of Warranty

Risk
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
• You agree to each of the following:(a) AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
Any use of the SOFTWARE while SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
driving an automobile or other vehicle THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
in violation of applicable law or SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
presents a significant risk of distracted ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
driving and should not be attempted TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
under any circumstances;(b) Use of BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
poses a significant risk of hearing THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
damage and should not be attempted "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
under any circumstances;(c) The FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
SOFTWARE may not be compatible ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
with new or different versions of an HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
operating system, third party software, AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
or third party services, and the THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
critical failure of an operating system, SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
third party software, or third party STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
service.(d) Any third party service LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
accessed by or third party software AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
charge an additional fee for access, (ii) QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
may not work correctly, on an ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
may change streaming formats or NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
adult, profane or offensive content; and NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
misleading traffic, weather, financial OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
or safety information or other content; SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
cause you to incur additional charges SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
from your wireless service provider WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
(WSP) and any data or minute THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
calculators that may be included in the SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
software program are for reference OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
only, are not warranted in any way and UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
should not be relied upon in anyway. OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
to be responsible for and assume the THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
entire risk to the items set forth in CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
Section (a) – (e) above. INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
616
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE Binding Arbitration and Class Action

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, Waiver
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE (a) Application. This Section applies to
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR controversy between You and FORD
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING exceptions listed above, concerning the
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE legal or equitable basis.
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
• The laws of the State of Michigan which is a written statement of the name,
govern this EULA and Your use of the address, and contact information of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to dispute, and the relief requested. You and
other local, state, national, or FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
international laws. Any litigation arising resolve any dispute through informal
out of or related to this EULA shall be negotiation within 60 days from the date
brought and maintained exclusively in the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
a court of the State of Michigan You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
located in Wayne County or in the commence arbitration.
United States District Court for the (c) Small claims court. You may also
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby litigate any dispute in small claims court
consent to submit to the personal in your county of residence or FORD
jurisdiction of a court in the State of MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
Michigan located in Wayne County and business, if the dispute meets all
the United States District Court for the requirements to be heard in the small
Eastern District of Michigan for any claims court. You may litigate in small
dispute arising out of or relating to this claims court whether or not You
EULA. negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
617
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a may award the same damages to You
party or class member) all disputes in court individually as a court could. The arbitrator
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes may award declaratory or injunctive relief
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, only to You individually, and only to the
whose decision will be final except for a extent required to satisfy Your individual
limited right of appeal under the Federal claim.
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award. • I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
forum will be conducted solely on an
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
COMPANY’S last written settlement
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
offer made before the arbitrator was
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
appointed (“last written offer”), your
attorney general action, or in any other
dispute goes all the way to an
proceeding in which any party acts or
arbitrator’s decision (called an
proposes to act in a representative
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
you more than the last written offer,
be combined with another without the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
prior written consent of all parties to all
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
arbitration will be conducted by the (3) reimburse any expenses (including
American Arbitration Association (the expert witness fees and costs) that
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration your attorney reasonably accrues for
Rules. If You are an individual and use the investigating, preparing, and pursuing
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or will determine the amounts.
less whether or not You are an individual • ii. Disputes involving more than
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA $75,000. The AAA rules will govern
Supplementary Procedures for payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
Consumer-Related Disputes will also and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for • iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may any arbitration you commence, FORD
request a telephonic or in-person hearing MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
good cause to hold an in-person hearing or brought for an improper purpose. In
instead. For more information, see adr.org any arbitration FORD MOTOR
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to COMPANY commences, it will pay all
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
618
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and 1. Safe and Lawful Use
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any You acknowledge that devoting attention
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
counted in determining how much a of injury or death to you and others in
dispute involves. situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed agree to comply with the following when
within one year. To the extent permitted using the TeleNav Software:
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
be filed within one year in small claims drive safely;
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section (b) use your own personal judgment while
d). The one-year period begins when the driving. If you feel that a route suggested
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
a claim or dispute is not filed within one perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
year, it is permanently barred. places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver you into an area that you consider to be
(Section e) is found to be illegal or unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
dispute, then that portion of Section e will manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
not apply to those parts. Instead, those your vehicle is stationary and parked;
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
or in any manner inconsistent with this
unenforceable, that provision will be
Agreement;
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect. (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software End User License TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
Agreement your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
Please read these terms and conditions
operation of any safety device (such as an
carefully before you use the TeleNav
airbag).
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
terms and conditions. If you do not accept harmless against all claims resulting from
these terms and conditions, do not break any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
the seal of the package, launch, or use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
otherwise use the TeleNav Software. vehicle, including as a result of your failure
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and to comply with the directions above.
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
619
Appendices
2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise

transfer the TeleNav Software to
You agree: (a) when registering the others, except as part of your
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with permanent transfer of the TeleNav
true, accurate, current, and complete Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
information about yourself, and (b) to Software in any manner that
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true, I. infringes the intellectual property or
accurate, current and complete. proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
3. Software License
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
• Subject to your compliance with the regulation, including but not limited to laws
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav and regulations related to spamming,
hereby grants to you a personal, privacy, consumer and child protection,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license obscenity or defamation, or
(except as expressly permitted below iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
in connection with your permanent harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
transfer of the TeleNav Software obscene, libelous, or otherwise
license), without the right to objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
sublicense, to use the TeleNav otherwise permit unauthorized access by
Software (in object code form only) in third parties to the TeleNav Software
order to access and use the TeleNav without advanced written permission of
Software. This license shall terminate TeleNav.
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will 4. Disclaimers
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, • To the fullest extent permissible
and not to provide commercial pursuant to applicable law, in no event
navigation services to other parties. will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
3.1 License Limitations foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile, else in reliance on the information
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
provided by the TeleNav Software.
or otherwise change the TeleNav
TeleNav also does not warrant the
Software or any part thereof; (b)
accuracy of the map or other data used
attempt to derive the source code,
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
audio library or structure of the
may not always reflect reality due to,
TeleNav Software without the prior
among other things, road closures,
express written consent of TeleNav;
construction, weather, new roads and
(c) remove from the TeleNav
other changing conditions. You are
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
responsible for the entire risk arising
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
out of your use of the TeleNav
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
Software. For example but without
other notices or markings; (d)
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
620
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

navigation, as the maps or functionality WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
of the TeleNav Software are not REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
intended to support such high risk DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
applications, especially in more remote CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
geographical areas. NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT 6. Arbitration and Governing Law
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV • You agree that any dispute, claim or
SOFTWARE. controversy arising out of or relating to
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the this Agreement or the TeleNav
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this Software shall be settled by
limitation may not apply to you. independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
5. Limitation of Liability the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER The arbitrator shall apply the
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV American Arbitration Association, and
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS the judgment upon the award rendered
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD by the arbitrator may be entered by any
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, court having jurisdiction. Note that
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES proceeding and the decision of the
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT arbitrator shall be binding upon both
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE parties. You expressly agree to waive
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, and performance hereunder will be
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF governed by and construed in
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION accordance with the laws of the State
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE of California, without giving effect to
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE its conflict of law provisions. To the
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF extent judicial action is necessary in
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE connection with the binding arbitration,
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. both TeleNav and you agree to submit
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
621
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the conferred by implication, statute,

courts of the County of Santa Clara, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
California. The United Nations TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
Convention on Contracts for the hereby reserve all of their respective rights
International Sale of Goods shall not other than the licenses explicitly granted
apply. in this Agreement.
7. Assignment 8.3
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer By using the TeleNav Software, you
this Agreement or any of your rights or consent to receive from TeleNav all
obligations, except in totality, in communications, including notices,
connection with your permanent agreements, legally required disclosures
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and or other information in connection with the
expressly conditioned upon the new TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing electronically. TeleNav may provide such
to be bound by the terms and Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
conditions of this Agreement. Any such Website or by downloading such Notices
sale, assignment or transfer that is not to your wireless device. If you desire to
expressly permitted under this withdraw your consent to receive Notices
paragraph will result in immediate electronically, you must discontinue your
termination of this Agreement, without use of the TeleNav Software.
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately 8.4
cease all use of the TeleNav Software. TeleNav's or your failure to require
Notwithstanding the foregoing, performance of any provision shall not
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to affect that party's right to require
any other party at any time without performance at any time thereafter, nor
notice, provided the assignee remains shall a waiver of any breach or default of
bound by this Agreement. this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
8. Miscellaneous subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.1
8.5
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with If any provision herein is held
respect to the subject matter hereof. unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
8.2 parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
Except for the limited licenses expressly effect.
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
622
Appendices
8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from

the United States Postal Service® to
The headings in this Agreement are for
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, ©United States Postal Service® 2014.
and will not be referred to in connection Prices are not established, controlled or
with the construction or interpretation of approved by the United States Postal
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, Service®. The following trademarks and
the words "include" and "including" and registrations are owned by the USPS:
variations thereof, will not be deemed to United States Postal Service, USPS, and
be terms of limitation, but rather will be ZIP+4
deemed to be followed by the words The Data for Mexico includes certain data
"without limitation". from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions Geografía.
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
other data licensed to Telenav by third (Shanghai) Co., Ltd
party vendors for the benefit of you and The data (“Data”) is provided for your
other end users. This Agreement personal, internal use only and not for
includes end-user terms applicable to resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
these companies (included at the end subject to the following terms and
of this Agreement), and thus your use conditions which are agreed to by you, on
of the Telenav Software is also subject the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
to such terms. You agree to comply Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
with the following additional terms and their licensors and suppliers) on the other
conditions, which are applicable to hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
Terms and Conditions
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
The data (“Data”) is provided for your for the internal business and personal
personal, internal use only and not for purposes for which you were licensed, and
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is not for service bureau, time-sharing or
subject to the following terms and other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
conditions which are agreed to by you, on subject to the restrictions set forth in the
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and following paragraphs, you agree not to
its licensors (including their licensors and otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
suppliers) on the other hand. decompile, disassemble, create any
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
The Data for areas of Canada includes or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
information taken with permission from except to the extent permitted by
Canadian authorities, including: © Her mandatory laws.
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
623
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
and without limiting the preceding Territories and Countries do not allow
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) certain warranty exclusions, so to that
with any products, systems, or applications extent the above exclusion may not apply
installed or otherwise connected to or in to you.
communication with vehicles, capable of Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
real time route guidance, fleet LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
management or similar applications; or (b) BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
with or in communication with any CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
positioning devices or any mobile or IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
wireless-connected electronic or computer CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
devices, including without limitation ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
computers, pagers, and personal digital MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
assistants or PDAs. POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
Warning. The Data may contain FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
inaccurate or incomplete information due CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
to the passage of time, changing OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
circumstances, sources used and the SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
nature of collecting comprehensive ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
geographic data, any of which may lead to INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
incorrect results. ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
guarantees, representations or warranties LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
of any kind, express or implied, arising by POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
law or otherwise, including but not limited States, Territories and Countries do not
to, content, quality, accuracy, allow certain liability exclusions or
completeness, effectiveness, reliability, damages limitations, so to that extent the
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, above may not apply to you.
use or results to be obtained from this Export Control. You shall not export from
Data, or that the Data or server will be anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
uninterrupted or error-free. product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
required under, applicable export laws,
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
rules and regulations, including but not
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
administered by the Office of Foreign
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
624
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

HERE from complying with any of its NOTICE OF USE
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
excused and shall not constitute a breach SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
of this Agreement.
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
Entire Agreement. These terms and SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
conditions constitute the entire agreement West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
between Telenav (and its licensors, 60606
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, This Data is a commercial item as
and supersedes in their entirety any and defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
all written or oral agreements previously these End-User Terms under which this
existing between us with respect to such Data was provided.
subject matter.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws If the Contracting Officer, federal
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” government agency, or any federal official
where European HERE Data is used], refuses to use the legend provided herein,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of the Contracting Officer, federal
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations government agency, or any federal official
Convention for Contracts for the must notify HERE prior to seeking
International Sale of Goods, which is additional or alternative rights in the Data.
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European I. US/Canada Territory
HERE Data is used] for any and all A. United States Data. The End-User
disputes, claims and actions arising from Terms for any Application containing
or in connection with the Data provided to Data for the United States shall contain
you hereunder. the following notices:
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the “HERE holds a non-exclusive license
United States government or any other from the United States Postal
entity seeking or applying rights similar to Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
those customarily claimed by the United information.”
States government, this Data is a “©United States Postal Service®
“commercial item” as that term is defined 20XX. Prices are not established,
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in controlled or approved by the United
accordance with these End-User Terms, States Postal Service®. The following
and each copy of Data delivered or trademarks and registrations are
otherwise furnished shall be marked and owned by the USPS: United States
embedded as appropriate with the Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
625
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with

B. Canada Data. The following provi- each copy of all or any portion of the
sions apply to the Data for Canada, Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
which may include or reflect data from shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
third party licensors (“Third Party following copyright notice on at least
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen one of: (i) the label for the storage
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada for the copy; or (iii) other materials
Post”) and the Department of Natural packaged with the copy, such as user
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client taken with permission from Canadian
agrees that its use of the Third Party authorities, including © Her Majesty
Data is subject to the following provi- the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
sions: Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The Department of Natural Resources
licensors of such data, including Her Canada. All rights reserved.”
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, 3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
make no guarantees, representa- wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tions or warranties respecting such tion with the provision of any portion
data, either express or implied, of the Data for the Territory of Canada
arising by law or otherwise, including to End-Users as may be authorized
but not limited to, effectiveness, under the Agreement, Client shall
completeness, accuracy or fitness provide such End-Users, in a reason-
for a particular purpose. ably conspicuous manner, with terms
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third (set forth with other end user terms
Party Data licensors, including Her required to be provided under the
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Agreement, or as otherwise may be
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of provided, by Client) which shall include
any claim, demand or action, irre- the following provisions on behalf of
spective of the nature of the cause the Third Party Data licensors,
of the claim, demand or action including Her Majesty, Canada Post
alleging any loss, injury or damages, and NRCan:
direct or indirect, which may result The Data may include or reflect
from the use or possession of such data of licensors, including Her
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of Majesty the Queen in the Right of
revenues or contracts, or any other Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
consequential loss of any kind Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
resulting from any defect in the and the Department of Natural
Data. Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
626
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not II. Mexico. The following provision applies
limited to, effectiveness, complete- to the Data for Mexico, which includes
ness, accuracy or fitness for a certain data from the Instituto Nacional
particular purpose. The licensors, de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
respect of any claim, demand or packaging containing Data for Mexico
action, irrespective of the nature of shall contain the following notice:
the cause of the claim, demand or “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
action alleging any loss, injury or Estadística y Geografía)”
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses- III. Latin America Territory
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty, A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not of the Data and/or packaging relating
be liable in any way for loss of thereto shall include the respective Third
revenues or contracts, or any other Party Notices set forth below and used
consequential loss of any kind as described below corresponding to
resulting from any defect in the data the Territory (or portion thereof)
or the Data. included in such copy:
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her Territory Notice
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
and their officers, employees and MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
agents from and against any claim, AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
demand or action, irrespective of 2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
the nature of the cause of the claim, ENERO DE 2011”
demand or action, alleging loss, “source: © IGN 2009 - BD
costs, expenses, damages or injuries TOPO ®”
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession Guade-
of the data or the Data. loupe,
French
4. Additional Provisions: The terms Guiana
contained in this Section are in addi- and
tion to all of the rights and obligations Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
of the parties under the Agreement. nique Nacional de Estadística y
To the extent that any of the provi- Mexico Geografía)”
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi- IV. Middle East Territory
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
627
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

of the Data and/or packaging relating V. Europe Territory
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
as described below corresponding to 1. General Restrictions Applicable to
the Territory (or portion thereof) Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
included in such copy: and agrees that in certain countries of
Country Notice the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
Jordan “© Royal Jordanian party RDS-TMC code providers to
Geographic Centre”. The receive and use the Traffic Codes in
foregoing notice requirement the Data and to deliver to End-Users
for Jordan Data is a material Transactions in any way derived from
term of the Agreement. If or based on such Traffic Codes. For
Client or any of its permitted such countries, HERE shall deliver the
sublicensees (if any) fail to Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
meet such requirement, HERE Client only after receiving certification
shall have the right to from Client of its having obtained such
terminate Client’s license rights.
with respect to the Jordan
Data. 2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted each Transaction that uses Traffic
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from Codes for Belgium, provide the
licensing and/or otherwise distributing following notice to the End-User:
HERE’s database for the country of “Traffic Codes for Belgium are
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter- provided by the Ministerie van de
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. Transports.”
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
restricted from using the Jordan Data in license granted to Client relating to
Enterprise Applications if such party is making, selling or distributing paper
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a paper-like medium): (a) such license
Jordan-based customer. For purposes with respect to Data for the Territory of
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica- Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic- entering into and complying with a
ations, GIS applications, mobile business separate written agreement with the
asset management applications, call Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
center applications, telematics applica- sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
tions, public organization Internet OS any and all applicable paper map
applications or for providing geocoding royalties, and Client’s complying with
services. the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
628
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich-

written consent from Kartografie a.s.; und Vermessungswesen”
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of Croatia
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s Cyprus,
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Estonia,
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Latvia,
Client is restricted from using Data for Lithuania,
the Territory of France to create paper Moldova,
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and Poland,
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted Slovenia
from using any Data to create, sell or and/or
distribute paper maps that are the same Ukraine “© EuroGeographics”
or substantially similar, in terms of data France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD
content and specific use of color, TOPO ®”
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national Germany “Die Grundlagendaten
mapping agencies, including without wurden mit Genehmigung
limitation, Landervermessungämter of der zuständigen Behörden
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the entnommen”
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Landestopografie of Switzerland, Survey data © Crown
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung- copyright and database
swesen of Austria, and the National right 2010 Contains Royal
Land Survey of Sweden. Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting right 2010”
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Client acknowledges and agrees that Ltd.”
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top-
a direct action against Client to enforce Map Ltd.”
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
map requirements (see Section IV(B) stata prodotta usando
above) contained in this Agreement. quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies al tratto prodotta e fornita
of the Data and/or packaging relating dalla Regione Toscana.”
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used Norway “Copyright © 2000;
as described below corresponding to Norwegian Mapping
the Territory (or portion thereof) Authority”
included in such copy:
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Country(ies) Notice
629
Appendices
Spain “Información geográfica Product incorporates data which is ©

propiedad del CNIG” 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Sweden “Based upon electronic Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.” B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Switzerland “Topografische Terms for any Application containing
Grundlage: © Bundesamt RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
für Landestopographie. shall contain the following notice:
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client “Product incorporates traffic location
acknowledges that HERE has not codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
received approvals to distribute map tion Limited and its licensors.”
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus, AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. Telematics Disclosure
HERE may update such list from time to
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
time. The license rights granted to Client
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
under this TL with respect to the Data
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
for such countries are contingent upon
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
Client’s compliance with all applicable
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
laws and regulations, including, without
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
limitation, any required licenses or
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
approvals to distribute the Application
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
incorporating such Data in such
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
respective countries.
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
VI. Australia Territory CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
of the Data and/or packaging relating PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
thereto shall include the respective Third AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
Party Notices set forth below and used UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
as described below corresponding to UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
the Territory (or portion thereof) UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
included in such copy: EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
Copyright. Based on data provided KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
under license from PSMA Australia REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
Limited (www.psma.com.au). ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
630
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR

HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
DEVICE. TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE CARRIER.
SERVICES
VII. China Territory
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL Personal Use Only
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END You agree to use this Data together with
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE [insert name of Client Application] for the
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT solely personal, non-commercial purposes
GUARANTEE ANY END USER for which you were licensed, and not for
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR service bureau, time-sharing or other
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS to the restrictions set forth in the following
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER as necessary for your personal use to (i)
631
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you rigCustomer Remedies
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
and may not transfer or distribute it in any the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
form, for any purpose, except to the extent Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
permitted by mandatory laws. with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
Restrictions resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
Except where you have been specifically be warranted for the remainder of the
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
not (a) use this Data with any products, nor any product support services offered
systems, or applications installed or by NAV2 are available without proof of
otherwise connected to or in purchase from an authorized international
communication with vehicles, capable of source.
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet No Other Warranty:
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
positioning devices or any mobile or SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
wireless-connected electronic or computer PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
devices, including without limitation AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
computers, pagers, and personal digital ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
using this Data if you fail to comply with MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
these terms and conditions. PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
Limited Warranty exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will exclusion may not apply to you.
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a Limited Liability:
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
described in applicable written materials LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
support engineers will make commercially BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
reasonable efforts to solve any problem CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
issues. IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
632
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, Governing Law.

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, The above terms and conditions shall be
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES governed by the laws of the People’s
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Republic of China, without giving effect to
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR United Nations Convention for Contracts
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR for the International Sale of Goods, which
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A from or in connection with the Data
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS provided to you hereunder shall be
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE submitted to the Shanghai International
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER Economic and Trade Arbitration
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR Commission for arbitration.
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER Gracenote® Copyright
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under CD and music-related data from
applicable law, so to that extent the above Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
exclusion may not apply to you.
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Export Control Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
You agree not to export to anywhere any practice one or more of the following U.S.
part of the Data provided to you or any Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
direct product thereof except in 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
compliance with, and with all licenses and 6,330,593 and other patents issued or
approvals required under, applicable pending. Some services supplied under
export laws, rules and regulations. license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
IP Protection
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
suppliers and are protected by applicable logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
copyright and other intellectual property Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
law and treaties. The Data are provided Gracenote.
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
Entire Agreement
This device contains software from
These terms and conditions constitute the Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
entire agreement between NAV2(and its Emeryville, California 94608
licensors, including their licensors and ("Gracenote").
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their The software from Gracenote (the
entirety any and all written or oral "Gracenote Software") enables this device
agreements previously existing between to do disc and music file identification and
us with respect to such subject matter. obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
633
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform including any copyrighted material or

other functions. You may use Gracenote music file information. You agree that
Data only by means of the intended End Gracenote may enforce its respective
User functions of this device. This device rights, collectively or separately, under this
may contain content belonging to agreement against you, directly in each
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the company's own name.
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
queries for statistical purposes. The
content and such content providers shall
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
be entitled to all of the benefits and
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
protections set forth herein that are
queries without knowing anything about
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
who you are. For more information, see the
will use the content from Gracenote
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
non-commercial use only. You agree not OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
associated with a music file) to any third WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
HEREIN. TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
Gracenote Servers.
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
Gracenote Content, including all ownership OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
rights. Under no circumstances will either ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
Gracenote become liable for any payment THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
to you for any information that you provide, PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
634
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Taiwan Territory

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Note: In accordance with the management
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
approach of low-power radio wave
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
radiation motors:
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE Article 12: For approved and certified
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY low-power radiation motor models,
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL companies, firms or users must not alter
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY the frequency, increase the power or
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL change the characteristics and functions
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS of the original design without authorization.
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON Article 14: The usage of low-power
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. radio-frequency motors must not affect
Radio Frequency Statement aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L be detected, immediately stop using the
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
This device complies with Part 15 of the interference. For the legal
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry telecommunication and wireless
Canada. Operation is subject to the telecommunication of the telco, the
following two conditions: low-power radio frequency motor must be
(1) This device may not cause harmful able to tolerate legal limits of interference
interference, and from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
interference that may cause undesired AND CONDITIONS
operation.
By activating, using and/or accessing the
WARNING SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
Changes or modifications not other content or material provided by
expressively approved by the party Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
responsible for compliance could and/or Services), you must accept
void the user's authority to operate the certain terms and conditions. The following
equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio is a brief summary of the terms and
certification number only signifies that conditions that apply to you. To view the
Industry Canada technical specifications full terms and conditions relevant to your
were met. use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
The antenna used for this transmitter must
Website
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
transmitter. ditions/
1. Acceptance
635
Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services, 5. Service Continuity and Reception of

you will be deemed to have accepted and the SUNA Traffic Channel
agreed to be bound by the terms and
We will use reasonable endeavours to
conditions fully detailed at:
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Website Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
maintenance. We will try to perform
ditions/
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
2. Intellectual Property SUNA Products and/or Services at any
SUNA Products and/or Services are for time.
your personal use. You may not record, or Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
retransmit the content, nor use the content reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
in association with any other traffic RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You 6. Limitation of Liability
obtain no right of ownership in any Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
Intellectual Property Rights (including the manufacturer of your device (the
copyright) in the data that is used to “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services. any third party for any damages either
3. Appropriate Use direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
SUNA Products and/or Services are inability to use SUNA Products and/or
intended as an aid to personal motoring Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
and travel planning, and do not provide has been advised of the possibility of such
comprehensive or accurate information on damages. You also acknowledge that the
all occasions. On occasions, you may neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
experience additional delay as a result of guarantees nor make any warranties that
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You relate to the availability, accuracy or
acknowledge that it is not intended, or completeness of SUNA Products and/or
suitable, for use in applications where time Services, and to the extent which it is
of arrival or driving directions may impact lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
the safety of the public or yourself. Supplier excludes any warranties which
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services might otherwise be implied by any State
while driving or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or 7. Please Note
Services are available or installed and Great care has been taken in preparing this
active, remain at all times responsible for manual. Constant product development
observing all relevant laws and codes of may mean that some information is not
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only entirely up-to-date. The information in this
actively operate SUNA Products and/or document is subject to change without
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete notice.
stop and it is safe to do so.
636
Appendices
WARNING
against the use of any hand-held device E207818
while driving and encourage the use of European Union EU

TYPE APPROVALS E253824
Ghana
RF Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
E253823
Jordan
E207816
Argentina
E253822
Malaysia
E253812
E197509
Brazil
E253813
637
Appendices
Mexico
E253816
Russia
E197811
Moldova
E197844
Serbia
E207821
Morocco
E253820
Singapore
E253817
Oman
E198002
South Africa
E198001
Philippines
E253819
South Korea
638
Appendices
E203679
Taiwan
E253818
Ukraine
E207817
United Arab Emirates
639
640
Index
3 Airbag Disposal...............................................55
Air Conditioning
360 Degree Camera....................................241 See: Climate Control.........................................148
Advanced Camera Views.................................241 Air Filter
Auxiliary Camera................................................244 See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L/
Camera Views......................................................241 6.8L....................................................................363
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L
Camera.............................................................243 Diesel................................................................364
Front Camera......................................................242 Alarm
Keep Out Zone....................................................242 See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................78
Side Camera........................................................243 Ambient Lighting............................................97
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................78
4 Arming the Alarm.................................................79
Disarming the Alarm...........................................79
4WD Using the System.................................................78
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................216 Appendices...................................................609
Apps.................................................................543
A ..................................................................................543
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................545
A/C At a Glance.........................................................17
See: Climate Control.........................................148 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............112
About This Manual...........................................7 Headlamps On Warning Chime......................112
ABS Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................113
See: Brakes...........................................................227 Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................113
ABS driving hints Audio Control...................................................83
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Media........................................................................84
Brakes................................................................229 Seek, Next or Previous.......................................84
Accessories.....................................................574 Audio System...............................................446
Exterior style........................................................574 General Information.........................................446
Interior style..........................................................574 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Lifestyle..................................................................574 SYNC.............................................................448
Peace of mind.....................................................574 Menu Structure..................................................450
Accessories Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
See: Replacement Parts Touchscreen Display...............................453
Recommendation............................................12 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/
ACC FM...................................................................447
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............246 Autolamps........................................................90
Adjusting the Headlamps........................356 Windshield Wiper Activated
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................358 Headlamps........................................................90
Vertical Aim Adjustment................................356 Automatic Climate Control......................150
Adjusting the Pedals....................................86 Automatic High Beam Control..................92
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles Automatic High Beam Indicator.....................93
With: Manual Adjustable Steering Switching the System On and Off.................92
Column............................................................82 Automatic Transmission...........................210
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles Brake-Shift Interlock..........................................213
With: Power Adjustable Steering If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Column............................................................82 Snow...................................................................214
End of Travel Position.........................................83
641
Index
Understanding the Shift Positions of Your Capacities and Specifications -

Automatic Transmission.............................210 6.2L................................................................428
Understanding your SelectShift Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Automatic™ transmission..........................212 Climates...........................................................432
Automatic Transmission Fluid Specifications.....................................................429
Check.............................................................347 Capacities and Specifications - 6.7L
Checking Automatic Transmission Diesel.............................................................433
Fluid....................................................................347 Engine Oil Specifications................................439
Autowipers........................................................87 Specifications.....................................................435
Auxiliary Power Points.................................172 Capacities and Specifications -
110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC Power 6.8L...............................................................440
Outlet..................................................................172 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................172 Climates...........................................................444
Locations................................................................172 Specifications......................................................441
Auxiliary Switches........................................575 Capacities and Specifications.................421
Upfitter Interface Module...............................578 Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior................................371
B Catalytic Converter......................................198
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................199
Battery Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................354 (I/M) Testing...................................................199
Bed Extender....................................................74 Center Console...............................................174
Grocery mode........................................................75 Changing a Bulb..........................................358
Tailgate mode........................................................74 Cargo Lamp and Central High Mounted
Bed Ramps.....................................................270 Brake Lamp Bulbs........................................360
Installing the Ramp Holder............................272 Fog Lamp Bulbs.................................................359
Stowing the Bed Ramp....................................272 Front Park and Direction Indicator Lamp
Using the Bed Ramp.........................................270 Bulbs.................................................................358
Blind Spot Information System.............254 Headlamp Bulbs................................................358
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer License Plate Lamp Bulb.................................361
Tow.....................................................................256 Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear Direction
Switching the System Off and On..............258 Indicator and Reversing Lamp
System Errors......................................................258 Bulbs.................................................................359
Using the System...............................................255 Changing a Fuse...........................................327
Bonnet Lock Fuses.......................................................................327
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........329 Changing a Road Wheel..........................408
Booster Seats..................................................32 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Types of Booster Seats......................................32 Information....................................................408
Brake Fluid Check........................................350 Location of the Spare Tire and
Brakes...............................................................227 Tools.................................................................409
General Information..........................................227 Removing the Spare Tire (With Spare Tire
Breaking-In....................................................299 Carrier Only)...................................................409
Bulb Specification Chart...........................361 Tire Change Procedure......................................411
Changing the 12V Battery.........................354
C Battery Management System.......................355
Changing the Crankcase Vent Filter
Cabin Air Filter...............................................154 Element.........................................................337
California Proposition 65.............................12
642
Index
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L/ Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
6.8L................................................................363 Blades............................................................374
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L Clearing All MyKeys.......................................65
Diesel............................................................364 Climate.............................................................527
Air Filter Restriction Gauge............................365 Climate Control.............................................148
Changing the Engine-Mounted and Climate Controlled Seats..........................165
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel Cooled Seats........................................................166
Filters - 6.7L Diesel...................................366 Heated Seats.......................................................165
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Collision Warning System........................263
Filter...................................................................366 Principle Of Operation.....................................263
Engine-mounted Fuel Filter..........................369 Coolant Check
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil See: Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L/6.8L.....339
Filter...............................................................336 See: Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L
Engine lubrication for severe service Diesel.................................................................343
operation..........................................................337 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......54
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................356 Creating a MyKey...........................................64
Checking MyKey System Status...............65 Programming or Changing Configurable
MyKey Distance....................................................65 Settings...............................................................64
Number of Admin Keys......................................65 Cross Traffic Alert........................................259
Number of MyKeys..............................................65 False Alerts...........................................................261
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................356 Switching the System Off and On...............261
Child Restraint and Seatbelt System Errors.......................................................261
Maintenance.................................................44 System Lights, Messages and Audible
Child Restraint Positioning.........................34 Alerts.................................................................260
Child Safety.......................................................19 System Limitations............................................261
General Information.............................................19 Using the System...............................................259
Child Safety Locks.........................................35 Cruise Control.................................................84
Left-Hand Side.....................................................36 Principle of Operation......................................245
Right-Hand Side...................................................36 Cruise control
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................376 See: Using Cruise Control...............................245
With King Ranch Edition.................................376 Customer Assistance...................................311
Without King Ranch Edition...........................376
Cleaning Products........................................371
Materials.................................................................371
D
Cleaning the Engine....................................373 Data Recording................................................10
Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel........373 Event Data Recording..........................................10
Cleaning the Exterior....................................371 Service Data Recording......................................10
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................372 Daytime Running Lamps..............................91
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................372 Type One - Conventional
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................372 (Non-Configurable)........................................91
Stripes or Graphics............................................372 Type Two - Configurable....................................91
Underbody............................................................372 Diesel Particulate Filter.............................204
Under Hood..........................................................372 Oxidation Catalytic Converter and Diesel
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Particulate Filter System...........................205
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................375 Regeneration.......................................................204
Cleaning the Interior....................................374 Digital Radio..................................................454
Cleaning the Wheels...................................377 HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................455
643
Index
Direction Indicators.......................................93 Engine and Secondary Cooling System

Doors and Locks.............................................67 Refill Procedure.............................................345
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan
Diesel.............................................................352 Clutch)..............................................................347
Draining the Diesel Fuel Conditioner Recycled Coolant...............................................345
Module..............................................................353 Severe Climates.................................................345
Filter Location......................................................352 Engine Emission Control............................197
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................47 Engine Idle Shutdown................................185
Children and Airbags...........................................52 Engine Immobilizer
Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch ..........47 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Engine Oil Check - 6.2L/6.8L..................334
Adjustment.........................................................51 Adding Engine Oil..............................................334
Driving Aids.....................................................252 Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel................335
Driving Hints..................................................299 Adding Engine Oil..............................................336
Driving Through Water..............................300 Engine lubrication for severe service
DRL operation .........................................................336
See: Daytime Running Lamps..........................91 Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L/6.8L...............334
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel.............334
E Engine Specifications - 6.2L.....................421
Drivebelt Routing................................................421
Economical Driving.....................................299 Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel........421
Electromagnetic Compatibility.............609 ...................................................................................421
Electronic Locking Differential................225 Drivebelt Routing...............................................422
Activating the Electronic Locking Engine Specifications - 6.8L....................422
Differential.......................................................225 Drivebelt Routing...............................................423
Emission Law.................................................197 Entertainment................................................517
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited AM/FM Radio.......................................................518
Tampering Acts and Maintenance.........198 Apps.......................................................................526
Tampering With a Noise Control Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................525
System...............................................................197 CD (If equipped)................................................524
End User License Agreement...................611 HD Radio™ Information (If
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE Available)..........................................................521
AGREEMENT (EULA) ...................................611 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Engine Block Heater....................................185 Activated).........................................................519
Using the Engine Block Heater......................186 Sources...................................................................518
Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L/6.8L........339 Supported Media Players, Formats and
Adding Coolant..................................................339 Metadata Information................................526
Engine Coolant Temperature USB Ports.............................................................526
Management..................................................342 Environment.....................................................16
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................341 Essential Towing Checks..........................287
Recycled Coolant..............................................340 Before Towing a Trailer....................................294
Severe Climates..................................................341 Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear View
Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Camera System............................................288
Diesel.............................................................343 Hitches..................................................................289
Adding Coolant...................................................343 Integrated Trailer Brake Controller...............291
Checking Coolant Corrosion Inhibitor Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Additive Strength ........................................346 Watercraft (PWC)........................................295
Coolant Change..................................................347 Safety Chains.......................................................291
644
Index
Trailer Brakes........................................................291 Fuel and Refueling.......................................187

Trailer Lamps......................................................294 Fuel Consumption.......................................195
Trailer Towing Connector................................287 Fuel Economy......................................................196
When Towing a Trailer.....................................295 Fuel Filter - 6.2L/6.8L.................................353
Event Data Recording Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................189
See: Data Recording............................................10 Biodiesel................................................................190
Export Unique Options.................................14 Diesel Fuel Additives..........................................191
Exterior Mirrors................................................99 Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Blind Spot Information System.....................101 Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low
Clearance Lamps ...............................................101 Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Required .........189
Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................101 Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................99 Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low
Heated Exterior Mirrors ....................................101 Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Required (United
Memory Mirrors ...................................................101 States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Virgin
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................99 Islands And Other Locales) ......................189
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping Fuel Quality - E85........................................188
Mirrors...............................................................100 Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Puddle Lamps......................................................101 Vehicles.............................................................188
Spot Lamps...........................................................101 Switching Between E85 and
Telescoping Mirrors...........................................100 Gasoline............................................................189
Trailer Towing Camera System......................101 Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................191
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................191
F Fuel Shutoff..................................................305
Fuses.................................................................318
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................38 Fuse Specification Chart...........................318
Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................39 Passenger Compartment Fuse
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.....................................41 Panel..................................................................324
Seatbelt Locking Modes...................................40 Power Distribution Box.....................................318
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................39
Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue
(Front Center Seat on Super Cab and
G
Crew Cab)..........................................................38 Garage Door Opener
Floor Mats......................................................300 See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........168
Fog Lamps - Front Gauges.............................................................105
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................93 DEF Gauge............................................................108
Foot Pedals Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge...........107
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................86 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge..............................107
Ford Credit.........................................................12 Fuel Gauge............................................................107
US Only......................................................................12 Transmission Fluid Temperature
Ford Protect...................................................579 Gauge................................................................108
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan Turbo Boost Gauge...........................................108
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................580 Type 1 and 2..........................................................105
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Type 3.....................................................................106
Only)..................................................................579 Gearbox
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................216 See: Transmission..............................................210
Front Fog Lamps............................................93 General Information on Radio
Front Seat Armrest......................................166 Frequencies...................................................56
...................................................................................166 Intelligent Access.................................................56
645
Index
General Maintenance Information........581 Home Screen................................................509

Multi-Point Inspection.....................................583 Hood Lock
Owner Checks and Services..........................582 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........329
Protecting Your Investment............................581
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................581
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
I
Dealership?......................................................581 Ignition Switch................................................177
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and In California (U.S. Only)..............................312
Canada..........................................................314 Information Display Control......................85
Getting the Services You Need.................311 Information Displays....................................114
Away From Home................................................311 General Information...........................................114
Global Opening..............................................99 Information Messages.................................131
Opening the Windows.......................................99 4WD.........................................................................147
Active Park..............................................................131
H Adaptive Cruise Control...................................132
Adaptive Steering...............................................132
Handbrake AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............133
See: Parking Brake.............................................229 Airbag......................................................................133
Hazard Flashers...........................................305 Alarm and Security.............................................133
HDC Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................134
See: Using Hill Descent Control...................235 Battery and Charging System........................134
Headlamp Adjusting Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................356 Alert System....................................................135
Headrest Collision Warning System...............................136
See: Head Restraints.........................................156 Diesel Messages.................................................136
Head Restraints............................................156 Doors and Locks.................................................138
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................157 Driver Alert.............................................................139
Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................154 Drivetrain................................................................139
Heated Rear Window..................................154 Engine.....................................................................139
Heated Seats.................................................164 Fuel..........................................................................140
Rear Heated Seats.............................................165 Keys and Intelligent Access............................140
Heated Steering Wheel...............................85 Lane Keeping System........................................141
Heating Maintenance..........................................................141
See: Climate Control.........................................148 MyKey......................................................................142
Hill Start Assist.............................................229 Off Road.................................................................142
Switching the System On and Off..............230 Park Aid..................................................................143
Using Hill Start Assist......................................230 Park Brake..............................................................143
Hints on Controlling the Interior Power Steering....................................................144
Climate...........................................................151 Remote Start.......................................................144
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Seats.......................................................................144
Weather.............................................................154 Starting System .................................................145
General Hints.........................................................151 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................145
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................153 Trailer.......................................................................145
Quickly Heating the Interior............................152 Installing Child Restraints...........................20
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........153 Child Seats..............................................................20
Recommended Settings for Heating..........153 Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Brakes............................................................229 Seats....................................................................29
646
Index
Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment

(Regular Cab)...................................................30
L
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew Lane Keeping System.................................252
Cab and Super Cab)........................................31 Switching the System On and Off...............252
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the System Display...................................................253
Outboard Seating Positions (Center System Settings.................................................252
Seating Use) ....................................................28 Troubleshooting.................................................253
Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear Seat Lighting Control..............................................89
Outboard Positions)......................................25 Headlamp Flasher...............................................90
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front Headlamp High Beam.......................................89
Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Lighting..............................................................89
Cab).......................................................................21 General Information...........................................89
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center Limited Slip Differential............................225
Position of Super Cab and Crew Load Carrying................................................266
Cab)......................................................................23 Load Limit......................................................266
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
CHildren (LATCH)............................................27 Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Using Tether Straps.............................................29 Vehicles.............................................................270
Instrument Cluster.......................................105 Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................90 Trailer................................................................266
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps......................91 Locking and Unlocking.................................67
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps................91 Activating Intelligent Access............................67
Instrument Panel Overview.........................17 Autolock..................................................................69
Interior Lamps.................................................94 Battery Saver.........................................................70
Front Interior Lamps...........................................94 Illuminated Entry..................................................69
Rear Interior Lamps............................................96 Power Door Locks.................................................67
Interior Mirror...................................................101 Remote Control.....................................................67
Automatic Dimming Mirror.............................102 Smart Unlock........................................................68
Manual Dimming Mirror....................................101 Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Introduction.........................................................7 Keys......................................................................68
Lug Nuts
J See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................408
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................306

Connecting the Jumper Cables...................306
M
Jump Starting......................................................307 Maintenance.................................................329
Preparing Your Vehicle....................................306 General Information.........................................329
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................307 Manual Climate Control............................148
Manual Seats.................................................158
K Manual Lumbar ..................................................159
Moving the Seat Backward and
Keyless Entry....................................................70 Forward.............................................................159
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY Recline Adjustment...........................................159
KEYPAD...............................................................70 Memory Function..........................................161
Keyless Starting.............................................178 Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................162
Ignition Modes......................................................178 Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Keys and Remote Controls.........................56 Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
..............................................................................162
647
Index
Recalling a Preset Position.............................162 Parking Brake................................................229

Saving a Preset Position..................................162 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................76
Message Center SecuriLock®...........................................................76
See: Information Displays................................114 PATS
Mirrors See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76
See: Windows and Mirrors...............................98 Pedals................................................................86
Mobile Communications Equipment......14 Perchlorate.........................................................12
Moonroof.........................................................103 Phone...............................................................529
Bounce-Back.......................................................104 During a Phone Call..........................................533
Opening and Closing the Moonroof............103 Making Calls.........................................................532
Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L..............................423 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel.................424 Time...................................................................529
Motorcraft Parts - 6.8L..............................425 Phone Menu........................................................530
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................66 Receiving Calls....................................................533
MyKey™.............................................................63 Smartphone Connectivity..............................534
Principle of Operation........................................63 Text Messaging...................................................534
Post-Crash Alert System..........................308
N Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................67
Navigation......................................................535 Power Running Boards................................80
cityseeker..............................................................542 Power Seats...................................................159
Destination Mode...............................................537 Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active
Map Mode............................................................536 Motion ..............................................................160
Navigation Map Updates................................543 Power Lumbar.....................................................160
Navigation Menu...............................................540 Power Steering Fluid Check......................351
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................543 Power Take-Off.............................................215
SYNC AppLink....................................................542 Power Windows.............................................98
Waypoints.............................................................541 Accessory Delay...................................................99
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........585 Bounce-Back.........................................................98
Diesel Engine......................................................586 One-Touch Up or Down....................................98
Gasoline Engine.................................................585 Window Lock.........................................................99
Protecting the Environment........................16
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................338
R
Oil Check Rear Axle.........................................................225
See: Engine Oil Check - 6.2L/6.8L..............334 Rear Parking Aid...........................................237
See: Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel.............335 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................238
Opening and Closing the Hood..............329 Rear Seat Armrest........................................167
Ordering Additional Owner's Rear Seats.......................................................163
Literature.......................................................315 Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ..............163
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........316 Rear Under Seat Storage.................................163
Overhead Console........................................174 Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position..............................................................163
P Rear View Camera.......................................238
Camera Guidelines............................................239
Parking Aids....................................................237 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................240
Principle of Operation.......................................237 Rear Camera Delay...........................................240
648
Index
Using the Rear View Camera System........239 Running-In

Rear View Camera See: Breaking-In.................................................299
See: Rear View Camera...................................238 Running Out of Fuel.....................................192
Recommended Towing Weights...........283
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle..............................286
S
Refueling - Diesel.........................................193 Safety Canopy™.............................................53
Dual Fuel Tanks...................................................195 Safety Precautions.......................................187
Fueling Tips..........................................................194 Satellite Radio..............................................456
Refueling................................................................194 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
Refueling - Gasoline....................................192 (ESN).................................................................457
Fuel Filler Cap......................................................193 Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............457
Remote Control..............................................56 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................457
Car Finder.................................................................61 Troubleshooting.................................................458
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter....................56 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........599
Intelligent Access Key.........................................57 Scheduled Maintenance...........................581
Memory Feature...................................................60 Seatbelt Extension........................................45
Remote Start..........................................................61 Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................42
Replacing the Battery.........................................58 Seatbelt Reminder........................................43
Sounding the Panic Alarm.................................61 Belt-Minder™........................................................43
Remote Start..................................................155 Seatbelts............................................................37
Automatic Settings............................................155 Principle of Operation.........................................37
Removing the Tailgate..................................72 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Replacement Parts Chime...............................................................42
Recommendation........................................12 Conditions of operation.....................................43
Collision Repairs....................................................12 Seats.................................................................156
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Security..............................................................76
Repairs..................................................................12 Selective Catalytic Reductant System -
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................13 Diesel............................................................200
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or
Control.............................................................62 Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada System.............................................................204
Only)...............................................................316 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines and
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Information.....................................................203
Only)...............................................................316 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level.............................200
Roadside Assistance.................................304 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Messages
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside and Vehicle Operations..............................202
Assistance.......................................................305 Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank.........200
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Settings...........................................................546
Assistance Program Coverage................305 911 Assist................................................................551
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Ambient Lighting...............................................558
Assistance.......................................................305 Bluetooth.............................................................548
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Clock......................................................................548
Roadside Assistance...................................304 Display...................................................................559
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using General..................................................................556
Roadside Assistance...................................304 Media Player........................................................547
Roadside Emergencies.............................304 Mobile Apps.........................................................554
Navigation............................................................552
649
Index
Phone....................................................................548 Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L

Radio.......................................................................551 Diesel.............................................................180
Sound....................................................................546 ...................................................................................180
Valet Mode..........................................................560 Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................182
Vehicle...................................................................558 Cold Weather Operation..................................182
Voice Control.......................................................559 Cold Weather Starting......................................182
Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................556 Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug
Side Airbags.....................................................52 System................................................................181
Sitting in the Correct Position..................156 Vehicles with an Ignition Key...........................181
Sliding Windows...........................................102 Vehicles with Keyless Start..............................181
Power Sliding Back Window..........................102 Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/
Snow Chains 6.8L.................................................................178
See: Using Snow Chains................................400 Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................179
Snowplowing.................................................301 Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel
Engine temperature while plowing.............302 Vehicles Only)................................................180
Installing the Snowplow..................................301 Failure to Start.....................................................179
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...............180
Attached..........................................................302 Important Ventilating Information..............180
Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Vehicle..............................................................302 Moving................................................................179
Transmission operation while Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
plowing.............................................................303 Stationary.........................................................179
Spare Wheel Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................178
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................408 Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................179
Special Notices................................................13 Starting and Stopping the Engine...........177
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................13 General Information...........................................177
On Board Diagnostics Data Link Steering............................................................261
Connector............................................................13 Adaptive Steering..............................................262
Special Instructions..............................................13 Power Steering....................................................261
Using a Slide-In Camper.....................................13 Steering Wheel...............................................82
Using your Vehicle as an Ambulance............14 Storage Compartments.............................174
Using your Vehicle as a Stationary Power Sunroof
Source...................................................................14 See: Moonroof.....................................................103
Using your Vehicle With a Snowplow............13 Sun Visors........................................................102
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Illuminated Vanity Mirror.................................103
Maintenance..............................................589 Supplementary Restraints System.........46
Diesel Engine.......................................................592 Principle of Operation........................................46
Exceptions............................................................597 Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L
Gasoline Engine.................................................589 Diesel.............................................................185
Speed Control Symbols Glossary.............................................8
See: Cruise Control............................................245 SYNC™ 3.......................................................498
Spot Lamps......................................................93 General Information.........................................498
Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps..................94 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................560
Stability Control...........................................232 SYNC™ Applications and
Principle of Operation......................................232 Services........................................................476
Starter Switch 911 Assist...............................................................476
See: Ignition Switch............................................177 SYNC Mobile Apps............................................478
650
Index
SYNC™...........................................................460 Using Trailer Reverse Guidance....................278

General Information........................................460 Trailer Sway Control...................................282
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................490 Transfer Case Fluid Check.......................350
Transmission Code Designation.............427
T Transmission..................................................210
Transporting the Vehicle..........................308
Tailgate Lock.....................................................72 Type Approvals.............................................637
Tailgate Step....................................................73 RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure
Closing the Step....................................................74 Monitoring Sensor(s)..................................637
Opening the Step.................................................73
Tailgate...............................................................72
Technical Specifications
U
See: Capacities and Specifications.............421 Under Hood Overview - 6.2L..................330
Terrain Control..............................................235 Under Hood Overview - 6.7L Diesel.......331
Principle of Operation......................................235 F-Super Duty........................................................331
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Scheduled Maintenance.................................332
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................313 Under Hood Overview - 6.8L...................333
Tire Care..........................................................382 Under Seat Storage......................................174
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................384 Rear Under Seat Storage.................................174
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Universal Garage Door Opener...............168
Grading.............................................................382 HomeLink Wireless Control System...........168
Information Contained on the Tire USB Port.........................................................459
Sidewall...........................................................385 Using Adaptive Cruise Control...............246
Temperature A B C............................................383 Automatic Cancellation..................................249
Traction AA A B C..............................................383 Blocked Sensor..................................................250
Treadwear............................................................383 Canceling the Set Speed................................249
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........400 Changing the Set Speed.................................249
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring Detection Issues.................................................249
System..............................................................407 Following a Vehicle............................................247
Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
System.............................................................400 Usage................................................................249
Tires Overriding the Set Speed...............................248
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................380 Resuming the Set Speed................................249
Towing a Trailer.............................................273 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............247
Load Placement.................................................274 Setting the Gap Distance...............................248
Towing Points...............................................309 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Towing the Vehicle on Four Off......................................................................249
Wheels.........................................................296 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Emergency Towing...........................................296 On.......................................................................246
Recreational Towing........................................296 Switching to Normal Cruise Control............251
Towing..............................................................273 System Not Available......................................250
Traction Control.............................................231 Using Cruise Control...................................245
Principle of Operation.......................................231 Switching Cruise Control Off.........................245
Trailer Reversing Aids..................................275 Switching Cruise Control On.........................245
Principle of Operation......................................275 Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................216
Setting Up Trailer Reverse Guidance..........275 4WD Indicator Lights.........................................217
Trailer Reverse Guidance.................................275 Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Troubleshooting.................................................279 Vehicles............................................................220
651
Index
Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4WD Using Traction Control................................231

system................................................................216 Switching the System Off................................231
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other System Indicator Lights and
Vehicles............................................................220 Messages..........................................................231
Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4WD Using Voice Recognition...........................462
system................................................................216 Audio Voice Commands...................................511
Using a Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) Climate Voice Commands..............................512
4WD system.....................................................217 Initiating a Voice Session................................462
Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD Mobile App Voice Commands.......................515
system................................................................219 Navigation Voice Commands........................514
Using Hill Descent Control.......................235 Phone Voice Commands.................................512
Hill descent modes...........................................235 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Using MyKey With Remote Start Commands......................................................515
Systems..........................................................65 System Interaction and Feedback..............463
Using Power Running Boards...................80 Voice Settings Commands.............................516
Automatic Power Deploy..................................80 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Automatic Power Stow.....................................80 Program (Canada Only).........................314
Bounce-back..........................................................81
Enabling and Disabling.......................................81
Manual Power Deploy........................................80
V
Using Snow Chains....................................400 Vehicle Care....................................................371
Using Stability Control...............................233 General Information...........................................371
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ Vehicle Certification Label.......................427
(RSC®).............................................................233 Vehicle Identification Number................426
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Vehicle Storage.............................................377
Player.............................................................481 Battery....................................................................378
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............485 Body.........................................................................377
Bluetooth Devices and System Brakes.....................................................................378
Settings............................................................487 Cooling system...................................................378
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the Engine.....................................................................378
USB Port...........................................................481 Fuel system..........................................................378
Media Menu Features......................................484 General...................................................................377
Media Voice Commands................................482 Miscellaneous.....................................................378
USB 2......................................................................487 Removing Vehicle From Storage..................378
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........488 Tires.........................................................................378
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........464 Ventilation
Accessing Features through the Phone See: Climate Control.........................................148
Menu.................................................................469 VIN
Accessing Your Phone Settings....................472 See: Vehicle Identification Number............426
Bluetooth Devices..............................................473 Voice Control...................................................84
Making Calls........................................................468
Pairing a Phone for the First Time..............465
Pairing Subsequent Phones.........................466
W
Phone Options during an Active Call........468 Warning Lamps and Indicators...............108
Phone Voice Commands...............................466 4X2.............................................................................111
Receiving Calls...................................................468 4X4 HIGH................................................................112
System Settings.................................................474 4X4 LOW.................................................................112
Text Messaging...................................................470 Adaptive Cruise Control..................................108
652
Index
Adaptive Steering..............................................109
Anti-Lock Braking System..............................109
Automatic High Beam......................................109
Battery....................................................................109
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................110
Brake System.......................................................109
Check Fuel Cap....................................................110
Cruise Control.......................................................110
Diesel Engine Brake.............................................112
Diesel Exhaust Fluid............................................112
Direction Indicator...............................................110
Door Ajar.................................................................110
Electronic Locking Differential.......................110
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................110
Engine Oil...............................................................110
Fasten Seatbelt....................................................110
Front Airbag...........................................................110
Front Fog Lamps.................................................110
High Beam.............................................................110
Hill Descent...........................................................110
Low Fuel Level.......................................................111
Low Tire Pressure Warning................................111
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control............111
Service Engine Soon............................................111
Stability Control....................................................111
Stability Control Off.............................................111
Transmission Tow/Haul.....................................111
Wait To Start..........................................................112
Water In Fuel..........................................................112
Washer Fluid Check.....................................351
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior................................371
See: Wipers and Washers.................................87
Waxing..............................................................372
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................408
Wheels and Tires........................................380
General Information.........................................380
Technical Specifications..................................419
Windows and Mirrors...................................98
Windshield Washers.....................................88
Windshield Wipers.........................................87
Speed Dependent Wipers.................................87
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................356
Wipers and Washers.....................................87
653

2018 F350 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2018 F350 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2018 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

2018 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

All rights reserved.

Introduction Supplementary Restraints

Power Running Boards Exterior Mirrors................................................99

Pedals Climate Control

Auxiliary Power Points Transmission

Using Adaptive Cruise Control...............246 In California (U.S. Only)..............................312

Using Voice Recognition............................510

ABOUT THIS MANUAL Note: Your vehicle’s powertrain control

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle

Brake fluid - non petroleum

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY Cruise control

Anti-lock braking system Engine coolant

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine coolant temperature

Battery Engine oil

Battery acid Explosive gas

Fasten seatbelt Note operating instructions

Flammable Panic alarm

Front airbag Parking aid

Fuel pump reset

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

Interior luggage compartment See Owner's Manual

Jack See Service Manual

Keep out of reach of children Service engine soon

Lighting control Side airbag

Low tire pressure warning Shield the eyes

Maintain correct fluid level Stability control

Windshield wash and wipe also be accessed electronically by Ford

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 We offer a number of convenient ways for

vehicle development we validate that On Board Diagnostics Data Link

Using your Vehicle as an MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

recommendations and specifications that

For details about Ford Motor

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

A Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 93).

GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Use a child safety seat

• You are required by law to properly use

When installing a child safety seat with

10. Before placing the child in the seat,

2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.

E142530 5. While pushing down with your knee on

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

1. Position the child safety seat in a seat

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor

5. To put the retractor in the automatic

Crew Cab and Super Cab

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors

Using Tether Straps

Crew Cab and Super Cab

Front Seat Tether Strap

If your child restraint system has a tether

Rear Seat Tether Strap

1. Route the vehicle tether loop between

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot